Table of Contents
- Contents
- Important Safety Instructions
- Basic Operations
- Printing a Document
- Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
- Network
- Security
- Using Remote UI
- Setting Menu List
- Troubleshooting (FAQ)
- Maintenance
- Appendix
- SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
- USRM2-6358-01_2017-11_en_Users_Guide.pdf
- USRM2-6341-02_2017-11_en_Users_Guide.pdf
- Contents
- Available Functions
- Launching and Closing SMS
- MEAP Application Settings
- System Settings
- List of Error Messages (MEAP)
- Errors Relating to the [Login] Page
- Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Management] Page
- Errors Relating to the [Install MEAP Application] Page
- Errors Relating to the [Authentication Information Settings] Page
- Errors Relating to the [License Management] Page
- Errors Relating to the [Enhanced System Application Management] Page
- Errors Relating to the [Check License] and [Change Password] Pages
- Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Setting Information Management] Page
- Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Log Management] Page
- Other Errors
- Using This Guide
- Disclaimer
- Trademarks
- SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
Canon LBP852Cx User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for LBP852Cx by Canon which is a product in the Laser Printers category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
LBP852Cx
User's Guide
USRMA-4084-00 2019-08 en Copyright CANON INC. 2019
Contents
Important Safety Instructions ........................................................................................................... 2
Installation ............................................................................................................................................................... 3
Power Supply ............................................................................................................................................................ 5
Handling ................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Maintenance and Inspections .................................................................................................................................... 9
Consumables .......................................................................................................................................................... 10
Basic Operations .......................................................................................................................................... 15
Main Functions ....................................................................................................................................................... 17
Parts and Their Functions ........................................................................................................................................ 18
Front Side .......................................................................................................................................................... 19
Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................... 21
Interior .............................................................................................................................................................. 23
Multi-Purpose Tray .............................................................................................................................................. 24
Paper Drawer ..................................................................................................................................................... 25
Operation Panel ................................................................................................................................................. 26
Display ........................................................................................................................................................ 29
Using the Operation Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 31
Entering Text ...................................................................................................................................................... 34
Turning ON/OFF the Power ...................................................................................................................................... 36
Performing a Quick Start of the Machine ............................................................................................................... 38
Loading Paper ......................................................................................................................................................... 40
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer ....................................................................................................................... 42
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray ............................................................................................................... 48
Loading Envelopes or Postcards ........................................................................................................................... 51
Loading Preprinted Paper .................................................................................................................................... 55
Specifying Paper Size and Type ............................................................................................................................. 59
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer ......................................................................................... 60
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray .................................................................................. 63
Saving Energy ......................................................................................................................................................... 66
Entering Sleep Mode ........................................................................................................................................... 67
Setting Auto Shutdown Time ................................................................................................................................ 69
Printing a Document ................................................................................................................................ 73
Printing from a Computer ....................................................................................................................................... 74
Canceling Prints ................................................................................................................................................. 77
Various Printing Methods ........................................................................................................................................ 79
Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print) ......................................................................................................... 81
Changing Default USB Print Settings ............................................................................................................... 91
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secured Print) ............................................................................................ 93
Using the Encrypted Print .............................................................................................................................. 96
I
Printing a Document Stored in the Machine (Stored Job Print) .................................................................................. 97
Deleting a Document Stored in the Machine .................................................................................................. 101
Setting a Name or PIN to a Box .................................................................................................................... 105
Printing without Opening a File (Direct Print) ....................................................................................................... 107
Print Settings for Direct Print ....................................................................................................................... 110
Printing Received E-mail (E-Mail Print) ................................................................................................................. 121
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device ........................................................... 128
Connecting to a Mobile Device ............................................................................................................................... 129
Utilizing the Machine through Applications ........................................................................................................... 130
Using AirPrint ................................................................................................................................................... 131
Printing with AirPrint .................................................................................................................................. 135
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ........................................................................................................................... 138
Using Google Cloud Print .................................................................................................................................. 139
Managing the Machine Remotely .......................................................................................................................... 143
Network ............................................................................................................................................................ 145
Connecting to a Network ...................................................................................................................................... 146
Connecting to a Wired LAN ................................................................................................................................ 148
Setting IP Addresses ......................................................................................................................................... 150
Setting IPv4 Address ................................................................................................................................... 151
Setting IPv6 Addresses ................................................................................................................................ 155
Conguring the Machine for Printing from a Computer .......................................................................................... 159
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ............................................................................................... 160
Enabling IPP/IPPS ....................................................................................................................................... 166
Setting Up Print Server ...................................................................................................................................... 173
Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ....................................................................................... 177
Conguring Ethernet Settings ............................................................................................................................ 178
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network .................................................................................................. 180
Conguring DNS .............................................................................................................................................. 181
Conguring WINS ............................................................................................................................................. 187
Conguring SNTP ............................................................................................................................................. 190
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ............................................................................................. 193
Conguring Settings for Device Management Software ......................................................................................... 198
Conguring SMB .............................................................................................................................................. 201
Conguring Settings on the Computer for Printing ......................................................................................... 204
Security .............................................................................................................................................................. 207
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access ................................................................................................ 208
Preventing Unauthorized Access ........................................................................................................................ 209
Setting Access Privileges .................................................................................................................................... 211
Setting the System Manager Password .......................................................................................................... 212
Setting the Department ID Management ....................................................................................................... 215
Setting a Remote UI PIN .............................................................................................................................. 222
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ..................................................................................................... 223
II
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules ...................................................................................................... 224
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules .................................................................................................. 230
Setting a Proxy ................................................................................................................................................. 233
Restricting the Machine's Functions ...................................................................................................................... 236
Restricting the Printing Operations ..................................................................................................................... 237
Restricting USB Functions .................................................................................................................................. 240
Restricting Operation Panel Functions ................................................................................................................. 243
Disabling HTTP Communication ......................................................................................................................... 246
Disabling Remote UI ......................................................................................................................................... 247
Disabling the LAN Port ...................................................................................................................................... 248
Hiding the Print Job History ................................................................................................................................ 249
Implementing Robust Security Features ................................................................................................................ 251
Using TLS for Encrypted Communications ............................................................................................................ 252
Conguring IPSec Settings ................................................................................................................................. 256
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication ............................................................................................................... 266
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ...................................................................................... 271
Generating Key Pairs ................................................................................................................................... 272
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ........................................................................................... 279
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ..................................................................................................... 282
Using Remote UI ........................................................................................................................................ 285
Starting Remote UI ............................................................................................................................................... 286
Remote UI Screens ................................................................................................................................................ 289
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status ........................................................................................ 295
Enabling End Users to Operate Documents .......................................................................................................... 300
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ............................................................................................................. 302
Saving/Loading Registered Data ............................................................................................................................ 304
Saving Registered Data ..................................................................................................................................... 305
Loading Registered Data ................................................................................................................................... 307
Setting Menu List ...................................................................................................................................... 310
Setup Menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 311
Control Menu ................................................................................................................................................... 312
Paper Source ................................................................................................................................................... 330
Network .......................................................................................................................................................... 331
Layout ............................................................................................................................................................. 352
Print Quality ..................................................................................................................................................... 356
Interface ......................................................................................................................................................... 371
User Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................ 374
Priority of Setting Menu Items ...................................................................................................................... 400
Print Mode ....................................................................................................................................................... 401
Settings Specic to Print Mode ........................................................................................................................... 403
UFR II ........................................................................................................................................................ 404
PCL ........................................................................................................................................................... 405
Imaging .................................................................................................................................................... 411
III
XPS ........................................................................................................................................................... 421
PDF ........................................................................................................................................................... 432
PS ............................................................................................................................................................. 443
MEAP Settings .................................................................................................................................................. 453
Check Counter ................................................................................................................................................. 455
Initialize Menu ................................................................................................................................................. 457
Utility Menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 458
Job Menu .............................................................................................................................................................. 464
Reset Menu ........................................................................................................................................................... 466
Select Feeder Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 468
Troubleshooting (FAQ) .......................................................................................................................... 478
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................. 480
Cleaning the Machine ........................................................................................................................................... 482
Exterior ........................................................................................................................................................... 483
Fixing Unit ....................................................................................................................................................... 484
Paper Delivery Area .......................................................................................................................................... 485
Replacing the Toner Cartridges .............................................................................................................................. 490
How to Replace Toner Cartridges ........................................................................................................................ 494
Replacing the Drum Cartridges .............................................................................................................................. 497
How to Replace Drum Cartridges ........................................................................................................................ 501
Replacing the Waste Toner Container .................................................................................................................... 503
How to Replace the Waste Toner Container .......................................................................................................... 504
Relocating the Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 506
Maintaining and Improving Print Quality ............................................................................................................... 508
Adjusting Print Density ...................................................................................................................................... 509
Correcting Color Mismatch and Hues .................................................................................................................. 511
Adjusting Print Position ..................................................................................................................................... 513
Printing Reports and Lists ..................................................................................................................................... 517
Viewing the Counter Value .................................................................................................................................... 526
Checking Consumables ......................................................................................................................................... 529
Initializing Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 532
Initializing Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 533
Initializing the Network Settings ......................................................................................................................... 534
Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................... 536
Third Party Software ............................................................................................................................................. 537
Feature Highlights ................................................................................................................................................ 538
Going Green and Saving Money ......................................................................................................................... 539
Improving Eciency ......................................................................................................................................... 540
So Much More .................................................................................................................................................. 542
Specications ....................................................................................................................................................... 544
Main Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 545
IV
Available Paper ................................................................................................................................................ 547
Paper Feeder PF-G ............................................................................................................................................ 553
Cassette Feeding Unit-AU .................................................................................................................................. 554
Printer Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 555
Management Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 559
System Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 562
Network Environment ....................................................................................................................................... 563
Consumables ........................................................................................................................................................ 564
Options ................................................................................................................................................................ 567
Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 568
System Options ................................................................................................................................................ 569
Installing the ROM ...................................................................................................................................... 571
Installing an SD Card ................................................................................................................................... 575
Manuals and Their Contents .................................................................................................................................. 580
Using User's Guide ................................................................................................................................................ 581
Screen Layout of User's Guide ............................................................................................................................ 582
Viewing User's Guide ........................................................................................................................................ 585
Managing MEAP Applications ................................................................................................................................ 587
Using FTP Clients .................................................................................................................................................. 588
Preparing for Using the FTP Server ..................................................................................................................... 589
Printing via FTP Client (FTP Print) ........................................................................................................................ 592
Specifying Settings via FTP Client ........................................................................................................................ 594
Others .................................................................................................................................................................. 601
Basic Windows Operations ................................................................................................................................. 602
Font Samples ................................................................................................................................................... 610
Notice ............................................................................................................................................................. 615
V
Important Safety Instructions
Important Safety Instructions ................................................................................................................... 2
Installation ............................................................................................................................................................ 3
Power Supply ......................................................................................................................................................... 5
Handling ................................................................................................................................................................. 6
Maintenance and Inspections .............................................................................................................................. 9
Consumables ....................................................................................................................................................... 10
Important Safety Instructions
1
Important Safety Instructions
52AC-000
The content described in this chapter is for the prevention of damage to property and injury to users of the machine
and others. Before using this machine, read this chapter and follow the instructions to properly use this machine. Do
not perform any operations not described in this manual. Canon will not be responsible for any damages resulting
from use not described in this manual, improper use, or repair/changes not performed by Canon or a third party
authorized by Canon.
Important Safety Instructions
2
Installation
52AC-001
To use this machine safely and comfortably, carefully read the following precautions and install the machine in an
appropriate location.
Do not install in a location that may result in a re or electrical shock
●A location where the ventilation slots are blocked
(too close to walls, beds, sofas, rugs, or similar objects)
●A damp or dusty location
●A location exposed to direct sunlight or outdoors
●A location subject to high temperatures
●A location exposed to open ames
●Near alcohol, paint thinners or other ammable substances
Other warnings
●Do not connect unapproved cables to this machine. Doing so may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Do not place necklaces and other metal objects or containers lled with liquid on the machine. If foreign
substances come in contact with electrical parts inside the machine, it may result in a re or electrical shock.
●When installing and removing the optional accessories, be sure to turn OFF the power, unplug the power
plug, and then disconnect all the interface cables and power cord from the machine. Otherwise, the power
cord or interface cables may be damaged, resulting in a re or electrical shock.
●If any foreign substance falls into this machine, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Do not install in the following locations
The machine may drop or fall, resulting in injury.
●An unstable location
●A location exposed to vibrations
Other cautions
●When carrying this machine, follow the instructions in this manual. If carried improperly, it may fall, resulting
in injury.
●When installing this machine, be careful not to get your hands caught between the machine and the oor or
walls. Doing so may result in injury.
Important Safety Instructions
3
Avoid poorly ventilated locations
●This machine generates a slight amount of ozone and other emissions during normal use. These emissions
are not harmful to health. However, they may be noticeable during extended use or long production runs in
poorly ventilated rooms. To maintain a comfortable working environment, it is recommended that the room
where the machine operates be appropriately ventilated. Also avoid locations where people would be
exposed to emissions from the machine.
Do not install in the following locations that may result in damage
●A location subject to dramatic changes in temperature or
humidity
●A location near equipment that generates magnetic or
electromagnetic waves
●A laboratory or location where chemical reactions occur
●A location exposed to corrosive or toxic gases
●A location that may warp from the weight of the machine or
where the machine is liable to sink (a carpet, etc.)
Do not install in a location where condensation occurs
●Water droplets (condensation) may form inside the machine when the room where the machine is installed
is heated rapidly, and when the machine is moved from a cool or dry location to a hot or humid location.
Using the machine under these conditions may result in paper jams, poor print quality, or damage to the
machine. Let the machine adjust to the ambient temperature and humidity for at least 2 hours before use.
In altitudes of above sea level 3,000 m or higher
●Machines with a hard disk may not operate properly when used at high altitudes of about 3,000 meters
above sea level, or higher.
Important Safety Instructions
4
Power Supply
52AC-002
●Use only a power supply that meets the specied voltage requirements. Failure to do so may result in a re
or electrical shock.
●The machine must be connected to a socket-outlet with grounding connection by the provided power cord.
●Do not use power cords other than the one provided, as this may result in a re or electrical shock.
●The provided power cord is intended for use with this machine. Do not connect the power cord to other
devices.
●Do not modify, pull, forcibly bend, or perform any other act that may damage the power cord. Do not place
heavy objects on the power cord. Damaging the power cord may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Do not plug in or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in an electrical shock.
●Do not use extension cords or multi-plug power strips with the machine. Doing so may result in a re or
electrical shock.
●Do not wrap the power cord or tie it in a knot, as this may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Insert the power plug completely into the AC power outlet. Failure to do so may result in a re or electrical
shock.
●Remove the power plug completely from the AC power outlet during a thunder storm. Failure to do so may
result in a re, electrical shock, or damage to the machine.
●Install this machine near the power outlet and leave sucient space around the power plug so that it can be
unplugged easily in an emergency.
When connecting power
●Do not connect the power cord to an uninterruptible power source. Doing so may result in malfunction of or
damage to the machine at power failure.
●If you plug this machine into an AC power outlet with multiple sockets, do not use the remaining sockets to
connect other devices.
●Do not connect the power cord to the auxiliary AC power outlet on a computer.
Other precautions
●Electrical noise may cause this machine to malfunction or lose data.
Important Safety Instructions
5
Handling
52AC-003
●Immediately unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet
and contact an authorized Canon dealer if the machine makes
an unusual noise, emits an unusual smell, or emits smoke or
excessive heat. Continued use may result in a re or electrical
shock.
●Do not disassemble or modify this machine. There are high-
voltage and high-temperature components inside the machine
which may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Place the machine where children will not come in contact with the power cord and other cables or internal
and electrical parts. Failure to do so may result in unexpected accidents.
●Do not use ammable sprays near this machine. If ammable substances come into contact with electrical
parts inside this machine, it may result in a re or electrical shock.
●When moving this machine, be sure to turn OFF the power of this machine and your computer, and then
unplug the power plug and interface cables. Failure to do so may damage the power cord or interface
cables, resulting in a re or electrical shock.
●When plugging or unplugging a USB cable when the power plug is plugged into an AC power outlet, do not
touch the metal part of the connector, as this may result in an electrical shock.
If you are using a cardiac pacemaker
●This machine generates a low level magnetic ux and ultrasonic waves. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and
feel abnormalities, please move away from this machine and consult your physician immediately.
●Do not place heavy objects on this machine as they may fall, resulting in injury.
●For your safety, please unplug the power cord if the machine will not be used for a long period of time.
●Use caution when opening and closing covers to avoid injury to your hands.
●Keep hands and clothing away from the rollers in the output area. If the rollers catch your hands or clothing,
this may result in personal injury.
●The inside of the machine and the output slot are very hot during and immediately after use. Avoid contact
with these areas to prevent burns. Also, printed paper may be hot immediately after being output, so use
caution when handling it. Failure to do so may result in burns.
Important Safety Instructions
6
●Do not carry the machine with the optional paper
feeder or cassette feeding unit installed. Otherwise,
they may fall, resulting in injury.
Laser beam
●If the laser beam should escape and enter your eyes, exposure may cause damage to your eyes.
When transporting the machine
To prevent damage to the machine during transport, perform the following.
●Remove the toner cartridges and drum cartridges.
●Securely pack the machine in the original box with packing materials.
If the operating noise concerns you
●Depending on the use environment and operating mode, if the operating noise is of concern, it is
recommended that the machine be installed in a place other than the oce.
Other precautions
●Follow the caution instructions on labels and the like found on this machine.
●Avoid shaking or applying shock to this machine.
●Do not forcibly open and close doors, covers, and other parts. Doing so may result in damage to the
machine.
●Do not touch the contacts ( ) inside the machine. Doing so may result in damage to the machine.
Important Safety Instructions
7
●To prevent a paper jam, do not turn OFF the power, open/close the covers, and load/unload the paper when
printing.
Important Safety Instructions
8
Maintenance and Inspections
52AC-004
Clean this machine periodically. If dust accumulates, the machine may not operate properly. When cleaning, be sure to
observe the following. If a problem occurs during operation, see Troubleshooting.
●Before cleaning, turn OFF the power and unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet. Failure to do so
may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Unplug the power plug periodically and clean with a dry cloth to remove dust and grime. Accumulated dust
may absorb humidity in the air and may result in a re if it comes into contact with electricity.
●Use a damp, well wrung-out cloth to clean the machine. Dampen cleaning cloths with water only. Do not use
alcohol, benzine, paint thinner, or other ammable substances. Do not use tissue paper or paper towels. If
these substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, they may generate static
electricity or result in a re or electrical shock.
●Check the power cord and plug periodically for damage. Check the machine for rust, dents, scratches,
cracks, or excessive heat generation. Use of poorly-maintained equipment may result in a re or electrical
shock.
●The inside of the machine has high-temperature and high-voltage components. Touching these components
may result in burns. Do not touch any part of the machine that is not indicated in the manual.
●When loading paper or removing jammed paper, be careful not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
●When removing jammed paper or replacing toner cartridges or the like, be careful not to get any toner on
your hands or clothing. If toner gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately with cold water.
Important Safety Instructions
9
Consumables
52AC-005
●Do not dispose of used toner cartridges or the like in open ames. Also, do not store toner cartridges, drum
cartridges, or paper in a location exposed to open ames. This may cause the toner to ignite, and result in
burns or re.
●If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, carefully gather the toner particles together or wipe them up with a
soft, damp cloth in a way that prevents inhalation. Never use a vacuum cleaner that does not have
safeguards against dust explosions to clean up spilled toner. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the
vacuum cleaner, or result in a dust explosion due to static discharge.
●Use caution not to inhale any toner. If you should inhale toner, consult a physician immediately.
●Use caution so that toner does not get into your eyes or mouth. If toner should get into your eyes or mouth,
immediately wash with cold water and consult a physician.
●Use caution so that toner does not come into contact with your skin. If it should, wash with soap and cold
water. If there is any irritation on your skin, consult a physician immediately.
●Keep the toner cartridges and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If toner is ingested,
consult a physician or poison control center immediately.
●Do not disassemble or modify the toner cartridge or the like. Doing so may cause the toner to scatter.
Handling the toner cartridge
●Be sure to hold the toner cartridge using the handle.
●Do not touch the feed section ( ), the electrical contacts ( ) or the toner cartridge memory ( ).
Important Safety Instructions
10
●Except when necessary, do not take out the toner cartridge from the packing material or from this machine.
●The toner cartridge is a magnetic product. Do not move it close to products susceptible to magnetism
including oppy disks and disk drives. Doing so may result in data corruption.
Handling the drum cartridge
●Be sure to hold the drum cartridge using the handle.
●Avoid scratching the drum surface ( ) or exposing it to light. Do not touch the electrical contacts ( ) or
the drum cartridge memory ( ).
●Except when necessary, do not take out the drum cartridge from the packing material or from this machine.
Handling the Waste Toner Container
●Do not tilt the waste toner container because doing so may cause toner to spill out of the mouth of the
container ( ).
Important Safety Instructions
11
Storing the toner cartridges and drum cartridges
●Store in the following environment to ensure safe and satisfactory use.
Storage temperature range: 0 °C to 35 °C
Storage humidity range: 35 % to 85 % RH (relative humidity/no condensation)*
●Store without opening until the toner cartridges or the drum cartridges are to be used.
●When removing the toner cartridges or the drum cartridges from this machine for storage, place the
removed toner cartridges or drum cartridges in the original packing material.
●When storing the toner cartridges, do not store it upright or upside down. The toner will solidify and may
not return to its original condition even if it is shaken.
* Even within the storable humidity range, water droplets (condensation) may develop inside the toner cartridges or the
drum cartridges if there is a difference of temperature inside and outside the toner cartridges or the drum cartridges.
Condensation will adversely affect the print quality of toner cartridges or the drum cartridges.
Do not store the toner cartridges or the drum cartridges in the following locations
●Locations exposed to open ames
●Locations exposed to direct sunlight or bright light for ve minutes or more
●Locations exposed to excessive salty air
●Locations where there are corrosive gases (i.e. aerosol sprays and ammonia)
●Locations subject to high temperature and high humidity
●Locations subject to dramatic changes in temperature and humidity where condensation may easily occur
●Locations with a large amount of dust
●Locations within the reach of children
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges or drum cartridges
●Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges or Canon drum cartridges in the
marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner cartridge or drum cartridge may result in poor print quality or
machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use
of counterfeit toner cartridge or drum cartridge.
For more information, see global.canon/ctc.
Availability period of repairing parts and toner cartridges, drum cartridges and the like
●The repairing parts, toner cartridges, drum cartridges and the like for the machine will be available for at
least seven (7) years after production of this machine model has been discontinued.
Packing materials for the toner cartridges and the drum cartridges
●Save the packing materials for the toner cartridges and drum cartridges. They are required when
transporting this machine.
●The packing materials may be changed in form or placement, or may be added or removed without notice.
Important Safety Instructions
12
When disposing of a used toner cartridges, drum cartridges or the like
●When discarding a toner cartridges, drum cartridges or the like, place it in the original packing material to
prevent toner from scattering from inside, and dispose of it in accordance with the applicable local
regulations.
Important Safety Instructions
13
Basic Operations
Basic Operations ............................................................................................................................................... 15
Main Functions .................................................................................................................................................... 17
Parts and Their Functions ................................................................................................................................... 18
Front Side ....................................................................................................................................................... 19
Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................ 21
Interior ........................................................................................................................................................... 23
Multi-Purpose Tray ......................................................................................................................................... 24
Paper Drawer ................................................................................................................................................. 25
Operation Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 26
Display ..................................................................................................................................................... 29
Using the Operation Panel .................................................................................................................................. 31
Entering Text .................................................................................................................................................. 34
Turning ON/OFF the Power ................................................................................................................................. 36
Performing a Quick Start of the Machine ........................................................................................................ 38
Loading Paper ...................................................................................................................................................... 40
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer ................................................................................................................ 42
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray ........................................................................................................ 48
Loading Envelopes or Postcards ..................................................................................................................... 51
Loading Preprinted Paper ............................................................................................................................... 55
Specifying Paper Size and Type ....................................................................................................................... 59
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer ............................................................................... 60
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray ....................................................................... 63
Saving Energy ...................................................................................................................................................... 66
Entering Sleep Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 67
Setting Auto Shutdown Time .......................................................................................................................... 69
Basic Operations
14
Basic Operations
52AC-006
This chapter describes basic operations, such as how to use the operation panel or how to load the paper, that are
frequently performed to use the functions of the machine.
●The functions installed on the machine vary depending on the model you purchased. Before using the
machine, see Main Functions(P. 17) and check the available functions.
◼Parts and Their Functions
This section describes the exterior and interior parts of the machine and their functions, as well as how to use the keys
on the operation panel and how to view the display. Parts and Their Functions(P. 18)
◼Using the Operation Panel
This section describes how to use the keys on the operation panel to perform various operations, such as adjusting
and checking the settings. Using the Operation Panel(P. 31)
◼Turning ON/OFF the Power
This section describes how to turn ON/OFF the power. Turning ON/OFF the Power(P. 36)
◼Loading Paper
This section describes how to load the paper into the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper(P. 40)
Basic Operations
15
Main Functions
52AC-007
This manual covers all the functions of the model series you purchased. Before getting started, check which functions
are available on the model you purchased.
: With function : Without function
Function LBP852Cx
Print
2-sided printing
Secured Print
USB Direct Print
Stored Job Print
Wired LAN connection
Wireless LAN connection
Linking with Mobile Devices
Department ID Management
MEAP
Paper Feeder PF-G *
Cassette Feeding Unit-AU *
Barcode Printing Kit *
PCL International Font Set *
SD CARD *
*This is an optional item.
●For the available driver types, see the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM supplied with the machine, or see
the Canon website (https://global.canon).
LINKS
Viewing User's Guide(P. 585)
Basic Operations
17
Parts and Their Functions
52AC-008
This section describes the parts of the machine (exterior, front and back side, and interior) and how they function. In
addition to describing the parts of the machine used for such basic operations as loading paper and replacing the
toner cartridges, this section also describes the keys on the operation panel and display. Read this section for tips on
how to use the machine properly.
Front Side(P. 19)
Back Side(P. 21)
Interior(P. 23)
Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 24)
Paper Drawer(P. 25)
Operation Panel(P. 26)
Basic Operations
18
Front Side
52AC-009
Output tray
Printed paper is output to the output tray.
Operation panel
The operation panel consists of numeric keys, a display, status indicators, etc. You can perform all the
operations and specify settings from the operation panel. Operation Panel(P. 26) Display(P. 29)
Power switch
Press the power switch to turn ON the power. When turning OFF the power, do not use this switch, but follow
the procedures shown in Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Shutdown)(P. 36) .
Front cover
Open the front cover when replacing toner cartridges or drum cartridges. How to Replace Toner
Cartridges(P. 494) How to Replace Drum Cartridges(P. 501)
Paper drawer
Load the type of paper you frequently use into the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper
Drawer(P. 42)
USB memory port (For USB memory)
You can connect a USB memory device to the machine and directly print the data from the USB memory
device. You can directly print the data in the USB memory device without using a computer. ( Printing
from USB Memory (USB Direct Print)(P. 81) ). Also, connect a USB memory device when exporting or
importing the settings of the machine ( Import/Export Set.(P. 395) ).
Basic Operations
19
Right cover
Open the right cover when clearing paper jams.
Lift handles
Hold the lift handles when carrying the machine. Relocating the Machine(P. 506)
Multi-purpose tray
Load the paper into the multi-purpose tray when you want to temporarily use a type of paper different from
that which is loaded in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 48)
Basic Operations
20
Back Side
52AC-00A
Back cover
Open the back cover to install the optional ROM. Installing the ROM(P. 571)
Ventilation slot
Air from inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects in
front of the ventilation slots prevents ventilation. Installation(P. 3)
Power socket
Connect the power cord.
Left cover
Open the left cover when replacing the waste toner container. How to Replace the Waste Toner
Container(P. 504)
Rating label
The label shows the serial number, which is needed when making inquiries about the machine. For more
information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.
Lift handles
Hold the lift handles when carrying the machine. Relocating the Machine(P. 506)
SD card slot cover
Open the SD card slot cover when installing the optional SD card. Installing an SD Card(P. 575)
USB port (for USB device connection)
Connect a USB device that is used with MEAP applications. Also, connect a USB memory device when
exporting or importing the settings of the machine ( Import/Export Set.(P. 395) ).
Basic Operations
21
USB port (for computer connection)
Connect a USB cable when connecting the machine and a computer.
ACT indicator
The ACT indicator blinks while data is being sent or received.
LNK indicator
The LNK indicator blinks green when the machine is properly connected to a network.
LAN port
Connect a LAN cable when connecting the machine to a wired LAN router, etc. Connecting to a Wired
LAN(P. 148)
Basic Operations
22
Interior
52AC-00C
Drum cartridge slots
Load the drum cartridges in these slots. How to Replace Drum Cartridges(P. 501)
Toner cartridge slots
Load the toner cartridges of appropriate color in these slots: Y (yellow) in the leftmost slot, followed by M
(magenta), C (cyan), and K (black). How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 494)
Basic Operations
23
Multi-Purpose Tray
52AC-00E
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to exactly the width of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the
machine. Press the lock release lever that is marked with arrow in the illustration to release the lock and slide
the paper guides.
Tray extension
Pull this out when loading large paper.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 48)
Basic Operations
24
Paper Drawer
52AC-00F
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to exactly the size of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the
machine. Press the lock release levers that are marked with arrows in the illustrations to release the locks
and slide the paper guides.
Paper level indicator
Indicates the remaining amount of paper. The mark moves downward as the remaining amount of paper
decreases.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 42)
Basic Operations
25
Operation Panel
52AC-00H
Display
Displays the current printing or other operation status, error information, toner cartridge status, etc.
Display(P. 29)
Job Status/Cancel key
If you press this key when the [ ] indicator is lit or blinking, a document being printed and documents
waiting to be printed are listed. You can select the document from the list and cancel printing of the
document. From the Operation Panel(P. 78)
Back key
Press to return to the previous screen. If you press this key when specifying settings, for example, the
settings are not applied and the display returns to the previous screen.
Numeric keys ([0]-[9] keys)
Press to enter numbers and text. Entering Text(P. 34)
[*] key
Press to switch the type of text that is entered.
Basic Operations
26
Ready indicator
Lights up when the machine is ready for printing or otherwise blinks.
Message indicator
●Lights up when a problem occurs to disable printing. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)"
on the online manual website.
●Lights up if the machine enters sleep mode while being off line.
Job indicator
Lights up when the machine is receiving print data or any print data remains in the memory of the machine.
Blinks when print data is being processed.
Energy Saver key
Press to put the machine into sleep mode. This key lights up in green when the machine is in sleep mode.
Press the key again to exit sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 67)
Application key
Each press of this key cycles through the functions in the order of: Print Screen MEAP1 MEAP2 ...
MEAP8 USB Direct Print Print Screen. Select the function you want to use. If you press this key without
logging on when department ID management is enabled, the authentication screen is displayed.
Select Feeder key
Press to select the paper source or specify the paper size. Select Feeder Menu(P. 468)
[ID] key
Displays the login screen for using the MEAP function. After you nish using the machine, press this key
again to log off.
Clear key
Press to delete the entered numbers and text.
Online key
Switches between online mode (printing jobs are accepted) and oine mode (no printing job is accepted).
This key lights up green when the machine is online and goes off when the machine is oine. Usually, keep
the machine online, but set it to oine when specifying settings of User Maintenance(P. 374) in the
setting menu.
●If you do not operate the key for a length of time when the machine is oine and the Main
Screen(P. 29) is displayed, the machine automatically becomes online. You can select <Auto Reset Time>
to change this time value ( Auto Reset Time(P. 314) ).
[#] key
Press to enter symbols such as "@" or "/".
Basic Operations
27
Utility key/[ ] key
●Displays the Utility menu. You can display the total number of printed pages and print internal system
information for checking. Utility Menu(P. 458)
●When specifying settings, press to return to the previous screen. When entering text, press to move the
cursor to the left.
Job key/[ ] key
●Displays the Job menu. You can check the print logs. Job Menu(P. 464)
●When specifying settings, press to select the item immediately above the currently selected item. When
changing setting values, press to increase a value.
Settings key/[ ] key
●Displays the Setup menu. You can specify settings of the machine. Setup Menu(P. 311)
●When specifying settings, press to proceed to the next screen. When entering text, press to move the
cursor to the right.
Reset key/[ ] key
●Displays the Reset menu. You can cancel all processes, delete data in memory, and turn OFF the power.
Reset Menu(P. 466)
●When specifying settings, press to select the item immediately below the currently selected item. When
changing setting values, press to decrease a value.
[OK] key
Press to apply settings or specied details.
LINKS
Using the Operation Panel(P. 31)
Basic Operations
28
Display
52AC-00J
The display shows the printing status and the screens for specifying settings. It also
shows error messages and toner cartridge status.
Main Screen
Status indication
Displays the current status or operation mode of the machine.
Paper size indication
Displays the currently selected paper size.
The following paper sizes are shown in an abbreviated form.
●Ledger: LD
●Legal: LG
●Letter (landscape) : LTR
●Letter (portrait) : LT
●Statement (landscape) : STR
●Statement (portrait) : ST
●Executive (landscape) : EXR
●Executive (portrait) : EX
●Foolscap: FC
●305x457 mm/12x18 in: TxE
●Index Card: IC
●Indian Legal: ILG
●Postcard: PD
●Reply Postcard: P2
●4 on 1 Postcard: P4
●Envelope KAKUGATA 2: K2
●Envelope NAGAGATA 3: N3
●Envelope YOUGATANAGA 3: YN3
●Envelope No. 10 (COM10): CO
●Envelope Monarch: MO
●Envelope ISO-C5: EC5
●Envelope DL: DL
●Free Size: FR
●Custom Paper Size Landscape: 80R
●Custom Paper Size Portrait: 80
Toner cartridge status indication
Displays the status of toner cartridges.
Menu Screen
Press ( ), ( ), ( ), ( ), or ( ) to display the corresponding menu screen. The
screen displayed when ( ) is pressed is shown below as an example.
Basic Operations
29
Setting Menu List(P. 310)
When an Error Occurs
In some cases when an error occurs, instructions on how to respond to the error are displayed. Follow the on-
screen instructions to solve the problem. The screen displayed when a paper jam occurs is shown below as an
example. For more information about the displayed messages, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online
manual website.
LINKS
Using the Operation Panel(P. 31)
Basic Operations
30
Using the Operation Panel
52AC-00K
Use the keys shown below to specify settings and adjust values.
Using /
Scrolling the Screen
The scroll bar is displayed on the right side of the screen when not all of the information ts on one screen. If
the scroll bar is displayed, use / to scroll up or down. The text and background colors of an item are
inverted when it is selected.
Changing a Setting Value
Use / to enter values.
●Values in ( ) displayed below the entry box are the enterable value range.
Basic Operations
31
Using /
Proceeding to the Next Screen/Returning to the Previous Screen
Press to proceed to the next screen. Press to return to the previous screen.
●You can also proceed to the next screen by pressing , and return to the previous screen by pressing
.
Moving the Cursor
Use / to enter text and values. Entering Text(P. 34)
Using
Press to apply a setting.
Using ( )
To return to the main screen after exiting the setting menu, press ( ).
Using the Numeric Keys
Use the numeric keys to enter text and values. Entering Text(P. 34)
●Depending on the screen, you cannot use the numeric keys to enter values. In that case, enter with /
.
Basic Operations
32
Entering Text
52AC-00L
Use the numeric keys to enter text and values.
Switching the Type of Text
Press to switch the type of text that is entered.
Types of Text That Can Be Entered
Text that can be entered is listed below.
Key A a 12
(Not available) 1
ABC abc 2
DEF def 3
GHI ghi 4
JKL jkl 5
MNO mno 6
Basic Operations
34
PQRS pqrs 7
TUV tuv 8
WXYZ wxyz 9
(Not available) 0
(space) @./-_!?&$%#()[]{}<>*+=",;:'^`|\ (Not available)
●Press when the type of text that is entered is <A> or <a> to display enterable symbols in the
screen. Use / / / to select the symbol you want to enter, and press .
Deleting Text
One character is deleted each time is pressed. Press and hold to delete all of the entered text.
Moving the Cursor
Press or to move the cursor.
Entering a Space
Press , and press .
Example of Entering Text and Numbers
Example: "Canon 1"
1Press repeatedly until <A> is selected.
2Press repeatedly until the letter "C" is selected.
3Press repeatedly until <a> is selected.
4Press repeatedly until the letter "a" is selected.
5Press repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.
6Press repeatedly until the letter "o" is selected.
7Press repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.
8Press , and press .
9Press repeatedly until <12> is selected.
10 Press .
11 Press .
Basic Operations
35
Turning ON/OFF the Power
52AC-00R
The power switch is used to turn ON the machine. However, when turning OFF the machine, be sure to shut down the
machine from the operation panel without using the power switch. This procedure is the same as that for turning
ON/OFF a computer.
Turning ON the Power(P. 36)
Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Shutdown)(P. 36)
Turning ON the Power
Press the power switch of the machine. When the main screen appears on the display of the operation panel after self-
diagnosis is performed, the machine is ready for printing.
●A message may be displayed after the self-diagnosis. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on
the online manual website.
●If you specify the quick startup settings, you can reduce a waiting time after the power is turned on.
Performing a Quick Start of the Machine(P. 38)
Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Shutdown)
When turning OFF the machine, shut down the machine from the operation panel.
Performing a Shutdown without Using the Power Switch
●If you press the power switch to turn OFF the power, an unexpected error may occur. Follow the procedure
below to properly turn OFF the power.
●If you have enabled the quick start function, you can press the power switch to turn OFF the power.
Performing a Quick Start of the Machine(P. 38)
1Press ( ).
Basic Operations
36
2Use / to select <Shut Down>, and press .
3Select <Yes>, and press .
➠After the message below appears, the power is automatically turned OFF.
When <Could not execute.> appears
●There is remaining print data. Delete the data ( Reset Menu(P. 466) ), and retry the operation. To
cancel the operation, press ( ).
●It may take some time for the machine to completely shut down. Do not unplug the power cord until
the display turns off.
Do not turn ON the power immediately after turning OFF the power
●Wait for 10 seconds or more, and then turn ON the power.
Power consumption after power OFF
●The machine slightly consumes power even after the power is turned OFF. To completely eliminate power
consumption, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.
LINKS
Performing a Quick Start of the Machine(P. 38)
Basic Operations
37
Performing a Quick Start of the Machine
52AC-00S
If you specify the quick startup settings, you can reduce the time from when the power switch is pressed until the
screens become operable. The way of turning OFF the power to perform a quick start of the machine is called "quick
turn-OFF."
Conguring Quick Startup Settings(P. 38)
Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Quick Turn-OFF)(P. 39)
When you are using a network
●If any of the settings below is <On>, the quick start function is disabled.
-RARP, BOOTP, IPv6 Network(P. 145)
- IPSec Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 256)
When you are using the MEAP function
●Check whether the currently installed MEAP applications support the quick start function.
Conguring Quick Startup Settings
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Control Menu>, and press .
3Select <Main Pwr Quick Start>, and press .
4Select <Off> or <On>, and press .
<Off>
Disables the Quick Start function.
<On>
Enables the Quick Start function.
5Perform a hard reset. Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466)
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Basic Operations
38
Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Quick Turn-OFF)
If you press the power switch to turn OFF the power when the quick start function is enabled, a quick start of the
machine is performed when the machine is turned ON next time (quick turn-OFF).
Do not unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet after performing a quick turn-
OFF
●Do not unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet after turning OFF the power by performing a quick
turn-OFF. Doing so may damage the internal components of the machine. Before you unplug the power plug
when relocating the machine, turn ON the power, and then perform a shutdown. Turning OFF the Power
(Performing a Shutdown)(P. 36)
●When the machine is performing a job or is in an error state or after you change any setting using the
operation panel or Remote UI, pressing the power switch does not trigger a quick turn-OFF, but triggers a
shutdown instead.
●If the power is turned OFF by a shutdown operation even when the quick start function is enabled, the
machine starts as usual when it is turned ON next time.
●If you perform the auto shutdown timer function when the quick start function is enabled, a quick turn-OFF
is performed. Setting Auto Shutdown Time(P. 69)
●If you turn ON the power immediately after performing a quick turn-OFF, it may take some time for the
machine to start up.
Basic Operations
39
Loading Paper
52AC-00U
You can load paper into the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray. Load the paper you usually use into the paper
drawer. The paper drawer is convenient when using large amounts of paper. Use the multi-purpose tray when you
temporarily use size or type of paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer. See Available Paper(P. 547) for
available paper sizes and types.
About Paper
Precautions for Paper(P. 40)
Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine(P. 41)
How to Load Paper
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 42)
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 48)
Loading Envelopes or Postcards(P. 51)
Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 55)
Conguring the Settings for the Loaded Paper
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 59)
Precautions for Paper
Do not use the following types of paper:
●A paper jam or printing error may occur.
-Wrinkled or creased paper
- Curled or rolled paper
- Torn paper
- Damp paper
- Very thin paper
- Thin coarse paper
- Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
- Back side of paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
- Highly textured paper
- Glossy paper
Notes on use of paper
●Only use paper that has fully acclimatized to the environment in which the machine is installed. Using paper
that has been stored under different temperature or humidity conditions may cause paper jams or result in
poor print quality.
Basic Operations
40
Paper handling and storage
●It is recommended that you use paper as soon as possible after unwrapping. Paper remaining unused
should be covered with the original wrapping paper and stored on a at surface.
●Keep the paper wrapped in its original package to protect the paper from moisture or dryness.
●Do not store the paper in such a way that may cause it to curl or fold.
●Do not store the paper vertically or do not stack too much paper.
●Do not store the paper in direct sunlight, or in a place subject to high humidity, dryness, or drastic changes
in temperature or humidity.
When printing on paper that has absorbed moisture
●Steam may emit from the paper output area, or water droplets may form around the paper output area.
There is nothing unusual about any of these occurrences, which occur when the heat generated from xing
toner on the paper causes moisture in the paper to evaporate (most likely to occur at low room
temperatures).
Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine
When handling/storing the paper printed with the machine, take the following precautions.
◼How to Store the Printed Paper
●Store on a at surface.
●Do not store together with articles made of PVC (polyvinyl chloride) such as clear folders. Toner may melt, resulting
in the paper's sticking to PVC articles.
●Take care that the paper does not get folded or creased. Toner may peel off.
●To store over a long period of time (two years or longer), store in binders or equivalent.
●When the paper is stored over a long period of time, it may become discolored and thus the print may seem to have
undergone a change of color.
●Do not store in a place where the temperature is high.
◼Precautions When Applying Adhesive
●Always use insoluble adhesive.
●Before applying adhesive, perform a test using a printout no longer required.
●When putting adhesive-applied paper sheets one over another, make sure that the adhesive is completely dried out.
Basic Operations
41
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
52AC-00W
1660-02Y
Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer. When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the
paper drawer, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 48)
Loading Standard Size Paper(P. 42)
Loading a Custom Size Paper(P. 45)
Paper Orientation
See the table below to load available paper in correct orientation.
Paper Orientation
A3, B4, A4 (landscape),
B5 (landscape), A5 (landscape),
Ledger, Legal, Letter (landscape),
Executive (landscape), Foolscap,
8K, 16K (landscape), Indian Legal,
Custom (landscape)
A4 (portrait), B5 (portrait),
A5 (portrait), Letter (portrait),
Executive (portrait), 16K (portrait),
Custom (portrait)
●Follow the procedure below when loading paper into the optional paper feeder or cassette feeding unit.
Loading Standard Size Paper
To load paper whose size is found in the paper size markings on the paper drawer, use the following procedure. For
paper whose size is not found in the paper size markings, see Loading a Custom Size Paper(P. 45) .
1Pull out the paper drawer until it stops.
2Adjust the positions of the paper guides to the paper size you want to use.
●Press the lock release lever ( ) to align the projection ( ) to the appropriate paper size marking.
Basic Operations
42
When loading in the optional paper feeder or cassette feeding unit
●When loading A3 or Ledger size paper, set the lever ( ) as shown in the illustration.
3Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the paper guide
on the left side of the paper drawer.
●Insert the paper with the print side face up.
●Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges.
Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper
●Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line ( ). Loading too much paper can
cause paper jams.
Basic Operations
43
●When loading paper with a logo, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 55) .
4Set the paper drawer.
»Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 60)
When changing the paper size or type
●When you have changed the paper size or paper type, always check the setting. If the loaded paper and
the congured paper settings do not match, printing is not performed properly.
Automatic detection of paper type
●The machine is provided with a function for automatic paper type detection. If this function is enabled, it is
not necessary to change paper type settings when you load plain or heavy paper. Auto Detect Ppr
Type(P. 472)
●To print from an OS not supporting printer drivers or from a mobile device or other device not supporting
paper size and type settings, specify <Standard Paper Size> and <Default Paper Type>. Select Feeder
Menu(P. 468)
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
multi-purpose tray ( Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 48) ), with the side to print face down
(previously printed side face down).
●When you want to print on the back side of the paper that is already printed, set <Manual 2-Sided (MP)> to
<2nd Side> in the setting menu of the operation panel. Manual 2-Sided (MP)(P. 475)
●Load one sheet of paper each time you print.
●You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
●You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
Basic Operations
44
Loading a Custom Size Paper
To load custom size paper or other paper whose size is not found in the paper size markings on the paper drawer, use
the following procedure.
1Pull out the paper drawer until it stops.
2Slide the paper guides apart.
●Press the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward.
3Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the right side of
the paper drawer.
●Place the paper stack with the print side face up.
●Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges.
Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper
●Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line ( ). Loading too much paper can
cause paper jams.
Basic Operations
45
●When loading paper with a logo, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 55) .
4Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
●Press the lock release lever and slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the
edges of the paper.
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
●Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
When loading in the optional paper feeder or cassette feeding unit
●If proper loading of paper is obstructed by the lever ( ), such as if the paper gets elevated or skewed,
once remove the paper and adjust the lever position to the paper size. After that, reload the paper and
then adjust the position of the paper guides.
Basic Operations
46
5Set the paper drawer.
»Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 60)
When changing the paper size or type
●If you load a different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do
not change the paper size or type setting, the machine cannot print properly.
Automatic detection of paper type
●The machine is provided with a function for automatic paper type detection. If this function is enabled, it is
not necessary to change paper type settings when you load plain or heavy paper. Auto Detect Ppr
Type(P. 472)
●To print from an OS not supporting printer drivers or from a mobile device or other device not supporting
paper size and type settings, specify <Standard Paper Size> and <Default Paper Type>. Select Feeder
Menu(P. 468)
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
multi-purpose tray ( Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 48) ), with the side to print face down
(previously printed side face down).
●When you want to print on the back side of the paper that is already printed, set <Manual 2-Sided (MP)> to
<2nd Side> in the setting menu of the operation panel. Manual 2-Sided (MP)(P. 475)
●Load one sheet of paper each time you print.
●You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
●You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
LINKS
Available Paper(P. 547)
Basic Operations
47
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray
52AC-00X
1660-030
When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray.
Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 42)
Paper Orientation
See the table below to load available paper in correct orientation.
Paper Orientation
A3, B4, A4 (landscape),
B5 (landscape), A5 (landscape),
A6 (landscape), Ledger, Legal,
Letter (landscape),
Statement (landscape),
Executive (landscape),
Foolscap, 305x457 mm/12x18 in,
Indian Legal, 8K,
16K (landscape), Index Card,
Postcard, Reply Postcard,
Envelope, Custom (landscape)
A4 (portrait), A5 (portrait),
B5 (portrait), Letter (portrait),
Executive (portrait),
Statement (portrait),
16K (portrait),
4 on 1 Postcard, Custom (portrait)
1Open the cover.
2Pull out the paper tray.
3Spread the paper guides apart.
●Press the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward.
Basic Operations
48
4Insert the paper into the multi-purpose tray until the paper stops.
●Insert the paper with the print side face down.
●Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges.
Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper
●Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line ( ). Loading too much paper can
cause paper jams.
●When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see Loading Envelopes or Postcards(P. 51) or
Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 55) .
5Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
●Press the lock release lever and slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the
edges of the paper.
Basic Operations
49
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
●Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
»Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 63)
When changing the paper size or type
●The factory default settings for paper size and type are <A4> and <Mixed Types>, respectively. If you load a
different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the setting. If you do not change the
paper size or type setting, the machine cannot print properly.
Automatic detection of paper type
●The machine is provided with a function for automatic paper type detection. If this function is enabled, it is
not necessary to change paper type settings when you load plain or heavy paper. Auto Detect Ppr
Type(P. 472)
●To print from an OS not supporting printer drivers or from a mobile device or other device not supporting
paper size and type settings, specify <Standard Paper Size> and <Default Paper Type>. Select Feeder
Menu(P. 468)
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
multi-purpose tray, with the side to print face down (previously printed side face up).
●When you want to print on the back side of the paper that is already printed, set <Manual 2-Sided (MP)> to
<2nd Side> in the setting menu of the operation panel. Manual 2-Sided (MP)(P. 475)
●Load one sheet of paper each time you print.
●You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
●You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
LINKS
Available Paper(P. 547)
Basic Operations
50
Loading Envelopes or Postcards
52AC-00Y
Before loading envelopes or postcards, make some preparations such as attening any curls on them. Also pay
attention to the orientation of envelopes or postcards and which side is face up. Note that neither envelopes nor
postcards can be loaded in the paper drawer.
Loading Envelopes(P. 51)
Loading Postcards(P. 53)
●This section describes how to load envelopes in the orientation you want, as well as procedures that you
need to complete before loading envelopes or postcards. For the general procedure for loading envelopes
or postcards in the multi-purpose, see Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 48) .
Loading Envelopes
◼Before Loading Envelopes
Follow the procedure below to prepare the envelopes before loading.
1Close the ap of each envelope.
2Flatten them to release any remaining air, and make sure that the edges are pressed
tightly.
3Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and atten any curls.
Basic Operations
51
4Align the edges of the envelope on a at surface.
◼Loading Envelopes in the Multi-Purpose Tray
Load the envelopes in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine), with the non-glued side (front
side) face down. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.
Envelopes YOUGATANAGA 3, ISO-C5, Monarch, No. 10 (COM10), or DL
Load the envelope so that the edge with the ap is toward the right side as shown in the illustration.
Envelopes KAKUGATA 2 or NAGAGATA 3
Insert the envelope with the ap toward you.
Basic Operations
52
Loading Postcards
●For postcards, automatic 2-sided printing is impossible. If you want to print on both sides of the postcard,
rst print on one side and then print on the other side.
●Before loading the postcards, atten any curls on them. With curls remaining, printouts may be skewed or
images may be printed distorted.
◼Loading Postcards in the Multi-Purpose Tray
Insert the postcard with the print side face down and with the short edge toward the machine.
Postcard
Insert the postcard with the upper end toward the machine.
Reply Postcard
Unfold the postcard and insert it with the right side toward the machine.
4 on 1 Postcard
Insert the postcard with the right side toward the machine.
Basic Operations
53
Basic Operations
54
Loading Preprinted Paper
52AC-010
When you use paper that has been preprinted with a logo, pay attention to the orientation of the paper when loading.
Load the paper properly so that printing is performed on the correct side of the paper with a logo.
Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 55)
Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 56)
●This section mainly describes how to load preprinted paper with the proper facing and orientation. For the
general procedure for loading paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray, see the following.
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 42)
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 48)
Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation
When loading paper in the paper drawer
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.
When loading paper in the multi-purpose tray
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face down.
Basic Operations
55
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
When loading paper in the paper drawer
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.
When loading paper in the multi-purpose tray
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face down.
Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos
When a document to print consists of an odd number of pages, set <Alternative Method> to <Off> in the setting menu
of the operation panel. Alternative Method(P. 355)
Basic Operations
56
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation
When loading paper in the paper drawer
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the rst page of the document) face down.
When loading paper in the multi-purpose tray
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the rst page of the document) face up.
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
When loading paper in the paper drawer
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the rst page of the document) face down.
Basic Operations
57
When loading paper in the multi-purpose tray
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the rst page of the document) face up.
The <Paper Feed Method> setting
●When you print on preprinted paper, you need to change the facing of the paper to load each time you
switch between 1-sided and 2-sided printing. However, if <Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Side Priority>,
the facing that you use for loading preprinted paper for 2-sided printing (logo side face down for paper
drawer or up for multi-purpose tray) can also be used for 1-sided printing. This setting is especially useful if
you frequently perform both 1-sided and 2-sided printing. Paper Feed Method(P. 390)
Basic Operations
58
Specifying Paper Size and Type
52AC-011
You must specify the paper size and type settings to match the paper that is loaded. Make sure to change the paper
settings when you load the paper that is different from the previously loaded paper.
●If the setting does not match the size and type of loaded paper, a paper jam or printing error may occur.
Basic Operations
59
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer
52AC-012
Specify the paper size and type as necessary depending on the paper you load in the paper drawer.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select one of <Drawer 1 Paper Size> to <Drawer 5 Paper Size>, and
press .
●<Drawer 2 Paper Size> to <Drawer 5 Paper Size> are displayed when the optional paper feeder or cassette
feeding unit is installed.
3Select the paper size, and press .
About <Auto>
●For the following paper sizes, specify <Auto>.
- A3
- B4
- A4
- B5 (portrait)
- A5 (portrait)
- Ledger
- Legal
- Letter
- Executive (portrait)
Paper sizes that can be loaded in either portrait or landscape orientation
●Paper of the following sizes can be loaded in either portrait or landscape orientation. See the table below
to select the setting according to the orientation of the paper.
Paper size Orientation Setting
A4 <Auto>
<Auto>
A5 *1 < A5R>
Basic Operations
60
Paper size Orientation Setting
<Auto>
B5 < B5R>
<Auto>
Letter <Auto>
<Auto>
Executive < EXECR>
<Auto>
16K < 16KR>
< 16K>
Custom Paper Size *2 < Custom Size R>
< Custom Size>
*1 When using the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver, select the [Feed Standard Paper Sizes Vertically] check box
in the [Paper Source] tab before printing.
*2 When using the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver, select the [Feed Custom Paper Vertically] check box in the
[Paper Source] tab before printing.
About <Free Size>
●If you frequently change sizes of paper to load, you can specify <Free Size>, which saves you the trouble of
changing the paper size setting each time you print. However, take note that this setting lets the machine
print even if there is mismatch between the paper size setting in the printer driver and the paper size
actually loaded in the machine.
●If you select <Free Size>, the print speed will be slower.
4Select one of <Drawer 1 Paper Type> to <Drawer 5 Paper Type>, and press .
●<Drawer 2 Paper Type> to <Drawer 5 Paper Type> are displayed when the optional paper feeder or cassette
feeding unit is installed.
Basic Operations
61
5Select the paper type, and press .
About <Mixed Types>
●If you frequently change sizes of paper to load, you can specify <Mixed Types>, which saves you the
trouble of changing the paper type setting each time you print. However, take note that this setting lets
the machine print even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the
paper type actually loaded in the machine.
Automatic detection of paper type
●The machine is provided with a function for automatic paper type detection. If this function is enabled, it is
not necessary to change paper type settings when you load plain or heavy paper. Auto Detect Ppr
Type(P. 472)
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 42)
Available Paper(P. 547)
Basic Operations
62
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose
Tray
52AC-013
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <MP Tray Paper Size>, and press .
3Select the paper size, and press .
Paper sizes that can be loaded in either portrait or landscape orientation
●Paper of the following sizes can be loaded in either portrait or landscape orientation. See the table below
to select the setting according to the orientation of the paper.
Paper size Orientation Setting
A4 < A4R>
< A4>
B5 < B5R>
< B5>
A5 *1 < A5R>
< A5>
Letter < LTRR>
< LTR>
Basic Operations
63
Paper size Orientation Setting
Executive < EXECR>
< EXEC>
16K < 16KR>
< 16K>
Statement < STMTR>
< STMT>
Custom Paper Size *2 < Custom Size R>
< Custom Size>
*1 When using the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver, select the [Feed Standard Paper Sizes Vertically] check box
in the [Paper Source] tab before printing.
*2 When using the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver, select the [Feed Custom Paper Vertically] check box in the
[Paper Source] tab before printing.
About <Free Size>
●If you frequently change sizes of paper to load, you can specify <Free Size>, which saves you the trouble of
changing the paper size setting each time you print. However, take note that this setting lets the machine
print even if there is mismatch between the paper size setting in the printer driver and the paper size
actually loaded in the machine.
●If you select <Free Size>, the print speed will be slower.
4Select <MP Tray Paper Type>, and press .
5Select the paper type, and press .
About <Mixed Types>
Basic Operations
64
●If you frequently change sizes of paper to load, you can specify <Mixed Types>, which saves you the
trouble of changing the paper type setting each time you print. However, take note that this setting lets
the machine print even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the
paper type actually loaded in the machine.
Automatic detection of paper type
●The machine is provided with a function for automatic paper type detection. If this function is enabled, it is
not necessary to change paper type settings when you load plain or heavy paper. Auto Detect Ppr
Type(P. 472)
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 48)
Available Paper(P. 547)
Basic Operations
65
Saving Energy
52AC-014
You can save energy by making a setting so that the machine automatically enters the power saving state (sleep
mode) or automatically turns OFF if no operation is performed for a certain period of time or that the machine is
automatically turned OFF at a xed time on each day of the week.
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 67)
Setting Auto Shutdown Time(P. 69)
Basic Operations
66
Entering Sleep Mode
52AC-015
The sleep mode function reduces the amount of power consumed by the machine by disabling power ow to the
operation panel. If no operations will be performed on the machine for a while, such as during a lunch break, you can
save power simply by pressing on the operation panel. You can also use the Auto Sleep Time setting to
automatically put the machine into sleep mode if it remains idle for a specied length of time. You can specify settings
to change the interval at which the auto sleep function is performed or put the machine in sleep mode at a specied
time.
When in sleep mode
●When the machine is in sleep mode, lights in green.
Situations in which the machine does not enter sleep mode
●The machine does not enter sleep mode when it is receiving data from or sending data to a computer, any
of the covers is opened, or no toner cartridge is installed.
Selecting the Sleep Mode Level
The degree of energy consumption reduction effect of sleep mode differs with the selected level of the mode
( Sleep Mode(P. 312) ). To effectively save the power, we recommend that you use the machine with the
factory default setting for sleep mode level. If you want to change the setting, follow the procedure below.
( ) <Control Menu> <Sleep Mode> <High (Deep Sleep)> or <Mid
(Printer Sleep)>
Changing Auto Sleep Time
The machine automatically enters sleep mode if it remains idle for a specied length of time. We recommend
using the factory default settings ( Auto Sleep Time(P. 313) ) to save the most power. If you want to change
the amount of time that elapses before Auto Sleep is performed, follow the procedure below.
( ) <Control Menu> <Auto Sleep Time> Select the time
Basic Operations
67
●Immediately after the machine is turned ON, the length of time to elapse before the machine enters
sleep mode may be longer than specied in the menu.
Automatically Entering/Exiting Sleep Mode at Specied Time
You can set the machine to enter sleep mode at a specied time. You can also set the machine to exit sleep
mode at a specied time.
( ) <Control Menu> <Timer Settings> <Wake Up Timer> or <Sleep
Timer> <On> <Wake Up Time> or <Sleep Time> Set the time
<Wake Up Timer>
Select <On> to automatically exit sleep mode at a specied time.
<Wake Up Time>
Set the time to automatically exit sleep mode.
<Sleep Timer>
Select <On> to automatically enter sleep mode at a specied time.
<Sleep Time>
Set the time to automatically enter sleep mode.
When You Want to Prevent the Machine from Entering Sleep Mode if an Error Occurs
You can specify settings so that the machine will not enter sleep mode when an error occurs. Sleep Even if
Error(P. 313)
( ) <Control Menu> <Sleep Even if Error> <Off>
Exiting Sleep Mode
Press .
Basic Operations
68
Setting Auto Shutdown Time
52AC-016
You can congure the machine to be automatically turned OFF when it is not operated for a long time. You can also
congure the machine to be turned OFF at a specied time. These functions allow you to avoid useless power
consumption that occurs due to failure to turn OFF the power. By factory default, this function is enabled.
●Specifying an auto shutdown time shorter than the default setting (4 hours) may shorten the life of the toner
cartridges.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Control Menu] [Edit].
4Congure auto shutdown timer settings.
Basic Operations
69
[Use Auto Shutdown Timer]
Select the check box to turn OFF the power when the time set in [Auto Shutdown Time] elapses.
[Auto Shutdown Time]
Specify after how many hours the machine should be turned OFF since it has entered sleep mode.
[Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer]
Select the check box to set the auto shutdown time for each day of the week.
[Sunday] to [Saturday]
Enter the time to turn OFF the power. If no time is specied, the auto shutdown time is not set for the day of
the week.
5Click [OK].
If shutdown does not seem to be nished
●It may take some time for the machine to completely shut down. Do not unplug the power cord until the
display turns off.
Basic Operations
70
Situations that may be responsible for failure to turn OFF the power automatically at
the specied time
●You are making some operation on the machine.
●The machine is in the process of printing, cleaning, or some other operation.
●An error message is displayed.
If the power cannot be turned OFF automatically at the specied time, a retry will be performed up to 10 times
at intervals of 1 minute. If the power cannot be turned OFF even after ten retries, auto shutdown will be
impossible for that day.
Basic Operations
71
Printing a Document
Printing a Document ...................................................................................................................................... 73
Printing from a Computer ................................................................................................................................... 74
Canceling Prints .............................................................................................................................................. 77
Various Printing Methods ................................................................................................................................... 79
Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print) ................................................................................................. 81
Changing Default USB Print Settings ....................................................................................................... 91
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secured Print) ................................................................................... 93
Using the Encrypted Print ........................................................................................................................ 96
Printing a Document Stored in the Machine (Stored Job Print) ....................................................................... 97
Deleting a Document Stored in the Machine ......................................................................................... 101
Setting a Name or PIN to a Box ............................................................................................................. 105
Printing without Opening a File (Direct Print) ............................................................................................... 107
Print Settings for Direct Print ................................................................................................................. 110
Printing Received E-mail (E-Mail Print) .......................................................................................................... 121
Printing a Document
72
Printing a Document
52AC-017
This section describes how to print documents made on your computer, print les saved in a USB memory device, and
print documents by entering a PIN from the operation panel.
◼Printing from a Computer
You can print a document made on your computer by using the printer driver. Printing from a Computer(P. 74)
◼Using Useful Print Functions
You can use the print functions to print les stored in a USB memory device by connecting it directly to the machine
without using a computer and to set a requirement that a PIN must be entered before any printing can start.
Various Printing Methods(P. 79)
Printing a Document
73
Printing from a Computer
52AC-018
You can print a document made with an application on your computer by using the printer driver. There are useful
settings on the printer driver, such as enlarging/reducing and 2-sided printing, that enable you to print your
documents in various ways. Before you can use this function, you need to complete some procedures, such as
installing the printer driver on your computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the
online manual website.
About the Printer Driver Help(P. 74)
To Use the Optional Items(P. 74)
Basic Printing Operations(P. 75)
About the Printer Driver Help
Clicking [Help] on the printer driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen, you can see the detailed
descriptions that are not in the User's Guide.
To Use the Optional Items
If the optional paper feeder or cassette feeding unit is attached to the machine, perform the following operation on
the printer driver in advance.
●To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 602) ) Right-click the printer driver
icon for this machine [Printer properties] or [Properties] [Device Settings] tab [Paper Source]
Select the paper source [OK] [OK]
Printing a Document
74
Basic Printing Operations
This section describes how to print a document on your computer by using the printer driver.
Paper settings on the machine
●Normally, it is necessary to specify the paper size and type for the paper loaded in each paper source before
proceeding to printing.
1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
2Select your printer, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].
●Switch the tab according to the settings.
Printing a Document
75
When you have congured [POP Printing Optimization] *
●To obtain better print results, specifying the following settings on the machine is recommended.
- <Toner Warning Mode> : <POP Print> Toner Warning Mode(P. 394)
- <POP Printing Speed> : <Mode 2> POP Printing Speed(P. 393)
- <Auto POP Calibration> : <On> Auto POP Calibration(P. 394)
●There are restrictions for paper that can be used with this function. See Paper Types Available with
POP Printing Optimization(P. 550) for available paper sizes and types.
●When the amount remaining in a toner cartridge is low, automatic calibration may be performed, resulting
in a slow start of printing.
●When <Auto POP Calibration> is not congured, it is recommended that you perform <POP Prnt
Calibration> prior to POP printing. Correcting Color Mismatch and Hues(P. 511)
*For more information on [POP Printing Optimization], see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual
website.
4Click [Print] or [OK].
➠Printing starts.
●If you want to cancel printing, see Canceling Prints(P. 77) .
Printing a Document
76
Canceling Prints
52AC-019
You can cancel printing from your computer or on the operation panel of the machine.
From a Computer(P. 77)
From the Operation Panel(P. 78)
From a Computer
You can cancel printing from the printer icon displayed on the system tray on the desktop.
1Double-click the printer icon.
When the printer icon is not displayed
●Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 602) ), right-click your printer icon, and click
[See what's printing] (or double-click the icon of the printer driver for the machine).
2Select the document you want to cancel, and click [Document] [Cancel].
3Click [Yes].
➠Printing of the selected document is canceled.
●Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.
Canceling from the Remote UI
●You can cancel printing from the [Job Status] page on the Remote UI: Checking Current Status of Print
Documents(P. 295)
Canceling from an application
●On some applications, a screen like shown below appears. You can cancel printing by clicking [Cancel].
Printing a Document
77
From the Operation Panel
When the print data is sent to the machine from a computer, the [ ] indicator lights up (or blinks). You can cancel
printing from the operation panel while the indicator is lit or blinking.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select the document to cancel, and press .
3Select <Yes>, and press .
➠The <Canceling jobs> message is displayed and the selected print job is canceled.
●Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.
LINKS
Printing from a Computer(P. 74)
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status(P. 295)
Printing a Document
78
Various Printing Methods
52AC-01A
You can use a variety of useful print functions as well as performing the basic print operations with the printer driver.
◼Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print)
You can print PDF les and image les stored in a USB memory device by connecting it directly to the machine. Using
this function, you can print without using a computer. Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print)(P. 81)
◼Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secured Print)
By setting a PIN to data that is sent to the machine from a computer, the data is not printed until the correct PIN is
entered on the operation panel of the machine. This function is useful when printing condential documents.
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secured Print)(P. 93)
◼Printing a Document Stored in the Machine (Stored Job Print)
You can save print data sent from a computer onto an SD card. The stored data can be printed as many times as you
want. Printing a Document Stored in the Machine (Stored Job Print)(P. 97)
◼Printing without Opening a File (Direct Print)
You can print les (PDF, JPEG, etc.) stored in your computer by sending them to the machine via a Web browser. No
specic application is needed. Printing without Opening a File (Direct Print)(P. 107)
Printing a Document
79
Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print)
52AC-01C
You can print les directly by connecting a USB memory device to the machine. Using this function, you can print
without using a computer.
Available USB Memory Devices
You can use FAT32 formatted USB memory devices.
●Do not use non-standard USB memory devices. You may not be able to print the les properly
depending on the USB memory device.
●Do not connect anything other than a USB memory device. USB memory devices cannot be connected
via a USB hub or an extension cable.
●Do not use USB memory devices with special functions such as built-in security functions.
1Connect a USB memory device to the USB port on the right side of the machine.
➠The following screen is automatically displayed.
●If the screen is not displayed, press ( ).
●Do not shock or shake the USB memory device or the machine while the device is connected to the
machine.
2Use / to select <Select File(s)>, and press .
Printing a Document
81
3Select the type of the le to print, and press .
4Select the le to print, and press .
●You can select multiple les.
●To clear a selection, select the le you have selected (marked with ), and press . To clear all selections,
select <Clear All>, and press .
●To display the contents of a folder, select a folder, and press or . To return to the folder in the upper
level, press or .
●Folders and les in lower levels or with longer names may not be displayed.
●When you move to another folder, the previous le selections will be cleared.
5Select <Apply>, and press .
When printing an XPS Document Using a Print Ticket
When a le to print is in XPS format, it can be printed according to the print ticket (print settings) attached to
the le.
1Select <Use Print Ticket>, and press .
2Select <Start Printing>, and press .
➠Printing starts. When the printing is nished, remove the USB memory device from the machine.
Disconnect the USB memory device.(P. 89)
Printing a Document
82
6Specify the print settings as necessary.
●Select the desired setting item, press , and specify the setting.
Icons* in the description
Settings for printing PDF les
Settings for printing XPS les
Settings for printing JPEG les
Settings for printing TIFF les
* Icons are omitted for the settings that are displayed regardless of the le format.
<No. of Copies>
Specify the number of copies. Use the numeric keys to enter a quantity, and press .
<Print Range>/<Print Range (TIFF)>
Specify the range (pages) to print. Use / to select <Designation Method> select the method to
designate the print range .
<All>
Prints all pages.
<Specify Pages>
Prints only the specied pages. To specify the pages, select <Page Range> enter <First Page> and
<Last Page> using the numeric keys select <Apply> .
<Color Mode>
Specify whether to print in color or black and white. Use / to select the setting, and press .
Printing a Document
83
<Auto (Color/Black)>
Automatically select color or black and white printing depending on the type of document.
<Black>
Print in black and white even when the document is in color.
<2-Sided Printing>
Select whether to print on both sides of paper. Use / to select the setting, and press .
●<2-Sided Printing> may not be available with some sizes or types of paper. Available Paper(P. 547)
<Binding Location>
Specify whether to bind the long edge or short edge of the 2-sided printouts with a binding tool such as a
stapler. Use / to select the binding position, and press .
<Long Edge>
Binds the printouts on the long edge.
<Short Edge>
Binds the printouts on the short edge.
Printing a Document
84
<Select Paper>
Select the paper source in which the paper to print is already loaded. Use / to select the paper source,
and press .
●When you want to print a PDF le or XPS le, specify <Auto> to automatically select the optimum paper
source.
●A paper source with custom size paper loaded cannot be selected.
<Halftones>
You can select the method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker
areas of an image).
PDF les and XPS les
You can specify <Error Diffusion> as the halftone reproduction method or specify the halftone reproduction
method separately for each image data type. To specify <Error Diffusion>, use / to select <Error
Diffusion> press <On> press . To specify the reproduction method separately for each image
data type, use / to select <Resolution/Gradation> press select the image data type press
select the method to reproduce halftone press .
<Error Diffusion>
This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.
●The stability of the texture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.
<Resolution/Gradation>
Select the halftone reproduction method when <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. You can make this setting for
each of the types of image contained in one document.
Type of image
Printing a Document
85
Select the type of image for which you want to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and
characters, <Graphics> represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and other types of
images.
<Resolution>
Prints text with clear edges to produce a ne print. This is suitable for printing text and thin lines.
<Gradation>
Prints gradations and outlines with a smooth nish. This is suitable for printing gures and graphs that
use gradations.
●When <Error Diffusion> is set to <On>, <Resolution/Gradation> is not displayed.
JPEG les and TIFF les
Use / to select the method to reproduce halftones, and press .
<Error Diffusion>
This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.
●The stability of the texture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.
<Resolution>
Prints text with clear edges to produce a ne print. This is suitable for printing text and thin lines.
<Gradation>
Prints gradations and outlines with a smooth nish. This is suitable for printing gures and graphs that use
gradations.
<Match Paper Size>
Automatically makes enlarged or reduced printouts according to the Printable Area(P. 551) of the paper.
The printouts are enlarged or reduced with the original's aspect ratio kept. Use / to select the setting, and
press .
●This setting is not available if <Auto> is set in <Select Paper>.
Printing a Document
86
<Zoom>
Enable or disable enlarging/reducing images. The printouts are enlarged or reduced with the image's aspect
ratio kept. Use / to select the setting, and press .
<Off>
When the image is within the Printable Area(P. 551) of the paper, it is printed with the size as is. When
an image is larger than the printable area, printouts are reduced.
<Auto>
Makes enlarged or reduced printouts according to the Printable Area(P. 551) .
<Enlarge Print Area>
Specify whether or not to print the image by extending the Printable Area(P. 551) fully to the paper size.
Use / to select the setting, and press .
●If you select <On>, some portions of the image may be missing near the edge of the paper or the paper
may be partly tainted depending on the original.
<N on 1>
Select whether to print multiple pages onto a single sheet by sequentially allocating them from the top left. For
example, to print four pages onto a single sheet, select <4 on 1>. Use / to select the setting, and press
.
●This setting is not available if <Auto> is set in <Select Paper>.
<Finishing>
Printing a Document
87
Specify the method to collate the printouts when printing multiple-page documents. Use / to select
whether or not to collate the printouts, and press .
<Off>
The printouts are not collated. The specied number of copies are printed for each page. For example, if you
are printing three copies of a four-page document, the printouts will be arranged in the following page
order: 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4.
<Collate>
The printouts are grouped into complete sets in sequential page order. For example, if you are printing three
copies of a four-page document, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3,
4, 1, 2, 3, 4.
<Image Orientation>
Specify the print orientation of an image. Use / to select the print orientation, and press .
<Auto>
Automatically determines the print orientation based on the width and height of the image.
<Vertical>
Select when printing a vertically-long image.
<Horizontal>
Select when printing a horizontally-long image.
Printing a Document
88
●If the specied setting of <Vertical> or <Horizontal> does not match the orientation of the image, the
reduced image is printed.
<Print Position>
Specify the position to print the image. Use / to select the print position, and press .
<Auto>
If the TIFF data contains the information that species the print position, the image is printed according to
the information, otherwise, it is printed at the center of paper. JPEG data is always printed at the center of
paper.
<Center>
Images are printed at the center of paper.
<Top Left>
Images are printed at the top left.
7Select <Start Printing>, and press .
➠Printing starts.
●To cancel printing, use the operation panel. Canceling Prints(P. 77)
8Disconnect the USB memory device.
1Select <Remove USB Memory>, and press .
2Select <Yes>, and press .
➠Wait until the message shown below appears.
3Disconnect the USB memory device.
Printing a Document
89
Changing Default USB Print Settings
52AC-01E
The settings that are initially displayed for specifying print settings are called the default settings. If you change these
default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate the need to specify the same
settings every time you make prints.
( ) <USB Print Settings> <PDF/XPS Default Set.> or <JPEG/TIFF Def. Set.>
Select the setting item Change the default value of the selected item
PDF/XPS JPEG/TIFF
Setting items
Select the item you want to set, and change the default value.
◼Setting the Order of Displaying Files to Print
You can set the order in which les to print from a USB memory device are displayed for selection.
( ) <USB Print Settings> <File Sort Def. Set.> Select the standard of
the le display order
<Name (Ascending)>
Displays the les in ascending order by name.
<Name (Descending)>
Displays the les in descending order by name.
Printing a Document
91
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secured Print)
52AC-01F
By setting a PIN to a document when printing from a computer, the document is held in an optional SD card installed
on the machine, and is not printed until the correct PIN is entered on the operation panel of the machine. This
function is called "Secured Print," and the document that is protected by a PIN is called a "secured document." Using
Secured Print keeps printouts of condential documents from being left unattended. Before you can use this function,
you need to install an optional SD card on the machine ( Installing an SD Card(P. 575) ).
Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine(P. 93)
Printing Out Secured Documents(P. 94)
Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents(P. 95)
Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine
Follow the procedure below. You can send a document protected by a PIN.
1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
2Select this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3Select [Secure Print] in [Output Method].
➠The [Information] pop-up screen is displayed. Check the message, and click [Yes] or [No].
4Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].
●Switch the tab according to the settings.
Printing a Document
93
5Click [Print] or [OK].
➠After the secured document is sent to the machine, it is held in the SD card waiting to be printed.
●You can also use the encrypted print function with enhanced security. Using the Encrypted Print(P. 96)
Printing Out Secured Documents
Prints secured documents sent to the machine. After a valid time period ( Changing the Valid Time Period for
Secured Documents(P. 95) ) has elapsed, the secured document will be deleted from the memory of the machine
and can no longer be printed.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Secured Print>, and press .
3Select the secured document to print, and press .
●If the SD card contains only one secured document, this screen is not displayed.
Printing a Document
94
If the user name is displayed
●If secured documents from two or more users are being held in the SD card, the user selection screen as
shown below is displayed prior to the screen shown above. Select your user name, and press .
4Enter the PIN, and press .
➠Printing starts.
●To cancel print jobs, use the operation panel. Canceling Prints(P. 77)
Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents
You can change the valid time period from the time secured document data is sent to the machine until the time it is
deleted within a certain period of time.
1Press ( ).
2Use / select <Control Menu>, and press .
3Select <Sec. Print Del. Time>, and press .
4Select how long the SD card holds secured documents, and press .
●The secured document is erased from the SD card when the time selected here elapses.
LINKS
Using the Encrypted Print(P. 96)
Installing an SD Card(P. 575)
Printing a Document
95
Using the Encrypted Print
52AC-01H
Print data is encrypted before being sent to the machine, enhancing security more than the regular secured print
function.
◼Activating the Encrypted Print function
To use the encrypted print function, perform the following operation in advance.
Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 602) ) Right-click your printer icon
[Printer properties] or [Properties] [Device Settings] tab [Details] [Other Settings] tab
Enable [Encrypted Secure Print] [OK] [OK]
◼Sending an Encrypted Document from a Computer to the Machine
See Help. You can view Help from the printer driver.
Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 602) ) Right-click the icon of the
machine [Printer properties] or [Properties] [Encrypted-P] tab [Help]
◼Printing Out Encrypted Documents
After you send an encrypted document to the machine, print it out. Encrypted documents will be deleted automatically
when the retention time has elapsed ( Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents(P. 95) ), and can
no longer be printed. The retention time setting method is common to secured documents and encrypted documents.
( ) <Encrypted Print> Select the encrypted document to print Enter the
PIN using the numeric keys
If you are using alphanumeric characters or symbols in your PIN
●The Encrypted Print function allows you to use alphabetic characters and symbols as well as numbers
when specifying a PIN in the printer driver. However, if you use an alphabetic character or symbol in
the PIN, you cannot print an encrypted document from the operation panel of the machine. Use [Job
Status] of the Remote UI to print an encrypted document. Checking Current Status of Print
Documents(P. 295)
Printing a Document
96
Printing a Document Stored in the Machine (Stored Job
Print)
52AC-01J
The data printed from a computer can be saved on the SD card installed on the machine. Since the saved data can be
directly printed from the machine, you can eliminate the need to operate the computer every time you print. It is
convenient to save a document that will be printed many times such as a fax cover sheet. Installing an SD
Card(P. 575)
Storing a Document in the Machine(P. 97)
Printing a Document Stored in the Machine(P. 99)
●The data saved on the SD card will not be deleted even when the power is turned OFF, but it will be deleted
automatically when the set storage period has elapsed, and can no longer be printed. When you want to
change the data storage period or prevent the data from being automatically deleted, change the applicable
settings from the Remote UI ( Changing the Storage Period for Documents(P. 101) ). The saved data can
also be deleted manually ( Manually Deleting Documents(P. 102) ).
Storing a Document in the Machine
1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
2Select this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3Select [Store] in [Output Method], and click [Yes].
Printing a Document
97
4Specify the settings for storing documents, and click [OK].
[Data Name]
Assign a name to print data to store in the SD card.
[Enter Name] Manually set a name. Specify a friendly name that can be easily identied on the
display of the machine.
[Use File Name] A name is automatically set based on the le name of print data to store and the
information of an application that you are using.
[Mail Boxes]
A place used to store print data in the SD card is called a box. Select the number of the box to store the
document. You can assign a name to the box to facilitate identication of the box. Setting a Name or
PIN to a Box(P. 105)
5Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].
●Switch the tab according to the settings.
●The settings changed here are stored with the document. When the document is printed next time, it is
printed with the stored settings.
Printing a Document
98
6Click [Print] or [OK].
➠The document is sent to the machine and stored in the specied box.
Printing a Document Stored in the Machine
1Press ( ).
●When the machine is oine, it does not operate even if you press ( ). Set the machine to Online.
Online key(P. 27)
2Use / to select <Stored Job Print>, and press .
3Select the box number of the document to print, and press .
If the box is protected by a PIN
●When the PIN input screen is displayed, enter the PIN and press . If you are unsure of the PIN, contact
the administrator of the machine.
Printing a Document
99
4Select the document to print, and press .
➠Printing starts.
●To cancel printing, use the operation panel. Canceling Prints(P. 77)
●Documents saved on the SD card can also be printed from the [Box] page of the Remote UI ( [Box]
Page(P. 293) ). Open the box in which documents are saved, select the check box for a document to print,
and click [Print].
LINKS
Deleting a Document Stored in the Machine(P. 101)
Setting a Name or PIN to a Box(P. 105)
Installing an SD Card(P. 575)
Printing a Document
100
Deleting a Document Stored in the Machine
52AC-01K
By factory default, the data you save on an SD card will be automatically deleted when a certain length of time has
elapsed, and can no longer be printed. If you want to change how long the SD card holds documents or prevent the
documents from being automatically deleted, change the settings from the Remote UI. The saved documents can also
be deleted manually.
Changing the Storage Period for Documents(P. 101)
Manually Deleting Documents(P. 102)
Changing the Storage Period for Documents
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Control Menu] [Edit].
4Change the storage period.
●To prevent documents from being automatically deleted, select [Off].
Printing a Document
101
5Click [OK].
Manually Deleting Documents
1Start the Remote UI and log on. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
If you logged on in General User Mode
●By default, the machine is congured so that no users (general users) other than the administrator can
delete the documents. To allow end users to operate documents, you must change the settings.
Enabling End Users to Operate Documents(P. 300)
●You can delete only the document of which user name matches the one that was used to log on to the
Remote UI.
2Click [Box].
Printing a Document
102
3Click the number of the box where the document to delete is stored.
If the box is protected by a PIN
●When the screen shown below is displayed, enter the PIN and click [OK].
4Select the check box of the document to delete, and click [Delete].
➠The selected document is deleted.
●You can click the text link under [File Name] to check the details of the document.
Printing a Document
103
●It may take some time until the free space of the SD card is increased because the stored data is erased in
the background.
Printing a Document
104
Setting a Name or PIN to a Box
52AC-01L
You can set a name for a box and a PIN to open the box. If you set a friendly name for the box, you can easily identify
the box when selecting the place to store documents by using the printer driver. If you set a PIN, the stored
documents can be accessed by only limited users, enhancing the security.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Box].
3Click the number of the box for which you want to specify the settings.
If the box is protected by a PIN
●When the screen shown below is displayed, enter the PIN and click [OK].
4[Settings].
Printing a Document
105
5Set a name and PIN.
[Box Name]
To set a name for the box, enter the necessary characters.
[Set PIN]
To set a PIN, select the [Set PIN] check box and enter a number for the PIN in the [PIN] text box. For
conrmation, enter the same number in the [Conrm] text box.
●You cannot use "0" as the rst digit of the PIN. A number with "0" removed from the rst digit will be set as
the PIN.
6Click [OK].
Printing a Document
106
Printing without Opening a File (Direct Print)
52AC-01R
You can print a le from a Web browser (Remote UI) without opening the le. In addition, you can also print a PDF le
on the Web by only specifying the URL.
1Start the Remote UI and log on. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Direct Print].
3Click the type of the le to print.
[PDF File]
Click to print a PDF le.
[PS File]
Printing a Document
107
Click to print a PS or EPS le.
[Image File]
Click to print a JPEG or TIFF le.
[XPS Files]
Click to print an XPS le.
4Click [Browse].
●When the dialog box for selecting the le appears, select the le to print and click [Open].
●When you print a PDF le, select [File Path].
When you print a PDF le on the Web
●Select [URL], and enter the URL of the PDF le. If the user authentication is performed, enter the user
name and password.
When the PDF le is password-protected
●Enter the password in [Document Password].
When you print a PDF le linked to a policy server
●Specify the [Policy Server User Name] and [Policy Server Password] settings.
5Specify the print settings as necessary. Print Settings for Direct Print(P. 110)
6Click [Start Printing].
➠The screen shown below is displayed and printing starts.
Printing a Document
108
Print Settings for Direct Print
52AC-01S
When you want to change the settings for Direct Print according to the document to print, specify the following
settings.
When you specify the print settings for XPS les
●Clear the [Prioritize Print Ticket] check box. If the check box is selected, some items are unavailable.
Icons* in the description
Settings for printing PDF les
Settings for printing PS/EPS les
Settings for printing JPEG les
Settings for printing TIFF les
Settings for printing XPS les
* Icons are omitted for the settings that are displayed regardless of the le format.
[Specify Print Range]
Printing a Document
110
[Print Range]
Specify the range (pages) to print.
[All] Select to print all pages.
[Specify Pages] Select to specify the print range. This setting is unavailable for JPEG les.
[Quality Settings]
[Gradation]
Set the gradation for print data processing.
[High 1] This print mode is suitable for printing photos or the like at average quality.
[High 2] Specify this setting to print photos or the like at high quality.
[Halftones]
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and
darker areas of an image). For PDF les and XPS les, you can set [Resolution] or [Gradation] for each of
image types contained in one document: [Text], [Graphics], and [Image].
[Error Diffusion] With this check box selected, you can print in a mode suitable for printing data with
text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc. This is applied to all image
data types, so you cannot select [Resolution] or [Gradation].
●The stability of the texture and xed toner may be reduced when [Error
Diffusion] is used.
[Resolution] Prints text with clear edges to produce a ne print. This is suitable for printing text
and thin lines.
[Gradation] Prints gradations and outlines with a smooth nish. This is suitable for printing
gures and graphs that use gradations.
[Error Diffusion] This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of
CAD data, etc.
Printing a Document
111
●The stability of the texture and xed toner may be reduced when [Error
Diffusion] is used.
[Advanced Smoothing]
Make settings for the smoothing mode that enables edges of lines, gures and text to be printed smoothly.
[Off] Does not perform smoothing.
[Smooth 1] Smoothly prints edges of lines, gures, and text.
[Smooth 2] Edges will be smoother than with [Smooth 1].
[Graphics] With this check box selected, the smoothing mode is applied to lines and gures when
[Smooth 1] or [Smooth 2] is specied.
[Text] With this check box selected, the smoothing mode is applied to text when [Smooth 1]
or [Smooth 2] is specied.
Printing a Document
112
[Color Settings]
[Color Mode]
Specify whether to print in color or black and white.
[Auto (Color/Black & White)] Automatically select color or black and white printing depending on the type of
document.
[Black & White] Print in black and white even when the document is in color.
[Color] Print in color.
Printing a Document
113
[Matching Mode]
Select the processing mode for color printing.
[ICC Prole] Use a prole for color matching.
[Gamma] Perform color correction by setting a gamma value for brightness adjustment.
[RGB Source Prole]
Select a suitable prole for RGB data that matches the monitor that you are using. For XPS les, you can set
this item for each of image types contained in one document: [Text], [Graphics], and [Image].
[sRGB v3.0 (Canon)] An RGB prole is used that is similar to an average prole of most Windows PC
monitors. When using a monitor that supports sRGB, you can print colors
close to the colors displayed on the monitor.
[Canon HDTV gamma 1.5 to 2.4
Monitor]
When you want a brightness adjustment after making comparison between
the printed colors and the colors displayed on the monitor, make a necessary
setting here. The higher the value, the darker the printed colors.
[None] Performs color separation from RGB data to CMYK without applying any RGB
source prole.
●For XPS les, this item is available when [Matching Mode] is set to [ICC Prole].
[CMYK Simulation Prole]
You can select a simulation target when printing CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data to a device-
dependent CMYK color model in accordance with the selected simulation target.
[JapanColor(Canon)] Use the JapanColor prole. Printing is performed in colors that are close to the
Japanese printing standards.
[U.S. Web Coated v1.00 (Canon)] Use the U.S. Web Coated prole. Printing is performed in colors that are close to the
U.S. printing standards.
[Euro Standard v1.00 (Canon)] Use the Euro Standard prole. Printing is performed in colors that are close to the
European printing standards.
[None] Prints CMYK data using a device-dependent CMYK color model without applying any
CMYK simulation prole.
●When this item is set to [None], dark color gradation may collapse depending on the data.
[Output Prole]
You can select suitable proles for data that you are going to print. For PDF les and XPS les, you can set
this item for each of image types contained in one document: [Text], [Graphics], and [Image].
[Normal] Color matching is performed so that data is printed in colors close to the colors
displayed on the monitor.
Printing a Document
114
[Photo] Color matching is performed so that the print result is similar to photography.
[TR Normal] Color matching is performed so that data is printed in colors close to the colors
displayed on the monitor and that bleeding of toner into text and ne lines is well
controlled.
[TR Photo] Color matching is performed so that the print result is similar to photography and that
bleeding of toner into text and ne lines is well controlled.
●For XPS les, this item is available when [Matching Mode] is set to [ICC Prole].
[Matching Method]
Specify which element to be given priority over others in color matching by [RGB Source Prole]. For XPS les,
you can set this item for each of image types contained in one document: [Text], [Graphics], and [Image].
[Perceptual] Matching is performed with priority given to perceptual.
[Saturation] Matching is performed with priority given to saturation.
[Colorimetric] Matching is performed so that color difference between originals and printouts is
minimized.
[Use Grayscale Prole]
With this check box selected, gray data is converted to CMYK data according to the machine's grayscale
prole.
●Printing may be performed only with K (black) toner depending on the setting of [Output Prole] or [Use
Pure Black Text].
[Use Pure Black Text]
With this check box selected, black text is printed with K (black) toner only. Unlike printing with color (CMY)
toner, color toner slurring around the edges will not occur. It is recommended that normally you use this
setting.
[Black Overprint]
Set how to print when black text is overlapped on a color background or color gure with [Use Pure Black
Text] selected. With this check box selected, rst only the color background or gure is printed and then the
black text is printed onto the background or gure with black (K) toner alone. With this check box deselected,
rst the data is printed after the black text is cut out from the color background or gure, leaving the
corresponding white blank, and then the black text is printed on the white blank.
●With this check box deselected, the print may be fainter or the edges of the text may be rimmed with
white.
[Perfrom Composite Overprinting]
With this check box selected, CMYK data for which overprint is set will be overprinted as composite data.
Printing a Document
115
●When [CMYK Simulation Prole] is set to other than [None], overprint is not performed even if this check
box is selected.
[Brightness]
You can adjust the brightness of the whole image in steps of 5 %. The smaller the value, the brighter the
image.
[Gamma Correction]
Brightness adjustment can be performed so that the brightness of the brightest and darkest parts of the
original is not affected in the print result. [1.4] is the standard setting (no correction), and the larger the
setting value, the darker the print will be. You can set this item for each of image types contained in one
document: [Text], [Graphics], and [Image].
●This item is available when [Matching Mode] is set to [Gamma].
[Photo Optimizer PRO]
With this check box selected, printing is performed by automatically correcting image contrast, color balance,
saturation, and gradation.
[Red-Eye Correction]
"Red-eye" is a phenomenon that causes the eyes of human subjects of ash/strobe photography to appear
unnaturally reddish in color. Set whether to automatically detect red-eye in the image and correct the
portions in question so that they appear in natural color. Select the check box, and select the correction level
under [Red-Eye Correction Level].
[Face Brightener]
For a photograph image in which the faces of human subjects are unnaturally dark due to backlight or
underexposure, set whether to print the image by correcting its entire brightness so that the subjects' faces
become naturally bright. Select the check box, and select the correction level under [Face Brightener Level].
[Grayscale Conversion]
You can select the method to convert color pint data to black-and-white data. For XPS les, you can specify
the conversion method for each image data type: [Text], [Graphics], and [Image].
[sRGB] Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate color-conscious smooth
gradation.
[NTSC] Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate appearances equivalent to
television pictures (NTSC).
[Uniform RGB] Color data is converted to black-and-white data to equalize all RGB levels based on the
brightness only.
●This item is available when [Color Mode] is set to [Black & White].
[Gray Compensation]
For black or gray data with color information dening R=G=B, select whether to print with black (K) toner
only. You can set this item for each of image types contained in one document: [Text], [Graphics], and
[Image].
Printing a Document
116
●When you set this item to [Off], printing is performed with the four CMYK color toners.
[Print Settings]
[Copies]
Specify the number of copies.
[Paper Size]
Specify the size of the paper to print on.
●When you want to print a PDF le or XPS le, specify [Auto] to automatically select the optimum paper size.
If no optimum size is found, the paper size set in <Standard Paper Size> is selected ( Standard Paper
Size(P. 470) ).
[Paper Type]
Specify the type of the paper to print on.
[Manual Feed]
If you select the check box, a document is printed only on the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray.
[Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size]
If you select the check box, printouts are enlarged or reduced printouts according to the Printable
Area(P. 551) of the paper. The printouts are enlarged or reduced with the original aspect ratio kept.
Printing a Document
117
●If [Paper Size] is set to [Auto], this item is unavailable.
[Image Orientation]
Specify the print orientation of an image.
[Auto] Automatically determines the print orientation based on the width and height of the
image.
[Vertical] Select when printing a vertically-long image.
[Horizontal] Select when printing a horizontally-long image.
●If the specied setting of [Vertical] or [Horizontal] does not match the orientation of the image, the
reduced image is printed.
[Print Position]
Specify the position to print the image.
[Auto] If the TIFF data contains the information that species the print position, the image is
printed according to the information, otherwise, it is printed at the center of paper.
JPEG data is always printed at the center of paper.
[Center] Images are printed at the center of paper.
[Top Left] Images are printed at the top left.
[Zoom]
Enable or disable enlarging/reducing images. The printouts are enlarged or reduced with the image aspect
ratio kept.
[Off] When the image is within the Printable Area(P. 551) of the paper, it is printed with
the size as is. When an image is larger than the printable area, printouts are reduced.
[Auto] Makes enlarged or reduced printouts according to the printable area of the paper.
[Enlarge Print Area]
If you select the check box, the image is printed by extending the Printable Area(P. 551) fully to the paper
size. However, a part of the image may be missing near the edge of the paper or the paper may be partly
tainted depending on the original.
[Print 2-Sided]
Select the check box to print on both sides of the paper.
[Binding Location]
Select whether to bind the long edge or short edge of the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler.
Printing orientation will be changed depending on the specied binding position. You can also specify the
binding margin ( Gutter(P. 354) ).
Printing a Document
118
[Long Edge] Binds the printouts on the long edge.
[Short Edge] Binds the printouts on the short edge.
[Show Warnings]
You can specify how the machine should behave if an error occurs.
[Print] Error information is printed and no image is printed.
[Panel] No image is printed and an error message is displayed on the operation panel.
[Off] No image is printed and no error is displayed.
[N on 1]
Specify whether or not to print multiple pages onto a single sheet by sequentially allocating them. For
example, to print four pages onto a single sheet, select [4 on 1].
●If [Paper Size] is set to [Auto], this item is unavailable.
[Page Order]
Select a page distribution layout.
[Finishing]
Specify the method to collate the printouts when printing multiple-page documents. This item is displayed
when the SD card is installed.
[Off] The printouts are not collated. The specied number of copies are printed for each
page. For example, if you are printing three copies of a four-page document, the
printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4.
Printing a Document
119
[Collate] The printouts are grouped into complete sets in sequential page order. For example, if
you are printing three copies of a four-page document, the printouts will be arranged
in the following page order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4.
[Comment Print]
Select whether to print comments.
[Auto] Prints comments in the PDF le.
[Off] Prints no comments.
[Store in Box]
You can store a document in the SD card installed on the machine without making printouts. Select the check
box to store the document in a box specied in [Box Number (00-99)]. You can print the documents in the
box from the operation panel as many times as you want. For how to print a document, see Printing a
Document Stored in the Machine(P. 99) . This item is displayed when the SD card is installed.
LINKS
Printing without Opening a File (Direct Print)(P. 107)
Printing a Document
120
Printing Received E-mail (E-Mail Print)
52AC-01U
E-Mail Print allows you to print the message and attached image les of an e-mail received from the POP3 mail server
without using a computer. E-mails can be manually received as well as being automatically received at regular
intervals. When the SMTP protocol is used, e-mails directly sent to the machine via no mail server are printed.
Conguring E-Mail Print Settings(P. 121)
Manually Receiving E-Mails(P. 125)
●When you set <TIFF Spooler> in the Setup menu to <On>, the received data is temporarily stored in the
machine or SD card before printed. This reduces the occurrence of errors. TIFF Spooler(P. 413)
Conguring E-Mail Print Settings
This section describes how to specify the settings for receiving and printing e-mails on this machine. Use a computer
to specify the settings for receiving e-mails and the operation panel of the machine to specify the settings for printing
e-mails.
From a Computer
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [E-Mail Print Settings].
Printing a Document
121
4Click [Edit].
5Specify the settings for E-Mail Print.
When performing E-Mail Print from POP3 mail server
When the e-mail receiving starts, all e-mails stored in the mailbox of the mail server are printed. If you send e-
mails that you want to print to the machine in advance, you can automatically print the e-mails at regular time
intervals or print all stored e-mails in an arbitrary timing.
●We recommend using the mail address exclusively for E-Mail Print because all e-mails received into the
machine are deleted from the mail server.
Conditions of use for POP3 protocol
●The POP3 mail server must support the UIDL command. For details, contact your network administrator or
server administrator.
Printing a Document
122
[POP3 Server Name]
Enter the mail server name or IP address for receiving e-mails.
[POP3 User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name used to connect to the mail server.
[Set/Change Password]
To set the password for connecting to the mail server, select the check box and enter alphanumeric
characters for the password in the [Password] text box. For conrmation, enter the same password in the
[Conrm] text box.
[POP3 RX Interval]
Specify the interval for automatically connecting to the mail server in minutes. New e-mails in the mailbox of
the mail server are automatically received and printed at the specied time intervals. You can also specify this
setting by using <POP3 RX Interval> in the setting menu of the operation panel ( POP3 RX
Interval(P. 349) ).
Preventing E-mails from Being Automatically Received
●Set [POP3 RX Interval] to [0]. If you set [0], you must manually receive e-mails. Manually Receiving E-
Mails(P. 125)
[POP3 RX]
Select the check box to enable E-Mail Print from the POP3 mail server. You can also specify this setting by
using <POP3 RX> in the setting menu of the operation panel ( POP3 RX(P. 350) ).
[POP3 Server Port Number]
Specify the port number of the mail server that receives e-mails.
When performing E-Mail Print by using SMTP protocol
If e-mails are sent to the machine via SMTP, the machine prints the e-mails immediately after receiving them.
Enable this function when you want to forward fax documents from Canon multifunction printers to this
machine and print them on the machine ( To forward fax documents from Canon multifunction
printers(P. 125) ).
[SMTP RX]
Select the check box to enable E-Mail Print by using the SMTP protocol. You can also specify this setting by
using <SMTP RX> in the setting menu of the operation panel ( SMTP RX(P. 350) ).
Printing a Document
123
[SMTP Server Port Number]
Specify the port number of the SMTP server for receiving e-mails.
6Click [OK].
7Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
From the Operation Panel
8Specify other settings for E-Mail Print as necessary.
Specify whether or not to print the e-mail message.
Print E-Mail Text(P. 414)
You can limit the number of pages to print the e-mail message.
Limit E-Mail Print(P. 414)
You can specify the settings for printing attached image les.
Image Orientation(P. 411)
Zoom(P. 412)
Print Position(P. 412)
TIFF Spooler(P. 413)
Show Warnings(P. 414)
Printing a Document
124
Enlarge Print Area(P. 415)
RGB Source Prole(P. 415)
CMYK Sim. Prole(P. 416)
Output Prole(P. 416)
Matching Method(P. 417)
Halftones(P. 417)
Photo Corr (CL Only)(P. 418)
Grayscale Conversion(P. 420)
Specify whether or not to display an E-Mail Print error.
Show Warnings(P. 316)
Manually Receiving E-Mails
If e-mail printing from the POP3 mail server is enabled, you can manually receive and print e-mails as well. When you
want to connect to the mail server before automatically receiving e-mails or the machine is congured to prevent e-
mails from being automatically received, follow the procedure below to manually receive the e-mails.
1Press ( ).
●When the machine is oine, it does not operate even if ( ) is pressed. Set the machine to Online.
Online key(P. 27)
2Use / to select <E-Mail Print Utility>, and press .
3Select <Received E-Mail>, and press .
4Select <Yes>, and press .
➠The machine is connected to the mail server. E-Mail Print is started for new e-mails in the mailbox of the
mail server if any.
To forward fax documents from Canon multifunction printers
Enable SMTP RX on this machine, and then specify the IP address of the machine as the Internet Fax (I Fax)
Address on the source multifunction printer. Forwarded fax documents are printed immediately when received.
Printing a Document
125
●Attached les can only be printed if they are in TIFF format. Only one TIFF le can be printed for each fax
document.
●When the toner cartridge is nearly empty, no fax documents can be received. The fax documents that could
not be received on this machine are printed on the source multifunction printer.
●When the optional SD card is installed on the machine, the maximum size of a printable TIFF le is limited to
100 MB.
LINKS
Checking History of Documents(P. 296)
E-Mail RX Log List(P. 519)
Printing a Document
126
Can Be Used Conveniently with a
Mobile Device
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device ........................................................................ 128
Connecting to a Mobile Device ......................................................................................................................... 129
Utilizing the Machine through Applications .................................................................................................... 130
Using AirPrint ............................................................................................................................................... 131
Printing with AirPrint ............................................................................................................................. 135
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ..................................................................................................................... 138
Using Google Cloud Print ............................................................................................................................. 139
Managing the Machine Remotely .................................................................................................................... 143
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
127
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
52AC-01W
Combining the machine with a mobile device such as a smartphone or tablet enables you to use an appropriate
application to perform printing with ease. You can also use a mobile device to operate the machine remotely, check
the printing status, and change machine's settings.
Connecting to a Mobile Device(P. 129)
Utilizing the Machine through Applications(P. 130)
Managing the Machine Remotely(P. 143)
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
128
Connecting to a Mobile Device
52AC-01X
Connect a mobile device and the machine via a wireless LAN router. For how to set and operate your wireless LAN
router and mobile devices, see the instruction manuals for the devices or contact your manufacturers.
●The machine does not come with a wireless LAN router. Have one ready as necessary.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
129
Utilizing the Machine through Applications
52AC-01Y
Perform printing and other operations from the mobile device connected to the machine using applications. Various
applications including those exclusive to Canon are supported. Use properly in accordance with your device, the
application, and the situation.
◼Using Canon PRINT Business
This application is used to perform printing and other operations from mobile devices that support iOS/Android. When
printing, it is not necessary to perform operations on the machine. For more information on supported operating
systems, detailed setting methods, and operations, see the application's Help or the Canon website (https://
global.canon/gomp/).
●You can download Canon PRINT Business for free, but you will be charged the Internet connection fee.
◼Printing with Canon Print Service
You can easily print from the menu of applications that support the Android print subsystem. For more information on
supported operating systems and detailed settings and procedures, see the Canon website (https://global.canon).
◼Printing by Mopria®
The machine also supports Mopria®. Using Mopria® enables you to print from mobile devices that support Android
using common operations and settings, even if manufacturers and models differ. For example, if you are using
printers supporting Mopria® made by multiple manufacturers or a printer supporting Mopria® that is located in a
place you are visiting, you can print without installing an application exclusive for each manufacturer or model. For
more information on supporting models or operation environments, see http://www.mopria.org.
Conrming Mopria® Settings
Log on to the Remote UI in Management Mode ( Starting Remote UI(P. 286) ) [Settings/
Registration] [Network] [Mopria Settings] [Edit] Check that the [Use Mopria] check box is
selected [OK]
◼Printing with Google Cloud Print
You can use applications and services which support Google Cloud Print to print from a computer or mobile device
without using a printer driver. Using Google Cloud Print(P. 139)
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
130
Using AirPrint
52AC-020
You can print without using printer driver by sending print data from Apple devices.
AirPrint settings
Conguring AirPrint Settings(P. 131)
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 133)
Functions of the AirPrint
Printing with AirPrint(P. 135)
Troubleshooting
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used(P. 138)
Conguring AirPrint Settings
You can register information, including the name of the machine and installation location, that is used for identifying
the machine. You can also disable the AirPrint function of the machine. Use the Remote UI to change these settings.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
●If you are using a mobile device, such as iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch, read "click" as "tap" in this section.
3Click [Network] [AirPrint Settings].
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
131
4Click [Edit].
5Specify the required settings, and click [OK].
[Use AirPrint]
Select the check box to enable AirPrint. To disable AirPrint, clear the check box.
[Printer Name]/[Location]/[Latitude]/[Longitude]
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
132
Enter the name and the installation location information to help you identify this machine when operating
your Apple device. This information is useful if you have more than one AirPrint printer.
If you select the [Use AirPrint] check box
The following items are also set to <On> automatically.
●<mDNS Settings> in IPv4 and IPv6 Conguring DNS(P. 181)
●<HTTP> Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 246)
●<IPP Print> Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 160)
If you change [Printer Name]
●If you change [Printer Name] that you have once specied, you may be unable to print any more from the
Mac that has been able to be used for printing so far. This phenomenon occurs because <mDNS Name>
( Conguring DNS(P. 181) ) of IPv4 is also changed automatically. In this case, add the machine to the
Mac again.
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable AirPrint from the setting menu of the operation panel.
( ) <Network> Check the message <AirPrint> <Off> or
<On>
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint
You can display the screen for AirPrint, on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view
information about consumables, such as paper and toner cartridge. Further, you can congure security function
settings ( Using TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 252) ).
1Click [System Preferences] in the Dock on the desktop [Printers & Scanners].
2Select your printer and click [Options & Supplies].
3Click [Show Printer Webpage].
4Log on to the Remote UI.
●To change AirPrint settings, log on in Management Mode.
➠The page dedicated for AirPrint is displayed.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
133
Trademarks
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
134
Printing with AirPrint
52AC-021
You do not necessarily need to use a computer for printing e-mails, photos, Web pages, and other documents. AirPrint
enables you to print directly from Apple devices such as iPad, iPhone, and iPod touch.
Printing from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch(P. 135)
Printing from Mac(P. 136)
System Requirements
To print with AirPrint, you need one of the following Apple devices.
●iPad (all models)
●iPhone (3GS or later)
●iPod touch (3rd generation or later)
●Mac (Mac OS X 10.7 or later)*
* OS X 10.9 or later when you use USB connection.
Network Environment
You need one of the following environments.
●The Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN.
●The Mac and the machine are connected via USB.
When using USB connection
●Set <USB-Connected PC OS> to <Mac OS>. USB-Connected PC OS(P. 325)
Printing from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and that it is connected to your Apple
device.
●For how to make sure of this, see "Getting Started." Manuals and Their Contents(P. 580)
2From the application on your Apple device, tap to display the menu options.
3From the drop-down list, tap [Print].
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
135
4Select this machine from [Printer] in [Printer Options].
●The printers connected to the network are displayed. Select this machine in this step.
●[Printer Options] is not displayed on applications that do not support AirPrint. You cannot print by using
those applications.
5Specify the print settings as necessary.
●The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.
6Tap [Print].
➠Printing starts.
Checking the print status
●During printing, press the Home button of the Apple device twice tap [Print].
Printing from Mac
1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and that it is connected to your Mac.
●For how to make sure of this, see "Getting Started." Manuals and Their Contents(P. 580)
2Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
3Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual for the application you are using.
4Select this machine in the print dialog box.
●The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select this machine in this step.
5Specify the print settings as necessary.
●The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
136
6Click [Print].
➠Printing starts.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
137
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used
52AC-022
If AirPrint cannot be used, try taking the following solutions.
●Make sure that the machine is turned ON. If the machine is turned ON, rst turn it OFF, then wait for at least 10
seconds and then turn it back ON to check if the problem is solved.
●Make sure that no error messages are displayed on the machine.
●Make sure that Apple devices and the machine are connected to the same LAN. If the machine is turned ON, it may
take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication.
●Make sure that Bonjour on your Apple device is enabled.
●Make sure that the machine is congured to enable printing from a computer even when no department ID and
password are entered. Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 220)
●Make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and the machine has sucient toner cartridge remaining.
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 133)
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
138
Using Google Cloud Print
52AC-023
Google Cloud Print is a service that enables a user with a Google account to print from a smartphone, tablet, or
computer connected to the Internet using applications compatible with Google Cloud Print. Unlike conventional
printing from a computer, it does not require a printer driver.
Checking the Machine Settings(P. 139)
Changing Google Cloud Print Settings(P. 139)
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 140)
●When registering the machine or when using Google Cloud Print to print documents, you must be able to
connect the machine to the Internet. You are also responsible for paying all Internet connection fees.
●You may not be able to use this function in some countries or regions.
●Google Cloud Print does not support printing from IPv6 addresses.
●To use Google Cloud Print, a Google account is required. If you do not have one, access Google Web site to
create your account.
Checking the Machine Settings
Before setting up Google Cloud Print, check the following:
●Make sure that the machine is assigned an IPv4 address and connected to a computer over a network.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 148)
●Make sure that the date and time settings are correct. Date/Time Settings(P. 322)
●If the Department ID Management is enabled, make sure that the machine is congured to enable printing from a
computer even when no Department ID and PIN are entered. Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is
Unknown(P. 220)
Changing Google Cloud Print Settings
Enable the Google Cloud Print function of the machine. You can also disable the Google Cloud Print function of the
machine.
1Press ( ).
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
139
2Use / to select <Network>, and press .
●When a message appears, press .
3Select <Google Cloud Print>, and press .
4Select <Use Cloud Print>, and press .
5Select <Off> or <On>, and press .
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print
Registering the machine with Google Cloud Print allows you to print from anywhere.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [Google Cloud Print Settings].
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
140
4Click [Register] in [Registration Status].
If [Register] is unavailable
●You need to enable Google Cloud Print. Click [Edit], select the [Use Google Cloud Print] check box, and
then click [OK].
To reregister the machine
●To reregister the machine if the owner of the machine has changed or for other reasons, unregister the
machine and register it again.
5Click the link of the URL displayed for [URL for Registration].
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
141
6Follow the on-screen instructions to register the machine.
➠Printing can now be performed from applications that support Google Cloud Print, such as Google
Chrome™.
●Access the Google Cloud Print Web site for information about the latest applications that support Google
Cloud Print.
Registering from a mobile device or Google Chrome
You can also register the machine from a mobile device or Google Chrome. The machine's display shows the
following conrmation screen before completion of the registration. Perform <Yes> to complete
the registration.
●To perform the registration, the main screen need to be displayed. Press ( ) to display the
main screen and then proceed to the registration.
●For the registration procedure, see the instruction manual for your mobile device or the Google Cloud Print
Web site.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
142
Managing the Machine Remotely
52AC-024
You can use the Remote UI from a Web browser installed on your mobile device. This allows you to check the
machine's status and specify machine's settings from your mobile device. Note that the Remote UI screen may not be
displayed properly for some devices and environments.
Starting Remote UI with a Mobile Device
Enter the IP address of the machine into the Web browser and start the Remote UI. Check the IP address set to the
machine in advance ( Network Status Print(P. 517) ). If you have any questions, ask your Network Administrator.
1Start the Web browser on your mobile device.
2Enter "http://(the IP address of the machine)/" in the address eld.
●If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://
[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).
LINKS
Using Remote UI(P. 285)
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
143
Network
Network .............................................................................................................................................................. 145
Connecting to a Network .................................................................................................................................. 146
Connecting to a Wired LAN ........................................................................................................................... 148
Setting IP Addresses ..................................................................................................................................... 150
Setting IPv4 Address .............................................................................................................................. 151
Setting IPv6 Addresses .......................................................................................................................... 155
Conguring the Machine for Printing from a Computer ................................................................................ 159
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ...................................................................................... 160
Enabling IPP/IPPS .................................................................................................................................. 166
Setting Up Print Server ................................................................................................................................. 173
Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ............................................................................. 177
Conguring Ethernet Settings ...................................................................................................................... 178
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network ......................................................................................... 180
Conguring DNS .......................................................................................................................................... 181
Conguring WINS ......................................................................................................................................... 187
Conguring SNTP ......................................................................................................................................... 190
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP .................................................................................... 193
Conguring Settings for Device Management Software ............................................................................... 198
Conguring SMB .......................................................................................................................................... 201
Conguring Settings on the Computer for Printing ............................................................................... 204
Network
144
Network
52AC-025
The machine has been designed for exibility of use across a variety of environments, and it includes advanced
technologies in addition to basic network features. Do not worry if you are not a network expert, because the machine
has also been designed for convenience and ease of use. Relax and proceed with the network setup one step at a time.
◼Connecting to a Computer/Viewing the Machine's Network Settings
Connecting to a Network(P. 146)
◼Conguring for Printing
Conguring the Machine for Printing from a Computer(P. 159)
◼Customizing the Machine for More Convenient Network Experience
Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment(P. 177)
Network
145
Connecting to a Network
52AC-026
The machine can be connected to a network via wired LAN, requiring a unique network IP address. For specic IP
address settings, contact your Internet service provider or network administrator.
●If the machine is connected to an unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third
party.
●The machine does not come with a LAN cable or router. Have them ready as necessary.
◼Before You Start
Follow these steps to connect the machine to a network.
Check your computer settings.
●Make sure that the computer is correctly connected to the network. For more
information, see the instruction manuals for the devices you are using, or contact the
device manufacturers.
●Make sure that the network settings have been completed on the computer. If the
network has not been set up properly, you will not be able to use the machine on the
network, even if you perform the rest of the procedure below.
●Depending on the network, you may need to change settings for the
communication method (half-duplex/full-duplex) or the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T) ( Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 178) ). For more
information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
●To check the MAC address of the machine.
MAC Address(P. 349)
●To connect to an IEEE 802.1X network, see Conguring IEEE 802.1X
Authentication(P. 266) .
Network
146
Connect to a wired LAN.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 148)
Set the IP address.
●At the time of purchase, the Auto IP function is activated to automatically acquire an IP
address. However, this function may not be used depending on the network
environment. In that case, set an IP address manually or congure to automatically
acquire an IP address via the DHCP or other protocol.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 150)
Network
147
Connecting to a Wired LAN
52AC-027
Connect the machine to a computer via a router. Use a LAN cable to connect the machine to the router.
1Connect a LAN cable.
●Connect the machine to a router by using a LAN cable.
●Push the connector in until it clicks into place.
2Check that the LNK indicator ( ) is lit.
●When the LNK indicator does not light up, some problem with the wired LAN connection may have
occurred. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.
3Set the IP address. Setting IP Addresses(P. 150)
●At the time of purchase, the Auto IP function is activated to automatically acquire an IP address. However,
this function may not be used depending on the network environment. In that case, set an IP address
manually or congure to automatically acquire an IP address via the DHCP or other protocol.
Network
148
Setting IP Addresses
52AC-028
Connecting the machine to a network requires a unique network IP address. Two versions of IP addresses are
available: IPv4 and IPv6. Congure these settings depending on the network environment. To use IPv6 addresses, you
need to properly congure the IPv4 address settings.
Network
150
Setting IPv4 Address
52AC-029
1660-00W
The machine's IPv4 address can be either assigned automatically by a dynamic IP
addressing protocol, such as DHCP, or entered manually. When connecting the
machine to a wired LAN, make sure that the connectors of the LAN cable are rmly
inserted into the ports ( Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 148) ).
Setting IPv4 Address
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Network>, and press .
●When a message appears, press .
3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <IP Mode>.
4Congure IP address settings.
<Auto>
Select to automatically assign an IP address via a protocol such as DHCP.
<Manual>
Select to congure the IP address settings by manually entering an IP address.
Automatically assigning an IP address
1Select <Auto>, and press .
2Select <Protocol>, and press .
Network
151
3Select <Use DHCP>, <Use BOOTP>, or <Use RARP>, and press .
●You can use only one of the protocols DHCP, BOOTP, and RARP. If the selected protocol is set to <On>,
the other two protocols are automatically set to <Off>.
4Select <On>, and press .
5Press .
6Select <Auto IP>, and press .
7Select <On>, and press .
When using DHCP
If you turn OFF the power and ON again, an IP address differing from the current one will be assigned. This
may disable printing. To use DHCP, specify one of the following settings after consulting the network
administrator.
●Conguring the DNS Dynamic Update Function Conguring DNS(P. 181)
●Specifying Settings for the DHCP Server to Constantly Assign the Same IP Address
If you do not want to use DHCP/BOOTP/RARP to assign an IP address
●Set all the protocols to <Off>. If you set <Use DHCP>, <Use BOOTP>, or <Use RARP> to <On> when the
DHCP/BOOTP/RARP servers are unavailable, the machine will waste time and communication resources in
searching the network for available services.
IP addresses that are given precedence
●IP addresses assigned via DHCP/BOOTP/RARP override the address obtained via Auto IP.
Manually entering an IP address
1Select <Manual>, and press .
2Select <IP Address Settings>, and press .
Network
152
3Specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address (or default gateway).
●Select the item to set, press , enter an address, and press .
How to enter addresses
●Use / to move to the target eld (a period-delimited input area), and use the numeric keys to
increase/decrease the value.
When you are unsure of the IP address to input
●The IP address can be determined from the router settings of the network. Determining the IP
Address to Assign to the Machine(P. 153)
5Perform a hard reset. Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466)
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Checking whether the settings are correct
●Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
If you have changed the IP address after installing the printer driver
●You need to specify the port to use again. For the port changing procedure, see the manuals for the relevant
drivers on the online manual website.
Determining the IP Address to Assign to the Machine
When you want to use a xed IP address for the machine, you can determine the IP address as shown below.
◼To Determine the IP Address
An IP address consists of four numbers delimited by a period (.) (example: 192.168.1.45). Each number must be
in the range from 0 to 255. In general, set the rst three numbers to be the same as those for the router
because they are common in the network. Determine the last number (for example, 45 in 192.168.1.45) that is
different from that for other devices.
Network
153
◼Checking the Router Settings
When you want to use a xed IP address, check the settings of the DHCP that functions to automatically assign
an IP address in a network. To avoid duplication of the IP address, you need to set an IP address outside the
range of IP addresses assigned by DHCP. Since a router often functions as a DHCP server, check the router
settings.
●For how to display the setting screen of the router, see the instruction manual of your router.
1Display the setting screen of the router.
2Check the range of IP addresses assigned by DHCP.
●The range of IP addresses assigned by DHCP is set according to your router.
Example DHCP setting screen of the router:
3Determine the IP address of the machine.
●In the example screen shown in step 2, assign an IP address in the range of 192.168.11.66 to 192.168.11.254
to the machine because an IP address that the router assigns by DHCP is in the range of 192.168.11.2 to
192.168.11.65.
LINKS
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 155)
Network Status Print(P. 517)
Conguring WINS(P. 187)
Network
154
Setting IPv6 Addresses
52AC-02A
The IPv6 addresses of the machine can be congured via the Remote UI. Before
setting IPv6 addresses, check the IPv4 address settings ( Setting IPv4
Address(P. 151) ). You need to set the correct IPv4 settings to use IPv6 addresses.
The machine can use the following multiple IPv6 addresses:
Type Description
Link-local address An address that is only valid within a subnet or link and cannot be used to communicate with
devices beyond a router. A link-local address is automatically set when the IPv6 function of the
machine is enabled.
Manual address An address that is entered manually. When using this address, specify the prex length and default
router address.
Stateless address An address that is generated automatically using the MAC address of the machine and the network
prex that is advertised by the router. Stateless addresses are discarded when the machine is
restarted (or turned ON).
Stateful address An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [TCP/IP Settings].
Network
155
4Click [Edit] in [IPv6 Settings].
5Select the [Use IPv6] check box and congure the required settings.
Network
156
[Use IPv6]
Select the check box to enable IPv6 on the machine. When not using IPv6, clear the check box.
[Use Stateless Address]
Select the check box when using a stateless address. When not using a stateless address, clear the check box.
[Use Manual Address]
When you want to manually enter an IPv6 address, select the check box and enter the IP address, prex
length, and default router address in the corresponding text boxes.
[IP Address]
Enter an IPv6 address. You cannot enter an address that starts with "ff" (or multicast address), the address of
"0000::0000" (all zeros), or an address that starts with "0:0:0:0:0:ffff" or "0:0:0:0:0:0."
[Prex Length]
Enter a number that indicates how many bits are available for the network address.
[Default Router Address]
Specify the IPv6 address of the default router as necessary. You cannot enter an address that starts with "ff"
(or multicast address), the address of "0000::0000" (all zeros), or an address that starts with "0:0:0:0:0:ffff" or
"0:0:0:0:0:0."
[Use DHCPv6]
Select the check box when using a stateful address. When not using DHCPv6, clear the check box.
6Click [OK].
7Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
Network
157
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Checking whether the settings are correct
●Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer by using the IPv6 address of the
machine. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
Selecting settings from the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable IPv6 addresses from the setting menu of the operation panel. IPv6
Settings(P. 334)
If you changed the IP address after installing the printer driver
●You need to specify the port to use again. For the port changing procedure, see the manuals for the relevant
drivers on the online manual website.
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 151)
Network Status Print(P. 517)
Network
158
Conguring the Machine for Printing from a Computer
52AC-02C
When using the machine as a network printer, you can congure the protocols and ports used for printing and create
a print server for the machine. Before conguring the machine for printing from a computer, perform the basic setup
procedures, including the printer driver installation. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on
the online manual website.
●Printing protocols are rules for delivering document data created on a computer to the machine, and can be
selected according to the printing purpose or the network environment.
●Ports are gateways for passing document data from a computer to the printer. Incorrect port settings are
often the cause when documents cannot be printed from a network computer.
Network
159
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions
52AC-02E
Congure the protocols that are used for printing documents from a networked computer. For the print protocols
supported by the machine, see Network Environment(P. 563) . This section describes the settings of LPD, RAW,
IPP/IPPS, and WSD.
To use FTP
●On how to congure settings, see the item below.
Using FTP Clients(P. 588)
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Congure printing protocols.
Network
160
Conguring LPD settings
1Click [Edit] in [LPD Settings].
2Congure the settings as necessary.
[Use LPD Printing]
When using LPD for printing, select the check box. When not using, clear the check box.
[Print LPD Banner Page]
Select the check box to include the information such as user names and le names on printouts. When
not printing the information, clear the check box.
[RX Timeout]
Set the time period after which the print job automatically ends when print data cannot be received due
to a communication error or some other problem.
3Click [OK].
Conguring RAW settings
1Click [Edit] in [RAW Settings].
Network
161
2Congure the settings as necessary.
[Use RAW Printing]
When using RAW for printing, select the check box. When not using, clear the check box.
[Use Bidirectional Communication]
When using bidirectional communication to notify the computer of machine status and print completion,
select the check box. When not using, clear the check box.
[RX Timeout]
Set the time period after which the print job automatically ends when print data cannot be received due
to a communication error or some other problem.
3Click [OK].
Conguring IPP/IPPS settings
1Click [Edit] in [IPP Print Settings].
2Congure the settings as necessary.
Network
162
[Use IPP Printing]
When using IPP/IPPS for printing, select the check box. When not using, clear the check box.
[Use TLS]
When using IPPS (IPP Print with TLS encrypted communication), select the check box. When not using,
clear the check box.
When using IPPS, enable the TLS encrypted communication function. Using TLS for Encrypted
Communications(P. 252)
If you select [RSA] for [Key Algorithm] when generating the key to use for network communication, set a
key length of [1024 bit] or longer. IPPS printing may not be able to be performed correctly if a key length
of [512 bit] is set, depending on the operating system you are using.
[Use IPP Authentication]
When using the user authentication function for IPP Print, select the check box and set the user name
and password. When not using, clear the check box.
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name used in IPP authentication.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the password
in the [Password] text box. For conrmation, enter the same password in the [Conrm] text box.
3Click [OK].
Conguring WSD settings
1Click [Edit] in [WSD Print Settings].
Network
163
2Congure the settings as necessary.
[Use WSD Printing]
When using WSD for printing, select the check box. When not using, clear the check box.
[Use WSD Browsing]
Select the check box to obtain information about the machine from a computer via WSD. This check box is
automatically selected when the [Use WSD Printing] check box is selected.
[Use Multicast Discovery]
Select the check box to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages. If the check box is
cleared, the machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast discovery messages are owing on the
network.
3Click [OK].
5Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Network
164
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable LPD print, RAW print, and IPP print from the setting menu of the operation
panel.
LPD Settings(P. 336)
RAW Settings(P. 336)
IPP Print(P. 337)
●WSD settings can also be accessed from the setting menu of the operation panel. WSD(P. 337)
Setup procedures on your computer
After the setting in the machine is completed, you may need to congure settings or install applications on your
computer as well. Congure settings in your computer as necessary.
●Conguring printer ports
Printing errors can occur when the IP address of the machine has been changed, or when a printer has been
added via the Windows printer folder. These errors are typically caused by incorrect printer port settings. For
example, an incorrect port number or port type may have been specied in the computer. In this case, you
need to congure printer ports. For the port changing procedure, see the manuals for the relevant drivers
on the online manual website.
●Setting up WSD network devices on Windows Vista/7/8/10
Use the WSD port to install the printer driver. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers
on the online manual website.
●Enabling IPP/IPPS
Install the printer drivers by specifying the IPP port. Enabling IPP/IPPS(P. 166)
LINKS
Setting Up Print Server(P. 173)
Network
165
Enabling IPP/IPPS
52AC-02F
To set the printing protocol to IPP or IPPS, install the printer driver by using the procedure shown below that suits the
operating system of your computer. The printer driver is included on the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM that comes
with the machine. Insert the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer before starting the
procedure.
●To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
●Congure the IPP print settings by using the Remote UI before staring the procedure.
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 160)
●Close the setup screen that is displayed when the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM is inserted.
1Open the Printer Folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 602)
2Click [Add a printer].
3If you are using Windows Vista/7/Server 2008, click [Add a network, wireless or
Bluetooth printer].
4Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
Network
166
5Select [Select a shared printer by name], enter a connection destination, and click
[Next].
●To use IPP, enter "http://<IP address of the machine>/ipp" for the connection destination.
Example: http://192.168.1.81/ipp
●To use IPPS, enter "https://<IP address of the machine>/ipp" for the connection destination.
Example: https://192.168.1.81/ipp
●When you are using a DNS server, enter "<host name of the machine>.<domain name>" instead of "IP
address of the machine" (example: https://my_printer.example.com/ipp).
6Click [Have Disk].
7Click [Browse].
Network
167
8Specify the folder where the printer drivers are contained, select the INF le, and
then click [Open].
●Specify the folder as shown below according to the operating system of your computer. If you are not sure
whether the operating system of your computer is a 32-bit or 64-bit version, see Checking the Bit
Architecture(P. 605) .
32-bit operating systems
Select [UFR II]-your language-[32BIT]-[Driver] folder on the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
64-bit operating systems
Select [UFR II]-your language-[x64]-[Driver] folder on the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
If using the IPP authentication function
●When you are prompted to enter the password, enter the user name and password, and click [OK].
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 160)
9Proceed with the setting procedure by following the on-screen instructions.
➠The printer driver is installed. To use IPPS, install public keys of the machine in the computer.
◼Installing Public Keys of the Machine
Using IPPS additionally requires installing the public keys of the machine on the computer.
●The [Common Name] of key pairs must be set in advance to be the "IP address" or "<host name>.<domain
name>" used when connecting to the machine. Generating Key Pairs(P. 272)
1Start the Web browser.
Network
168
2Enter "https://<IP address of the machine>/" in the address eld, and press the
[ENTER] key.
●Example: https://192.168.1.81/
●When you are using a DNS server, enter "<host name of the machine>.<domain name>" instead of "IP
address of the machine" (example: https://my_printer.example.com/).
3Click [Continue to this website (not recommended).].
➠Login Page is displayed.
4Click [Tools] [Internet options].
5Select [Trusted Sites] in the [Security] tab, and click [Sites].
Network
169
6Make sure that "https://<IP address of the machine> or <host name of the
machine>.<domain name>/" is displayed, and click [Add] [Close].
7Clear the [Enable Protected Mode (requires restarting Internet Explorer)] check box
when it is selected.
8Click [OK].
➠The screen returns to the Remote UI screen.
9Exit the Web browser.
10 Repeat steps 1 to 3 to start the Remote UI.
11 Click [Certicate error] [View certicates] in the right of the address eld.
Network
170
12 Click [Install Certicate].
13 Click [Next].
14 Select [Place all certicates in the following store] and click [Browse].
15 Select [Trusted Root Certication Authorities], and follow the on-screen instructions
to complete the certicate import wizard.
16 If you have cleared the [Enable Protected Mode (requires restarting Internet
Explorer)] check box in step 7, select the check box.
Network
171
Setting Up Print Server
52AC-02H
With a print server, you can reduce the load on the computer that you print from. The print server also enables each
computer to install printer drivers over the network, which saves you the trouble of installing printer drivers on each
computer by using the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM. To set up a computer on the network as a print server, congure the
settings for sharing the printer.
●To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
●You may be unable to install printer drivers over the network depending on the operating system and the bit
architecture (32-bit or 64-bit) of the print server and client computers.
●When implementing a print server in a domain environment, consult your Network Administrator.
To carry out Department ID Management when using a print server
●Canon Driver Information Assist Service must be added during the printer driver installation. For more
information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 602)
2Right-click your printer icon and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
3Click the [Sharing] tab, select [Share this printer], and enter the share name of the
machine.
Network
173
When [Change Sharing Options] is displayed
●Click [Change Sharing Options].
4Install additional drivers as necessary.
●This operation is required if you want to install printer drivers in other computers running a different bit
architecture via the print server.
1Click [Additional Drivers].
2Select the check box for the bit architecture that other computers are running, and click [OK].
●Select additional drivers from the following, according to the operating system of the print server.
Print server Select the check box for
32-bit operating systems [x64]
64-bit operating systems [x86] under [Processor]
Network
174
●If you do not know whether your Windows operating system is a 32-bit or 64-bit version, see
Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 605) .
3Insert the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer, and click [Browse].
4Specify the folder that contains additional drivers, select the INF le, and then click [Open].
●Select the folder as shown below according to the operating system of the print server.
If the print server runs a 32-bit operating system
Select [UFR II]-your language-[x64]-[Driver] folder on the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
If the print server runs a 64-bit operating system
Select [UFR II]-your language-[32BIT]-[Driver] folder on the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
5Click [OK].
➠Installation of the additional drivers starts. Wait until the [Sharing] tab is displayed back.
When [User Account Control] is displayed
●Click [Yes].
5Click [OK].
◼Installing Printer Drivers on a Computer via the Print Server
1Locate the shared printer in the print server. Displaying Shared Printers in the
Print Server(P. 603)
2Double-click the shared printer.
3Follow the on-screen instructions to install the printer drivers.
Network
175
Conguring the Machine for Your Network
Environment
52AC-02J
The conguration of a network varies depending on the purpose of the network. The machine has been designed to
be compatible with as many network congurations as possible, and it is equipped with a variety of technologies.
Consult your Network Administrator and set a conguration to suit your network environment.
Network
177
Conguring Ethernet Settings
52AC-02K
Ethernet is a standard for communicating data in a local area network (LAN). You can set
the communication mode and the Ethernet type. In general, the machine can be used
without changing the defaults ( Ethernet Driver(P. 347) ), but you can change these
settings to suit your network environment.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Network>, and press .
●When a message appears, press .
3Select <Ethernet Driver> <Auto Detect>.
4Select whether to congure Ethernet settings automatically or manually.
Conguring Ethernet settings automatically
Select <On> and press . The machine detects and automatically sets the communication mode and the
Ethernet type that can be used.
Conguring Ethernet settings manually
1Select <Off>, and press .
2Select the communication mode.
●Select <Communication Mode> Select <Half Duplex> or <Full Duplex>
<Half Duplex>
Alternately sends and receives communication data. Select when the machine is connected to a
networking device using half duplex.
<Full Duplex>
Simultaneously sends and receives communication data. Use this setting for most environments.
Network
178
3Select the Ethernet type.
●Select <Ethernet Type> Select the Ethernet type
●When you select <1000 Base-T>, the setting for <Communication Mode> is changed to <Full Duplex>.
5Perform a hard reset. Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466)
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
LINKS
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 180)
Network
179
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network
52AC-02L
When a network is designed to enjoy redundant connectivity with multiple switching hubs or bridges, it must have a
mechanism to prevent packets from looping. One effective solution is to dene the role of each switch port. However,
communication may still be disrupted for several tens of seconds immediately after you change the way that network
devices are connected, or if you add a new device. If this type of problem occurs, set a wait time for connecting to the
network.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Network>, and press .
●When a message appears, press .
3Select <Wait Time at Startup>, and press .
4Enter the wait time in seconds, and press .
●Use the numeric keys to enter the time.
5Perform a hard reset. Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466)
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
LINKS
Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 178)
Network
180
Conguring DNS
52AC-02R
DNS (Domain Name System) provides a service for name resolution that associates a host (or domain) name with an IP
address. Congure the DNS, mDNS or DHCP option settings as necessary. Note that the procedures for conguring
DNS are different for IPv4 and IPv6.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Congure DNS settings.
Conguring IPv4 DNS
1Click [Edit] in [IPv4 Settings].
Network
181
2Congure IPv4 DNS settings.
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server. You can also set the IP address from the operation panel (
IPv4 Settings(P. 331) ).
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. You can also set the IP address from the
operation panel ( IPv4 Settings(P. 331) ).
[Host Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS
server.
[Domain Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as
"example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is
changed.
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP
address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS and enter the mDNS name in the
Network
182
[mDNS Name] text box. This check box can only be selected when the [Use IPv4] check box is
selected.
[DHCP Option Settings]
[Acquire Host Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 12 to obtain the host name from the DHCP server. You can
also specify whether to obtain a host name from the operation panel ( IPv4 Settings(P. 331) ).
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to enable Option 81 to dynamically update the DNS records through the DHCP
server. You can also specify whether to perform DNS dynamic update from the operation panel (
IPv4 Settings(P. 331) ).
[Acquire DNS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 6 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire Domain Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 15 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.
[Acquire WINS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 44 to obtain a WINS server address from the DHCP server.
3Click [OK].
Conguring IPv6 DNS
1Click [Edit] in [IPv6 Settings].
Network
183
[Primary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server. You cannot enter an address that starts with "ff" (or multicast
address), the address of "0000::0000" (all zeros), or an address that starts with "0:0:0:0:0:ffff" or
"0:0:0:0:0:0".
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. You cannot enter an address that starts with
"ff" (or multicast address), the address of "0000::0000" (all zeros), or an address that starts with
"0:0:0:0:0:ffff" or "0:0:0:0:0:0".
[Use IPv4 Host/Domain Names]
Select the check box to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.
[Host Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS
server.
[Domain Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as
"example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is
changed. To specify the type(s) of addresses you want to register to the DNS server, select the
check box for [Register Manual Address], [Register Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless
Address].
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP
address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS. This check box can only be
selected when the [Use IPv6] check box is selected.
[Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]
Select the check box to use the same mDNS name as that set in IPv4. To set a different name, clear
the check box and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.
[DHCP Option Settings]
[Acquire DNS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 23 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire Domain Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 24 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.
3Click [OK].
5Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
Network
185
Conguring WINS
52AC-02S
Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) is a name resolution service that associates a NetBIOS name (a computer or
printer name in an SMB network) with an IP address. To enable WINS, the WINS server must be specied.
●The function is not available in an IPv6 network.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Click [Edit] in [WINS Conguration].
Network
187
5Select the [WINS Resolution] check box, specify the required settings, and click [OK].
[WINS Resolution]
Select the check box to use WINS for name resolution. When not using WINS, clear the check box.
[WINS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of the WINS server.
●If the IP address of the WINS server is obtained from a DHCP server, the obtained IP address overrides the
IP address entered in the [WINS Server Address] text box.
[Scope ID]
When dividing the network into several groups with scope IDs (identiers for groups of devices in the
network), enter the scope ID for your computer. Leave the text box blank if there is no scope ID set for your
computer.
[SMB Server Name]
When registering the machine on the WINS server, specify the server name to be used in the SMB network.
●You cannot use spaces.
●A server name set in [Server Name] under [SMB Settings] is automatically used for [SMB Server Name], if
any. A change to the server name in [SMB Server Name] is also applied to [Server Name] under [SMB
Settings].
[SMB Workgroup Name ]
When registering the machine on the WINS server, specify the name of the workgroup to which the machine
belongs in the SMB network.
Network
188
●You cannot use spaces.
●A workgroup name set in [Workgroup Name] under [SMB Settings] is automatically used for [SMB
Workgroup Name], if any. A change to the workgroup name in [SMB Workgroup Name] is also applied to
[Workgroup Name] under [SMB Settings].
6Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Selecting settings from the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable the WINS settings from the setting menu of the operation panel. WINS
Resolution(P. 335)
LINKS
Conguring SMB(P. 201)
Network
189
Conguring SNTP
52AC-02U
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) enables you to adjust the system clock by using
the time server on the network. When you use SNTP, the system checks the time server
periodically, so that the system clock is always accurate.
●The SNTP of the machine supports both NTP (version 3) and SNTP (versions 3 and 4) servers.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Click [Edit] in [SNTP Settings].
Network
190
5Select the [Use SNTP] check box and specify the required settings.
[Use SNTP]
Select the check box to use SNTP for synchronization. If you do not want to use SNTP, clear the check box.
[NTP Server Name]
Enter the IP address of the NTP or the SNTP server. If DNS is available on the network, you can enter "<host
name>.<domain name>" (or FQDN) using alphanumeric characters instead (example: ntp.example.com).
[Polling Interval]
Specify the interval between one synchronization and the next.
6Click [OK].
7Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
Network
191
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Testing communication with the NTP/SNTP server
●You can view communication status with the registered server by clicking [Settings/Registration]
[Network] [TCP/IP Settings] and then clicking [Check NTP Server Connection] in [SNTP Settings] that
appears. If a proper connection has been established, the result is displayed as shown below. Note that this
operation does not adjust the system clock.
Selecting settings from the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable the SNTP settings from the setting menu of the operation panel.
SNTP(P. 340)
Network
192
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP
52AC-02W
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a
network by using Management Information Base (MIB). The machine supports SNMPv1 and security-enhanced
SNMPv3. You can check the status of the machine from a computer when you print documents or use the Remote UI.
You can enable either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3, or both at the same time. Specify the settings for each version to suit your
network environment and the purpose of use.
SNMPv1
SNMPv1 uses information called "community" to dene the scope of SNMP communication. Because this
information is exposed to the network in plain text, your network will be vulnerable to attacks. If you want to
ensure network security, disable SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3.
SNMPv3
With SNMPv3, you can implement network device management that is protected by robust security features.
Note that TLS must be enabled for the Remote UI before conguring SNMPv3 ( Using TLS for Encrypted
Communications(P. 252) ).
●The machine does not support the trap notication feature of SNMP.
●SNMP management software, when installed on a computer on the network, enables you to congure,
monitor, and control the machine remotely from the computer. For more information, see the instruction
manuals for your management software.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
Network
193
3Click [Network] [SNMP Settings].
4Click [Edit].
5Specify SNMPv1 settings.
●If you do not need to change SNMPv1 settings, proceed to the next step.
Network
194
[Use SNMPv1]
Select the check box to enable SNMPv1. You can specify the rest of SNMPv1 settings only when this check box
is selected.
[Use Community Name 1]/[Use Community Name 2]
Select the check box to specify a community name. If you do not need to specify a community name, clear
the check box.
[Community Name 1]/[Community Name 2]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the community.
[MIB Access Permission]
For each community, select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Dedicated Community]
Dedicated Community is a preset community, intended exclusively for administrators using Canon software,
such as iW Management Console. Select [Off], [Read/Write], or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB
objects.
[Off] Does not use Dedicated Community.
[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects by using Dedicated
Community.
[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects by using Dedicated Community.
6Specify SNMPv3 settings.
●If you do not need to change SNMPv3 settings, proceed to the next step.
Network
195
[Use SNMPv3]
Select the check box to enable SNMPv3. You can specify the rest of SNMPv3 settings only when this check box
is selected.
[Enable User]
Select the check box to enable [User Settings 1] to [User Settings 5]. To disable user settings, clear the
corresponding check box.
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.
[MIB Access Permission]
Select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Security Settings]
Select [Authentication Yes/Encryption Yes], [Authentication Yes/Encryption No], or [Authentication No/
Encryption No] for the desired combination of authentication and encryption settings.
[Authentication Algorithm]
Click the [Authentication Yes/Encryption Yes] or [Authentication Yes/Encryption No] for [Security Settings] for
the algorithm that corresponds to your environment.
[Encryption Algorithm]
Click the [Authentication Yes/Encryption Yes] for [Security Settings] for the algorithm that corresponds to
your environment.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the password in
the [Authentication Password] or [Encryption Password] text box. For conrmation, enter the same password
in the [Conrm] text box. Passwords can be set independently for authentication and encryption algorithms.
[Context Name 1] to [Context Name 5]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the context name.
7Specify Printer Management Information Acquisition Settings.
●With SNMP, the printer management information, such as printing protocols and printer ports, can be
monitored and obtained regularly from a computer on the network.
[Obtain Printer Management Information from Host]
Select the check box to enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP.
To disable monitoring of the printer management information, clear the check box.
[Reject SNMP Packets While in Sleep Mode]
Select the check box to discard SNMP packets received during sleep mode. If you do not want to discard the
packets, clear the check box.
Network
196
●If you select the check box, applications that use the SNMP protocol, such as Canon software imageWARE
Series, may be disabled to access the machine.
8Click [OK].
9Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Disabling SNMPv1
●If SNMPv1 is disabled, some of the functions of the machine become unavailable, such as obtaining machine
information via the printer driver.
Using the operation panel
●SNMP settings can also be accessed from the setting menu of the operation panel. SNMP Settings(P. 344)
Enabling Both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3
●If both versions of SNMP are enabled, it is recommended that MIB access permission in SNMPv1 be set to
[Read Only]. MIB access permission can be set independently in SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 (and for each user in
SNMPv3). Selecting [Read/Write] (full access permission) in SNMPv1 negates the robust security features
that characterize SNMPv3 because most of the machine settings can then be controlled with SNMPv1.
LINKS
Using TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 252)
Network
197
Conguring Settings for Device Management Software
52AC-02X
You can facilitate the collection and management of various information about networked devices by implementing
device management software, such as iW Management Console, into the network. Information such as device settings
and error logs is retrieved and distributed via the server computer. If the machine is connected to such a network, iW
Management Console searches the network for the machine by using protocols such as Service Location Protocol (SLP)
to gather information from the machine, including the power status. SLP settings can be specied via the Remote UI.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Specify SLP settings.
Specifying multicast device discovery
1Click [Edit] in [Multicast Discovery Settings].
Network
198
2Select the [Respond to Discovery] check box and specify the required settings.
[Respond to Discovery]
Select the check box to set the machine to respond to device management software multicast discovery
packets and enable monitoring by device management software. If you do not want to set the machine to
respond, clear the check box.
[Scope Name]
To include the machine into a specic scope, enter characters for the scope name.
3Click [OK].
Notifying a device management software of the power status of the machine
1Click [Edit] in [Sleep Mode Notication Settings].
2Select the [Notify] check box and specify the required settings.
Network
199
[Notify]
Select the check box to notify a device management software of the power status of the machine. When
[Notify] is selected, you can expect the machine to avoid unnecessary communication during sleep mode
and reduce the total power consumption.
[Port Number]
Change the port number for this function according to the network environment.
[Number of Routers to Traverse]
Specify how many routers the notication packets can pass.
[Notication Interval]
Specify how often the machine noties a device management software of its power status.
3Click [OK].
5Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable discovery response from the setting menu of the operation panel.
Discovery Response(P. 341)
●Power status notication settings can also be accessed from the setting menu of the operation panel.
Sleep Notif. Set.(P. 341)
LINKS
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 67)
Network
200
Conguring SMB
52AC-02Y
Server Message Block (SMB) is a protocol for sharing resources, such as les and printers, with more than one device
in a network and used to register the machine as a shared printer on the SMB network.
●SMB supports only NetBIOS over TCP/IP and does not support NetBEUI. Congure the IP address before
conguring the SMB settings. Setting IP Addresses(P. 150)
●SMB is enabled only when the optional SD card is installed in the machine.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [SMB Settings].
4Click [Edit].
Network
201
5Select the [Use SMB Server] check box and specify the required settings.
[Use SMB Server]
If you select the check box, the computer is indicated as an SMB server on the SMB network.
[Server Name]
Specify the server name that is to be displayed on the SMB network. The name must be different from the
names of any other computers and printers on the network.
●You cannot use spaces.
●A server name set in [SMB Server Name] under [WINS Conguration] is automatically used for [Server
Name], if any. A change to the server name in [Server Name] is also applied to [SMB Server Name] under
[WINS Conguration].
[Workgroup Name]
Enter the name of the workgroup to which the machine belongs. If there is no workgroup in your network
environment, create a workgroup on Windows and enter the name of the workgroup.
●You cannot use spaces.
●A workgroup name set in [SMB Workgroup Name] under [WINS Conguration] is automatically used for
[Workgroup Name], if any. A change to the server name in [Workgroup Name] is also applied to [SMB
Workgroup Name] under [WINS Conguration].
[Comments]
Enter comments on the machine as necessary.
Network
202
[Use LM Announce]
Select the check box to notify the LAN Manager of existence of the machine. If you do not need to notify,
clear the check box, reducing a network load.
[Use SMB Printing]
When using SMB printing with the machine, select the check box.
[Printer Name]
Specify the name of the machine.
●You cannot use spaces.
6Click [OK].
7Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
»Continue to Conguring Settings on the Computer for Printing(P. 204) .
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable the SMB server from the setting menu of the operation panel. SMB(P. 343)
●You can also enable or disable SMB print from the setting menu of the operation panel. SMB(P. 343)
LINKS
Conguring WINS(P. 187)
Network
203
Conguring Settings on the Computer for Printing
52AC-030
Congure the connection settings and install the printer driver on the computer so that printing can be performed
with the machine from the computer via SMB network.
Connecting to the SMB Network(P. 204)
Installing the Printer Driver(P. 205)
Connecting to the SMB Network
1Display [Local Area Connection Properties].
2Select the [Client for Microsoft Networks] check box.
3Select the [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] or [Internet Protocol] check box
and click [Properties].
4Click the [General] tab [Advanced].
Network
204
5Click the [WINS] tab, select [Enable NetBIOS over TCP/IP], and then click [OK].
6Click [OK] until all dialog boxes are closed.
●Restart the computer if you are prompted to do so.
Installing the Printer Driver
For more information about the installation procedure, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual
website.
When a port selection screen appears during installation
●Follow the procedure below.
1Click [Add Port].
2Select [Network] and click [OK].
3From the list, select "Workgroup Name," "Server Name," and "Printer Name" that were
specied in the SMB protocol settings in this order. Conguring SMB(P. 201)
Network
205
Security
Security ................................................................................................................................................................ 207
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access ....................................................................................... 208
Preventing Unauthorized Access .................................................................................................................. 209
Setting Access Privileges .............................................................................................................................. 211
Setting the System Manager Password .................................................................................................. 212
Setting the Department ID Management .............................................................................................. 215
Setting a Remote UI PIN ........................................................................................................................ 222
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ............................................................................................. 223
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules ............................................................................................. 224
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules ......................................................................................... 230
Setting a Proxy ............................................................................................................................................. 233
Restricting the Machine's Functions ................................................................................................................ 236
Restricting the Printing Operations .............................................................................................................. 237
Restricting USB Functions ............................................................................................................................. 240
Restricting Operation Panel Functions ......................................................................................................... 243
Disabling HTTP Communication ................................................................................................................... 246
Disabling Remote UI ..................................................................................................................................... 247
Disabling the LAN Port ................................................................................................................................. 248
Hiding the Print Job History .......................................................................................................................... 249
Implementing Robust Security Features ......................................................................................................... 251
Using TLS for Encrypted Communications .................................................................................................... 252
Conguring IPSec Settings ........................................................................................................................... 256
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication ....................................................................................................... 266
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ........................................................................... 271
Generating Key Pairs ............................................................................................................................. 272
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ................................................................................. 279
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ............................................................................................. 282
Security
206
Security
52AC-031
Condential information is handled by information devices everywhere, including computers and printers, and any of
these devices may become a target for malicious third parties at anytime. Attackers may directly gain unauthorized
access to your devices, or indirectly take advantage of negligence or improper use. Either way, you may incur
unanticipated losses when your condential information is leaked. To counter these risks, the machine is equipped
with a variety of security functions. Set the necessary conguration depending on your network environment.
●You can congure the best security system by building an environment that inhibits access to printers on
your in-house network via the Internet and using such environment together with the machine's security
features. Preventing Unauthorized Access(P. 209)
◼Establishing the Basics of Information Security
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access(P. 208)
◼Preparing for Risks from Negligence or Misuse
Restricting the Machine's Functions(P. 236) Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secured Print)
(P. 93)
◼Implementing Robust Security Features
Implementing Robust Security Features(P. 251)
Security
207
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access
52AC-032
Prevent unauthorized third parties from accessing and using the machine. You can implement multiple security
measures, such as managing user access privileges and using rewalls.
Security
208
Preventing Unauthorized Access
52AC-033
This section describes the security measures on how to prevent unauthorized access from the external network. This is
a must-read for all users and administrators before using this machine, other printers, and multifunction machines
connected to the network. In recent years, a printer/multifunction machine connected to the network can offer you a
variety of useful functions, such as printing from a computer, operating from a computer using the remote function,
and sending scanned documents via the Internet. On the other hand, it is essential to take security measures to
reduce the security risk for information leakage, as a printer/multifunction machine has become more exposed to
threats, such as unauthorized access and theft, when it is connected to the network. This section explains necessary
settings you need to specify to prevent unauthorized access before using a printer/multifunction machine connected
to the network.
Security Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access from the External Network
Assigning a Private IP Address(P. 209)
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission(P. 210)
Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication (P. 210)
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine(P. 210)
Assigning a Private IP Address
An IP address is a numerical label assigned to each device participating in a computer network. A "global IP address" is
used for the communication connecting to the Internet, and a "private IP address" is used for the communication
within a local area network, such as a LAN in the company. If a global IP address is assigned, your printer/
multifunction machine is open to the public and can be accessed via the Internet. Thus, the risk of information leakage
due to unauthorized access from external network increases. On the other hand, if a private IP address is assigned,
your printer/multifunction machine is closed to a local area network and can be accessed by only users on your local
area network, such as a LAN in the company.
Global IP Address
Can be accessed from the users within a local area
network
Private IP Address
Can be accessed from the users within a local area network
Basically, assign a private IP address to your printer/multifunction machine. Make sure to conrm the IP address,
assigned to the printer/multifunction machine you are using, is a private IP address or not. A private IP address is
found in one of the following ranges.
Ranges for Private IP addresses
●From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
●From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
●From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
For information on how to conrm the IP address, see Setting IP Addresses(P. 150) .
Security
209
●If a global IP address is assigned to a printer/multifunction machine, you can create a network environment
to reduce the risk of unauthorized access by installing security software, such as a rewall that prevents
access from the external networks. If you want to assign a global IP address to and use a printer/
multifunction machine, contact your network administrator.
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission
A rewall is a system that prevents unauthorized access from the external networks and protects against attacks/
intrusions to a local area network. You can use a rewall on your network environment to block access from the
external network that appears to be dangerous, by restricting communication from specied IP address of the
external network. The function installed to a Canon printer/multifunction machine enables you to set up the IP
address lter. For information on how to set up an IP address lter, see Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall
Rules(P. 224) .
Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication
For information on the TLS Encrypted Communication, see Implementing Robust Security Features(P. 251) , and
on the procedures to specify, see Using TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 252) .
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine
If a malicious third party attempts to gain unauthorized access to a printer/multifunction machine, setting PIN to
information stored in the machine will reduce the risk of information leakage. Canon printer/multifunction machine
enables you to protect various type of information by setting PIN.
Setting PIN to Each Function
●Setting PIN for Using Remote UI
For more information, see Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 222) .
●Setting PIN for the System Manager Settings
For more information, see Setting the System Manager Password(P. 212) .
Listed above are some examples of security measures for preventing unauthorized access. For more information on
the other security measures, see Security(P. 207) and take necessary security measures for preventing
unauthorized access to suit your environment.
Security
210
Setting Access Privileges
52AC-034
Protect the machine from unauthorized access by only allowing users with access privileges to use the machine.
Access privileges are set separately for the System Manager password, an account called "Department ID," and the
Remote UI. When privileges are set, the user must enter an ID and PIN to print or change settings.
The System Manager password is intended exclusively for administrators while the Department ID is for general users.
Both are specied by System Managers. And by setting a Remote UI Access PIN, you can restrict use of the Remote UI.
System Manager Password
Specifying the settings for the machine from the Remote UI requires the System Manager password. The
password is set to "7654321" by default, and can be changed to allow only specic administrators to change the
settings.
Setting the System Manager Password(P. 212)
Department ID (Department ID Management)
Department ID is an account for managing printing jobs. You can register multiple Department IDs to specify
access privileges for a user (or group of users). If a user tries to print a document when Department IDs are
enabled, the screen for entering a Department ID is displayed, and the user must enter his/her own
Department ID. Information for each Department ID can be viewed, such as how many pages have been
printed.
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 215)
Remote UI PIN (Remote UI Access PIN)
This is a PIN for using the Remote UI. Only users who know the PIN can access the Remote UI.
Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 222)
Security
211
Setting the System Manager Password
52AC-035
Changing the settings congured in the machine from the Remote UI requires administrative privileges. Follow the
procedure shown below to change the System Manager password. The System Manager password settings
information is critical to the security of the machine, so make sure that only Administrators know the System Manager
password.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Management Settings].
4Click [Edit].
Security
212
5Enter the current password in [Current System Manager Password].
●The default password is "7654321".
6Enter a new password.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the password in
the [Password] text box. For conrmation, enter the same password in the [Conrm] text box.
●If you click [OK] with the check box selected and the [Password] and [Conrm] text boxes left blank, the
currently set password is deleted.
7Enter the System Manager name and contact information as necessary, and click
[OK].
Security
213
[System Manager]
Enter the name of an administrator.
[Contact Information]
Enter the contact information of the administrator.
[E-Mail Address]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the e-mail address of the administrator.
[System Manager Comment]
Enter comments of the administrator.
●Be sure to remember the password that you have set. If you have forgotten the password, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 211)
Checking System Manager Information(P. 298)
Security
214
Setting the Department ID Management
52AC-036
You can control access to the machine by using multiple IDs for multiple users or groups. If a user tries to operate the
machine when Department ID Management is enabled, a logon screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own
Department ID and PIN to use the machine. Department ID Management provides recorded details of the past use of
the machine for each Department ID. To congure Department ID Management, register department IDs as necessary
and then enable Department ID Management function. Additional settings are required if you want to enable
Department ID Management for printing from a computer.
Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN(P. 215)
Enabling the Department ID Management(P. 216)
Setting the Department ID Management for Printing from the Computer(P. 218)
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 220)
To manage the print status of each department
Checking the Number of Pages Printed for Each Department(P. 527)
Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN
Register a Department ID and set a PIN for it. Register all the department IDs to be managed.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Department ID Management] and register or edit Department IDs.
Security
215
Registering a Department ID
1Click [Register New Department].
2Specify the required settings and click [OK].
[Department ID]
Enter the Department ID number to be registered.
[Set PIN]
To set a PIN, select the check box and enter the same number both in the [PIN] and [Conrm] text
boxes.
Editing the settings of the registered Department ID
1Click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] to edit.
2Change the settings as necessary and click [OK].
Deleting a Department ID
●Click [Delete] on the right of the Department ID you want to delete click [OK].
Enabling the Department ID Management
After you register as many Department IDs as necessary, enable Department ID Management.
Security
216
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Department ID Management] [Settings].
4Select the [Enable Department ID Management] check box and click [OK].
[Enable Department ID Management]
Select the check box to enable Department ID Management. If you do not want to use Department ID
Management, clear the check box.
●For information on the [Accept Print Jobs With Unknown IDs] check box, see Blocking Jobs When
Department ID Is Unknown(P. 220) .
Security
217
If Department ID Management is enabled
●When users try to print a le in the USB memory device or a document stored
on the SD card from the operation panel, the authentication screen is
displayed. Enter the Department ID and PIN, select <Log In>, and press .
●To log on to the Remote UI in General User Mode, you must enter the Department ID and PIN. Starting
Remote UI(P. 286)
◼When the XPS Printer Driver Is Used
If you want to use Department ID Management when the XPS printer driver is used, set key pairs for TLS
encrypted communication ( Using TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 252) ). After completing the
settings of key pairs, congure the settings shown below.
Log on to the Remote UI in Management Mode ( Starting Remote UI(P. 286) ) [Settings/
Registration] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [Edit] in [Department ID Management PIN
Conrmation Settings] Select the [Use Department ID Management PIN Conrmation] check
box [OK]
[Use Department ID Management PIN Conrmation]
If you select the check box, Department ID Management will be enabled for printing with the XPS printer
driver. If you do not want to use Department ID Management, clear the check box.
●If any key pair is not set in the machine, you cannot enable [Use Department ID Management PIN
Conrmation]. Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 271)
Setting the Department ID Management for Printing from the Computer
If you want to enable Department ID Management for printing from a computer, you need to specify settings by using
the printer driver you already installed on the computer. Specify the Department ID and PIN as necessary.
●To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
Security
218
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 602)
2Right-click your printer icon and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
3Click the [Device Settings] tab and specify the required settings.
1Select [Department ID Management] in [User Management], and then click [Settings] located below.
2Specify the settings as necessary and click [OK].
[Allow PIN Setting]
Select the check box to enable the PIN setting.
[Department ID]
Enter the Department ID number.
Security
219
[PIN]
Enter the PIN corresponding to the Department ID as necessary.
[Verify]
Click to verify that the correct ID and PIN are entered. This function is not available if the machine and
the computer are connected via a USB or WSD (Web Services on Devices) port.
[Conrm Department ID/PIN When Printing]
Select the check box to display the [Conrm Department ID/PIN] pop-up screen each time you print
from a computer.
[Authenticate Department ID/PIN at Device]
Select the check box if the machine and the computer are connected via a USB or WSD port.
3Click [OK].
Logging on to the machine
●When you try to print from a computer when Department ID
Management is enabled, the following pop-up screen is displayed
(unless the [Conrm Department ID/PIN When Printing] check box is
cleared):
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown
The factory default settings are such that even when Department ID Management is enabled, you can print from a
computer without entering an ID and PIN. If you want to change this so that printing is not possible unless an ID and
PIN are entered, use the following procedure.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Department ID Management] [Settings].
Security
220
4Clear the [Accept Print Jobs With Unknown IDs] check box and click [OK].
●If you clear the check box, users cannot print by a method that is not supported by Department ID
Management or perform Direct Print from the Remote UI that the users log on in Management Mode.
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 211)
Setting the System Manager Password(P. 212)
Security
221
Setting a Remote UI PIN
52AC-037
You can set a PIN for access to the Remote UI. All users use a common PIN.
●When Department ID Management is enabled, setting here is not required. Setting the Department ID
Management(P. 215)
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Network>, and press .
●When a message appears, press .
3Select <Remote UI Settings> <RUI Access Sec. Set.>.
4Select <On>, and press .
5Set a PIN.
●Enter a number for the PIN and press .
●As <Conrm PIN> is displayed for conrmation, enter again the same PIN digits.
If Remote UI settings are initialized
●The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, reset the PIN. Initializing Menu(P. 533)
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 211)
Setting the System Manager Password(P. 212)
Security
222
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls
52AC-038
Without proper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are
connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet lter, a feature that
restricts communication to devices with specied IP addresses or MAC addresses.
Security
223
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules
52AC-039
You can either limit communication to only devices with specied IP addresses, or block devices with specied IP
addresses but permit other communications. You can specify a single IP address or a range of IP addresses. For data
reception, you can specify IP addresses by specifying port numbers.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [IP Address Filter].
4Click [Edit] for the lter type that you want to use.
Security
224
[IPv4 Address: TX Filter]
Select to restrict sending data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv4 addresses.
[IPv4 Address: RX Filter]
Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv4 addresses and the port
number.
[IPv6 Address: TX Filter]
Select to restrict sending data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv6 addresses.
[IPv6 Address: RX Filter]
Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv6 addresses and the port
number.
5Specify the settings for packet ltering.
For TX Filter
Select the default policy to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine, and then
specify IP addresses for exceptions.
1Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default
Policy].
[Use Filter]
Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
Security
225
[Default Policy]
Select the precondition to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine.
[Allow]
Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from
devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications
with other devices are permitted.
[Reject]
Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from
devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications
with other devices are prohibited.
2Specify address exceptions.
●Enter the IP address (or the range of IP addresses) in [Register Address] and click [Add].
Check for entry errors
●If IP addresses are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI,
in which case you need to set <Address Filter> to <Off>. Address Filter(P. 349)
When you have selected [Reject] under [Default Policy]
●Loopback, multicast, and broadcast packets cannot be ltered.
Deleting an IP address from exceptions
●Select an IP address and click [Delete].
3Click [OK].
For RX Filter
When selecting [Allow] under [Default Policy], specify the IP addresses of devices whose communication with
the machine should be blocked. When selecting [Reject] under [Default Policy], specify the IP addresses of
devices that should be able to communicate with the machine.
Security
226
1Click [Register New].
2Specify address exceptions.
●Enter the IP address (or the range of IP addresses) in [Register Address].
●To specify a port number, select the [Specify Port Number] check box, enter a port number in [Port
Number], and click [Add].
Check for entry errors
●If IP addresses or the port numbers are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine
from the Remote UI, in which case you need to set <Address Filter> to <Off>. Address Filter(P. 349)
To delete a set port number
●Select the port number to delete, and click [Delete].
3Click [OK].
4Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default
Policy].
Security
227
[Use Filter]
Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
[Default Policy]
Select the precondition to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine.
[Allow]
Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from
devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications
with other devices are permitted.
[Reject]
Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from
devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications
with other devices are prohibited.
Editing a set IP address from exceptions
●Click the corresponding text link under [Exception Addresses], in the screen that has been displayed
change settings as necessary, and click [OK].
Deleting an IP address from exceptions
●Select an IP address to delete, and click [Delete].
5Click [OK].
6Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
Security
228
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules
52AC-03A
You can limit communication to only devices with specied MAC addresses, or block devices with specied MAC
addresses but permit other communications.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [MAC Address Filter].
4Click [Edit] for a lter type.
Security
230
[TX Filter]
Select to restrict sending data from the machine to a computer by specifying MAC addresses.
[RX Filter]
Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying MAC addresses.
5Specify the settings for packet ltering.
●Select the precondition (default policy) to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the
machine, and then specify MAC addresses for exceptions.
1Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Allow] or [Reject] radio button for the [Default Policy].
[Use Filter]
Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
[Default Policy]
Select the precondition to allow or reject other devices to communicate with the machine.
[Allow]
Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from
devices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses].
Communications with other devices are permitted.
[Reject]
Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from
devices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses].
Communications with other devices are prohibited.
2Specify address exceptions.
●Enter the MAC address in the [Register Address] text box and click [Add].
Security
231
●You do not need to delimit the address with hyphens or colons.
Check for entry errors
●If MAC addresses are incorrectly entered, you may become unable to access the machine from the
Remote UI, in which case you need to set <Address Filter> to <Off>. Address Filter(P. 349)
When you have selected [Reject] under [Default Policy]
●Outgoing multicast and broadcast packets cannot be ltered.
Deleting a MAC address from exceptions
●Select a MAC address and click [Delete].
3Click [OK].
6Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable MAC address ltering from the setting menu of the operation panel.
Address Filter(P. 349)
LINKS
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 224)
Security
232
Setting a Proxy
52AC-03C
A proxy (or HTTP proxy server) refers to a computer or software that carries out HTTP communication for other
devices, especially when communicating with resources outside the network, such as when browsing Web sites. The
client devices connect to the outside network through the proxy server, and do not communicate directly to the
resources outside. Setting a proxy not only facilitates management of trac between in-house and outside networks
but also blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced security. When you use
Google Cloud Print to print over the Internet, you can enhance security by setting a proxy. When setting a proxy, make
sure that you have the necessary proxy information, including the IP address, port number, and a user name and
password for authentication.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Click [Edit] in [Proxy Settings].
Security
233
5Select the [Use Proxy] check box and specify the required settings.
[Use Proxy]
Select the check box to use the specied proxy server when communicating with an HTTP server.
[HTTP Proxy Server Address]
Enter the address of the proxy server. Specify the IP address or host name depending on the environment.
[HTTP Proxy Server Port Number]
Change the port number as necessary.
[Use Proxy within Same Domain]
Select the check box to also use the specied proxy server for communication with devices in the same
domain.
[Use Proxy Authentication]
To enable authentication by the proxy server, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the
user name in the [User Name] text box.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password for the proxy authentication, when it is enabled, select the check box and
enter alphanumeric characters for the new password in the [Password] text box. For conrmation, enter the
same password in the [Conrm] text box.
6Click [OK].
7Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
Security
234
Restricting the Machine's Functions
52AC-03E
Some of the functions of the machine may rarely be used or provide opportunities for misuse. For security purposes,
the machine can be set to limit its capabilities by partially or completely disabling these functions.
Restricting the Printing Functions
Restricting the Printing Operations(P. 237)
Restricting USB Functions
Restricting USB Functions(P. 240)
Restricting Operation Panel Functions
Restricting Operation Panel Functions(P. 243)
Restricting Network Functions Including HTTP Communications
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 246)
Disabling Remote UI(P. 247)
Disabling the LAN Port(P. 248)
Hiding the Print Job History
Hiding the Print Job History(P. 249)
Security
236
Restricting the Printing Operations
52AC-03F
You can specify settings to prevent received print data from being automatically printed, reducing wasteful use of
paper and disabling third parties to use the machine. To use this function, you must install an optional SD card.
Installing an SD Card(P. 575)
●Even when the printing operations are restricted, settings lists and reports can be printed. Printing
Reports and Lists(P. 517)
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Management Settings].
Security
237
4Click [Edit].
5Enter the System Manager password in [Current System Manager Password].
6Select the [Restrict Printer Jobs] check box and click [OK].
[Restrict Printer Jobs]
Select the check box to restrict the printing operations of the machine. Clear the check box to disable the
restriction.
Security
238
7Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
When the printing operations are restricted
●Only Stored Job Print can be performed from the printer drivers. Printing a Document Stored in the
Machine (Stored Job Print)(P. 97)
●Only PDF, PS, EPS, and XPS les stored in boxes can be printed from the Remote UI. Printing without
Opening a File (Direct Print)(P. 107)
●USB Direct Print from the USB memory device and E-mail Print are not available.
LINKS
Printing a Document Stored in the Machine (Stored Job Print)(P. 97)
Security
239
Restricting USB Functions
52AC-03H
USB is a convenient way of connecting peripheral devices and storing or relocating data, but USB can also be a source
of information leakage if it is not properly managed. Be especially careful when handling USB memory devices. This
section describes how to restrict connection via the USB port of the machine and how to prohibit use of USB memory
devices.
Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer(P. 240)
Restricting the USB Direct Print Function(P. 241)
Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer
You can disable the USB port, for connecting a computer, located on the left side of the machine. Connection to a
computer via USB will be disabled, but a USB memory device can be connected to the USB port on the right side of the
machine.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Interface>, and press .
3Select <Interface Selection> and press .
●When a message appears, press .
4Select <USB> and press .
5Select <Off> and press .
<Off>
Disables the USB port located on the left side of the machine.
<On>
Enables the USB port located on the left side of the machine.
Security
240
6Perform a hard reset. Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466)
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Restricting the USB Direct Print Function
You can disable printing data from a USB memory device. This makes it impossible to print data stored in the USB
memory.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Management Settings].
4Click [Edit].
Security
241
5Enter the System Manager password in [Current System Manager Password].
6Clear the [USB Direct Print] check box and click [OK].
[USB Direct Print]
Clear the check box to disable direct printing from a USB memory device. Select the check box to enable
printing from a USB memory device. If you also select the [Automatically Display USB Direct Print Screen]
check box, the USB Direct Print screen will be automatically displayed when a USB memory device is attached
to the machine.
LINKS
Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print)(P. 81)
Security
242
Restricting Operation Panel Functions
52AC-03J
You can restrict the use of the keys on the operation panel to prevent the settings of the machine from being
carelessly changed.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Management Settings].
4Click [Edit].
Security
243
5Enter the System Manager password in [Current System Manager Password].
6Select the check box of the key to restrict and click [OK].
[Keys to Lock]
You can select the check box to lock the corresponding key even when it is pressed on the operation panel.
Clear the check box to unlock the key. You can also lock the Setup key from the operation panel ( Mng.
Settings(P. 326) ).
Security
244
Disabling HTTP Communication
52AC-03K
HTTP is used for communications over the network, such as when you access the machine via the Remote UI. If you
are using a USB connection or are otherwise not using HTTP, you can disable HTTP to block malicious third-party
intrusions via the unused HTTP port.
●Disabling HTTP disables some of the network capabilities, such as the Remote UI, WSD printing, and printing
with Google Cloud Print.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Network>, and press .
●When a message appears, press .
3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <HTTP>.
4Select <Off>, and press .
<Off>
Disables HTTP communication.
<On>
Enables HTTP communication.
5Perform a hard reset. Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466)
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
LINKS
Using Remote UI(P. 285)
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 160)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 139)
When the XPS Printer Driver Is Used(P. 218)
Security
246
Disabling Remote UI
52AC-03L
The Remote UI is useful because the machine settings can be specied by using a Web browser on a computer. To use
the Remote UI, the machine must be connected to a computer over the network. If the machine is connected to a
computer via USB, or if you do not need to use the Remote UI, you might want to disable the Remote UI to reduce the
risk of having your machine controlled remotely over the network by malicious third parties.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Network>, and press .
●When a message appears, press .
3Select <Remote UI Settings> <Remote UI>.
4Select <Off>, and press .
<Off>
Disables the Remote UI.
<On>
Enables the Remote UI.
5Perform a hard reset. Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466)
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
LINKS
Using Remote UI(P. 285)
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 246)
Security
247
Disabling the LAN Port
52AC-03R
A LAN port is an interface that connects a LAN cable for using a network. When you are using the machine via USB, you
can disable the LAN port to completely shut down the network, blocking malicious third-party intrusions via the LAN
port.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Interface>, and press .
3Select <Interface Selection> and press .
●When a message appears, press .
4Select <Network> and press .
5Select <Off> and press .
<Off>
Disables the LAN port.
<On>
Enables the LAN port.
6Perform a hard reset. Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466)
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Security
248
Hiding the Print Job History
52AC-03S
To protect the privacy of users, you can specify settings to disable displaying the print job history on the Remote UI
screen and printing the print history list. The print job history is updated and maintained even if it is set to be hidden,
so that administrators can view the history as necessary.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Display Job Log].
4Click [Edit].
Security
249
5Clear the [Display Job Log] check box and click [OK].
[Display Job Log]
If you clear the check box, the print job history will not be displayed on the Remote UI screen and the print
history list cannot be printed, either. To display the job history, select the check box.
[Allow to Retrieve Job Log with Management Software]
If you select the check box, device management software such as iW Management Console can be used to
obtain a print job history. Clear the check box to disable the management software to obtain the print job
history. This function is automatically enabled when the [Display Job Log] check box is selected.
LINKS
Checking History of Documents(P. 296)
Job Menu(P. 464)
Security
250
Implementing Robust Security Features
52AC-03U
Authorized users may incur unanticipated losses from attacks by malicious third parties, such as sning, spoong,
and tampering of data as it ows over a network. To protect your important and valuable information from these
attacks, the machine supports the following features to enhance security and secrecy.
TLS Encrypted Communication
TLS is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web
browser or an e-mail application. TLS enables secure network communication when you access the machine
from a computer via the Remote UI. Using TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 252)
IPSec Communication
While TLS only encrypts data used on a specic application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail application,
IPSec encrypts the whole (or payloads of) IP packets. This enables IPSec to offer a more versatile security system
than TLS. Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 256)
IEEE 802.1X Authentication
IEEE 802.1X is a standard and mechanism for blocking unauthorized access to the network by collectively
managing user authentication information. If a device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must
go through user authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user.
Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication
to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch blocks access from
the outside of the network. The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. Conguring
IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 266)
LINKS
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 271)
Security
251
Using TLS for Encrypted Communications
52AC-03W
You can encrypt communication between the machine and a Web browser on the computer and the IPP Print data to
print via Internet by using Transport Layer Security (TLS). TLS is a mechanism for encrypting data sent or received over
the network. TLS must be enabled when the Remote UI is used for specifying settings for IPSec (Pre-Shared Key
Method), IEEE 802.1X authentication (TTLS/PEAP), or SNMPv3. To use TLS encrypted communication, you need to set a
key pair and enable the TLS function. Have a key pair to use ready ( Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital
Certicates(P. 271) ).
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Click [Edit] in [TLS Settings].
Security
252
5Edit TLS Settings.
[Key and Certicate Settings]
Select a key from the list of keys and certicates.
●Select a key from the list of keys and certicates, and click [Default Key Settings].
Viewing details of a certicate
●You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text link
under [Key Name], or the certicate icon. Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 282)
If [Default Key Settings] is not displayed
●When TLS is already enabled by [Remote UI Settings] or [IPP Print Settings], [Default Key Settings] is not
displayed. To change the key to use, refer to step 6 and clear the [Use TLS] check boxes under [Remote UI
Settings] or [IPP Print Settings], respectively.
[Allowed Versions]
Security
253
Select the allowed versions for TLS.
[Encryption Algorithms to Restrict]
Select the encryption algorithms to be restricted against use for TLS. If you make no restriction, select
[None].
6Enable TLS for the Remote UI.
Using TLS for communication with the Remote UI
1Click [Security] [Remote UI Settings].
2Click [Edit].
3Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [OK].
[Use TLS]
When using TLS for Remote UI communication, select the check box. When not using, clear the check
box.
Security
254
Using TLS for a function that is compatible with encrypted communication
Using TLS for IPP printing
Make the following setting to perform IPP printing using TLS. For other IPP print settings, see Conguring
Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 160) .
[Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [Edit] in [IPP Print Settings] Select the [Use TLS] check box
[OK]
7Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable TLS encrypted communication from the setting menu of the operation panel.
Remote UI Settings(P. 346)
Starting the Remote UI with TLS
●If you try to start the Remote UI when TLS is enabled, a security alert may be displayed regarding the
security certicate. In this case, check that the correct URL is entered in the address eld, and then proceed
to display the Remote UI screen. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
LINKS
Generating Key Pairs(P. 272)
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 279)
Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 256)
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 266)
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 193)
Security
255
Conguring IPSec Settings
52AC-080
Internet Protocol Security (IPSec or IPsec) is a protocol suite for encrypting data transported over a network, including
Internet networks. While TLS only encrypts data used on a specic application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail
application, IPSec encrypts either whole IP packets or the payloads of IP packets, offering a more versatile security
system. The IPSec of the machine works in transport mode, in which the payloads of IP packets are encrypted. With
this feature, the machine can connect directly to a computer that is in the same virtual private network (VPN). Set the
necessary conguration on the computer before you congure the machine.
Registering Security Policies(P. 256)
Enabling IPSec Communication(P. 263)
Using IPSec with IP address lter
●The IPSec settings are applied before the IP address lter settings during packet reception while the IP
address settings are applied before the IPSec settings during packet transmission. Specifying IP
Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 224)
Registering Security Policies
To use IPSec for encrypted communication, you need to register security policies (SP) before enabling the IPSec
settings ( Enabling IPSec Communication(P. 263) ). A security policy consists of the groups of settings described
below. You can register multiple policies according to a combination of the IP address and the port number. After
registering policies, specify the order in which they are applied.
Selector
Selector denes conditions for IP packets to apply IPSec communication. Selectable conditions include IP
addresses and port numbers of the machine and the devices to communicate with.
IKE
IKE congures the IKEv1 that is used for key exchange protocol. Note that instructions vary depending on the
authentication method selected.
[Pre-Shared Key Method]
A key of alphanumeric characters can be shared with the other devices. Enable TLS for the Remote UI in
advance ( Using TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 252) ).
[Digital Signature Method]
The machine and the other devices authenticate each other by mutually verifying their digital signatures. Have
a key pair to use ready ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 279) ).
Setting Protocols and Options
Specify the settings for ESP and AH, which are added to packets during IPSec communication. ESP and AH
cannot be used at the same time. You can also select whether or not to enable PFS for tighter security.
Security
256
6Enter a policy name in [Policy Name], and select the [Enable Policy] check box.
[Policy Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for a name that is used for identifying the policy.
[Enable Policy]
Select the check box to enable the policy. When not using the policy, clear the check box.
7Specify the selector settings.
[Local Address]
Select the type of the IP address of the machine to apply the policy from the following list.
Security
258
[All IP Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.
[IPv4 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from the IPv4 address of the
machine.
[IPv6 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from an IPv6 address of the
machine.
[IPv4 Manual Settings] Select to specify a single IPv4 address or a range of IPv4 addresses to apply IPSec.
Enter the IPv4 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
[IPv6 Manual Settings] Select to specify a single IPv6 address or a range of IPv6 addresses to apply IPSec.
Enter the IPv6 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
[Addresses to Set Manually]
If [IPv4 Manual Settings] or [IPv6 Manual Settings] is selected for [Local Address], enter the IP address to
apply the policy.
[Subnet Settings]
When manually specifying IPv4 addresses, you can express the range by using the subnet mask. Enter the
subnet mask using periods to delimit numbers (example:"255.255.255.240").
[Remote Address]
Select the type of IP address of the other devices to apply the policy from the list shown below.
[All IP Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.
[All IPv4 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from an IPv4 address.
[All IPv6 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from an IPv6 address.
[IPv4 Manual Settings] Select to specify a single IPv4 address or a range of IPv4 addresses to apply IPSec.
Enter the IPv4 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
[IPv6 Manual Settings] Select to specify a single IPv6 address or a range of IPv6 addresses to apply IPSec.
Enter the IPv6 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
[Addresses to Set Manually]
If [IPv4 Manual Settings] or [IPv6 Manual Settings] is selected for [Remote Address], enter the IP address to
apply the policy.
[Subnet Settings]
When manually specifying IPv4 addresses, you can express the range by using the subnet mask. Enter the
subnet mask using periods to delimit numbers (example:"255.255.255.240").
[Local Port]/[Remote Port]
If you want to create separate policies for each protocol, such as HTTP or SMTP, enter the appropriate port
number for the protocol to determine whether to use IPSec.
●IPSec is not applied to the packets that have a specied multicast or broadcast address.
8Specify the IKE Settings.
Security
259
[IKE Mode]
The mode used for the key exchange protocol is displayed. Normally select the main mode.
●Select the aggressive mode when the IP address is not xed. Note that security is lower in the aggressive
mode than in the main mode.
[AUTH Method]
Select [Pre-Shared Key Method] or [Digital Signature Method] for the method used when authenticating the
machine.
●When the aggressive mode is selected in [IKE Mode], the [Pre-Shared Key Method] setting does not
encrypt the shared key.
[Authentication/Encryption Algorithm]
To automatically set the algorithm that is used for key exchange, select the [Auto] check box. If you select the
check box, the algorithm is set as shown below.
[Authentication] [SHA1 and MD5]
[Encryption] [3DES-CBC and AES-CBC]
[DH Group] [Group 2 (1024)]
To manually set the algorithm, clear the check box and select the algorithm.
[Authentication] Select the hash algorithm.
[Encryption] Select the encryption algorithm.
[DH Group] Select the Die-Hellman group, which determines the key strength.
Using [Pre-Shared Key Method] for authentication
1Select [Pre-Shared Key Method] for [AUTH Method] and click [Shared Key Settings].
2Enter alphanumeric characters for the pre-shared key and click [OK].
Security
260
Using [Digital Signature Method] for authentication
1Select [Digital Signature Method] for [AUTH Method] and click [Key and Certicate].
2Select the key pair you want to use, and click [Default Key Settings].
Viewing details of a key pair or certicate
●You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text
link under [Key Name], or the certicate icon. Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 282)
9Specify the IPSec Network Settings.
[Use PFS]
Select the check box to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) for IPSec session keys. Enabling PFS enhances
the security while increasing the load on the communication. Make sure that PFS is also enabled for the other
devices. When not using PFS, clear the check box.
[Validity]
Specify how long SA is used as a communication tunnel. Select the [Specify by Time] or [Specify by Size] check
box or both check boxes as necessary. If both check boxes are selected, the IPSec SA session is terminated
when either of the conditions has been satised.
Security
261
[Specify by Time] Enter a time in minutes to specify how long a session lasts. The entered time is applied
to both IPSec SA and IKE SA.
[Specify by Size] Enter a size in megabytes to specify how much data can be transported in a session.
The entered size is applied to IPSec SA only.
If you have selected the [Specify by Size] check box only
●The IKE SA validity cannot be specied by size, so that the initial value (480 minutes) of [Specify by Time] is
applied.
[Authentication/Encryption Algorithm]
Select the protocol and algorithm to use for IPSec communication.
Automatically setting up connection
Select [Auto].
[ESP Authentication] ESP is enabled and the authentication algorithm is set to [SHA1 and MD5].
[ESP Encryption] ESP is enabled and the encryption algorithm is set to [3DES-CBC and AES-CBC].
Using ESP
Choose [ESP] and select the authentication algorithm and encryption algorithm.
[ESP Authentication] Select the hash algorithm to use for ESP authentication.
[ESP Encryption] Select the encryption algorithm for ESP.
Using AH
Choose [AH], and select the hash algorithm to use for AH authentication from [AH Authentication].
[Connection Mode]
The connection mode of IPSec is displayed. The machine supports transport mode, in which the payloads of
IP packets are encrypted. Tunnel mode, in which whole IP packets (headers and payloads) are encapsulated
is not available.
10 Click [OK].
●If you need to register an additional security policy, return to step 5.
11 Arrange the order of policies listed under [IPSec Policy List].
●Policies are applied from one at the highest position to the lowest. Click [Raise Priority] or [Lower Priority] to
move a policy up or down the order.
Security
262
Editing a policy
●You can click the text link under [Policy Name] to edit the settings.
Deleting a policy
●Click [Delete] on the right of the policy that you want to delete.
12 Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after a hard reset is performed.
Enabling IPSec Communication
After completion of registering security policies, enable the IPSec communication.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [IPSec Settings].
Security
263
4Click [Edit].
5Select the [Use IPSec] check box and click [OK].
[Use IPSec]
When using IPSec in the machine, select the check box. When not using, clear the check box.
[Allow Receive Non-Policy Packets]
If you select the check box when using IPSec, packets that are not available for the registered policies are
also sent/received. To disable sending/receiving the packets that are not available for the policies, clear the
check box.
6Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
Security
264
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable IPSec communication from the setting menu of the operation panel.
IPSec(P. 341)
LINKS
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 271)
IPSec Policy List(P. 459)
Security
265
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication
52AC-03Y
The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. A typical 802.1X network consists of a RADIUS server
(authentication server), LAN switch (authenticator), and client devices with authentication software (supplicants). If a
device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication in order to prove that
the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server,
which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails,
a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network.
Select the authentication method from the options below. If necessary, install or register a key pair or CA certicate
before conguring IEEE 802.1X authentication ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 279) ).
TLS
The machine and the authentication server authenticate each other by mutually verifying their certicates. A
key pair issued by a certication authority (CA) is required for the client authentication (when authenticating the
machine). For the server authentication, a CA certicate installed via the Remote UI can be used in addition to a
CA certicate preinstalled in the machine.
TTLS
This authentication method uses a user name and password for the client authentication and a CA certicate for
the server authentication. MSCHAPv2 or PAP can be selected as the internal protocol. TTLS can be used with
PEAP at the same time. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method ( Using
TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 252) ).
PEAP
The required settings are almost the same as those of TTLS. MS-CHAPv2 is used as the internal protocol. Enable
TLS for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method ( Using TLS for Encrypted
Communications(P. 252) ).
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
Security
266
3Click [Network] [IEEE 802.1X Settings].
4Click [Edit].
5Select the [Use IEEE 802.1X] check box, enter the login name in the [Login Name] text
box, and specify the required settings.
Security
267
[Use IEEE 802.1X]
Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1X authentication.
[Login Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for a name (EAP identity) that is used for identifying the user.
Setting TLS
1Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [Key and Certicate].
●You cannot use TLS with TTLS or PEAP.
2Select a key from the list of keys and certicates, and click [Default Key Settings].
Viewing details of a key pair or certicate
●You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text
link under [Key Name], or the certicate icon. Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 282)
Setting TTLS/PEAP
1Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] check box.
Security
268
Internal protocol for TTLS
●You can select MSCHAPv2 or PAP. If you want to use PAP, click the [PAP] radio button.
2Click [Change User Name/Password].
●To specify a user name other than the login name, clear the [Use Login Name as User Name] check
box. Select the check box if you want to use the login name as the user name.
3Set the user name/password and click [OK].
Security
269
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.
[Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the new
password both in the [Password] and [Conrm] text boxes.
6Click [OK].
7Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication from the setting menu of the operation panel.
IEEE802.1X(P. 348)
LINKS
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 271)
Security
270
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital
Certicates
52AC-040
In order to encrypt communication with a remote device, an encryption key must be sent and received over an
unsecured network beforehand. This problem is solved by public-key cryptography. Public-key cryptography ensures
secure communication by protecting important and valuable information from attacks, such as sning, spoong, and
tampering of data as it ows over a network.
Key Pair
A key pair consists of a public key and a secret key, both of which are required for encrypting or
decrypting data. Because data that has been encrypted with one of the key pair cannot be
returned to its original data form without the other, public-key cryptography ensures secure
communication of data over the network. Up to eight key pairs, including the preinstalled pairs,
can be registered ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 279) ). For TLS
encrypted communication, a key pair can be generated for the machine ( Generating Key
Pairs(P. 272) ).
CA Certicate
Digital certicates including CA certicates are similar to other forms of identication, such as
driver's licenses. A digital certicate contains a digital signature, which enables the machine to
detect any spoong or tampering of data. It is extremely dicult for third parties to abuse
digital certicates. A digital certicate that contains a public key of a certication authority (CA)
is referred to as a CA certicate. CA certicates are used for verifying the device the machine is
communicating with for features such as printing with Google Cloud Print or IEEE 802.1X
authentication. Up to 150 CA certicates can be registered, including the 72 certicates that are
preinstalled in the machine ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 279) ).
Security
271
Generating Key Pairs
52AC-041
A key pair can be generated with the machine when it is required for encrypted communication via Transport Layer
Security (TLS). You can use TLS when accessing the machine via the Remote UI or performing IPP Print. Up to eight key
pairs, including the preinstalled pairs, can be registered. Self-signed certicates are used with key pairs generated in
"Network Communication". With a "Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)", you can apply for a CA-issued digital
certicate for the key pair generated by the machine.
Generate Network Communication Key(P. 272)
Generate Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)(P. 274)
Generate Network Communication Key
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Key and Certicate Settings].
4Click [Generate Key].
Security
272
Deleting a registered key pair
●Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair you want to delete click [OK].
●A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "TLS" or "IEEE 802.1X",
is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before deleting it.
5Select [Network Communication] and click [OK].
6Specify settings for the key and certicate.
[Key Settings]
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key pair. Set a name that will be easy for you to nd later
in a list.
Security
273
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
RSA or ECDSA is used for generating a key pair. Select the key length from the drop-down list. The larger
the number for the key length, the slower the communication. However, the security is tighter.
●[512 bit] cannot be selected for the key length, if [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected for
[Signature Algorithm].
[Certicate Settings]
[Validity Start Date (dd/mm yyyy)]
Enter the validity start date of the certicate.
[Validity End Date (dd/mm yyyy)]
Enter the validity end date of the certicate. A date earlier than [Validity Start Date (dd/mm yyyy)]
cannot be set.
[Country/Region]
Enter characters for the Internet country code.
[State]/[City]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common Name"
is often abbreviated as "CN."
To perform IPPS Print, the "IP address" or "<host name>.<domain name>" that is used for
connection via IPPS must be entered in [Common Name].
●Enter the "IP address" when it is xed.
●Enter "<host name>.<domain name>" when the DNS server is used. Enabling IPP/
IPPS(P. 166)
7Click [OK].
●Keys for network communication may take approximately 10 minutes to 15 minutes to generate.
●After a key pair is generated, it is automatically registered to the machine.
Generate Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
Security
274
3Click [Security] [Key and Certicate Settings].
4Click [Generate Key].
Deleting a registered key pair
●Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair you want to delete click [OK].
●A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "TLS" or "IEEE 802.1X",
is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before deleting it.
5Select [Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)] and click [OK].
Security
275
6Specify settings for the key and certicate.
[Key Settings]
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key pair. Set a name that will be easy for you to nd later
in a list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
RSA or ECDSA is used for generating a key pair. Select the key length from the drop-down list. The larger
the number for the key length, the slower the communication. However, the security is tighter.
●[512 bit] cannot be selected for the key length, if [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected for
[Signature Algorithm].
[Certicate Signing Request (CSR) Settings]
[Country/Region]
Enter characters for the Internet country code.
[State]/[City]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Security
276
Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common Name"
is often abbreviated as "CN."
To perform IPPS Print, the "IP address" or "<host name>.<domain name>" that is used for
connection via IPPS must be entered in [Common Name].
●Enter the "IP address" when it is xed.
●Enter "<host name>.<domain name>" when the DNS server is used. Enabling IPP/
IPPS(P. 166)
7Click [OK].
●Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) may take approximately 10 minutes to 15 minutes to generate.
8Click [Store in File].
●A dialog box for storing the le appears. Choose where to store the le and click [Save].
➠The Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) le is stored on the computer.
9Attach the stored le and submit the application to the certication authority.
◼Register the digital certicate issued by the certication authority.
You cannot use the key pair generated by the Certicate Signing Request (CSR) until the certicate is registered. Once
the certication authority has issued the digital certicate, register it using the procedure below.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Key and Certicate Settings].
Security
277
4Click [Key Name] or [Certicate] for the certicate to be registered.
5Click [Register Certicate].
6Click [Browse] in [File Path], specify the le for the certicate signing request, and
click [Register].
LINKS
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 279)
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 282)
Using TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 252)
Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 256)
Security
278
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates
52AC-042
Key pairs and digital certicates can be obtained from a certication authority (CA) for use with the machine. You can
store and then register these les by using the Remote UI. Make sure that the key pair and the certicate satisfy the
requirements of the machine ( Registration of Keys and Certicates(P. 559) ). Up to 8 key pairs (including the
preinstalled ones) can be registered, and up to 150 CA certicates (including the 72 preinstalled ones) can be
registered.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Key and Certicate Settings] or [CA Certicate Settings].
●Click [Key and Certicate Settings] to install a key pair, or [CA Certicate Settings] to install a CA certicate.
4Click [Register Key and Certicate] or [Register CA Certicate].
Security
279
Deleting a registered key pair or CA certicate
●Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair or CA certicate you want to delete click [OK].
●A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or "[IEEE
802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before
deleting it. The preinstalled CA certicate cannot be deleted.
5Click [Install].
Deleting a key pair or CA certicate
●Click [Delete] on the right of the le you want to delete, and then click [OK].
6Click [Browse], specify the le to install, and click [Start Installation].
●The key pair or CA certicate is installed in the machine.
7Register the key pair or CA certicate.
Security
280
Registering a key pair
1Click [Register] on the right of the key pair you want to register.
2Enter the name of the key pair and password, and then click [OK].
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the key pair to be registered.
[Password]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the password of the private key set for the le to be registered.
Registering a CA certicate
Click [Register] on the right of the CA certicate you want to register.
LINKS
Generating Key Pairs(P. 272)
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 282)
Using TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 252)
Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 256)
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 266)
Security
281
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates
52AC-043
Once key pairs and CA certicates are registered, you can view their detailed information or verify them for validity
and signature.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Key and Certicate Settings] or [CA Certicate Settings].
●Click [Key and Certicate Settings] to verify a key pair, or [CA Certicate Settings] to verify a CA certicate.
4Click the icon for the key pair or certicate that you want to verify.
Security
282
Using Remote UI
Using Remote UI ............................................................................................................................................. 285
Starting Remote UI ........................................................................................................................................... 286
Remote UI Screens ............................................................................................................................................ 289
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status .............................................................................. 295
Enabling End Users to Operate Documents .................................................................................................. 300
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ...................................................................................................... 302
Saving/Loading Registered Data ...................................................................................................................... 304
Saving Registered Data ................................................................................................................................ 305
Loading Registered Data .............................................................................................................................. 307
Using Remote UI
284
Using Remote UI
52AC-044
Using a Web browser to operate the machine remotely, you can check the documents waiting to be printed or the
status of the machine. You can also make some settings for the machine. You can do this without leaving your desk,
making system management easier.For more information about the system requirements for the Remote UI, see
System Environment(P. 562) .
Functions of the Remote UI
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status(P. 295)
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 302)
Saving/Loading Registered Data(P. 304)
Basics of the Remote UI
Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
Remote UI Screens(P. 289)
Using Remote UI
285
Starting Remote UI
52AC-045
To operate remotely, you need to input the IP address of the machine into a Web browser and start the Remote UI.
Check the IP address set to the machine in advance ( Network Status Print(P. 459) ). If you have any questions, ask
your Network Administrator.
1Start the Web browser.
2Enter "http://(the IP address of the machine)/" in the address eld, and press the
[ENTER] key.
●If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://
[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).
If using a DNS server
●You can enter "<host name of the machine>.<domain name>" instead of "IP address of the machine"
(example: http://my_printer.example.com).
If a security alert is displayed
●A security alert may be displayed when the Remote UI communication is encrypted ( Using TLS for
Encrypted Communications(P. 252) ). When certicate settings or TLS settings have no errors, continue
browsing the Web site.
3Log on to the Remote UI.
When the Department ID Management is disabled
Select [Management Mode] or [General User Mode].
[Management Mode]
You can perform all the Remote UI operations and settings. Enter the System Manager password in
[Password].
Using Remote UI
286
●The default System Manager password is "7654321." Setting the System Manager
Password(P. 212)
[General User Mode]
You can check the status of documents or the machine, and you can also change some of the settings. If
you wish to delete your print documents, enter the user name of the documents in [User Name]. The user
name is automatically set to print documents based on information such as your computer name or
computer logon name.
About [User Name]
●By default, [User Name] is not displayed to disable general users to operate documents. If you want to
operate documents in General User Mode, log on in Management Mode and enable [Allow General
User Job Operation]. Enabling End Users to Operate Documents(P. 300)
[Remote UI Access PIN]
If [Remote UI Access PIN] is displayed, enter the PIN ( Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 222) ).
When the Department ID Management is enabled
Enter the appropriate ID in [Department ID] and PIN in [PIN] ( Setting the Department ID
Management(P. 215) ).
4Click [Log In].
➠Portal Page (main page) will be displayed. Remote UI Screens(P. 289)
Using Remote UI
287
Using Remote UI
288
Remote UI Screens
52AC-046
This section describes the typical screens of the Remote UI.
Portal Page (Main Page)(P. 289)
[Status Monitor/Cancel] Page(P. 291)
[Settings/Registration] Page(P. 292)
[Box] Page(P. 293)
[Direct Print] Page(P. 294)
Portal Page (Main Page)
[Log Out]
Logs off from the Remote UI. The Login page will be displayed.
[Mail to System Manager]
Displays a window for creating an e-mail to the system manager specied in [Management Settings] under
[Security].
Refresh Icon
Refreshes the currently displayed page.
Using Remote UI
289
Device Basic Information
Displays the current status of the machine and error information. If an error has occurred, the link to the
Error Information page will be displayed.
Consumables Information
Displays information about paper (remaining amount, size, etc.) and the status of toner cartridges and other
consumables.
Message Board
Displays a message from the System Manager specied in [Message Board/Support Link] under [Settings/
Registration] [License/Other].
Support Link
Displays a text link to the support information of the machine specied in [Message Board/Support Link]
under [Settings/Registration] [License/Other].
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
Displays [Status Monitor/Cancel] page. You can use this page to check the current printing status, cancel
print processing, and view a history of print jobs.
[Settings/Registration]
Displays [Settings/Registration] page. When you have logged on in Management Mode, you can change the
settings items and save/load the registered data. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 302)
[Box] (only when an optional SD card is installed)
Displays the [Box] page. You can print and delete documents stored in the machine. Printing a Document
Stored in the Machine (Stored Job Print)(P. 97)
[Direct Print]
You can print a le stored in a computer without opening it. Printing without Opening a File (Direct
Print)(P. 107)
[Service Management Service]
Starts Service Management Service (SMS) used to manage MEAP applications (function-enhancing software).
Function Guide for MEAP Application Management
Using Remote UI
290
[Status Monitor/Cancel] Page
[To Portal]
Returns to Portal Page (main page).
Menu
Click an item, and the content is displayed in the right page. Managing Documents and Checking the
Machine Status(P. 295)
Breadcrumb Trail
Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is
currently displayed.
Refresh Icon
Refreshes the currently displayed page.
Top Icon
Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.
Using Remote UI
291
[Settings/Registration] Page
[To Portal]
Returns to Portal Page (main page).
Menu
Click an item, the content is displayed in the right page. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote
UI(P. 302)
Breadcrumb Trail
Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is
currently displayed.
Top Icon
Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.
Menu on the [Settings/Registration] page
●You can change settings on the [Settings/Registration] page only when you have logged on in
Management Mode.
●If you log on in General User Mode, [Utility Menu], [Calibration], [Device Control], [Department ID
Management], and [Import/Export] are not displayed.
Using Remote UI
292
[Box] Page
[To Portal]
Returns to Portal Page (main page).
[Box]
Displays a list of boxes. You can open a box to check detailed information of the documents stored in the
box, print and delete the documents. Printing a Document Stored in the Machine (Stored Job Print)
(P. 97)
Breadcrumb Trail
Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is
currently displayed.
Refresh Icon
Refreshes the currently displayed page.
Box Number
You can enter a box number and click [Open] to open the box of the entered number.
Box List
You can click the text link under [Box Number] to open the applicable box.
Top Icon
Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.
Using Remote UI
293
[Direct Print] Page
[To Portal]
Returns to Portal Page (main page).
Menu
Displays the page for specifying the le format of a le to be printed by Direct Print. Printing without
Opening a File (Direct Print)(P. 107)
Breadcrumb Trail
Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is
currently displayed.
Top Icon
Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.
Using Remote UI
294
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine
Status
52AC-047
Checking Current Status of Print Documents(P. 295)
Checking History of Documents(P. 296)
Checking Error Information(P. 297)
Checking Device Specications(P. 297)
Checking System Manager Information(P. 298)
Checking Print Total Counter(P. 298)
Checking History of Toner Cartridges/Drum Cartridges(P. 299)
●A le name of a document may not be displayed in full. The printed application name may be added to the
le name.
Checking Current Status of Print Documents
You can check the print status (currently being printed or waiting to be printed) of the documents designated to be
printed from a computer, and delete or interrupt documents.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 286) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Status]
[Cancel]
You can delete documents that are being printed or waiting to be printed.
[Interrupt] *
Temporarily stops the current print job in progress and starts a specied print job. For the interrupted print
job, printing of the remaining pages is started as soon as the interrupting print job is nished.
[Priority Print] *
Moves up the print order of a document waiting to be printed by one.
Using Remote UI
295
[Pause] */[Resume] *
Press [Pause] to temporarily stop the current print job. Press [Resume] to restart the paused print job.
●For a secured or encrypted document, clicking [Resume] displays a screen to prompt you to enter the PIN.
Enter the correct PIN and click [OK].
* Not displayed when <Interrupt Print> is set to <Off> in the setting menu of the operation panel ( Interrupt
Print(P. 324) ).
●The status of all print jobs is displayed regardless of the settings of the Department ID Management.
●The factory default settings prevent some operations, such as deleting a document to print or
interrupting a print job, from being performed in General User Mode. If you want to operate
documents in General User Mode, log on in Management Mode and enable [Allow General User Job
Operation]. Enabling End Users to Operate Documents(P. 300)
●If you entered your user name when you logged on in General User Mode, your user name will only
be displayed on the documents that you printed.
●Click [Job No.] on the paused documents and secure documents to display detailed information. You
can check the user name and the page count of the printed document.
Checking History of Documents
The print history and e-mail reception history are displayed in list form.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 286) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Log]
[Job Log] (Print)
Print history can be displayed for each type of print.
[Job Log] (E-Mail RX)
The e-mail reception history is displayed. If an error occurs during e-mail reception, the applicable error code
is displayed in [RX Results]. E-Mail Reception Error Codes(P. 559)
Using Remote UI
296
[Display] (print history only)
When you select the print type from the drop-down list and click [Display], the history of the selected print
type is displayed in list form.
●If any optional SD card is not installed on the machine, the history is erased when a shutdown or hard reset
is performed.
●If you log into the machine in General User Mode when [Allow General User Job Operation] is active, the
document name for jobs other than yours is not shown but instead asterisks are shown, like "********".
Enabling End Users to Operate Documents(P. 300)
Checking Error Information
When an error occurs, this page will be displayed by clicking the message displayed under [Error Information] on
Portal Page (main page). Portal Page (Main Page)(P. 289)
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 286) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Error
Information]
Checking Device Specications
You can view the information including the maximum print speed and features of the machine.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 286) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device
Features]
Using Remote UI
297
Checking System Manager Information
Information about the machine and the system manager is displayed. This information is what has been set in
[Security] [Management Settings] on the [Settings/Registration] page ( Setting the System Manager
Password(P. 212) ).
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 286) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device
Information]
Checking Print Total Counter
The total number of pages that have been printed is displayed.
Using Remote UI
298
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 286) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Check
Counter]
Checking History of Toner Cartridges/Drum Cartridges
You can check usage logs for toner cartridges and drum cartridges.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 286) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Cartridge
Log]
LINKS
Remote UI Screens(P. 289)
Using Remote UI
299
Enabling End Users to Operate Documents
52AC-048
You can congure settings so that you can delete or interrupt the documents even when you log on to the Remote UI
in General User Mode.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Management Settings].
4Click [Edit].
Using Remote UI
300
5Enter the System Manager password in [Current System Manager Password].
6Select the [Allow General User Job Operation] check box and click [OK].
[Allow General User Job Operation]
If you select the check box, general users will be able to operate the documents of which the user name
matches the one that was used to log on. When you do not want to allow general users to operate
documents, clear the check box.
LINKS
Remote UI Screens(P. 289)
Using Remote UI
301
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI
52AC-049
You can change the various machine settings by using the Remote UI. Most of the settings can be set also on the
machine, but some settings can only be set using the Remote UI.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click the menu item you want to set, and click [Edit].
●For more information about the settings menu, see each item below
Menu items Referents
Preferences
Control Menu Control Menu(P. 312)
Paper Source Settings Select Feeder Menu(P. 468)
Network Network(P. 331)
Layout Layout(P. 352)
Print Quality Print Quality(P. 356)
Using Remote UI
302
Menu items Referents
User Maintenance User Maintenance(P. 374)
Output/Control
Utility Menu Printing Reports and Lists(P. 517)
Job Menu(P. 464)
Calibration Correcting Color Mismatch and Hues(P. 511)
Device Control You can control the status of the machine.
Online key(P. 27)
Soft Reset(P. 466)
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 67)
Management Settings
Department ID Management Setting the Department ID Management(P. 215)
Security Security(P. 207)
Import/Export Saving/Loading Registered Data(P. 304)
License/Other ●You can change messages shown on the message board and the link to the
support page that are displayed on the Portal Page (main page).
●You can register or update software ( Function Guide for Software
Registration and Update ).
●You may not be able to use this function in some countries or regions.
LINKS
Remote UI Screens(P. 289)
Setting Menu List(P. 310)
Using Remote UI
303
Saving/Loading Registered Data
52AC-04A
Menu options data that has been registered in the machine can be saved in your computer (export). Data that is saved
on your computer can also be registered in the machine (import). Data exported from this machine can be imported to
another machine of the same model. So you can easily copy a variety of settings data to multiple machines. To use
these features, it is required that you have logged on in Management Mode.
Saving Registered Data(P. 305)
Loading Registered Data(P. 307)
Do not turn OFF the machine until the export/import process is complete
●It may take a few minutes to complete the process. If the machine is turned OFF during the process, it may
result in damage to data or the machine.
Do not operate the machine during the export/import process
●Before exporting/importing, check that no operation such as printing documents is currently processing.
Import/export using the operation panel
●You can also save/load settings data via a USB memory device by using the operation panel of the machine.
Import/Export Set.(P. 395)
Using Remote UI
304
Saving Registered Data
52AC-04C
You can export machine settings data and save them in your computer. It is recommended that you regularly back up
important settings.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Import/Export] [Export].
4Select the settings to export, and set the encryption password.
Using Remote UI
305
[Settings/Registration Basic Information]
To export the settings data of items that can be set from [Settings/Registration] in the Portal Page, select this
check box.
[MEAP Application Setting Information]
To export the settings data of MEAP applications, select this check box.
[All PDL Setting Information]
To export the settings data of items that can be set from Settings Specic to Print Mode(P. 403) , select
this check box.
[Encryption Password]
Enter the password to encrypt data to be exported using characters. Enter the same password in [Conrm]. If
no password is set, data exporting is impossible.
●The password is required when exported data is imported. Loading Registered Data(P. 307)
5Click [Start Exporting].
6Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the location where the exported setting
data is saved.
➠The setting data will be saved.
LINKS
Remote UI Screens(P. 289)
Setting Menu List(P. 310)
Using Remote UI
306
Loading Registered Data
52AC-04E
Load (import) data that was exported from the machine. You can also import settings from another machine if it is the
same model as your machine.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Import/Export] [Import].
4Specify the setting le to be imported, and enter the password.
Using Remote UI
307
[File Path]
Click [Browse] and select the le.
[Decryption Password]
Enter the password set when the settings were exported.
5Click [Start Importing].
6Click [OK].
➠The specied setting data will be imported into the machine.
7Click [Restart].
➠The settings are enabled after the machine is restarted.
LINKS
Remote UI Screens(P. 289)
Setting Menu List(P. 310)
Using Remote UI
308
Setting Menu List
Setting Menu List ........................................................................................................................................... 310
Setup Menu ........................................................................................................................................................ 311
Control Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 312
Paper Source ................................................................................................................................................ 330
Network ....................................................................................................................................................... 331
Layout .......................................................................................................................................................... 352
Print Quality ................................................................................................................................................. 356
Interface ....................................................................................................................................................... 371
User Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 374
Priority of Setting Menu Items ............................................................................................................... 400
Print Mode .................................................................................................................................................... 401
Settings Specic to Print Mode ..................................................................................................................... 403
UFR II ..................................................................................................................................................... 404
PCL ........................................................................................................................................................ 405
Imaging ................................................................................................................................................. 411
XPS ........................................................................................................................................................ 421
PDF ........................................................................................................................................................ 432
PS .......................................................................................................................................................... 443
MEAP Settings .............................................................................................................................................. 453
Check Counter .............................................................................................................................................. 455
Initialize Menu .............................................................................................................................................. 457
Utility Menu ....................................................................................................................................................... 458
Job Menu ............................................................................................................................................................ 464
Reset Menu ........................................................................................................................................................ 466
Select Feeder Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 468
Setting Menu List
309
Setting Menu List
52AC-04F
There are various settings in this machine. You can adjust each of the settings in detail. Specify the settings from the
menu screens of the operation panel.
NOTE
Priority of settings
●Settings that are specied on the printer driver will
override those specied on the operation panel.
●When you perform USB Direct Print or Direct Print, the
settings specied for printing or stored in TIFF data
override those specied on the operation panel.
●You can print the setting menu in list form to check the current settings:
Conguration Page(P. 459)
Network Status Print(P. 459)
Setting Menu List
310
Setup Menu
52AC-04H
You can specify the settings for the operation environment of the machine and for
printing. When you press ( ) on the operation panel, the Setup menu
appears to show the setting items under each function item.
Control Menu(P. 312)
Paper Source(P. 330)
Network(P. 331)
Layout(P. 352)
Print Quality(P. 356)
Interface(P. 371)
User Maintenance(P. 374)
Print Mode(P. 401)
Settings Specic to Print Mode(P. 403)
MEAP Settings(P. 453)
Check Counter(P. 455)
Initialize Menu(P. 457)
Setting Menu List
311
Control Menu
52AC-04J
The settings about the sleep mode and how the machine should behave if an error
occurs are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger
().
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the options you are using, or other
setting items.
Sleep Mode(P. 312)
Sleep Even if Error(P. 313)
Deep Sleep Eco Prior(P. 313)
Auto Sleep Time(P. 313)
Sleep When Using USB(P. 313)
Timer Settings(P. 314)
Auto Skip Error(P. 315)
Language(P. 316)
Alarm(P. 316)
Show Warnings(P. 316)
Action When Warning(P. 320)
Date/Time Settings(P. 322)
Main Pwr Quick Start(P. 323)
SD Card(P. 324)
Interrupt Print(P. 324)
Sec. Print Del. Time(P. 324)
Secure Job Log(P. 324)
USB-Connected PC OS(P. 325)
PDL Selection (PnP)(P. 325)
Mng. Settings(P. 326)
RMT-SW(P. 326)
Adjust Screen(P. 326)
Animated Instruction(P. 327)
Show Toner Gauge(P. 327)
Set. Comp. Notify(P. 328)
Check Paper Settings(P. 328)
Scrolling Speed(P. 328)
Canon Genuine Mode(P. 329)
Sleep Mode
The sleep mode function reduces the amount of power consumed by the machine by temporarily stopping some
internal operations. Specify the sleep mode level. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 67)
High (Deep Sleep)
Mid (Printer Sleep)
Sleep mode levels
●The energy consumption reduction effect is smaller with <Mid (Printer Sleep)> and greater with <High (Deep
Sleep)>.
When you are using utility software related to network
●If you set sleep mode to <High (Deep Sleep)>, the utility software may fail in communication.
Setting Menu List
312
Sleep Even if Error
Select whether to automatically enter sleep mode when an error occurs.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Sleep Even if Error> <Off> or <On>
Deep Sleep Eco Prior
Select whether to further reduce power consumption when the machine and the computer are connected via USB.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Deep Sleep Eco Prior> <Off> or <On>
●It may be possible that when you do an operation to perform printing with this item set to <On>, the
machine does not exit the sleep mode. In that case, press to exit the sleep mode.
Auto Sleep Time
If the machine has not been operated or has had no data to print for a specied period of time, it enters sleep mode to
save energy consumption (Auto Sleep). Specify the period of time after which auto sleep is performed. We recommend
using the factory default settings to save the most power. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 67)
1 min.
5 min.
10 min.
15 min.
30 min.
60 min.
Sleep When Using USB *
Select whether to allow the machine to enter sleep mode when you are using USB over NW to access a USB device
from a computer via a network. Adv. Func. Settings(P. 371)
Do Not Allow
Setting Menu List
313
Allow
( ) <Control Menu> <Sleep When Using USB> <Do Not Allow> or
<Allow>
Timer Settings
You can specify the settings for the machine operations and time regarding Sleep Mode and for the Auto Reset
function that displays the main screen if any key is not pressed for a specied period of time.
Wake Up Timer
Select whether to automatically exit sleep mode at a specied time. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 67)
Off
On
Wake Up Time
Set the time to exit sleep mode if <Wake Up Timer> is set to <On>. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 67)
00:00 to 12:00 to 23:59
Auto Reset Time
If any key is not pressed for a specied period of time, the current menu screen automatically returns to the
main screen and the machine returns to the online mode (Auto Reset). Specify the interval at which the Auto
Reset is performed. Select <Off> to disable the Auto Reset function.
Off
10 sec.
20 sec.
30 sec.
40 sec.
50 sec.
1 min.
2 min.
3 min.
4 min.
5 min.
6 min.
7 min.
8 min.
9 min.
( ) <Control Menu> <Timer Settings> <Auto Reset
Time> Select the time
Setting Menu List
314
Sleep Timer
Select whether to automatically enter sleep mode at a specied time. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 67)
Off
On
Sleep Time
Set the time to enter sleep mode if <Sleep Timer> is set to <On>. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 67)
00:00 to 12:00 to 23:59
Calibration Timer
Select whether to automatically perform a calibration at a specied time.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Timer Settings> <Calibration
Timer> <Off> or <On>
Calibration Time
Set the time to perform a calibration if <Calibration Timer> is set to <On>.
00:00 to 12:00 to 23:59
( ) <Control Menu> <Timer Settings> <Calibration Time> Set
the time
Auto Skip Error
If an error occurs during printing, the printing is stopped. When you want to continue printing even if an error occurs,
specify <On>. For the errors during which the current print job is allowed to continue by this setting, see
"Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Auto Skip Error> <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
315
Language
You can change the language displayed on the operation panel screen, login screen of the remote UI, and the setting
lists.
Čeština
Dansk
Deutsch
English
Español
Français
Italiano
Magyar
Nederlands
Norsk
Polski
Português
Русский
Suomi
Svenska
Türkçe
中文(简体)
한국어
( ) <Control Menu> <Language> Select the language
Alarm
Select whether the machine beeps when a problem such as a paper jam or an operation mistake occurs.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Alarm> <Off> or <On>
Show Warnings
Select whether to inform about warnings by messages when the machine has entered the warning state.
Chk/Chg. Toner Cart.
Select whether to display an applicable message when the time to replace a toner cartridge is near.
Off
Setting Menu List
316
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Show Warnings> <Chk/Chg. Toner
Cart.> <Off> or <On>
Toner Cart. Life End
Select whether to display an applicable message when a toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Show Warnings> <Toner Cart. Life
End> <Off> or <On>
Chk/Chg. Drum Cart.
Select whether to display an applicable message when the time to replace a drum cartridge is near.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Show Warnings> <Chk/Chg. Drum
Cart.> <Off> or <On>
Drum Cart. Life End
Select whether to display an applicable message when a drum cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Show Warnings> <Drum Cart. Life
End> <Off> or <On>
Chk/Chg. Fixing Unit
Select whether to display an applicable message when the time to replace the xing unit is near.
Off
Setting Menu List
317
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Show Warnings> <Chk/Chg. Fixing
Unit> <Off> or <On>
Chk./Change ITB Unit
Select whether to display an applicable message when the time to replace the ITB unit is near.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Show Warnings> <Chk./Change ITB
Unit> <Off> or <On>
Chk/Chg. Waste Toner
Select whether to display an applicable message when the time to replace the waste toner container is near.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Show Warnings> <Chk/Chg. Waste
Toner> <Off> or <On>
Chk/Chg 2nd Trf. Rlr
Select whether to display an applicable message when the time to replace the secondary transfer outer roller is
near.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Show Warnings> <Chk/Chg 2nd Trf.
Rlr> <Off> or <On>
Chk/Chg Pckup/Fd Rlr
Select whether to display an applicable message when the time to replace the feeder roller is near.
Setting Menu List
318
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Show Warnings> <Chk/Chg Pckup/Fd
Rlr> <Off> or <On>
Fixing Unit Life End
Select whether to display an applicable message when the xing unit has reached the end of its lifetime.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Show Warnings> <Fixing Unit Life
End> <Off> or <On>
ITB Unit Life End
Select whether to display an applicable message when the ITB unit has reached the end of its lifetime.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Show Warnings> <ITB Unit Life
End> <Off> or <On>
Drawer Empty
Select whether to display an applicable message when the paper drawer runs out of paper.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Show Warnings> <Drawer Empty> <Off>
or <On>
E-Mail Trans. Error
Select whether to display an applicable message when a communication error occurs during E-Mail Print.
Setting Menu List
319
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Show Warnings> <E-Mail Trans.
Error> <Off> or <On>
Action When Warning
Specify how the machine should behave when a lifetime message for consumables appears.
Chk/Chg. Toner Cart.
Select whether to automatically stop printing when the toner cartridge will soon reach the end of its lifetime.
Continue Printing
Stop Printing
( ) <Control Menu> <Action When Warning> <Chk/Chg. Toner
Cart.> <Continue Printing> or <Stop Printing>
<Continue Printing>
When the time to replace a toner cartridge is near, the <X toner cartridge will soon reach lifetime.> message
is displayed, but the printing is continued.
<Stop Printing>
When the time to replace a toner cartridge is near, the <X toner cartridge will soon reach end of lifetime.>
message is displayed, and the printing is temporarily stopped. To resume the printing, press
( ).
●"X" in the above message represents a CMYK color.
Chk/Chg. Drum Cart.
Select whether to automatically stop printing when the time to replace a drum cartridge is near.
Continue Printing
Stop Printing
Setting Menu List
320
( ) <Control Menu> <Action When Warning> <Chk/Chg. Drum
Cart.> <Continue Printing> or <Stop Printing>
<Continue Printing>
When the time to replace a drum cartridge is near, the <Drum Cartridge N will soon reach end of lifetime.>
message is displayed, but the printing is continued.
<Stop Printing>
When the time to replace a drum cartridge is near, the <Drum Cartridge N will soon reach end of lifetime.>
message is displayed, and the printing is temporarily stopped. To resume the printing, press
( ).
●"N" in the above message represents a number from 1 to 4.
Chk/Chg. Waste Toner
Select whether to automatically stop printing when the time to replace the waste toner container is near.
Continue Printing
Stop Printing
( ) <Control Menu> <Action When Warning> <Chk/Chg. Waste
Toner> <Continue Printing> or <Stop Printing>
<Continue Printing>
When the time to replace the waste toner container is near, the <Change waste toner container soon.>
message is displayed, but the printing is continued.
<Stop Printing>
When the time to replace the waste toner container is near, the <Change waste toner container soon.>
message is displayed, and the printing is temporarily stopped. To resume the printing, press
( ).
Setting Menu List
321
Date/Time Settings
Set the current date and time.
Date
Set the current date in the order of Year, Month, and Day. Use / to move the cursor, and use the
numeric keys to specify the date.
01/01 2001 to 31/12 2030
( ) <Control Menu> <Date/Time Settings> <Date> Set the
date
Time (24 hour)
Specify the current time on a 24-hour basis. Use / to move the cursor, and use the numeric keys to
specify the time.
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
( ) <Control Menu> <Date/Time Settings> <Time (24
hour)> Set the time
Daylight Savings
Specify settings for daylight saving time.
DST Settings
Species whether to set the daylight saving time.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight
Savings> Check the message <DST Settings> <Off> or
<On> Perform a hard Reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Start Date/Time
Species the start date and time of daylight saving time.
Setting Menu List
322
Month
Week
Day
Time (24 hour)
( ) <Control Menu> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight
Savings> Check the message <Start Date/Time> Set the date and
time Perform a hard Reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
End Date/Time
Species the end date and time of daylight saving time.
Month
Week
Day
Time (24 hour)
( ) <Control Menu> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight
Savings> Check the message <End Date/Time> Set the date and
time Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Time Zone
Species the time zone according to the region where the machine is being used.
GMT-12:00 to GMT 00:00 to GMT+12:00
( ) <Control Menu> <Date/Time Settings> <Time Zone>
Check the message Set the time zone Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Main Pwr Quick Start
If you specify the quick startup settings, you can reduce the time from when the power switch is pressed until the
screens become operable. Performing a Quick Start of the Machine(P. 38)
Off
On
Setting Menu List
323
SD Card *
Enable or disable the SD card.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <SD Card> Check the message <Off> or
<On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Interrupt Print *
Select whether to allow use of the Interrupt Print function.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Interrupt Print> <Off> or <On>
Sec. Print Del. Time *
Set the time until secured documents stored in the machine are automatically deleted. Changing the Valid Time
Period for Secured Documents(P. 95)
1 hr.
2 hr.
3 hr.
6 hr.
12 hr.
24 hr.
Secure Job Log *
Depending on the timing of shutdown, a print log may not be generated and the total number of printed pages may
not be counted. If you set this function to <On>, print log generation and total printed page counting are surely
performed. However, the print speed will be slower.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
324
( ) <Control Menu> <Secure Job Log> Check the
message <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 466) )
USB-Connected PC OS
Select the OS of your computer connecting to the machine via USB.
Mac OS
Windows
Other
●Be sure to match the machine settings to the OS of your computer. If not matched, the computer will
not correctly recognize the machine.
●If the OS of your computer is OS X 10.10 or earlier and if you want to print from a printer driver via
USB, set this item to <Other>.
( ) <Control Menu> <USB-Connected PC OS> Check the message
Select the OS of the computer to connect to the machine Hard Reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
PDL Selection (PnP)
Specify a printer driver to be installed when the machine is connected to a computer via USB or it is searched over the
WSD network.
UFR II
UFR II (V4)
PCL6
PCL6 (V4)
PS3
XPS (Direct)
( ) <Control Menu> <PDL Selection (PnP)> Check the message
Select the page description language Perform a hard reset ( Performing a
Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Setting Menu List
325
Mng. Settings
Select whether to restrict the use of the ( ) key on the operation panel to prevent any settings from being
changed carelessly.
Settings Key Lock
If you select <On>, the Setup menu is not operable even if ( ) is pressed.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Mng. Settings> <Settings Key
Lock> Check the message <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, the Settings key can be unlocked from the Remote UI only. Restricting
Operation Panel Functions(P. 243)
RMT-SW
Use this machine leaving this item set to <Off>. You may be asked to change the setting to <On> to allow for remote
maintenance on your machine by a Canon service representative.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <RMT-SW> <Off> or <On>
Adjust Screen
You can adjust the contrast and brightness of the display.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast (difference in brightness between light and dark areas) of the display to suit the installation
location of the machine.
-3 to 0 to +3
Setting Menu List
326
( ) <Control Menu> <Adjust Screen> <Contrast> Use /
to adjust the contrast
Adjusting the contrast
Set a "+" value to brighten the screen. Set a "-" value to darken the screen.
Backlight Brightness
Adjust the backlight brightness of the display by selecting from three levels. Select <Off> to disable the
backlight.
Off
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
( ) <Control Menu> <Adjust Screen> <Backlight
Brightness> Select the brightness level
Animated Instruction
Select whether to show animated instructions on the display when a paper jam occurs or when you replace toner
cartridges or the like.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Animated Instruction> <Off> or <On>
Show Toner Gauge
Select whether to display the toner cartridge status indicator icon in the lower right of the display.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
327
( ) <Control Menu> <Show Toner Gauge> <Off> or <On>
Set. Comp. Notify
Specify how long a message that appears when a setting is changed is displayed in
seconds. If you select <Off>, the message will no longer be displayed.
Off
1 sec.
2 sec.
3 sec.
( ) <Control Menu> <Set. Comp. Notify> Select the number of
seconds
Check Paper Settings
Select whether to display a message prompting you to check the paper settings when you set a paper drawer.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Check Paper Settings> <Off> or <On>
Scrolling Speed
Adjust the speed for scrolling characters from the right to the left on the display by selecting from three levels.
Slow
Normal
Fast
Setting Menu List
328
( ) <Control Menu> <Scrolling Speed> Select the speed
Canon Genuine Mode
The mode for when Canon genuine toner cartridges are used.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Canon Genuine Mode> <Off> or <On>
●When necessary, the service representative may change the setting. If this item is not displayed, contact the
administrator of the machine.
Setting Menu List
329
Network
52AC-04L
All the settings about the network are listed with short descriptions. Default settings
are marked with a dagger ( ).
If <Network> is not displayed
●If <Network> under <Interface Selection> is set to <Off>, <Network> is not displayed in the Setup menu.
Interface Selection(P. 371)
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the options you are using, or other
setting items.
TCP/IP Settings(P. 331)
Mopria(P. 342)
Google Cloud Print(P. 343)
SMB(P. 343)
SNMP Settings(P. 344)
Spooler(P. 345)
Receive in Parallel(P. 346)
Wait Time at Startup(P. 346)
Remote UI Settings(P. 346)
Software Regist/Updt(P. 347)
Ethernet Driver(P. 347)
Sleep Mode Priority(P. 348)
IEEE802.1X(P. 348)
Address Filter(P. 349)
MAC Address(P. 349)
E-Mail Print Set.(P. 349)
Monitoring Service(P. 350)
Init. Network Set.(P. 351)
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings for using the machine in a TCP/IP network, such as IP address settings.
IPv4 Settings
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv4 network.
IPv4
Enable or disable IPv4 in the machine.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4
Settings> <IPv4> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a
Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Setting Menu List
331
IP Mode
Select how to set the IP address. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 151)
Auto
Manual
Protocol *
Select the protocol to use when <IP Mode> is set to <Auto>. If you set the selected protocol to <On>, the
other two protocols are automatically set to <Off>. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 151)
Use DHCP
Off
On
Use BOOTP
Off
On
Use RARP
Off
On
Auto IP *
Select whether to automatically obtain an IP address. Specify <On> when <IP Mode> is set to <Auto>.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 151)
Off
On
IP Address Settings
Congure the IP address, which is used for identifying devices, such as computers and printers, on a TCP/IP
network. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 151)
IP Address
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Subnet Mask
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Gateway Address
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
DNS
Specify settings for the server address of the Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP
address resolutions. Use / to move the cursor, and use the numeric keys to specify the address. Use
the Remote UI to specify other settings for DNS. Conguring DNS(P. 181)
Primary Address
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Secondary Address
Setting Menu List
332
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4
Settings> <DNS> Select the server to congure Set the
address Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
mDNS Settings *
Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers. Conguring DNS(P. 181)
mDNS
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4
Settings> <mDNS Settings> <mDNS> <Off> or <On> Perform a
hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
mDNS Name *
When <mDNS> is set to <On>, set this item.
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4
Settings> <mDNS Settings> <mDNS Name> Set the
name Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
DHCP Option
When DHCP is enabled, select whether to acquire the host name and whether to perform dynamic update of
the DNS using the DHCP options.
Acquire Host Name
Off
On
DNS Dynamic Update
Off
On
Setting Menu List
333
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4
Settings> <DHCP Option> <Acquire Host Name> or <DNS Dynamic
Update> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 466) )
IPv6 Settings
Select whether to use the machine in an IPv6 network. Use the Remote UI to specify the IPv6 address settings.
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 155)
IPv6
Enable or disable IPv6 in the machine.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv6
Settings> <IPv6> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a
Hard Reset(P. 466) )
mDNS Settings *
Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers. Conguring DNS(P. 181)
mDNS
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv6
Settings> <mDNS Settings> <mDNS> <Off> or <On> Perform a
hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Use IPv4 Name (mDNS) *
Off
On
Setting Menu List
334
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv6
Settings> <mDNS Settings> <Use IPv4 Name (mDNS)> <Off> or
<On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
mDNS Name *
When <Use IPv4 Name (mDNS)> is set to <Off>, set this item.
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv6
Settings> <mDNS Settings> <mDNS Name> Set the
name Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
WINS Resolution
Select whether to use Windows Internet Name Service (WINS), which provides a NetBIOS name for IP address
resolutions in a mixed network environment of NetBIOS and TCP/IP. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed
settings that are applied when WINS is enabled. Conguring WINS(P. 187)
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <WINS
Resolution> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 466) )
FTP
Select whether to change the settings for printing and those congured in the machine from FTP.
FTP Print
Select whether to print from FTP. Use the Remote UI to set the user name and password that are used to
print from FTP. Preparing for Using the FTP Server(P. 589)
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP
Settings> <FTP> <FTP Print> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard
reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Setting Menu List
335
Allow Set. via FTP
Select whether to change the settings congured in the machine from FTP.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP
Settings> <FTP> <Allow Set. via FTP> <Off> or <On> Perform a
hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
LPD Settings
Enable or disable LPD, a printing protocol that can be used on any hardware platform or operating system. Also,
set the time period after which the print job automatically ends when print data cannot be received due to a
communication error or some other problem. Use the Remote UI to specify settings for banner page printing
when LPD is enabled. Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 160)
LPD Print
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <LPD
Settings> <LPD Print> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
RX Timeout *
1 to 60 (min.)
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <LPD
Settings> <RX Timeout> Set Timeout Time Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
RAW Settings
Enable or disable RAW, a Windows specic printing protocol. Also, set the time period after which the print job
automatically ends when print data cannot be received due to a communication error or some other problem.
Use the Remote UI to specify settings for bidirectional communication. Conguring Printing Protocols and
WSD Functions(P. 160)
RAW Print
Off
Setting Menu List
336
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <RAW
Settings> <RAW Print> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
RX Timeout *
1 to 60 (min.)
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <RAW
Settings> <RX Timeout> Set Timeout Time Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
IPP Print
Enable or disable IPP, which enables printing from an external network via Internet. Use the Remote UI to
specify settings for TLS encryption of data to send and user authentication. Conguring Printing Protocols
and WSD Functions(P. 160)
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPP
Print> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
WSD
Enable or disable automatic browsing and acquiring information for the machine by using the WSD protocol.
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 160)
WSD Print
Select whether to print with the machine by using WSD.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
337
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP
Settings> <WSD> <WSD Print> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard
reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
WSD Browsing *
Select whether to acquire information of the machine from a computer by using WSD. If <WSD Print> is set to
<On>, <WSD Browsing> is xed to <On> and is not displayed in the setting menu.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP
Settings> <WSD> <WSD Browsing> <Off> or <On> Perform a
hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Multicast Discovery
Select whether to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP
Settings> <WSD> <Multicast Discovery> <Off> or <On> Perform
a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
●If <Multicast Discovery> is set to <Off>, the machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast
discovery messages are owing on the network.
HTTP
Enable or disable HTTP. HTTP is required for communications with a computer, such as when using the Remote
UI and performing WSD printing. Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 246)
Off
On
Proxy Settings
Specify settings for using the proxy server that relays HTTP communications. Setting a Proxy(P. 233)
Setting Menu List
338
Proxy
Enable or disable the proxy server when the machine performs HTTP communications.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Proxy
Settings> <Proxy> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a
Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Server Address *
Set the address of the proxy server to use. Specify the IP address, domain name, and other necessary
information that suit your operational environment. Use / to move the cursor, and use the numeric
keys to enter the address ( Entering Text(P. 34) ).
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Proxy
Settings> <Server Address> Enter the server address Perform a hard
reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Port Number *
Specify the port number of the proxy server to use.
1 to 80 to 65535
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Proxy
Settings> <Port Number> Enter the port number Perform a hard reset
( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Same Domain *
Enable or disable the proxy server even for performing HTTP communications with devices in the same
domain.
Use Proxy
Do Not Use Proxy
Setting Menu List
339
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Proxy
Settings> <Same Domain> <Use Proxy> or <Do Not Use Proxy> Perform
a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Proxy Authentication *
Enable or disable the authentication function of the proxy server.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Proxy
Settings> <Proxy Authentication> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset
( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
User Name *
To enable the proxy authentication, enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the user name to
authenticate. Use the numeric keys to enter the user name. ( Entering Text(P. 34) )
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Proxy
Settings> <User Name> Enter the user name Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Password *
To set the password for the proxy authentication, enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters. Use the numeric
keys to enter the password. ( Entering Text(P. 34) )
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Proxy
Settings> <Password> Enter the password Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
SNTP
Select whether to acquire time from a network time server. Use the Remote UI to specify the server address
settings. Conguring SNTP(P. 190)
Off
On
Setting Menu List
340
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP
Settings> <SNTP> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a
Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Discovery Response
Select whether to set the machine to respond to multicast discovery packets on the network. Use the Remote UI
to specify the scope name that is used to include the machine into a specic scope. Conguring Settings for
Device Management Software(P. 198)
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP
Settings> <Discovery Response> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
IPSec
Select whether to perform encrypted communication by establishing a virtual private network (VPN) via IPSec.
Use the Remote UI to register and specify the security policies. Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 256)
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP
Settings> <IPSec> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a
Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Sleep Notif. Set.
Specify settings for SLP communication to notify imageWARE of the power status of the machine. If you set
<Sleep Mode Notif.> to <On>, you can expect the machine to avoid unnecessary communication during sleep
mode and reduce the total power consumption. Conguring Settings for Device Management
Software(P. 198)
Sleep Mode Notif.
Enable or disable SLP communication. If you select <On>, the power status of the machine is notied to
imageWARE.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
341
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Sleep
Notif. Set.> <Sleep Mode Notif.> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Port Number *
Enter the port number for SLP communications with management software.
1 to 11427 to 65535
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Sleep
Notif. Set.> <Port Number> Use the numeric keys to enter the port
number Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Routers to Traverse *
Specify how many routers the notication packets can pass.
0 to 3 to 254
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Sleep
Notif. Set.> <Routers to Traverse> Use the numeric keys to enter the number of
routers to traverse Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Notif. Interval *
Specify how often the machine noties imageWARE of its power status.
60 to 600 to 65535
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Sleep
Notif. Set.> <Notif. Interval> Use the numeric keys to enter the notication
interval Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Mopria
Select whether to use Mopria®. Printing by Mopria®(P. 130)
Setting Menu List
342
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <Mopria> <Off> or
<On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Google Cloud Print
Enable or disable Google Cloud Print. Changing Google Cloud Print Settings(P. 139)
Use Cloud Print
Off
On
Registration Status
SMB *
Select whether to use the machine as a shared printer on the SMB network. Use the Remote UI to specify other SMB
settings including the server name and the workgroup name. Conguring SMB(P. 201)
SMB Server
Select whether to display the machine as an SMB Server on the SMB network conguration screen.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <SMB> <SMB
Server> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 466) )
SMB Print *
Enable or disable SMB Print.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <SMB> <SMB
Print> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Setting Menu List
343
SNMP Settings
Specify the settings for monitoring and controlling the machine from a computer running SNMP-compatible software.
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 193)
SNMPv1 Settings
Specify settings for using SNMPv1. Use the Remote UI to specify a community name and access privileges to
Management Information Base (MIB) objects.
SNMPv1
Enable or disable SNMPv1.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <SNMP
Settings> <SNMPv1 Settings> <SNMPv1> <Off> or
<On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Dctd. Community Set.
Dedicated Community is a preset community, intended exclusively for administrators using Canon software,
such as iW Management Console. Select the access privilege to Management Information Base (MIB) objects.
Dctd. Community
Off
Read/Write
Read Only
( ) <Network> Check the message <SNMP
Settings> <SNMPv1 Settings> <Dctd. Community Set.> <Dctd.
Community> Select the access privilege Perform a hard reset ( Performing a
Hard Reset(P. 466) )
SNMPv3 Settings
Specify settings for using SNMPv3. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed settings that are applied when
SNMPv3 is enabled.
SNMPv3
Enable or disable SNMPv3.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
344
( ) <Network> Check the message <SNMP Settings> <SNMPv3
Settings> <SNMPv3> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
User Settings N (N=1, 2, 3, 4, 5) *
Specify the authentication password and encryption password as the user information used on SNMPv3. Use
the Remote UI to register the user information. Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with
SNMP(P. 193)
Auth. Password /Encryption Password
Enter 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters for each password. Use the numeric keys to enter the password.
( ) <Network> Check the message <SNMP
Settings> <SNMPv3 Settings> Select the user settings number Check the
user name <Auth. Password> or <Encryption Password> Enter the
password Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Rjct Packet in Sleep
Select whether to discard SNMP packets received during sleep mode.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <SNMP Settings> <Rjct
Packet in Sleep> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 466) )
●If you select <On>, applications that use the SNMP protocol, such as Canon software imageWARE
Series, may be disabled to access the machine.
Spooler *
Select whether to include the SD card in the storage locations of received print data. If you select <On>, the machine
capacity of receiving print data is increased.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
345
( ) <Network> Check the message <Spooler> <Off> or
<On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Receive in Parallel
Species whether to print jobs in the order received when print data for several jobs are sent to the printer from one
computer. If you select <Off>, jobs are printed in the order received but printing speed may be slower.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <Receive in Parallel> <Off>
or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
●Even if you select <Off>, jobs may not be saved in the order received in some cases, for example when
the Stored Job Print function is being executed.
Wait Time at Startup
Specify a wait time for connecting to a network. Select the setting depending on the network environment. Setting a
Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 180)
0 to 300 (sec.)
Remote UI Settings
Specify settings for using the Remote UI. You can use the Remote UI to specify settings for the machine from a Web
browser.
Remote UI
Enable or disable the Remote UI. Disabling Remote UI(P. 247)
Off
On
RUI Access Sec. Set.
Select whether to use a PIN to access the Remote UI. Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 222)
Off
On
Setting Menu List
346
TLS *
Enable or disable TLS for Remote UI communications. To use TLS for encrypted communications, you need to
set key pairs by using the Remote UI ( Using TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 252) ), respectively.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <Remote UI
Settings> <TLS> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a
Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Software Regist/Updt *
When you register or update a MEAP application, you can check for communication with a distribution server to
connect to.
Software Mngt. Set.
Communication Test
( ) <Network> Check the message <Software Regist/Updt>
<Software Mngt. Set.> <Communication Test> <Yes> Check the message
Check the message
Ethernet Driver
Specify the Ethernet communication mode (half duplex/full duplex) and Ethernet type (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX/1000
Base-T). Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 178)
Auto Detect
Select whether to automatically detect or manually select the communication mode and the Ethernet type.
Off
On
Communication Mode *
If <Auto Detect> is set to <Off>, select the Ethernet communication mode.
Half Duplex
Full Duplex
Setting Menu List
347
Ethernet Type *
If <Auto Detect> is set to <Off>, select the Ethernet type.
10 Base-T
100 Base-TX
1000 Base-T
Sleep Mode Priority
Select whether to give priority to rapid returning from sleep mode or greater energy saving effect of sleep mode.
Optimal Balance
Exit Speed
Energy Saving
( ) <Network> Check the message <Sleep Mode
Priority> Select the settings item Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 466) )
Optimal Balance
The machine returns from sleep mode rapidly. When the devices directly connected to the machine support
EEE (Energy Ecient Ethernet), power consumption can be reduced to a greater degree. Normally use this
setting.
Exit Speed
The machine returns from sleep mode more rapidly.
Energy Saving
Communication speed during sleep mode is reduced for lowest power consumption.
●This item is available when <Sleep Mode> is set to <High (Deep Sleep)>. Entering Sleep
Mode(P. 67)
IEEE802.1X
Enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed settings that are applied when
IEEE802.1X authentication is enabled. Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 266)
Setting Menu List
348
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <IEEE802.1X> Check the
message <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 466) )
Address Filter
Enable or disable communication restricted with the IP address and MAC address. Use the Remote UI to specify the
address to restrict. Basic Printing Operations(P. 75)
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <Address Filter> <Off> or
<On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
MAC Address
Check the MAC address of the machine, which is a number unique to each communication device.
(Display only)
( ) <Network> Check the message <MAC Address>
E-Mail Print Set.
Specify settings for using the E-Mail Print function. Use the Remote UI to specify other settings for E-Mail Print
including the mail server settings. Printing Received E-mail (E-Mail Print)(P. 121)
POP3 RX Interval
Specify the interval for automatically connecting to the mail server in minutes. New e-mails in the mailbox of the
mail server are automatically received and printed at the specied time intervals.
0 to 90 (min.)
Setting Menu List
349
( ) <Network> Check the message <E-Mail Print Set.> <POP3
RX Interval> Use the numeric keys to enter the interval of auto e-mail
reception Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
●If you select "0," e-mails are not automatically received. In this case, receive e-mails manually.
Manually Receiving E-Mails(P. 125)
POP3 RX
Enable or disable E-Mail Print for the POP3 mail server.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <E-Mail Print Set.> <POP3
RX> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
SMTP RX
Enable or disable E-Mail Print for the SMTP protocol.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <E-Mail Print Set.> <SMTP
RX> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Monitoring Service
Enable communication with a remote monitoring server and display of communication logs.
Comm. Test
Enable communication with a remote monitoring server. Execution of this item enables information about the
machine to be periodically sent to the remote monitoring server connected to the machine.
Setting Menu List
350
( ) <Network> Check the message <Monitoring
Service> <Comm. Test> Check the message <Yes>
Comm. Log
Display communication logs including error information generated with <Comm. Test>.
(Display only)
( ) <Network> Check the message <Monitoring
Service> <Comm. Log> Select the log Select the time
Init. Network Set.
Select to return the Network Settings to the factory defaults. Initializing the Network Settings(P. 534)
Setting Menu List
351
Layout
52AC-04R
The settings about print appearance including gutter margins and print positions
are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Number of Copies(P. 352)
Offset Y/Offset X(P. 352)
Binding Location(P. 353)
Gutter(P. 354)
Alternative Method(P. 355)
Number of Copies
Specify the number of copies.
1 to 9999
( ) <Layout> <Number of Copies> Use the numeric keys to enter the
number of copies
Offset Y/Offset X
You can specify settings for shifting the print position for all types of printing in 0.5 mm increments regardless of the
paper source.
-50.0 to 0.0 to +50.0 (mm)
( ) <Layout> <Offset Y> or <Offset X> Use / to enter the offset
value
<Offset Y>
Shifts the print position vertically.
Setting Menu List
352
<Offset X>
Shifts the print position horizontally.
Offset values
For <Offset Y>, set a plus (+) value to shift the print position downward. For <Offset X>, set a plus (+) value to
shift the print position rightward. Set a minus (-) value to shift the print position in the opposite direction.
<Offset Y> <Offset X>
Specifying ne settings for the print position
You can select <Adj. Print Position> under <User Maintenance> to nely specify the print position for each paper
source. The range of available offset values is from -5.0 mm to +5.0 mm in the vertical direction and from -3.5
mm to +3.5 mm in the horizontal direction. Adjusting Print Position(P. 513)
Binding Location
Select whether to bind the long edge or short edge of the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler. In this case,
specify settings for <Gutter> to adjust the binding margin, as well.
Long Edge
Short Edge
( ) <Layout> <Binding Location> <Long Edge> or <Short Edge>
<Long Edge>
Select to bind the printouts along the long edge.
<Short Edge>
Select to bind the printouts along the short edge.
Setting Menu List
353
Gutter
Adjust the margin width of the edge specied in <Binding Location> by shifting the print position of the print data. If
you select "0.0", the margin will not be changed.
-50.0 to 0.0 to +50.0 (mm)
( ) <Layout> <Gutter> Use / to enter the offset value
Margin values
Specify the direction and width for shifting the print position of the print data. The edge where the margin is
changed varies depending on whether a "+" or "-" value is set. You can adjust the margin width in 0.5 mm
increments.
Portrait-oriented document
Setting Value Long edge binding Short edge binding
"+" value Left end of paper
(for left binding)
Upper end of paper
(for top binding)
"-" value Right end of paper
(for right binding)
Lower end of paper
(for bottom binding)
Landscape-oriented document
Setting Value Long edge binding Short edge binding
"+" value Left end of paper
(for top binding)
Upper end of paper
(for right binding)
Setting Menu List
354
Setting Value Long edge binding Short edge binding
"-" value Right end of paper
(for bottom binding)
Upper end of paper
(for right binding)
Alternative Method
When you perform 2-sided printing of a document that consists of an odd number of pages, you can select whether to
process the last page in 1-sided printing mode. If you select <On>, the printing will be nished faster than the regular
2-sided printing.
Off
On
( ) <Layout> <Alternative Method> <Off> or <On>
When the printing of a document consisting of an even number of pages nishes in 1-
sided printing mode
In the following cases, the last page is processed in 1-sided printing mode even if the document consists of an
even number of pages.
●The last page is blank.
●The last page cannot be printed for a reason such as the paper size is not available for 2-sided printing.
When paper with preprinted logo is used
●If the last page is processed in 1-sided printing mode with <Alternative Method> to <On>, the orientation or
print side of the last page may not match those of other pages. In this case, set <Alternative Method> to
<Off>.
Setting Menu List
355
Print Quality
52AC-04S
The settings about print quality including the gradation and toner density are listed
with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on other setting items.
Gradation(P. 356)
Toner Save(P. 357)
Density: X (X=C, M, Y, K)(P. 357)
Density X (Fine Adj) (X=C, M, Y, K)(P. 357)
Color Mode(P. 357)
Halftones(P. 358)
Gray Compensation(P. 359)
CMS(P. 360)
Gradation Settings(P. 365)
Advanced Smoothing(P. 366)
Toner Volume Corr.(P. 367)
Line Control(P. 367)
Reduce Quality(P. 368)
Sp. Smoothing Mode(P. 368)
Gradation
Specify the gradation for processing print data.
High 1
High 2
( ) <Print Quality> <Gradation> <High 1> or <High 2>
<High 1>
This print mode is suitable for printing photos or the like at average quality.
<High 2>
Specify this setting to print photos or the like at high quality.
Setting Menu List
356
Toner Save
Specify this setting when you want to check the nishing such as the layout before printing a large job, for example.
Since this printing mode saves toner, ne lines and portions with lighter print density may become blurred.
Off
On
( ) <Print Quality> <Toner Save> <Off> or <On>
Density: X (X=C, M, Y, K) *
For each CMYK color, adjust the toner density to apply to printing. This item is not displayed when <Toner Save> is set
to <On>. Adjusting Print Density(P. 509)
-8 to 0 to +8
Density X (Fine Adj) (X=C, M, Y, K) *
For each CMYK color, you can make ne adjustment of the toner density applied to printing separately for three
different density areas. This item is not displayed when <Toner Save> is set to <On>. Adjusting Print
Density(P. 509)
High
-8 to 0 to +8
Medium
-8 to 0 to +8
Low
-8 to 0 to +8
Color Mode
Specify whether to print in color or black and white.
Auto (Color/Black)
Color
Black
( ) <Print Quality> <Color Mode> Select the color mode
Setting Menu List
357
<Auto (Color/Black)>
Automatically select color or black and white printing depending on the type of document.
<Color>
Print in color.
<Black>
Print in black and white even when the document is in color.
Halftones
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker
areas of an image).
Error Diffusion
This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.
Off
On
( ) <Print Quality> <Halftones> <Error Diffusion> <Off> or
<On>
●The stability of the texture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.
Resolution/Grad. *
Select the halftone reproduction method when <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. You can set this item for each of
the types of image contained in one document.
Text
Resolution
Gradation
Graphics
Resolution
Gradation
Image
Resolution
Setting Menu List
358
Gradation
( ) <Print Quality> <Halftones> <Resolution/Grad.> Select the
image data type <Resolution> or <Gradation>
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<Resolution>
Performs ne printing by sharply reproducing the edges of characters. This print mode is suitable for
printing data of characters and thin lines with a clear nish.
<Gradation>
Prints gradation and lines with a smooth nish. This print mode is suitable for printing gures and charts
with gradation.
Gray Compensation
For black or gray data with color information dening R=G=B, select whether to print with black (K) toner only or print
with CMYK 4-color toner. You can set this item for each of the types of image contained in one document.
Text
Off
On
Graphics
Off
On
Image
Off
On
( ) <Print Quality> <Gray Compensation> Select the image data type
<Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
359
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<Off>
Prints with CMYK 4-color toner. Reproducibility of gradation of dark colors is better than with <On>.
<On>
Prints with black (K) toner only. Color mismatch due to use of color (CMY) toner can be prevented.
CMS
Set the processing methods for color correction. You can make different settings for different data types contained in
one document.
CMS Selection
Set whether to perform color correction on the printer side or the host side (printer driver side).
Printer
Host
( ) <Print Quality> <CMS> <CMS Selection> <Printer> or
<Host>
CMS/Gamma
Select the processing mode for color printing. You can set this item for each of the types of image contained in
one document.
Text
CMS
Gamma
Graphics
CMS
Gamma
Image
CMS
Gamma
Setting Menu List
360
( ) <Print Quality> <CMS> <CMS/Gamma> Select the image
data type <CMS> or <Gamma>
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<CMS>
Use a prole for color matching.
<Gamma>
Perform color correction by setting a gamma value for brightness adjustment.
RGB Source Prole
Select a suitable prole for RGB data that matches the monitor that you are using. You can set this item for each
of the types of image contained in one document.
Text
sRGB v3.0 (Canon)
Canon HDTV gamma 1.5
Canon HDTV gamma 1.8
Canon HDTV gamma 2.4
Graphics
sRGB v3.0 (Canon)
Canon HDTV gamma 1.5
Canon HDTV gamma 1.8
Canon HDTV gamma 2.4
Image
sRGB v3.0 (Canon)
Canon HDTV gamma 1.5
Canon HDTV gamma 1.8
Canon HDTV gamma 2.4
( ) <Print Quality> <CMS> <RGB Source Prole> Select the
image data type Select the prole
Setting Menu List
361
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<sRGB v3.0 (Canon)>
An RGB prole is used that is similar to an average prole of most Windows PC monitors. When using a
monitor that supports sRGB, you can print colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor.
<Canon HDTV gamma 1.5> to <Canon HDTV gamma 2.4>
When you want a brightness adjustment after making comparison between the printed colors and the colors
displayed on the monitor, make a necessary setting here. The higher the value, the darker the printed colors.
●This item is available when <CMS/Gamma> is set to <CMS>.
Output Prole
You can select suitable proles for data that you are going to print. You can set this item for each of the types of
image contained in one document.
Text
Normal
Photo
Graphics
Normal
Photo
Image
Normal
Photo
( ) <Print Quality> <CMS> <Output Prole> Select the image
data type <Normal> or <Photo>
Setting Menu List
362
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<Normal>
Color matching is performed so that data is printed in colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor.
<Photo>
Color matching is performed so that the print result is similar to photography.
●This item is available when <CMS/Gamma> is set to <CMS>.
Matching Method
Specify which element to be given priority over others in color matching by <RGB Source Prole>. You can set
this item for each of the types of image contained in one document.
Text
Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
Graphics
Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
Image
Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
( ) <Print Quality> <CMS> <Matching Method> Select the
image data type Select the matching method
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
Setting Menu List
363
<Perceptual>
Matching is performed with priority given to color perceptual.
<Saturation>
Matching is performed with priority given to saturation.
<Colorimetric>
Matching is performed so that color difference between originals and printouts is minimized.
Gamma Correction
Brightness adjustment can be performed so that the brightness of the brightest and darkest parts of the
original is not effected in the print result. You can set this item for each of the types of image contained in one
document.
Text
1.0
1.4
1.8
2.2
Graphics
1.0
1.4
1.8
2.2
Image
1.0
1.4
1.8
2.2
( ) <Print Quality> <CMS> <Gamma Correction> Select the
image data type Select the setting value
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
Setting Menu List
364
<1.0> to <2.2>
Set this item when you want to adjust the brightness of printouts. <1.4> is the standard setting (no
correction), and the larger the setting value, the darker the print will be.
●This item is available when <CMS/Gamma> is set to <Gamma>.
Gradation Settings
Make settings for the smoothing mode that enables gradations in lines, gures, or images such as photos to be
printed smoothly.
Gradation
Specify whether to enable or disable the smoothing mode. Gradations are printed more smoothly with <Smooth
2> than with <Smooth 1>.
Off
Smooth 1
Smooth 2
( ) <Print Quality> <Gradation Settings> <Gradation> Select
the processing method
Graphics *
Specify whether to apply the smoothing mode to lines and gures when <Gradation> is set to <Smooth 1> or
<Smooth 2>.
Off
On
( ) <Print Quality> <Gradation Settings> <Graphics> <Off> or
<On>
Image *
Specify whether to apply the smoothing mode to image data such as photos when <Gradation> is set to
<Smooth 1> or <Smooth 2>.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
365
( ) <Print Quality> <Gradation Settings> <Image> <Off> or
<On>
Advanced Smoothing
Make settings for the smoothing mode that enables edges of lines, gures and text are printed smoothly.
Advanced Smoothing
Specify whether to enable or disable the smoothing mode. Edges will be smoother with <Smooth 2> than with
<Smooth 1>.
Off
Smooth 1
Smooth 2
( ) <Print Quality> <Advanced Smoothing> <Advanced
Smoothing> Select the processing method
Graphics *
Specify whether to apply the smoothing mode to lines and gures when <Advanced Smoothing> is set to
<Smooth 1> or <Smooth 2>.
Off
On
( ) <Print Quality> <Advanced Smoothing> <Graphics> <Off>
or <On>
Text *
Specify whether to apply the smoothing mode to text when <Advanced Smoothing> is set to <Smooth 1> or
<Smooth 2>.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
366
( ) <Print Quality> <Advanced Smoothing> <Text> <Off> or
<On>
Toner Volume Corr.
Set how to adjust the toner volume when printing high density areas.
Normal
Gradation Priority
Text Priority
( ) <Print Quality> <Toner Volume Corr.> Select the correction
method
<Normal>
Prints text and lines using the toner volume that will preserve resolution, and prints the other types of data
with the toner volume that will preserve hue.
<Gradation Priority>
Prints all types of data using the toner volume that will preserve hue.
<Text Priority>
Prints all types of data using the toner volume that will preserve resolution.
Line Control
Set the image processing method for lines.
Resolution Priority
Gradation Priority
Setting Menu List
367
( ) <Print Quality> <Line Control> <Resolution Priority> or <Gradation
Priority>
<Resolution Priority>
Processes lines so that resolution is preserved to a similar extent to the processing of text.
<Gradation Priority>
Processes lines so that hue and gradation are preserved to a similar extent to the processing of gures.
Reduce Quality
Select whether to continue printing by automatically reducing the quality when insucient memory is available for the
processing.
Continue Printing
Stop Printing
( ) <Print Quality> <Reduce Quality> <Continue Printing> or <Stop
Printing>
●If you select <Stop Printing>, an error message is displayed and the printing is stopped when the machine
runs out of memory. You can press ( ) to resume the printing by reducing the quality.
Sp. Smoothing Mode
Change the setting if output print density is uneven or print nish is not smooth.
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Setting Menu List
368
( ) <Print Quality> <Sp. Smoothing Mode> Select the mode
<Mode 1>
Use this setting for most environments.
<Mode 2>
Specify this setting if the internal area of high density gures, large characters, or thick lines cannot be
printed with a smooth nish.
<Mode 3>
Specify this setting when the following symptoms are observed at a time.
●The internal area of high density gures, large characters, or thick lines cannot be printed with a smooth
nish.
●The perimeter of low density gures, characters, or lines cannot be printed with a smooth nish.
●Characters and lines on a solid background cannot be printed with a smooth nish.
Setting Menu List
369
<Mode 4>
Specify this setting when the perimeter of low density gures, characters, or lines cannot be printed with a
smooth nish.
<Mode 5>
Specify this setting when stripes appear on images such as photos, gures, gradations, or shaded patterns,
resulting in uneven printouts.
<Mode 6>
Specify this setting if printing is not smooth as a whole.
●When <Mode 2> or <Mode 4> is specied, areas of low density may be unevenly colored.
●When <Mode 3> is specied, areas of thin density or shaded patterns may be unevenly colored.
●When <Mode 5> is specied, the perimeter of characters, lines, or gures may not be printed smoothly.
●When <Mode 6> is specied, color unevenness may appear.
Setting Menu List
370
Interface
52AC-04U
All the settings about interfaces for communications with a computer and USB are
listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the options you are using, or other
setting items.
Interface Selection(P. 371)
Timeout(P. 372)
Connection Recog.(P. 373)
Extended RX Buffer(P. 373)
Interface Selection
Select the interface used for the machine.
USB
Enable or disable the USB port. Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer(P. 240)
Off
On
Network
Enable or disable the LAN port. Disabling the LAN Port(P. 248)
Off
On
USB Adv. Functions
Specify settings for selecting a function to use a USB device or selecting a device driver to use.
Adv. Func. Settings
Select which of MEAP applications and USB over NW to be given priority when a USB device is connected to
the machine.
Meap Priority
USB Over NW Priority
Setting Menu List
371
( ) <Interface> <Interface Selection> Check the
message <USB Adv. Functions> <Adv. Func. Settings> <Meap Priority> or
<USB Over NW Priority> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
<Meap Priority>
Specify this to give priority to MEAP applications.
<USB Over NW Priority>
Specify this to give priority to USB over NW. This function enables you to use, from your computer, a USB
device connected to the machine's USB port.
USB Storage Device
Specify settings for the device driver for using a USB memory device.
MEAP Driver
Enable or disable the MEAP specic device driver when a USB memory device is attached to the machine.
When you want to perform the direct print function (USB Direct Print) from a USB memory device without
using a computer, select <Off>.
Off
On
( ) <Interface> <Interface Selection> Check the
message <USB Adv. Functions> <USB Storage Device> <MEAP
Driver> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 466) )
Timeout
Specify how the machine should behave if receiving print data is interrupted.
Timeout
Select whether to cancel printing if print data receiving is interrupted for a specied period of time.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
372
( ) <Interface> <Timeout> <Timeout> <Off> or <On>
Timeout Time *
Set the time period until a timeout error occurs.
5 to 15 to 300 (seconds)
( ) <Interface> <Timeout> <Timeout Time> Use the numeric
keys to set the time period
Connection Recog.
A problem such as improper overlay printing or garbled characters may occur during printing via wired LAN
connection. In this case, set <Connection Recog.> to <Off>.
Off
On
( ) <Interface> <Connection Recog.> Check the
message <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 466) )
Extended RX Buffer
Select whether to increase the space of the memory built in the machine for receiving print data from a computer. If
you select <On>, the time until the computer will be freed from print data processing or transmission can be reduced
when the computer sends a large volume of data or complicatedly structured data.
Off
On
( ) <Interface> <Extended RX Buffer> Check the
message <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 466) )
Setting Menu List
373
User Maintenance
52AC-04W
The settings about adjustment of the machine including print position correction
for each paper source and print quality improvement are listed with short
descriptions. You can specify those settings when the machine is oine. Default
settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the options you are using, or other
setting items.
Adj. Print Position(P. 374)
Recovery Printing(P. 375)
Initialize Counter(P. 375)
Check Paper Size(P. 376)
Corr Consc Prnt Void(P. 377)
Substitute Size(P. 377)
Auto Detect Ppr Type(P. 377)
Short Edge Fd. Prty.(P. 378)
Special Image Mode(P. 378)
Sp. Transfer Mode(P. 379)
Wrinkle Correction(P. 379)
Sp. Fixing Mode 4(P. 379)
Improve Toner Fixing(P. 380)
Clr/B&W Switch Mode(P. 380)
Charged Rlr Cleaning(P. 381)
Corr. Drum Line(P. 381)
Special Density Mode(P. 381)
SD Card Maintenance(P. 382)
Special Print Mode(P. 382)
Special Print Mode E(P. 388)
Update Firmware(P. 389)
First Calibration(P. 389)
Paper Feed Method(P. 390)
Adjust Standby Temp(P. 390)
Show Job List(P. 391)
Paper Delivery Adj.(P. 391)
Rdc Hvy 3 Clr Msmtch(P. 392)
Corr. Color Mismatch(P. 392)
Correct B&W Density(P. 392)
POP Printing Speed(P. 393)
POP Prnt Color Corr.(P. 393)
Toner Warning Mode(P. 394)
Auto POP Calibration(P. 394)
Import/Export Set.(P. 395)
Calibration Freq.(P. 396)
Notify to Clean(P. 396)
Clean. Notif. Timing(P. 396)
Toner Check Timing(P. 396)
Spec Tnr Chk Timing(P. 397)
Drum Check Timing(P. 397)
Spec Drum Chk Timing(P. 397)
Action When Tnr. Out(P. 398)
Rdc Bndg for Low Spd(P. 398)
Reduce Margin Stain(P. 399)
Control Condensation(P. 399)
Adj. Print Position
You can adjust the print position for each paper source. Adjusting Print Position(P. 513)
Offset Y (2-Sided)
You can adjust the vertical print position for printing on the rst page (front side) in 2-sided printing mode. The
print position on the second page (back side) follows the settings for the paper source available when the
printing is started.
-5.0 to 0.0 to +5.0 (mm)
Setting Menu List
374
Offset X (2-Sided)
You can adjust the horizontal print position for printing on the rst page (front side) in 2-sided printing mode.
The print position on the second page (back side) follows the settings for the paper source available when the
printing is started.
Multi-Purpose Tray
-3.5 to 0.00 to +3.5 (mm)
Drawer 1 to 5 *
-3.5 to 0.00 to +3.5 (mm)
Offset Y (MP Tray)
You can adjust the vertical print position for printing on paper from the multi-purpose tray.
-5.0 to 0.0 to +5.0 (mm)
Offset X (MP Tray)
You can adjust the horizontal print position for printing on paper from the multi-purpose tray.
-3.5 to 0.00 to +3.5 (mm)
Offset Y (Drawer 1 to 5) *
You can adjust the vertical print position for printing on paper fed from a paper drawer.
-5.0 to 0.0 to +5.0 (mm)
Offset X (Drawer 1 to 5) *
You can adjust the horizontal print position for printing on paper fed from a paper drawer.
-3.5 to 0.00 to +3.5 (mm)
Recovery Printing
Select whether to print again the page of which printing was interrupted by a paper jam or an error.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Recovery Printing> <Off> or <On>
Initialize Counter
Initialize the count of printed pages for each consumable part.
2nd Trf Outer Roller
Initialize the count of pages printed using the same secondary transfer outer roller. Conduct this operation
when replacement of the secondary transfer outer roller has been performed.
Setting Menu List
375
( ) <User Maintenance> <Initialize Counter> <2nd Trf Outer
Roller> <Yes>
MP Tray Pickup Rlr.
Initialize the count of pages printed using the same multi-purpose tray pickup roller. Conduct this operation
when replacement of the multi-purpose tray pickup roller has been performed.
( ) <User Maintenance> <Initialize Counter> <MP Tray Pickup
Rlr.> <Yes>
Cassette 1 Feed Rlr. to Cassette 5 Feed Rlr. *
Initialize the count of pages printed using the same feeder roller. Conduct this operation when replacement of
the feeder roller has been performed.
( ) <User Maintenance> <Initialize Counter> <Cassette 1 Feed Rlr. to
Cassette 5 Feed Rlr.> <Yes>
Check Paper Size
Select whether to check the size of paper that is fed from the paper source with the paper size set to <Free Size>. If you
select <On>, the message for conrming the paper size is displayed and the printing is stopped when the size of the
paper fed from the paper source does not match the print data.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Check Paper Size> <Off> or <On>
●If the difference in size between the fed paper and the print data is not so large, it is possible that no
message will be displayed and the printing will be continued even when the selected setting is <On>.
Setting Menu List
376
Corr Consc Prnt Void
Continuous printing may result in uneven print density. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Corr Consc Prnt Void> <Off> or <On>
Substitute Size
Select whether to print by substituting A4 size paper and Letter size paper with each other. If you select <On>, Letter
size paper is used for printing when you have specied A4 size paper for printing from a computer but the A4 size
paper is not loaded in the machine.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Substitute Size> <Off> or <On>
Auto Detect Ppr Type
You can optimize the automatic paper type detection function ( Auto Detect Ppr Type(P. 472) ) depending on the
paper size that you use most frequently. We recommend that you normally use the factory default setting for this
function.
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
( ) <User Maintenance> <Auto Detect Ppr Type> Select the
mode
Setting Menu List
377
<Mode 1>
Specify this setting if you frequently use <Plain L> or <Plain L2> of A4 or A3 size.
<Mode 2>
Specify this setting if you frequently use <Plain> of A4 or A3 size.
<Mode 3>
Specify this setting if you frequently use <Plain> of Letter or Ledger size.
●This item is enabled when <Auto Detect Ppr Type> in the Select Feeder Menu(P. 468) is set to other than
<Do Not Use>.
●If you change the factory default setting to any other setting, automatic paper type detection may be
incorrect.
Short Edge Fd. Prty.
When printing on paper of a size that allows for loading both in portrait and landscape orientations, set this item to
<On> if you want the paper in landscape orientation to be fed preferentially. This setting applies only when <Paper
Source> to <Auto>.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Short Edge Fd. Prty.> <Off> or <On>
Special Image Mode
Set this item if the central area of characters or lines of dark density cannot be printed. The improvement effect is
stronger with <Level 2> than with <Level 1>.
Off
Level 1
Level 2
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Image Mode> Select the level
Setting Menu List
378
●Print density will be lighter when you select stronger improvement.
Sp. Transfer Mode
When you use the machine in an environment with low humidity, printed images or text may be smudged. In this case,
setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Sp. Transfer Mode> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On> and use the machine in an environment with high humidity, the print density may become
lighter or uneven.
Wrinkle Correction
Printing on plain paper or thin paper may result in a wrinkled printout. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve
the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Wrinkle Correction> <Off> or <On>
●This setting may not be enabled if <On> is selected for certain setting items. Priority of Setting Menu
Items(P. 400)
Sp. Fixing Mode 4
When using the machine in an environment with low humidity, ghost images may appear in a blank area of the
printout. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
379
( ) <User Maintenance> <Sp. Fixing Mode 4> <Off> or <On>
Improve Toner Fixing
When you perform 2-sided printing after the machine is left unused for a long time, void may occur in printed images.
In this case, setting this item may solve the problem. The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than with
<Mode 1>.
Off
Mode 1
Mode 2
( ) <User Maintenance> <Improve Toner Fixing> Select the
mode
In the case of 2-sided printing with this item set to other than <Off>, it may take longer until printing starts.
Clr/B&W Switch Mode
When printing data including both black and white data and color data, you can specify whether to give priority to
higher printing speed or lower frequency of CMY toner cartridge usage.
Mode 1
Mode 2
( ) <User Maintenance> <Clr/B&W Switch Mode> Select the
mode
<Mode 1>
Gives priority to printing speed.
Setting Menu List
380
<Mode 2>
Printing may be possible while using the CMY toner cartridges less frequently.
●If you select <Mode 2>, the printing speed may be slower.
Charged Rlr Cleaning
Sometimes white areas may become lightly colored. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Charged Rlr Cleaning> <Off> or <On>
If you select <On>, print density may be lighter.
Corr. Drum Line
If streaks appear on printouts, setting to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Corr. Drum Line> <Off> or <On>
Special Density Mode
When you use the machine in an environment with high humidity, the print density may become lighter or uneven. In
this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
381
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Density Mode> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On> and use the machine in an environment with low humidity, printed images or text may be
smudged.
SD Card Maintenance *
When an error occurs in an SD card or when you want to discard an SD card, you can erase all the data stored on that
card.
Format
Initializes the SD card. All the stored data is erased from the card.
( ) <User Maintenance> <SD Card
Maintenance> <Format> <Yes>
Completely Del. Data
All the stored data is erased from the SD card. Perform this operation as necessary, such as when you want to
discard an SD card after erasing all the stored data including those fragments that cannot be erased normally.
Deleting All Data in an SD Card(P. 578)
Special Print Mode
Provides items you can set when printing cannot be performed properly.
Curl Correction
Printing on plain paper or thin paper may result in a curled printout. In this case, the problem may be solved if
you set this item to <On> for the paper source used to supply the paper that became curled.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Curl
Correction> Select the paper source <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
382
Paper source selection
Select the paper source for which you want to change the setting of Curl Correction.
Switching of the settings
To perform curl correction, select <On>.
●If you select <On>, it may take longer until printing starts. Also, the printing speed may be slower.
●This setting may not be enabled if <On> is selected for certain setting items. Priority of Setting
Menu Items(P. 400)
Curl Correction 2
If enabling <Curl Correction> does not show an actual effect for curl correction, setting this item to <On> may
solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Curl Correction
2> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, the print speed may be slower. Also, printouts may be faded.
Sp. Ctd. Paper Mode
Depending on the paper type or environmental conditions, toner may come off the printout. In this case,
setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
383
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Sp. Ctd. Paper
Mode> <Off> or <On>
●This setting may not be enabled if <On> is selected for certain setting items. Priority of Setting
Menu Items(P. 400)
Rough Paper Adj.
When printing on thick rough paper, the following phenomena may occur depending on the environmental
conditions. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
●Toner comes off the printout
●Print density is lower
●Printouts curl
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Rough Paper
Adj.> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, the printing speed will be slower.
Special Env. Mode
If the seal ap of an envelope having absorbed moisture sticks to the body, set this item to <On>.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Special Env.
Mode> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, printouts may be faded.
Setting Menu List
384
●This setting may not be enabled if <On> is selected for certain setting items. Priority of Setting
Menu Items(P. 400)
Fix Prevention Mode
If output sheets stick together, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Fix Prevention
Mode> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, the print speed may be slower.
●This setting may not be enabled if <On> is selected for certain setting items. Priority of Setting
Menu Items(P. 400)
Sp. H/H Thin Paper
If thin paper is used in an environment with high temperature or high humidity, the paper may jam in the xing
unit. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Sp. H/H Thin
Paper> <Off> or <On>
●This setting may not be enabled if <On> is selected for certain setting items. Priority of Setting
Menu Items(P. 400)
Imprv Ppr Separation
If paper jams occur during printing, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
385
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Imprv Ppr
Separation> <Off> or <On>
Special Glossy Mode
When the machine is used in an environment with high temperature or high humidity, white areas may become
lightly colored. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Special Glossy
Mode> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, print density may be lighter.
Corr. White Line
White streaks (lines) may appear on printed images. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the
problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Corr. White
Line> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, ghost images may appear.
Correct B&W Streaks
When streaks appear on printouts, cleaning the xing unit may not be effective to solve the problem. In this
case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
386
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Correct B&W
Streaks> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, the print speed may be slower. Also, ghost images may appear.
Plain Ppr Clr Corr 2
If gloss unevenness occurs on printouts, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Plain Ppr Clr Corr
2> <Off> or <On>
●This setting may not be enabled if <On> is selected for certain setting items. Priority of Setting
Menu Items(P. 400)
Reduce Ghosting 3
If the printout reveals a ghost of an image in the same page, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Reduce Ghosting
3> <Off> or <On>
●Setting to <On> may result in uneven print.
Sp. Fixing Mode 2
Depending on the environmental conditions, toner may come off printed images. In this case, setting this item
to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
Setting Menu List
387
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Sp. Fixing Mode
2> <Off> or <On>
●This setting may not be enabled if <On> is selected for certain setting items. Priority of Setting
Menu Items(P. 400)
Rdc Waterdrop Pttrn.
If print density of printed images is uneven in a way that the print looks like a water drops pattern, setting this
item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Rdc Waterdrop
Pttrn.> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, print quality may be affected.
Special Print Mode E
If continuous printing involves generation of ghost images, setting this item to other than <Off> may solve the
problem. The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than <Mode 1>.
Off
Mode 1
Mode 2
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode E> Select the mode
●Selecting <Mode 1> or <Mode 2> may result in uneven print density.
Setting Menu List
388
Update Firmware
Upgrades the rmware of the machine.
( ) <User Maintenance> <Update Firmware> Select the connection
method <Yes>
Connection method selection
Select the method to connect a computer that performs the rmware update.
First Calibration
Specify the timing to automatically perform calibration after the power is turned ON.
After Jobs
Immediately
( ) <User Maintenance> <First Calibration> <After Jobs> or
<Immediately>
<After Jobs>
Automatically starts calibration on completion of the rst print job after the power is turned ON.
<Immediately>
Automatically starts calibration immediately after the power is turned ON.
●If you select <Immediately>, it takes some time before the machine is ready to print.
Setting Menu List
389
Paper Feed Method
Specify this setting when you print a document on paper with logos. To print on paper with logos, you need to change
how the paper loaded in the paper source is facing depending on whether you are performing 1- or 2-sided printing.
However, if you change the setting to <Print Side Priority>, you can just load the paper face down for both 1- and 2-
sided printing. For more information, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 55) .
Speed Priority
Print Side Priority
( ) <User Maintenance> <Paper Feed Method> Select the paper
source <Speed Priority> or <Print Side Priority>
Paper source selection
Select the paper source for which you want to change the setting of Paper Feed Mode.
<Speed Priority>
When using paper that has been preprinted with a logo, you need to change which side is up depending on
1-sided or 2-sided printing.
●We recommend selecting <Speed Priority> if you do not need to consider which side to print on.
<Print Side Priority>
To print on a specic side of paper, you do not need to ip over paper in the paper source regardless of
whether 1- or 2-sided printing is selected.
●Even if <Print Side Priority> is selected for the paper source ( Available Paper(P. 547) ), it is disabled and
the machine operates in the same way as when <Speed Priority> is selected. In this case, load the paper in
the same way as when <Speed Priority> is selected ( Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 55) ).
●If you select <Print Side Priority>, 1-sided printing speed will be slower.
Adjust Standby Temp
Select whether to adjust the temperature of the xing unit. If you select <On>, the time until printing starts may
shorten.
Setting Menu List
390
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Adjust Standby Temp> <Off> or <On>
●Setting to <On> increases the power consumption during startup of the machine.
Show Job List
Select whether to display a list of data that is being printed and waiting to be printed when you press ( ) on
the operation panel.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Show Job List> <Off> or <On>
●If you press ( ) when <Off> is selected, the current print job in progress is canceled.
Paper Delivery Adj.
If paper jams frequently when using the multi-purpose tray, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Paper Delivery Adj.> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, the print speed may be slower.
Setting Menu List
391
Rdc Hvy 3 Clr Msmtch
If color mismatch occurs when printing on some heavy paper, changing the setting may solve the problem.
Mode 1
Mode 2
( ) <User Maintenance> <Rdc Hvy 3 Clr Msmtch> <Mode 1> or <Mode
2>
●The degree of improvement may vary depending on paper to use for printing. If the print results are not as
expected, try printing by switching the setting between <Mode 1> and <Mode 2>.
Corr. Color Mismatch
If color mismatch occurs, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Corr. Color Mismatch> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, the print speed may be slower.
Correct B&W Density
When <Color Mode> ( Color Mode(P. 357) ) under <Print Quality> or <Color Mode> ( Printing from USB Memory
(USB Direct Print)(P. 81) ) in the print settings for USB Direct Print is set to <Auto (Color/Black)> or <Black>, uneven
print density may result or horizontal streaks may appear in the printout. In this case, changing the setting of this item
may solve the problem.
Off
Mode 1
Mode 2
Setting Menu List
392
( ) <User Maintenance> <Correct B&W Density> Select the
mode
●If you specify <Mode 1>, set <Auto Detect Ppr Type> to <Do Not Use> for the paper source to use. Auto
Detect Ppr Type(P. 472)
●With <Mode 1> or <Mode 2> specied, the CMYK toners are consumed even in black and white printing
depending on the paper type used. Further, the print speed may be slower.
●With <Off> specied, black and white printing may result in uneven print density.
POP Printing Speed
If the quality of the printout is not acceptable when printing with [POP Printing Optimization] congured on the
printer driver, specifying <Mode 2> is recommended. It will result in POP prints with a more vivid color tone. For more
information on [POP Printing Optimization], see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
Mode 1
Mode 2
( ) <User Maintenance> <POP Printing Speed> <Mode 1> or <Mode 2>
●If you select <Mode 2>, the print speed will be slower.
●When [POP Printing Optimization] is congured, it is recommended that you also congure the following
items.
- <Toner Warning Mode>
- <Auto POP Calibration>
POP Prnt Color Corr.
If uneven print density results from POP printing when [POP Printing Optimization] is congured, specify <On>.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
393
( ) <User Maintenance> <POP Prnt Color Corr.> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, print density may be lighter.
●When [POP Printing Optimization] is congured, it is recommended that you also congure the following
items.
- <Toner Warning Mode>
- <Auto POP Calibration>
Toner Warning Mode
You can change the timing to display a message when the toner remaining amount is low. <POP Print> displays the
message at an earlier timing than <Standard Print>. When [POP Printing Optimization] is congured on the printer
driver, the quality of the printout may not be acceptable if the toner remaining amount is low. Therefore, specifying
<POP Print> is recommended. For more information on [POP Printing Optimization], see the manuals for the relevant
drivers on the online manual website.
Standard Print
POP Print
( ) <User Maintenance> <Toner Warning Mode> <Standard Print> or
<POP Print>
●When <POP Print> is specied, the settings of the following items lose effect.
-<Toner Check Timing> Toner Check Timing(P. 396)
- <Spec Tnr Chk Timing> Spec Tnr Chk Timing(P. 397)
●When you specify <POP Print>, it is recommended that you also congure the following items.
- <POP Printing Speed>
- <Auto POP Calibration>
Auto POP Calibration
You can change the type of calibration that will be performed automatically. In addition to ordinary calibration, a
calibration to correct hue mismatch that has occurred in POP printing. When [POP Printing Optimization] is congured
on the printer driver, always specifying <On> is recommended. For more information on [POP Printing Optimization],
see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
394
( ) <User Maintenance> <Auto POP Calibration> <Off> or <On>
●When you specify <On>, calibration will take longer time. Further, the lifetime of toner cartridges may be
affected.
●When [POP Printing Optimization] is congured, it is recommended that you also congure the following
items.
- <Toner Warning Mode>
Import/Export Set.
You can transfer and save the data registered in the machine and the setting data of the menu options to the USB
memory device attached to the machine. The exported data can be imported. If the machine model is the same, other
machines can import the data exported from this machine and vice versa.
IMPORT
You can import data that was written to a USB memory device from the machine.
( ) <User Maintenance> <Import/Export
Set.> <IMPORT> <Yes> Select the le to be imported Enter the
password Check the message
EXPORT
You can save the data registered in the machine and the setting data of the menu options to a USB memory
device.
( ) <User Maintenance> <Import/Export
Set.> <EXPORT> Enter the password Password (Conrm) Check
the message
●For these purposes, you can use either of the USB ports provided on the left and right sides of the machine.
When USB memory devices are connected to both of these USB ports, data is imported or exported via the
right side port.
●If the <Ready to print les from USB memory.> screen is displayed when USB memory is connected, press
( ).
Setting Menu List
395
●For details about import/export of settings data, see Saving/Loading Registered Data(P. 304) .
Calibration Freq.
Specify the frequency of automatic calibration. If color mismatch occurs frequently, set this item to <High> or <Very
High>.
Standard
High
Very High
( ) <User Maintenance> <Calibration Freq.> Set the frequency
Notify to Clean
Select whether to display a message that prompts you to clean the xing unit.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Notify to Clean> <Off> or <On>
Clean. Notif. Timing *
When you have set <Notify to Clean> to <On>, you can specify the timing to display a prompt message for cleaning the
xing unit, in terms of the number of printed pages and in units of 1,000. The Conguration Page allows you to check
how many pages you can print before the prompt message is displayed. ( Conguration Page(P. 517) )
1000 to 50000
( ) <User Maintenance> <Clean. Notif. Timing> Enter the number of
printed pages using or
Toner Check Timing
To change the timing to display a message when the toner remaining amount is low, select <Custom>.
Default
Setting Menu List
396
Custom
( ) <User Maintenance> <Toner Check Timing> <Default> or
<Custom>
Spec Tnr Chk Timing *
When you have set <Toner Check Timing> to <Custom>, specify the timing to display the message.
1 to 20 to 99 (%)
( ) <User Maintenance> <Spec Tnr Chk Timing> Use the numeric keys
to enter the toner cartridge remaining amount
Drum Check Timing
To change the timing to display an applicable message when the time to replace a drum cartridge is near, select
<Custom>.
Default
Custom
( ) <User Maintenance> <Drum Check Timing> <Default> or
<Custom>
Spec Drum Chk Timing *
If you have set <Drum Check Timing> to <Custom>, specify the message display timing.
1 to 20 to 99 (%)
( ) <User Maintenance> <Spec Drum Chk Timing> Use the numeric
keys to enter the drum cartridge remaining amount
Setting Menu List
397
Action When Tnr. Out
Specify whether to continue printing when a toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
Continue Printing
Pause Printing
Stop Printing
( ) <User Maintenance> <Action When Tnr. Out> Select the operation
for printing
<Continue Printing>
When a toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime, the <Change X toner cartridge.> message is
displayed, but the printing is continued.
<Pause Printing>
When a toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime, the <End of lifetime reached. Change X toner
cartridge.> message is displayed, and the printing is temporarily stopped. To resume the printing, press
( ).
<Stop Printing>
When a toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime, the <Change X toner cartridge.> message is
displayed, and the printing is stopped. When this message is displayed, you cannot continue printing.
●"X" in the above message represents a CMYK color.
●If you continue printing, the print quality may deteriorate.
Rdc Bndg for Low Spd
Depending on the paper type or machine settings, horizontal streaks may appear on printouts. In this case, setting
this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
398
( ) <User Maintenance> <Rdc Bndg for Low Spd> <Off> or <On>
Reduce Margin Stain
If smudge marks appear in the margin on the bottom edge of printouts, changing the setting may solve the problem.
Off
Mode 1
Mode 2
( ) <User Maintenance> <Reduce Margin Stain> Select the mode
●In the case of continuous printing with <Mode 1> or <Mode 2> specied, printing a larger number of pages
than a certain specic number triggers automatic cleaning, resulting in a slower printing speed.
Control Condensation
The print may be faint due to condensation inside the main unit. In this case, setting this item to <Auto> may solve the
problem.
Off
Auto
( ) <User Maintenance> <Control Condensation> <Off> or
<Auto>
Setting Menu List
399
Priority of Setting Menu Items
52AC-04X
There is an order of priority for the following setting menu items. When multiple items are set to <On>, only the top
priority item takes effect. Priority is highest with number 1 and lowers in the ascending number order.
Priority Settings
1 Sp. Fixing Mode 2 Sp. Fixing Mode 2(P. 387)
2 Sp. Ctd. Paper Mode Sp. Ctd. Paper Mode(P. 383)
3 Curl Correction Curl Correction(P. 382)
4 Sp. H/H Thin Paper Sp. H/H Thin Paper(P. 385)
5 Wrinkle Correction Wrinkle Correction(P. 379)
6 Special Env. Mode Special Env. Mode(P. 384)
7 Fix Prevention Mode Fix Prevention Mode(P. 385)
8 Plain Ppr Clr Corr 2 Plain Ppr Clr Corr 2(P. 387)
Setting Menu List
400
Print Mode
52AC-04Y
All the settings about print mode switching are listed with short descriptions.
Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the options you are using, or other
setting items.
Auto Mode Selection(P. 401)
Auto Select(P. 402)
Mode Priority(P. 402)
◼Type of Print Mode
Auto selection mode The machine enters the auto selection mode when <Auto Selection> is selected for <Auto Mode
Selection>. The machine automatically discriminates data sent from a computer and selects the
print mode. Normally use this print mode when you print from an application.
<PCL> Mode for printing a PCL le sent from a computer.
<PS> Mode for printing a PS le sent from a computer.
<PDF> Mode for printing a PDF le by using Direct Print or USB Direct Print.
<XPS> Mode for printing an XPS le by using Direct Print or USB Direct Print.
Auto Mode Selection
Specify the print mode in which the machine operates.
Auto Selection
PCL
PS
PDF
XPS
( ) <Print Mode> <Auto Mode Selection> Select the print mode
Setting Menu List
401
Auto Select
Enable or disable the automatic mode selection feature for the print modes during auto selection mode.
Off
On
( ) <Print Mode> <Auto Select> Select the print mode <Off>
or <On>
●If all print modes are set to <Off>, the machine operates in the print mode specied for <Mode Priority>.
Mode Priority
Specify the print mode that is automatically selected when the machine cannot identify the control command during
auto selection mode.
None
PCL
PS
PDF
XPS
( ) <Print Mode> <Mode Priority> Select the preferential print
mode
●If you select <None>, the machine automatically determines the print mode when it cannot identify the
control command.
Setting Menu List
402
UFR II
52AC-051
This section describes the settings available during use of UFR II with the control
commands. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Paper Save
Select whether to prevent blank pages from being output when they are contained in documents to print.
Off
On
( ) <UFR II> <Paper Save> <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
404
PCL
52AC-052
All the settings about the PCL control commands are listed with short descriptions.
Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on other setting items or whether the
optional ROM is installed on the machine.
Paper Save(P. 405)
Orientation(P. 405)
Font Number(P. 406)
Point Size(P. 406)
Pitch(P. 406)
Form Lines(P. 406)
Character Code(P. 407)
Custom Size(P. 407)
Unit of Measurement(P. 408)
X Dimension(P. 408)
Y Dimension(P. 408)
Append CR to LF(P. 408)
Enlarge A4 Prt Width(P. 409)
BarDIMM(P. 409)
FreeScape(P. 409)
Paper Save
Species whether the machine outputs the blank page that can be created due to no data existing between two form
feed codes sent from an application.
Off
On
( ) <PCL> <Paper Save> <Off> or <On>
Orientation
Enables you to set the paper orientation.
Portrait
Landscape
( ) <PCL> <Orientation> <Portrait> or <Landscape>
Setting Menu List
405
Font Number
Enables you to set the default font for this machine function using the corresponding font numbers. Valid font
numbers are from 0 to 104.
0 to 104
( ) <PCL> <Font Number> Use the numeric keys to enter the port
number
Point Size *
If the number selected in <Font Number> is that of a proportionally spaced scalable font, this option appears in the
<PCL> options. It enables you to specify a point size for the default font. The point size can be adjusted in increments
of 0.25 pts.
4.00 to 12.00 to 999.75 (point)
( ) <PCL> <Point Size> Use the numeric keys to enter the setting
value
Pitch *
If the number selected in <Font Number> is that of a xed pitch scalable font, <Pitch> appears in the <PCL> options. It
enables you to specify the pitch for the default font. The pitch can be adjusted in increments of 0.01 cpi (characters per
inch).
0.44 to 10.00 to 99.99 (cpi)
( ) <PCL> <Pitch> Use the numeric keys to enter the setting
value
Form Lines
Enables you to specify the number of lines to be printed on a page. You can specify from 5 to 128 lines.
5 to 64 to 128 (lines)
Setting Menu List
406
( ) <PCL> <Form Lines> Use the numeric keys to enter the setting
value
Character Code
Enables you to select the symbol set most suited to the needs of the host computer.
PC8
ROMAN8
ROMAN9
ISOL1
ISOL2
ISOL5
ISOL6
ISOL9
PC775
PC8DN
PC850
PC852
PC858
PC8TK
PC1004
WINL1
WINL2
WINL5
WINBALT
DESKTOP
PSTEXT
LEGAL
ISO4
ISO6
ISO11
ISO15
ISO17
ISO21
ISO60
ISO69
WIN 30
MCTEXT
PC864
ARABIC8
WINARB
PC866
ISOCYR
WINCYR
PC851
GREEK8
ISOGRK
PC8GRK
WINGRK
PC862
HEBREW7
HEBREW8
ISOHEB
( ) <PCL> <Character Code> Select the character code
Custom Size
Enables you to specify a custom paper size. If <Set> is selected, you can enter a custom size.
Do Not Set
Set
Setting Menu List
407
( ) <PCL> <Custom Size> <Set> or <Do Not Set>
Unit of Measurement *
Enables you to specify the unit of measurement you would like to use to specify your custom paper size.
Millimeters
Inches
( ) <PCL> <Unit of Measurement> <Millimeters> or <Inches>
X Dimension *
Enables you to specify the X dimension of the custom paper. The X dimension can be adjusted between 64.0 mm and
320.0 mm in increments of 0.1 mm.
64.0 to 304.8 to 320.0 (mm)
( ) <PCL> <X Dimension> Use / to enter the setting
value
Y Dimension *
Enables you to specify the Y dimension of the custom paper. The Y dimension can be adjusted between 120 mm and
1200 mm in increments of 0.1 mm.
120 to 457.2 to 1200 (mm)
( ) <PCL> <Y Dimension> Use / to enter the setting value
Append CR to LF
Enables you to specify whether to append a carriage return (CR) when line feed code (LF) is received.
Setting Menu List
408
Yes
No
( ) <PCL> <Append CR to LF> <Yes> or <No>
Enlarge A4 Prt Width
Determines whether to expand the printable area of A4 paper to that of Letter size in width.
Off
On
( ) <PCL> <Enlarge A4 Prt Width> <Off> or <On>
BarDIMM *
You can enable or disable the Bar Code Printing function of the machine.
Enable
Disable
( ) <PCL> <BarDIMM> <Enable> or <Disable>
FreeScape *
You can specify the AEC (Alternate Escape Code) to be used for bar code commands when the host computer does not
support the standard Escape Code.
Setting Menu List
409
Off
~
"
#
$
/
\
?
{
}
|
( ) <PCL> <FreeScape> Select Escape Code
Setting Menu List
410
Imaging
52AC-053
All the settings about image les (JPEG and TIFF les) available for USB Direct Print,
Direct Print, and E-Mail Print are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are
marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the options you are using, or other
setting items.
Image Orientation(P. 411)
Zoom(P. 412)
Print Position(P. 412)
TIFF Spooler(P. 413)
Show Warnings(P. 414)
Print E-Mail Text(P. 414)
Limit E-Mail Print(P. 414)
Enlarge Print Area(P. 415)
RGB Source Prole(P. 415)
CMYK Sim. Prole(P. 416)
Output Prole(P. 416)
Matching Method(P. 417)
Halftones(P. 417)
Photo Corr (CL Only)(P. 418)
Grayscale Conversion(P. 420)
Image Orientation
Specify the print orientation of an image.
Auto
Vertical
Horizontal
( ) <Imaging> <Image Orientation> Select the orientation
<Auto>
Automatically determines the print orientation based on the width and height of the image.
<Vertical>
Select when printing a vertically-long image.
Setting Menu List
411
<Horizontal>
Select when printing a horizontally-long image.
●If the specied setting (<Vertical> or <Horizontal>) does not match the orientation of the image, the image is
printed at a reduced size.
Zoom
Enable or disable enlarging/reducing images. The printouts are enlarged or reduced with the image aspect ratio kept.
Off
Auto
( ) <Imaging> <Zoom> <Off> or <Auto>
<Off>
When an image is within Printable Area(P. 551) , it is printed at the original size. When an image is larger
than the printable area, printouts are reduced.
<Auto>
Makes enlarged or reduced printouts according to the printable area of the paper.
Print Position
Specify the position to print the image.
Auto
Center
Top Left
( ) <Imaging> <Print Position> Select <Auto> or the position
Setting Menu List
412
<Auto>
If the TIFF data contains the information that species the print position, the image is printed according to
the information, otherwise, it is printed at the center of paper. JPEG data is always printed at the center of
paper.
<Center>
Images are printed at the center of paper.
<Top Left>
Images are printed at the top left.
TIFF Spooler
Select whether to store TIFF data in the SD card prior to processing it for printing. Set this item to <On> if an error
occurs during printing.
Off
On
( ) <Imaging> <TIFF Spooler> Check the message <Off> or
<On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
<Off>
TIFF data is continuously processed as soon as it is received, reducing the processing time.
<On>
All of received TIFF data is processed at one time, reducing the occurrence of errors. When an SD card is
installed, the data is stored to the SD card.
●If no SD card is installed, les exceeding 40 MB in size may not be printed.
Setting Menu List
413
Show Warnings
You can specify how the machine should behave if an error occurs.
Off
Print
Panel
( ) <Imaging> <Show Warnings> Select how the machine should
behave
<Off>
No image is printed and no error is displayed.
<Print>
Error information is printed and no image is printed.
<Panel>
No image is printed and an error message is displayed on the operation panel.
Print E-Mail Text
Select whether to print e-mail messages when E-Mail Print is performed. If you select <Off>, only an image attached to
the e-mail is printed.
Off
On
( ) <Imaging> <Print E-Mail Text> <Off> or <On>
Limit E-Mail Print *
Select whether to limit the number of e-mail message pages to print when <Print E-Mail Text> is set to <On>. If you
select <On>, the number of e-mail message pages to print is limited to 5.
Setting Menu List
414
Off
On
( ) <Imaging> <Limit E-Mail Print> <Off> or <On>
Enlarge Print Area
Specify whether or not to print the image by extending the Printable Area(P. 551) fully to the paper size.
Off
On
( ) <Imaging> <Enlarge Print Area> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, some portions of the image may be missing near the edge of the paper or the paper may
be partly tainted depending on the original.
RGB Source Prole
Select a suitable prole for RGB data that matches the monitor that you are using.
sRGB v3.0 (Canon)
Canon HDTV gamma 1.5
Canon HDTV gamma 1.8
Canon HDTV gamma 2.4
( ) <Imaging> <RGB Source Prole> Select the prole
<sRGB v3.0 (Canon)>
An RGB prole is used that is similar to an average prole of most Windows PC monitors. When using a
monitor that supports sRGB, you can print colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor.
Setting Menu List
415
<Canon HDTV gamma 1.5> to <Canon HDTV gamma 2.4>
When you want a brightness adjustment after making comparison between the printed colors and the colors
displayed on the monitor, make a necessary setting here. The higher the value, the darker the printed colors.
CMYK Sim. Prole
You can select a simulation target when printing CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data to a device-dependent
CMYK color model in accordance with the selected simulation target.
Euro Standard v1.00
JapanColor(Canon)
U.S. Web Coated v1.0
( ) <Imaging> <CMYK Sim. Prole> Select the prole
<Euro Standard v1.00>
Use the Euro Standard prole. Printing is performed in colors that are close to the European printing
standards.
<JapanColor(Canon)>
Use the JapanColor prole. Printing is performed in colors that are close to the Japanese printing standards.
<U.S. Web Coated v1.0>
Use the U.S. Web Coated prole. Printing is performed in colors that are close to the U.S. printing standards.
Output Prole
You can select suitable proles for data that you are going to print.
Normal
Photo
( ) <Imaging> <Output Prole> Select the prole
Setting Menu List
416
<Normal>
Color matching is performed so that data is printed in colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor.
<Photo>
Color matching is performed so that the print result is similar to photography.
Matching Method
Specify which element to be given priority over others in color matching by <RGB Source Prole>.
Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
( ) <Imaging> <Matching Method> Select the matching method
<Perceptual>
Matching is performed with priority given to perceptual.
<Saturation>
Matching is performed with priority given to saturation.
<Colorimetric>
Matching is performed so that the RGB color values are reproduced as accurately as possible.
Halftones
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker
areas of an image).
Resolution
Gradation
Error Diffusion
Setting Menu List
417
( ) <Imaging> <Halftones> Select the method to reproduce
halftones
<Resolution>
Performs ne printing by sharply reproducing the edges of characters. This print mode is suitable for
printing data of characters and thin lines with a clear nish.
<Gradation>
Prints gradation and lines with a smooth nish. This print mode is suitable for printing gures and charts
with gradation.
<Error Diffusion>
This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.
●The stability of the texture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.
Photo Corr (CL Only) *
Make settings for correction functions for photos or other similar image data. This item is displayed when an SD card
is installed.
Photo Optimizer PRO
Set whether to perform printing by automatically correcting image contrast, color balance, saturation, and
gradation.
Off
On
( ) <Imaging> <Photo Corr (CL Only)> <Photo Optimizer
PRO> <Off> or <On>
Red-Eye Correction
"Red-eye" is a phenomenon that causes the eyes of human subjects of ash/strobe photography to appear
unnaturally reddish in color. Set whether to automatically detect red-eye in the image and correct the portions
Setting Menu List
418
in question so that they appear in natural color. You can select the level of correction strength from among
three.
Red-Eye Correction
Set whether to perform red-eye correction.
Off
On
( ) <Imaging> <Photo Corr (CL Only)> <Red-Eye
Correction> <Red-Eye Correction> <Off> or <On>
Red-Eye Corr. Level *
Specify the level of correction strength when <Red-Eye Correction> is set to <On>.
Weak
Standard
Strong
( ) <Imaging> <Photo Corr (CL Only)> <Red-Eye
Correction> <Red-Eye Corr. Level> Select the level
Face Brightener
For a photograph image in which the faces of human subjects are unnaturally dark due to backlight or
underexposure, set whether to print the image by correcting its entire brightness so that the subjects' faces
become naturally bright. You can select the level of correction strength from among three.
Face Brightener
Set whether to make a correction to brighten the subjects' faces.
Off
On
( ) <Imaging> <Photo Corr (CL Only)> <Face
Brightener> <Face Brightener> <Off> or <On>
Face Brightener Lv. *
Specify the level of correction strength when <Face Brightener> is set to <On>.
Weak
Standard
Strong
Setting Menu List
419
( ) <Imaging> <Photo Corr (CL Only)> <Face
Brightener> <Face Brightener Lv.> Select the level
Grayscale Conversion *
You can select the method to convert color pint data to black-and-white data.
sRGB
NTSC
Uniform RGB
( ) <Imaging> <Grayscale Conversion> Select the conversion
method
<sRGB>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate color-conscious smooth gradation.
<NTSC>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate appearances equivalent to television pictures
(NTSC).
<Uniform RGB>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to equalize all RGB levels based on the brightness only.
●This item is available when <Color Mode> ( Color Mode(P. 357) ) under <Print Quality> is set to <Black>.
Setting Menu List
420
XPS
52AC-054
All the settings about XPS les available for USB Direct Print and Direct Print are
listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on other setting items.
Matching Mode(P. 421)
ICC Prole Settings(P. 422)
Gamma Settings(P. 424)
Photo Corr (CL Only)(P. 425)
Halftones(P. 427)
Gray Compensation(P. 428)
Advanced Smoothing(P. 429)
Grayscale Conversion(P. 430)
Matching Mode
Select the processing mode for color printing.
ICC Prole
Gamma
( ) <XPS> <Matching Mode> <ICC Prole> or <Gamma>
<ICC Prole>
Use a prole for color matching.
<Gamma>
Perform color correction by setting a gamma value for brightness adjustment.
Setting Menu List
421
ICC Prole Settings
Set the prole to be used when performing color matching and specify which element to be given priority over others.
You can set this item for each of the types of image contained in one document.
RGB Source Prole
Select a suitable prole for RGB data that matches the monitor that you are using.
Text
sRGB v3.0 (Canon)
Canon HDTV gamma 1.5
Canon HDTV gamma 1.8
Canon HDTV gamma 2.4
Graphics
sRGB v3.0 (Canon)
Canon HDTV gamma 1.5
Canon HDTV gamma 1.8
Canon HDTV gamma 2.4
Image
sRGB v3.0 (Canon)
Canon HDTV gamma 1.5
Canon HDTV gamma 1.8
Canon HDTV gamma 2.4
( ) <XPS> <ICC Prole Settings> <RGB Source Prole> Select
the image data type Select the prole
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<sRGB v3.0 (Canon)>
An RGB prole is used that is similar to an average prole of most Windows PC monitors. When using a
monitor that supports sRGB, you can print colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor.
<Canon HDTV gamma 1.5> to <Canon HDTV gamma 2.4>
When you want a brightness adjustment after making comparison between the printed colors and the colors
displayed on the monitor, make a necessary setting here. The higher the value, the darker the printed colors.
Setting Menu List
422
●This item is available when <Matching Mode> is set to <ICC Prole>.
Output Prole
You can select suitable proles for data that you are going to print.
Text
Normal
Photo
Graphics
Normal
Photo
Image
Normal
Photo
( ) <XPS> <ICC Prole Settings> <Output Prole> Select the
image data type <Normal> or <Photo>
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<Normal>
Color matching is performed so that data is printed in colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor.
<Photo>
Color matching is performed so that the print result is similar to photography.
●This item is available when <Matching Mode> is set to <ICC Prole>.
Matching Method
Specify which element to be given priority over others in color matching by <RGB Source Prole>. You can set
this item for each of the types of image contained in one document.
Text
Setting Menu List
423
Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
Graphics
Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
Image
Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
( ) <XPS> <ICC Prole Settings> <Matching Method> Select
the image data type Select the matching method
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<Perceptual>
Matching is performed with priority given to perceptual.
<Saturation>
Matching is performed with priority given to saturation.
<Colorimetric>
Matching is performed so that the RGB color values are reproduced as accurately as possible.
Gamma Settings
Set whether to perform color correction by setting a gamma value for brightness adjustment.
Gamma Correction
Brightness adjustment can be performed so that the brightness of the brightest and darkest parts of the
original is not effected in the print result. You can set this item for each of the types of image contained in one
document.
Text
1.0
Setting Menu List
424
1.4
1.8
2.2
Graphics
1.0
1.4
1.8
2.2
Image
1.0
1.4
1.8
2.2
( ) <XPS> <Gamma Settings> <Gamma Correction> Select the
image data type Select the setting value
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<1.0> to <2.2>
Set this item when you want to adjust the brightness of printouts. <1.4> is the standard setting (no
correction), and the larger the setting value, the darker the print will be.
●This item is available when <Matching Mode> is set to <Gamma>.
Photo Corr (CL Only)
Make settings for correction functions for photos or other similar image data.
Photo Optimizer PRO
Set whether to perform printing by automatically correcting image contrast, color balance, saturation, and
gradation.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
425
( ) <XPS> <Photo Corr (CL Only)> <Photo Optimizer
PRO> <Off> or <On>
Red-Eye Correction
"Red-eye" is a phenomenon that causes the eyes of human subjects of ash/strobe photography to appear
unnaturally reddish in color. Set whether to automatically detect red-eye in the image and correct the portions
in question so that they appear in natural color. You can select the level of correction strength from among
three.
Red-Eye Correction
Set whether to perform red-eye correction.
Off
On
( ) <XPS> <Photo Corr (CL Only)> <Red-Eye Correction> <Red-
Eye Correction> <Off> or <On>
Red-Eye Corr. Level *
Specify the level of correction strength when <Red-Eye Correction> is set to <On>.
Weak
Standard
Strong
( ) <XPS> <Photo Corr (CL Only)> <Red-Eye Correction> <Red-
Eye Corr. Level> Select the level
Face Brightener
For a photograph image in which the faces of human subjects are unnaturally dark due to backlight or
underexposure, set whether to print the image by correcting its entire brightness so that the subjects' faces
become naturally bright. You can select the level of correction strength from among three.
Face Brightener
Set whether to make a correction to brighten the subjects' faces.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
426
( ) <XPS> <Photo Corr (CL Only)> <Face Brightener> <Face
Brightener> <Off> or <On>
Face Brightener Lv. *
Specify the level of correction strength when <Face Brightener> is set to <On>.
Weak
Standard
Strong
( ) <XPS> <Photo Corr (CL Only)> <Face Brightener> <Face
Brightener Lv.> Select the level
Halftones
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker
areas of an image).
Error Diffusion
This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.
Off
On
( ) <XPS> <Halftones> <Error Diffusion> <Off> or <On>
●The stability of the texture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.
Resolution/Grad. *
Select the halftone reproduction method when <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. You can set this item for each of
the types of image contained in one document.
Text
Resolution
Gradation
Graphics
Resolution
Setting Menu List
427
Gradation
Image
Resolution
Gradation
( ) <XPS> <Halftones> <Resolution/Grad.> Select the image
data type <Resolution> or <Gradation>
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<Resolution>
Performs ne printing by sharply reproducing the edges of characters. This print mode is suitable for
printing data of characters and thin lines with a clear nish.
<Gradation>
Prints gradation and lines with a smooth nish. This print mode is suitable for printing gures and charts
with gradation.
Gray Compensation
For black or gray data with color information dening R=G=B, select whether to print with black (K) toner only or print
with CMYK 4-color toner. You can set this item for each of the types of image contained in one document.
Text
Off
On
Graphics
Off
On
Image
Off
On
Setting Menu List
428
( ) <XPS> <Gray Compensation> Select the image data
type <Off> or <On>
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<Off>
Prints with CMYK 4-color toner. Reproducibility of gradation of dark colors is better than with <On>.
<On>
Prints with black (K) toner only. Color mismatch due to use of color (CMY) toner can be prevented.
Advanced Smoothing
Make settings for the smoothing mode that enables edges of lines, gures and text are printed smoothly.
Advanced Smoothing
Specify whether to enable or disable the smoothing mode. Edges will be smoother with <Smooth 2> than with
<Smooth 1>.
Off
Smooth 1
Smooth 2
( ) <XPS> <Advanced Smoothing> <Advanced
Smoothing> Select the processing method
Graphics *
Specify whether to apply the smoothing mode to lines and gures when <Advanced Smoothing> is set to
<Smooth 1> or <Smooth 2>.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
429
( ) <XPS> <Advanced Smoothing> <Graphics> <Off> or
<On>
Text *
Specify whether to apply the smoothing mode to text when <Advanced Smoothing> is set to <Smooth 1> or
<Smooth 2>.
Off
On
( ) <XPS> <Advanced Smoothing> <Text> <Off> or
<On>
Grayscale Conversion
You can select the method to convert color pint data to black-and-white data.
Text
sRGB
NTSC
Uniform RGB
Graphics
sRGB
NTSC
Uniform RGB
Image
sRGB
NTSC
Uniform RGB
( ) <XPS> <Grayscale Conversion> Select the image data
type Select the conversion method
Setting Menu List
430
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<sRGB>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate color-conscious smooth gradation.
<NTSC>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate appearances equivalent to television pictures
(NTSC).
<Uniform RGB>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to equalize all RGB levels based on the brightness only.
●This item is available when <Color Mode> ( Color Mode(P. 357) ) under <Print Quality> is set to <Black>.
Setting Menu List
431
PDF
52AC-055
All the settings about PDF les available for USB Direct Print and Direct Print are
listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on other setting items.
Fit to Paper Size(P. 432)
Enlarge Print Area(P. 432)
N on 1(P. 433)
Comment Print(P. 433)
ICC Prole Settings(P. 433)
Pure Black Text(P. 437)
Black Overprint(P. 438)
Brightness(P. 438)
Halftones(P. 439)
Composite Overprint(P. 440)
Advanced Smoothing(P. 440)
Grayscale Conversion(P. 441)
Fit to Paper Size
Specify whether to enlarge or reduce printouts according to the Printable Area(P. 551) of paper. The printouts are
enlarged or reduced with the original aspect ratio kept.
Off
On
( ) <PDF> <Fit to Paper Size> <Off> or <On>
Enlarge Print Area
Specify whether or not to print the image by extending the Printable Area(P. 551) fully to the paper size.
Off
On
( ) <PDF> <Enlarge Print Area> <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
432
●If you select <On>, some portions of the image may be missing near the edge of the paper or the paper may
be partly tainted depending on the original.
N on 1
Select whether to print multiple pages onto a single sheet at a reduced size by sequentially allocating them from the
top left. For example, to print four pages onto a single sheet, select <4 on 1>.
Off
2 on 1
4 on 1
6 on 1
8 on 1
9 on 1
16 on 1
( ) <PDF> <N on 1> Select the aggregation method
Comment Print
Select whether to print comments. If you select <Auto>, comments in the PDF le are printed.
Off
Auto
( ) <PDF> <Comment Print> <Off> or <Auto>
ICC Prole Settings
Set the prole to be used when performing color matching and specify which element to be given priority over others.
RGB Source Prole
Select a suitable prole for RGB data that matches the monitor that you are using.
sRGB v3.0 (Canon)
Canon HDTV gamma 1.5
Canon HDTV gamma 1.8
Canon HDTV gamma 2.4
None
Setting Menu List
433
( ) <PDF> <ICC Prole Settings> <RGB Source Prole> Select
the prole
<sRGB v3.0 (Canon)>
An RGB prole is used that is similar to an average prole of most Windows PC monitors. When using a
monitor that supports sRGB, you can print colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor.
<Canon HDTV gamma 1.5> to <Canon HDTV gamma 2.4>
When you want a brightness adjustment after making comparison between the printed colors and the colors
displayed on the monitor, make a necessary setting here. The higher the value, the darker the printed colors.
<None>
Performs color separation from RGB data to CMYK without applying any RGB source prole.
CMYK Sim. Prole
You can select a simulation target when printing CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data to a device-
dependent CMYK color model in accordance with the selected simulation target.
Euro Standard v1.00
JapanColor(Canon)
U.S. Web Coated v1.0
None
( ) <PDF> <ICC Prole Settings> <CMYK Sim. Prole> Select
the prole
<Euro Standard v1.00>
Use the Euro Standard prole. Printing is performed in colors that are close to the European printing
standards.
Setting Menu List
434
<JapanColor(Canon)>
Use the JapanColor prole. Printing is performed in colors that are close to the Japanese printing standards.
<U.S. Web Coated v1.0>
Use the U.S. Web Coated prole. Printing is performed in colors that are close to the U.S. printing standards.
<None>
Prints CMYK data using a device-dependent CMYK color model without applying any CMYK simulation prole.
●When this item is set to <None>, dark color gradation may collapse depending on the data.
Grayscale Prole
Set whether to convert gray data to CMYK data using the machine's grayscale prole.
Off
On
( ) <PDF> <ICC Prole Settings> <Grayscale Prole> <Off> or
<On>
<Off>
Prints only with K (black) toner without converting the data to CMYK data.
<On>
Converts the data to CMYK data using the machine's grayscale prole. However, printing may be performed
only with K (black) toner depending on the setting of <Output Prole> or <Pure Black Text>.
Output Prole
You can select suitable proles for data that you are going to print. You can set this item for each of the types of
image contained in one document.
Text
PS Normal
PS Photo
PS TR Normal
PS TR Photo
Graphics
Setting Menu List
435
PS Normal
PS Photo
PS TR Normal
PS TR Photo
Image
PS Normal
PS Photo
PS TR Normal
PS TR Photo
( ) <PDF> <ICC Prole Settings> <Output Prole> Select the
image data type Select the prole
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<PS Normal>
Color matching is performed so that data is printed in colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor.
<PS Photo>
Color matching is performed so that the print result is similar to photography.
<PS TR Normal>
Color matching is performed so that data is printed in colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor and
that bleeding of toner into text and ne lines is well controlled.
<PS TR Photo>
Color matching is performed so that the print result is similar to photography and that bleeding of toner into
text and ne lines is well controlled.
This item is disabled when one of the following settings is made.
●<RGB Source Prole> is set to <None>.
●<CMYK Sim. Prole> is set to <None>.
●<Grayscale Prole> is set to <Off>.
Setting Menu List
436
Matching Method
Specify which element to be given priority over others in color matching by <RGB Source Prole>.
Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
( ) <PDF> <ICC Prole Settings> <Matching Method> Select
the matching method
<Perceptual>
Matching is performed with priority given to perceptual.
<Saturation>
Matching is performed with priority given to saturation.
<Colorimetric>
Matching is performed so that color difference between originals and printouts is minimized.
●This item is disabled when <RGB Source Prole> is set to <None>.
Pure Black Text
For black text whose color information denes "R=G=B=0%," "C=M=Y=100%," or "C=M=Y=0%/K=100%," select whether
to print it with K (black) toner only or according to the setting of <Output Prole>.
Off
On
( ) <PDF> <Pure Black Text> <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
437
<Off>
Prints according to the setting of <Output Prole>. The print result may be better than with <On> depending
on the print data.
<On>
Prints black text with K (black) toner only. Unlike printing with color (CMY) toner, color toner slurring around
the edges will not occur. It is recommended that normally you use this setting.
Black Overprint *
Set how to print when black text is on a color background or color gure. This item is not displayed when <Pure Black
Text> is set to <Off>.
Off
On
( ) <PDF> <Black Overprint> <Off> or <On>
<Off>
First the data is printed after the black text is cut out from the color background or gure, leaving the
corresponding white blank, and then the black text is printed on the white blank. The print may be fainter
than with the <On> setting, and the edges of the text may be rimmed with white.
<On>
First only the color background or gure is printed, and then the black text is printed onto the background or
gure.
Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the whole image in steps of 5 %. The smaller the value, the brighter the image.
Setting Menu List
438
85 to 100 to 115 (%)
( ) <PDF> <Brightness> Use / to enter the setting value
Halftones
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker
areas of an image).
Error Diffusion
This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.
Off
On
( ) <PDF> <Halftones> <Error Diffusion> <Off> or <On>
●The stability of the texture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.
Resolution/Grad. *
Select the halftone reproduction method when <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. You can set this item for each of
the types of image contained in one document.
Text
Resolution
Gradation
Graphics
Resolution
Gradation
Image
Resolution
Gradation
( ) <PDF> <Halftones> <Resolution/Grad.> Select the image
data type <Resolution> or <Gradation>
Setting Menu List
439
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<Resolution>
Performs ne printing by sharply reproducing the edges of characters. This print mode is suitable for
printing data of characters and thin lines with a clear nish.
<Gradation>
Prints gradation and lines with a smooth nish. This print mode is suitable for printing gures and charts
with gradation.
Composite Overprint
Set whether CMYK data for which overprint is set is to be overprinted as composite data.
Off
On
( ) <PDF> <Composite Overprint> <Off> or <On>
●Setting this item to <On> does not enable overprint if <CMYK Sim. Prole> is set to other than <None>.
Advanced Smoothing
Make settings for the smoothing mode that enables edges of lines, gures and text are printed smoothly.
Advanced Smoothing
Specify whether to enable or disable the smoothing mode. Edges will be smoother with <Smooth 2> than with
<Smooth 1>.
Off
Smooth 1
Smooth 2
Setting Menu List
440
( ) <PDF> <Advanced Smoothing> <Advanced
Smoothing> Select the processing method
Graphics *
Specify whether to apply the smoothing mode to lines and gures when <Advanced Smoothing> is set to
<Smooth 1> or <Smooth 2>.
Off
On
( ) <PDF> <Advanced Smoothing> <Graphics> <Off> or
<On>
Text *
Specify whether to apply the smoothing mode to text when <Advanced Smoothing> is set to <Smooth 1> or
<Smooth 2>.
Off
On
( ) <PDF> <Advanced Smoothing> <Text> <Off> or
<On>
Grayscale Conversion *
You can select the method to convert color pint data to black-and-white data.
sRGB
NTSC
Uniform RGB
( ) <PDF> <Grayscale Conversion> Select the conversion
method
Setting Menu List
441
<sRGB>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate color-conscious smooth gradation.
<NTSC>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate appearances equivalent to television pictures
(NTSC).
<Uniform RGB>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to equalize all RGB levels based on the brightness only.
●This item is available when <Color Mode> ( Color Mode(P. 357) ) under <Print Quality> is set to <Black>.
Setting Menu List
442
PS
52AC-056
All the settings about the PS control commands are listed with short descriptions.
Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on other setting items.
Job Timeout(P. 443)
Print PS Errors(P. 443)
ICC Prole Settings(P. 444)
Pure Black Text(P. 448)
Black Overprint(P. 448)
Brightness(P. 449)
Halftones(P. 449)
Composite Overprint(P. 450)
Advanced Smoothing(P. 451)
Grayscale Conversion(P. 452)
Job Timeout
If the time specied in this item has elapsed since a job process was started, the machine automatically nishes the
job and receives the next job.
If you do not want to specify the timeout, specify "0 seconds."
0 to 3600 (seconds)
( ) <PS> <Job Timeout> Use the numeric keys to enter the setting
value
Print PS Errors
Species whether an error page should be printed when a PostScript error is occurring.
Off
On
( ) <PS> <Print PS Errors> <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
443
ICC Prole Settings
Set the prole to be used when performing color matching and specify which element to be given priority over others.
RGB Source Prole
Select a suitable prole for RGB data that matches the monitor that you are using.
sRGB v3.0 (Canon)
Canon HDTV gamma 1.5
Canon HDTV gamma 1.8
Canon HDTV gamma 2.4
None
( ) <PS> <ICC Prole Settings> <RGB Source Prole> Select
the prole
<sRGB v3.0 (Canon)>
An RGB prole is used that is similar to an average prole of most Windows PC monitors. When using a
monitor that supports sRGB, you can print colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor.
<Canon HDTV gamma 1.5> to <Canon HDTV gamma 2.4>
When you want a brightness adjustment after making comparison between the printed colors and the colors
displayed on the monitor, make a necessary setting here. The higher the value, the darker the printed colors.
<None>
Performs color separation from RGB data to CMYK without applying any RGB source prole.
CMYK Sim. Prole
You can select a simulation target when printing CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data to a device-
dependent CMYK color model in accordance with the selected simulation target.
Euro Standard v1.00
JapanColor(Canon)
U.S. Web Coated v1.0
None
Setting Menu List
444
( ) <PS> <ICC Prole Settings> <CMYK Sim. Prole> Select the
prole
<Euro Standard v1.00>
Use the Euro Standard prole. Printing is performed in colors that are close to the European printing
standards.
<JapanColor(Canon)>
Use the JapanColor prole. Printing is performed in colors that are close to the Japanese printing standards.
<U.S. Web Coated v1.0>
Use the U.S. Web Coated prole. Printing is performed in colors that are close to the U.S. printing standards.
<None>
Prints CMYK data using a device-dependent CMYK color model without applying any CMYK simulation prole.
●When this item is set to <None>, dark color gradation may collapse depending on the data.
Grayscale Prole
Set whether to convert gray data to CMYK data using the machine's grayscale prole.
Off
On
( ) <PS> <ICC Prole Settings> <Grayscale Prole> <Off> or
<On>
Setting Menu List
445
<Off>
Prints only with K (black) toner without converting the data to CMYK data.
<On>
Converts the data to CMYK data using the machine's grayscale prole. However, printing may be performed
only with K (black) toner depending on the setting of <Output Prole> or <Pure Black Text>.
Output Prole
You can select suitable proles for data that you are going to print. You can set this item for each of the types of
image contained in one document.
Text
PS Normal
PS Photo
PS TR Normal
PS TR Photo
Graphics
PS Normal
PS Photo
PS TR Normal
PS TR Photo
Image
PS Normal
PS Photo
PS TR Normal
PS TR Photo
( ) <PS> <ICC Prole Settings> <Output Prole> Select the
image data type Select the prole
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<PS Normal>
Color matching is performed so that data is printed in colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor.
Setting Menu List
446
<PS Photo>
Color matching is performed so that the print result is similar to photography.
<PS TR Normal>
Color matching is performed so that data is printed in colors close to the colors displayed on the monitor and
that bleeding of toner into text and ne lines is well controlled.
<PS TR Photo>
Color matching is performed so that the print result is similar to photography and that bleeding of toner into
text and ne lines is well controlled.
This item is disabled when one of the following settings is made.
●<RGB Source Prole> is set to <None>.
●<CMYK Sim. Prole> is set to <None>.
●<Grayscale Prole> is set to <Off>.
Matching Method
Specify which element to be given priority over others in color matching by <RGB Source Prole>.
Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
( ) <PS> <ICC Prole Settings> <Matching Method> Select the
matching method
<Perceptual>
Matching is performed with priority given to perceptual.
<Saturation>
Matching is performed with priority given to saturation.
<Colorimetric>
Matching is performed so that color difference between originals and printouts is minimized.
Setting Menu List
447
●This item is disabled when <RGB Source Prole> is set to <None>.
Pure Black Text
For black text whose color information denes "R=G=B=0%," "C=M=Y=100%," or "C=M=Y=0%/K=100%," select whether
to print it with K (black) toner only or according to the setting of <Output Prole>.
Off
On
( ) <PS> <Pure Black Text> <Off> or <On>
<Off>
Prints according to the setting of <Output Prole>. The print result may be better than with <On> depending
on the print data.
<On>
Prints black text with K (black) toner only. Unlike printing with color (CMY) toner, color toner slurring around
the edges will not occur. It is recommended that normally you use this setting.
Black Overprint *
Set how to print when black text is on a color background or color gure. This item is not displayed when <Pure Black
Text> is set to <Off>.
Off
On
( ) <PS> <Black Overprint> <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
448
<Off>
First the data is printed after the black text is cut out from the color background or gure, leaving the
corresponding white blank, and then the black text is printed on the white blank. The print may be fainter
than with the <On> setting, and the edges of the text may be rimmed with white.
<On>
First only the color background or gure is printed, and then the black text is printed onto the background or
gure.
Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the whole image in steps of 5 %. The smaller the value, the brighter the image.
85 to 100 to 115 (%)
( ) <PS> <Brightness> Use / to enter the setting value
Halftones
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker
areas of an image).
Error Diffusion
You can perform ner printing than with <Resolution/Grad.>. This print mode is suitable for sharply printing
edges of ne granularity data such as characters or thin lines.
Off
On
( ) <PS> <Halftones> <Error Diffusion> <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
449
Resolution/Grad. *
Select the halftone reproduction method when <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. You can set this item for each of
the types of image contained in one document.
Text
Resolution
Gradation
Graphics
Resolution
Gradation
Image
Resolution
Gradation
( ) <PS> <Halftones> <Resolution/Grad.> Select the image
data type <Resolution> or <Gradation>
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<Resolution>
Performs ne printing by sharply reproducing the edges of characters. This print mode is suitable for
printing data of characters and thin lines with a clear nish.
<Gradation>
Prints gradation and lines with a smooth nish. This print mode is suitable for printing gures and charts
with gradation.
Composite Overprint
Set whether CMYK data for which overprint is set is to be overprinted as composite data.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
450
( ) <PS> <Composite Overprint> <Off> or <On>
●Setting this item to <On> does not enable overprint if <CMYK Sim. Prole> is set to other than <None>.
Advanced Smoothing
Make settings for the smoothing mode that enables edges of lines, gures and text are printed smoothly.
Advanced Smoothing
Specify whether to enable or disable the smoothing mode. Edges will be smoother with <Smooth 2> than with
<Smooth 1>.
Off
Smooth 1
Smooth 2
( ) <PS> <Advanced Smoothing> <Advanced
Smoothing> Select the processing method
Graphics *
Specify whether to apply the smoothing mode to lines and gures when <Advanced Smoothing> is set to
<Smooth 1> or <Smooth 2>.
Off
On
( ) <PS> <Advanced Smoothing> <Graphics> <Off> or
<On>
Text *
Specify whether to apply the smoothing mode to text when <Advanced Smoothing> is set to <Smooth 1> or
<Smooth 2>.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
451
( ) <PS> <Advanced Smoothing> <Text> <Off> or <On>
Grayscale Conversion *
You can select the method to convert color pint data to black-and-white data.
sRGB
NTSC
Uniform RGB
( ) <PS> <Grayscale Conversion> Select the conversion method
<sRGB>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate color-conscious smooth gradation.
<NTSC>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate appearances equivalent to television pictures
(NTSC).
<Uniform RGB>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to equalize all RGB levels based on the brightness only.
●This item is available when <Color Mode> ( Color Mode(P. 357) ) under <Print Quality> is set to <Black>.
Setting Menu List
452
MEAP Settings
52AC-057
The setting items about the main screen on MEAP are listed with short descriptions.
Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on other setting items.
Select Def. Screen(P. 453)
Use DNS Caching(P. 454)
Period of Validity(P. 454)
Add X-FRAME-OPTIONS(P. 454)
Select Def. Screen
You can specify the screen that appears on the display of the operation panel when the machine starts up.
Print Screen
MEAP
( ) <MEAP Settings> <Select Def. Screen> <Print Screen> or
<MEAP>
<Print Screen>
The print standby screen (main screen) is displayed.
<MEAP>
The screen of an installed MEAP application is displayed if any installed.
●You can press ( ) on the operation panel to change the screens of the display.
Setting Menu List
453
Use DNS Caching
You can specify whether to hold in memory the DNS information with which search by a MEAP application has
succeeded. Selecting <On (Specify Period)> allows for temporary holding and makes it possible to specify a valid
holding period ( Period of Validity(P. 454) ).
Off
On (Unlimited Use)
On (Specify Period)
( ) <MEAP Settings> <Use DNS Caching> Select the setting value
Period of Validity *
When the setting of <Use DNS Caching> is <On (Specify Period)>, specify the time period for which to hold the DNS
information in memory.
1 to 60 to 120 (seconds)
( ) <MEAP Settings> <Period of Validity> Use the numeric keys to set
the time period
Add X-FRAME-OPTIONS
Specify whether to add X-FRAME-OPTIONS to the header when the HTTP server returns a response. Adding X-FRAME-
OPTIONS prevents the information from overlapping on contents generated by other servers.
Off
On
( ) <MEAP Settings> <Add X-FRAME-OPTIONS> <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
454
Check Counter
52AC-058
You can check the total number of printed pages.
●You can also check the counter value by selecting <Check Counter> in the Utility Menu(P. 458) as well as
this item.
101: Total 1
You can check the total number of pages printed.
(Display only)
108: Total (B&W 1)
You can check the number of pages printed in black and white.
(Display only)
112: Total (Black/L)
You can check the number of pages printed in black and white on paper of size larger than B4.
(Display only)
113: Total (B&W/Sml)
You can check the number of pages printed in black and white on paper of size B4 or smaller.
(Display only)
114:Total 1(2-Sided)
You can check the number of pages printed in 2-sided printing mode.
(Display only)
Setting Menu List
455
122:Total(Full+1C/L)
You can check the number of pages printed in color on paper of size larger than B4 (other than e-mail printing).
(Display only)
123:Total(Full+1C/S)
You can check the number of pages printed in color on paper of size B4 or smaller (other than e-mail printing).
(Display only)
Setting Menu List
456
Initialize Menu
52AC-059
Select to restore the settings of the Setup menu listed below to the factory defaults.
Initializing Menu(P. 533)
Settings that cannot be initialized
●You cannot initialize the settings specied for <Network> and <Adj. Print Position>. When you want to
initialize the <Network> settings, see Initializing the Network Settings(P. 534) . When you want to
initialize the <Adj. Print Position> settings, manually restore them to the factory default settings ( Adj.
Print Position(P. 374) ).
Setting Menu List
457
Utility Menu
52AC-05A
You can display the total number of printed pages and print internal system
information. When you press ( ) on the operation panel, the Utility menu
is displayed. You can specify the settings described below when the machine is
oine.
Check Counter(P. 458)
Conguration Page(P. 459)
Network Status Print(P. 459)
Consmbl. Status Prt.(P. 459)
IPSec Policy List(P. 459)
Calibration(P. 459)
PCL Utility(P. 460)
PS Utility(P. 460)
Cleaning(P. 460)
Prevent Tnr Spilling(P. 460)
ITB Cleaning(P. 460)
Adj Aftr Cart. Chng(P. 460)
E-Mail Print Utility(P. 461)
Printing Pos. Print(P. 461)
Page Count List(P. 461)
Counter Report(P. 461)
Print MEAP Sys. Info(P. 461)
Cartridge Log Print(P. 461)
Serial Number(P. 461)
Consumables Info.(P. 461)
Check Counter
You can check the total number of printed pages. Checking Total Number of Printed Pages(P. 526)
●You can also check the counter value by selecting <Check Counter> in the Setup Menu(P. 311) as well as
this item.
101: Total 1
You can check the total number of pages printed.
(Display only)
108: Total (B&W 1)
You can check the number of pages printed in black and white.
(Display only)
112: Total (Black/L)
You can check the number of pages printed in black and white on paper of size larger than B4.
(Display only)
113: Total (B&W/Sml)
You can check the number of pages printed in black and white on paper of size B4 or smaller.
(Display only)
Setting Menu List
458
114:Total 1(2-Sided)
You can check the number of pages printed in 2-sided printing mode.
(Display only)
122:Total(Full+1C/L)
You can check the number of pages printed in color on paper of size larger than B4 (other than e-mail printing).
(Display only)
123:Total(Full+1C/S)
You can check the number of pages printed in color on paper of size B4 or smaller (other than e-mail printing).
(Display only)
Conguration Page
You can check the machine settings ( Setup Menu(P. 311) ) congured in the machine. You can also check other
information such as the toner cartridge status, the number of printed pages, and the capacity of the memory (RAM)
mounted on the machine. Conguration Page(P. 517)
Network Status Print
Select to print a list of the settings ( Network(P. 331) ) about the network congured in the machine. You can also
check the information about the security including the address lter settings and IPSec settings. Network Status
Print(P. 517)
Consmbl. Status Prt.
You can print information such as toner cartridge status, warning messages, and information on where you can
purchase new toner cartridges. Consmbl. Status Prt.(P. 518)
IPSec Policy List
Select to print a list of the IPSec policy names and settings ( Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 256) ) congured in the
machine. IPSec Policy List(P. 518)
Calibration
When color mismatch occurs or when the colors have changed and the data is not printed in the correct colors
(specied colors), you can perform calibration. Correcting Color Mismatch and Hues(P. 511)
POP Prnt Calibration
Use this function to correct color mismatch and hue difference if they occur in POP printing.
Full Calibration
Use this function to correct color mismatch and hue difference.
Setting Menu List
459
PCL Utility
Select to print a list of the internal information items registered in the machine for use of the PCL mode.
Font List
Select to print a list of the fonts that can be used in the PCL mode. PCL Font List(P. 521)
PS Utility
Select to print a list of the settings for use of the PS mode and the internal information items registered in the
machine. PS Mode List(P. 522)
Conguration Page
Select to print a list of the machine settings ( PS(P. 443) ).
Font List
Select to print a list of the fonts that can be used in the PS mode.
Cleaning
Select to clean the xing unit when black spots or streaks appear on printouts. Fixing Unit(P. 484)
Prevent Tnr Spilling
You can prevent toner spilling during transportation of the machine over a long distance. Relocating the
Machine(P. 506)
ITB Cleaning
If print quality is not good, you can perform ITB unit cleaning.
( ) <ITB Cleaning> <Yes>
Adj Aftr Cart. Chng
Adjust toner density when POP printing is not possible with the expected density.
( ) <Adj Aftr Cart. Chng> <Yes>
Setting Menu List
460
E-Mail Print Utility
Select to manually receive e-mails and print a log of received e-mails in list form.
Received E-Mail
Select to manually receive e-mails from the POP3 mail server and print them. Manually Receiving E-
Mails(P. 125)
E-Mail RX Log List
Select to print a log consisting of subjects and received date/time of e-mails received in the machine in list form.
E-Mail Print Log(P. 525)
Printing Pos. Print
Select to print marks that indicate the current print position. Adjusting Print Position(P. 513)
Page Count List
Select to print a report on the number of printed pages for each department when Department ID Management is
enabled. Page Count List(P. 519)
Counter Report
Outputs a report showing the total number of pages printed to date. Counter Report(P. 520)
Print MEAP Sys. Info
Select to print a list of information about MEAP applications installed in the machine and the MEAP system applications
when the MEAP function is enabled. Print MEAP Sys. Info(P. 520)
Cartridge Log Print
Prints logs of usage of toner cartridge/drum cartridge in the form of a list. Cartridge Log Print(P. 521)
Serial Number
Select to display the serial number of the machine.
( ) <Serial Number>
Consumables Info.
Select to display the information about such as the paper and toner cartridge.
Setting Menu List
461
Paper Information
Select to display the currently specied paper size and paper type, and the remaining paper level for each paper
source. Checking Paper(P. 529)
Toner Cart. Model
Select to display the model number of the toner cartridge for the machine. Checking the Toner Cartridge
Model(P. 529)
Remaining Toner
Displays the toner cartridge status. Checking the Toner Cartridge Status(P. 530)
●The displayed toner cartridge status can be used only as a guide and may differ from the actual
status.
Drum Cart. Model
Select to display the model number of the drum cartridge for the machine. Checking the Drum Cartridge
Model(P. 530)
Remaining Drum Life
Displays the drum cartridge status. Checking the Drum Cartridge Status(P. 530)
●The displayed drum cartridge status can be used only as a guide and may differ from the actual
status.
Setting Menu List
462
Job Menu
52AC-05C
You can print documents stored in the SD card and a print log. When you
press ( ) on the operation panel, the Job menu is displayed. You can specify
the settings described below when the machine is oine.
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with "*1" may not be displayed depending on the options you are using, or other setting
items.
●Settings marked with "*2" may not be displayed when [Display Job Log] check box of the Remote UI is not
selected. Hiding the Print Job History(P. 249)
Encrypted Print(P. 464)
Secured Print(P. 464)
Stored Job List(P. 464)
Stored Job Print(P. 464)
Job Print Log(P. 465)
Stored Job Print Log(P. 465)
Report Print Log(P. 465)
E-Mail Print Log(P. 465)
Encrypted Print *1
Select to print encrypted documents that you sent to the machine from the computer. Printing Out Secured
Documents(P. 94)
Secured Print *1
Select to print secured documents that you sent to the machine from the computer. Printing Out Secured
Documents(P. 94)
Stored Job List *1
Select to print a list of documents stored in the SD card installed on the machine. Stored Job List(P. 523)
Stored Job Print *1
Select to print documents stored in the SD card installed on the machine. Printing a Document Stored in the
Machine(P. 99)
Setting Menu List
464
Job Print Log *2
Select to print a log of documents printed from the computer in list from. Job Print Log(P. 523)
Stored Job Print Log *1*2
Select to print a print log of documents stored in the SD card installed on the machine in list form. Stored Job Print
Log(P. 524)
Report Print Log *2
Select to print the settings and a print log of reports in list form. Report Print Log(P. 524)
E-Mail Print Log *2
Select to print a print log of received e-mails in list form. E-Mail Print Log(P. 525)
Setting Menu List
465
Reset Menu
52AC-05E
You can cancel all processes, delete data in memory, and turn OFF the power. When
you press ( ) on the operation panel, the Reset menu is displayed.
Soft Reset(P. 466)
Form Feed(P. 467)
Shut Down(P. 467)
●When the message Ennn-nnnn (n is a number) is displayed, only <Shut Down> can be executed.
Soft Reset
Select to erase all data of print jobs that are not yet nished (soft reset). You can also select this item to perform a hard
reset for enabling the changed settings.
●Make sure to check that other users are not using the machine before performing a soft reset or hard reset,
otherwise, all print data is erased before being printed.
◼Performing a Soft Reset
Perform a soft reset when you want to erase all print data that is being printed, waiting to be printed, or being
received.
( ) <Soft Reset> <Yes>
◼Performing a Hard Reset
Perform a hard reset when you want to enable the changed settings of machine or to erase data registered in memory
of the machine.
1Press ( ).
Setting Menu List
466
●If the setting menu is displayed, rst press ( ) to return to the main screen and then
perform this step 1.
2Use / to select <Soft Reset>, press and hold for 5 seconds or more, and
release it.
➠The message <Execute hard reset?> is displayed.
3Select <Yes>, and press .
➠When a hard reset is executed, the machine is restarted.
●When a soft reset or hard reset is performed, secured documents stored in the optional SD card are also
deleted.
Form Feed
If printing is canceled from the computer or the communication is interrupted during data reception, the data may
remain in the memory of the machine, preventing the printing from nishing. The next print data cannot be printed
with the remaining data left as is. In this case, select <Form Feed> to forcibly print the data remaining in memory.
( ) <Form Feed> <Yes>
●If the remaining data is not printed, perform a soft reset.
●If the data still remains in the memory of the machine after a form feed is performed (the [ ] indicator is lit
on the machine), perform a soft reset.
Shut Down
When turning OFF the machine, shut down the machine from the operation panel without using the power switch.
Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Shutdown)(P. 36)
Setting Menu List
467
Select Feeder Menu
52AC-05F
The settings about the paper source and the size of paper loaded in the machine
are listed with short descriptions. When you press ( ) on the operation panel,
the Select Feeder menu is displayed. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Common settings
●The settings are the same as those for <Paper Source> in the Setup Menu(P. 311) . The settings specied
here are also applied to the <Paper Source> settings.
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the options you are using, or other
setting items.
Paper Source(P. 468)
MP Tray Paper Size(P. 469)
Drawer N Paper Size (N=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)(P. 469)
Standard Paper Size(P. 470)
MP Tray Priority(P. 471)
MP Tray for Mix Ppr.(P. 471)
Auto Select Drawer(P. 472)
Auto Detect Ppr Type(P. 472)
Default Paper Type(P. 474)
MP Tray Paper Type(P. 474)
Drawer N Paper Type (N=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)(P. 475)
Manual 2-Sided (MP)(P. 475)
2-Sided Printing(P. 476)
Paper Source
Select the paper source from which paper is fed. When you want to automatically change the paper source based on
the paper size and paper type, select <Auto>.
Auto
Multi-Purpose Tray
Drawer 1
Drawer 2 *
Drawer 3 *
Drawer 4 *
Drawer 5 *
( ) <Paper Source> Select the paper source
Setting Menu List
468
MP Tray Paper Size
Specify the size of the paper that is loaded in the multi-purpose tray. Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-
Purpose Tray(P. 63)
A6
A5
A5R
B5
B5R
A4
A4R
B4
A3
LTR
LTRR
LGL
11x17
EXEC
EXECR
305x457 mm
Free Size
Custom Size
Custom Size R
Postcard
Reply Postcard
4on1 Postcard
Env. Kakugata2
Env. Nagagata3
Env. Younaga 3
Env. ISO-C5
Env. Monarch
Env. No.10
Env. DL
India-LGL
Index Card
STMT
STMTR
FLSC
8K
16K
16KR
Drawer N Paper Size (N=1, 2, 3, 4, 5) *
Set the size of paper loaded in the machine's paper drawer or optional paper feeder or cassette feeding unit (
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 60) ).
Machine's Paper Drawer
A5R
Setting Menu List
469
B5R
EXECR
Free Size
Auto
Custom Size
Custom Size R
India-LGL
FLSC
8K
16K
16KR
Paper Feeder's or Cassette Feeding Unit's Paper Drawer
A5R
B5R
EXECR
Free Size
Auto
Custom Size
Custom Size R
India-LGL
FLSC
8K
16K
16KR
Standard Paper Size
Set the default paper size. Printing will be performed with the paper size set here when you want to print from an OS
not supporting printer drivers or a mobile device or other device not supporting paper size settings.
A6
A5
B5
A4
B4
A3
LTR
LGL
11x17
EXEC
305x457 mm
Postcard
Reply Postcard
4on1 Postcard
Env. Kakugata2
Env. Nagagata3
Env. Younaga 3
Env. ISO-C5
Env. Monarch
Env. No.10
Setting Menu List
470
Env. DL
India-LGL
Index Card
STMT
FLSC
8K
16K
( ) <Standard Paper Size> Select the paper size
Selecting the paper size
Specify the setting according to the size of the paper to print on.
MP Tray Priority
Select whether to prioritize paper feeding from the multi-purpose tray when <Paper Source> is set to <Auto>. If you
select <On>, paper is fed from the multi-purpose tray when the same size paper is loaded in both the multi-purpose
tray and the paper drawer.
Off
On
( ) <MP Tray Priority> <Off> or <On>
●When <MP Tray for Mix Ppr.> is set to <On>, paper is preferentially fed from the paper drawer even if <MP
Tray Priority> is set to <On>.
MP Tray for Mix Ppr.
If you select <On> with <Paper Source> set to <Auto>, the multi-purpose tray is automatically selected when
appropriate size paper is not loaded in any paper drawer.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
471
( ) <MP Tray for Mix Ppr.> <Off> or <On>
Auto Select Drawer
If you select <Use> with <Paper Source> set to <Auto>, the machine automatically selects the paper source with
appropriate size paper loaded. Also, when the paper runs out, this setting enables continuous printing by switching
from one paper source to another that is loaded with the same paper size.
Do Not Use
Use
( ) <Auto Select Drawer> Select the paper source <Do Not Use> or
<Use>
Paper source selection
Select the paper source to which you want to apply the Auto Select Drawer function.
Switching of the settings
Select <On> to enable automatic drawer selection for the paper source you selected on the previous screen
().
Auto Detect Ppr Type
Specify whether to automatically detect the paper type when plain paper or heavy paper is loaded. To use this
function, set the paper type for the paper source to <Mixed Types>. Also, set [Paper Type] in the printer driver to
[Printer Default].
Available Paper(P. 547)
MP Tray Paper Type(P. 474)
Drawer N Paper Type (N=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)(P. 475)
Basic Printing Operations(P. 75)
Multi-Purpose Tray
Do Not Use
First Sheet Only
Each Sheet
Drawer 1
Do Not Use
Setting Menu List
472
Use
Drawer 2 *
Do Not Use
Use
Drawer 3 *
Do Not Use
Use
Drawer 4 *
Do Not Use
Use
Drawer 5 *
Do Not Use
Use
( ) <Auto Detect Ppr Type> Check the message Select the paper
source Select the setting value
Paper source selection
Select the paper source for which you want to make a setting concerning automatic paper type detection.
Switching of the settings (Multi-Purpose Tray)
When <First Sheet Only> is specied, paper type detection is performed for the rst sheet only. When <Each
Sheet> is specied, paper type detection is performed for each sheet as it is fed.
Switching of the settings (Drawer 1 to 5*)
When <Use> is specied, paper type detection is performed for the rst sheet only.
●When this function is enabled, the printing speed may be slower. When <Each Sheet> is specied, the
printing speed will be slower.
●When this function is enabled, the machine may not be able to print properly. If the machine cannot print
properly, set this function to <Do Not Use> and specify the paper type from the printer driver before trying
printing again.
Setting Menu List
473
Default Paper Type
Set the default paper type. Printing will be performed with the paper type set here when you want to print from an OS
not supporting printer drivers or a mobile device or other device not supporting paper type settings.
Plain
Plain L
Plain L2
Heavy 1
Heavy 2
Heavy 3
Heavy 4
Heavy 5
Postcard
Envelope
Coated 1
Coated 2
Coated 3
Labels
Rough 1
Rough 2
( ) <Default Paper Type> Select the paper type
Paper type selection
Specify the settings in the same way as the paper settings in the printer driver according to the paper type
for printing. Loading Paper(P. 40)
●Printing will be performed with the paper type set here if [Paper Type] is set to [Printer Default] on the
printer driver side and the type of the paper loaded in the paper source is set to <Mixed Types> on the
machine side.
MP Tray Paper Type
Set the type of paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray. Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose
Tray(P. 63)
Plain
Plain L
Plain L2
Setting Menu List
474
Heavy 1
Heavy 2
Heavy 3
Heavy 4
Heavy 5
Postcard
Envelope
Coated 1
Coated 2
Coated 3
Labels
Rough 1
Rough 2
Mixed Types
Drawer N Paper Type (N=1, 2, 3, 4, 5) *
Set the type of paper loaded in the paper drawer. Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 60)
Plain
Plain L
Plain L2
Heavy 1
Heavy 2
Heavy 3
Heavy 4
Labels
Rough 1
Rough 2
Mixed Types
Manual 2-Sided (MP)
Select the side of paper to print on when you want to perform 2-sided printing manually from the multi-purpose tray.
1st Side
2nd Side
( ) <Manual 2-Sided (MP)> <1st Side> or <2nd Side>
<1st Side>
Select to print on the back side (the side to print rst).
Setting Menu List
475
<2nd Side>
Select to print on the front side (the opposite of the side that is already printed).
2-Sided Printing
Select whether to print on both sides of paper.
Off
On
( ) <2-Sided Printing> <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
476
Troubleshooting (FAQ)
52AC-05H
When a problem occurs, check this chapter to nd out solutions before contacting Canon.
Troubleshooting (FAQ)
478
Maintenance
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................................... 480
Cleaning the Machine ....................................................................................................................................... 482
Exterior ......................................................................................................................................................... 483
Fixing Unit .................................................................................................................................................... 484
Paper Delivery Area ...................................................................................................................................... 485
Replacing the Toner Cartridges ........................................................................................................................ 490
How to Replace Toner Cartridges ................................................................................................................. 494
Replacing the Drum Cartridges ........................................................................................................................ 497
How to Replace Drum Cartridges ................................................................................................................. 501
Replacing the Waste Toner Container ............................................................................................................. 503
How to Replace the Waste Toner Container .................................................................................................. 504
Relocating the Machine .................................................................................................................................... 506
Maintaining and Improving Print Quality ....................................................................................................... 508
Adjusting Print Density ................................................................................................................................. 509
Correcting Color Mismatch and Hues ........................................................................................................... 511
Adjusting Print Position ................................................................................................................................ 513
Printing Reports and Lists ................................................................................................................................ 517
Viewing the Counter Value ............................................................................................................................... 526
Checking Consumables ..................................................................................................................................... 529
Initializing Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 532
Initializing Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 533
Initializing the Network Settings ................................................................................................................... 534
Maintenance
479
Maintenance
52AC-05J
This chapter describes upkeep of the machine, including how to clean the machine and initialize settings.
◼Basic Cleaning Cleaning the Machine(P. 482)
●The machine becomes dirty, see Exterior(P. 483) .
●Black spots appear on printouts, see Fixing Unit(P. 484) .
◼Replacing the Toner Cartridges
●To check the toner cartridge status, see Replacing the Toner
Cartridges(P. 490) .
●How to replace toner cartridges, see How to Replace Toner
Cartridges(P. 494) .
◼Replacing the Drum Cartridges
●To check the drum cartridge status, see Replacing the Drum Cartridges(P. 497) .
●How to replace drum cartridges, see How to Replace Drum Cartridges(P. 501) .
◼Replacing the Waste Toner Container
●The replacement message has been displayed, see Replacing the Waste Toner Container(P. 503) .
●How to replace the waste toner container, see How to Replace the Waste Toner Container(P. 504) .
◼Relocating the Machine
●Relocating the machine for maintenance or an oce move, see Relocating
the Machine(P. 506) .
◼Managing Print Quality Maintaining and Improving Print Quality(P. 508)
●If you want to adjust the toner density to be used for printing, see Adjusting Print Density(P. 509) .
●If you want to correct color mismatch or hue difference, see Correcting Color Mismatch and Hues(P. 511) .
●If you want to adjust the print position, see Adjusting Print Position(P. 513) .
Maintenance
480
◼Printing Reports and Lists
●Printing out lists of settings or the like, see Printing Reports and Lists(P. 517) .
◼Checking the Total Pages Printed by the Machine
If you want to check the total page number of printouts, see Viewing the Counter Value(P. 526) .
◼Initializing Settings
If you want to restore the settings, see Initializing Settings(P. 532) .
Maintenance
481
Cleaning the Machine
52AC-05K
Regularly clean the machine to prevent deterioration in printing quality and to ensure that you use it safely and easily.
Carefully read the safety instructions before you start cleaning. Maintenance and Inspections(P. 9)
Where to Clean
Exterior of the machine and ventilation slots
Exterior(P. 483)
Internal xing unit
Fixing Unit(P. 484)
Internal paper delivery area
Paper Delivery Area(P. 485)
Maintenance
482
Exterior
52AC-05L
Regularly wipe the exterior of the machine, especially around the ventilation slots, to keep the machine in good
condition.
1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
●When you turn OFF the power, shut down the machine from the operation panel without using the power
switch. Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Shutdown)(P. 36)
2Clean the exterior of the machine and the ventilation slots.
●Use a soft, well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted with water.
●To locate the ventilation slots, see Front Side(P. 19) .
3Wait for the exterior of machine to dry completely.
4Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.
Maintenance
483
Fixing Unit
52AC-05R
Dirt may adhere to the xing unit inside the machine and cause black spots to appear on printouts. To clean the xing
unit, perform the following procedure. Note that you cannot clean the xing unit when the machine has documents
waiting to be printed. Note that cleaning the xing unit requires A4 or Letter size paper. Set the paper in the multi-
purpose tray before performing the following procedure.
●Cleaning consumes the toner cartridge. Make sure that there is sucient toner cartridge remaining
beforehand. Checking the Toner Cartridge Status(P. 493)
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Cleaning>, and press .
3Select the size of the loaded paper, and press .
4Select <Yes>, and press .
➠The <Set cleaning paper and press the Online key.> message appears on the display.
5Press ( ).
➠The cleaning paper is slowly fed into the machine and the cleaning of the xing unit starts.
●You cannot stop the cleaning halfway. Wait until the cleaning is completed.
Maintenance
484
Paper Delivery Area
52AC-05S
If you frequently use labels, glue on them may stick to the paper delivery area, causing paper jams. After using labels,
use the following procedure to wipe off the glue residue from the paper delivery area.
1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
●When you turn OFF the power, shut down the machine from the operation panel without using the power
switch. Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Shutdown)(P. 36)
2Wipe off the glue residue sticking to the paper delivery area.
●Wipe off the glue residue using a soft, well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted
with water.
For the paper drawer
●Also use the following procedure to remove the glue residue from the optional paper feeder or cassette
feeding unit.
1Pull out the paper drawer until it stops.
2Wipe off the glue residue sticking to the paper guides.
●When there is paper loaded in the paper source in question, remove the paper before proceeding to
the wipe-off operation.
3Set the paper drawer.
●If paper was loaded, reload paper. Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 42)
4Open the right cover.
Maintenance
485
5Wipe off the glue residue sticking to the interior of the main unit.
●When wiping off the glue residue sticking to the interior of the main unit, take care not to touch the
ITB unit or the automatic paper type detection sensor.
6Close the right cover.
For the multi-purpose tray
1Open the cover.
2Wipe off the glue residue sticking to the paper guides.
Maintenance
486
3Remove the cover for the feeder rollers.
4Pull out the upper feeder roller.
5Wipe off the glue residue sticking to the feeder roller.
6Place the removed feeder roller back into position.
7Place back the cover for the feeder rollers.
8Close the cover.
9Open the right cover.
Maintenance
487
10 Wipe off the glue residue sticking to the interior of the main unit.
●When wiping off the glue residue sticking to the interior of the main unit, take care not to touch the
ITB unit or the automatic paper type detection sensor.
11 Close the right cover.
3Wipe off the glue residue sticking to the output tray.
4Wait for the exterior of machine to dry completely.
Maintenance
488
5Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.
Maintenance
489
Replacing the Toner Cartridges
52AC-05U
When the replacement time for a toner cartridge is near, a message appears on the display. Note that the print quality
becomes poor if you continue printing without taking any action. You can also check the toner cartridge status on the
display.
When a Message Appear(P. 490)
If Printouts are Poor in Quality(P. 492)
Checking the Toner Cartridge Status(P. 493)
◼When a Message Appear
Depending on which message is displayed, you will need to make sure that you have a replacement toner cartridge
ready or replace the toner cartridge. How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 494) Consumables(P. 564)
●"X" in the following message represents a CMYK color.
<X toner cartridge will soon reach lifetime.>
<X toner cartridge will soon reach end of lifetime.>
This message noties you that the toner cartridge for the indicated color needs to be replaced soon. Make sure
that you have a replacement toner cartridge ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before
you start to print a large job.
●When the <Ready to print.> message is not displayed, the printing is temporarily stopped. To resume
the printing, press ( ).
●Which message is to be displayed depends on the <Action When Warning> setting in the setting
menu of the operation panel. Action When Warning(P. 320)
●You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge that triggers
this message. Spec Tnr Chk Timing(P. 397)
<Change X toner cartridge.>
<End of lifetime reached. Change X toner cartridge.>
The toner cartridge for the indicated color has reached the end of its lifetime. It is recommended that you
replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
Maintenance
490
●You can continue printing when this message is displayed, but the print quality may deteriorate.
●Receiving e-mail and fax documents will be disabled. Printing Received E-mail (E-Mail Print)
(P. 121)
●When the <End of lifetime reached. Change X toner cartridge.> message is displayed, the printing is
temporarily stopped. To resume the printing, press ( ).
●Which message is to be displayed depends on the <Action When Tnr. Out> setting in the setting menu
of the operation panel. Action When Tnr. Out(P. 398)
<Change X toner cartridge.>
The toner cartridge for the indicated color has reached the end of its lifetime. Replace the toner cartridge.
●When this message is displayed, you cannot continue printing.
●Whether this message is displayed or not depends on the settings of <Action When Tnr. Out> in the
Setting Menu of the operation panel. Action When Tnr. Out(P. 398)
<Counterfeit/non-Canon cart. are not covered.>
This message noties you that the machine may not print in optimum quality. It is recommended that you
replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
●You can continue printing when this message is displayed, but the print quality may deteriorate.
Doing so may result in damage to the machine.
<Counterfeit/non-Canon toner cart. may be in use.>
This message noties you that the machine may not print in optimum quality. It is recommended that you
replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
Maintenance
491
●You can press ( ) to continue printing, but the print quality may deteriorate. Doing so
may result in damage to the machine.
<Cannot print. Tnr. cart. may be non-Canon/counterfeit.>
This message noties you that the machine may not print in optimum quality. It is recommended that you
replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
●When this message is displayed, you cannot continue printing. Canon Genuine Mode(P. 329)
<X toner comm. err. Cart. may be non-Canon/counterfeit.>
This message noties you that the machine may not print in optimum quality. It is recommended that you
replace the toner cartridge with a new one. How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 494)
◼If Printouts are Poor in Quality
If your printouts begin to show any of the following features, one of your toner cartridges is consumed. Replace the
nearly empty toner cartridge even if no message is displayed. How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 494)
Streaks Appear/Printing is Uneven Partially faded Uneven density
Afterimages appear in blank areas White spots appear Printouts Become Lightly Colored
Maintenance
492
◼Checking the Toner Cartridge Status
You can check the toner cartridge status on the main screen. It is recommended that you check the amount before
you start to print a large job.
Cartridge Status Indication
Displays the toner cartridge status. Depending on your environment, other internal parts may reach the end
of their lifetime before the toner runs out.
●The displayed toner cartridge status can be used only as a guide and may differ from the actual
status.
●You can also check the toner cartridge status with <Remaining Toner> under <Consumables Info.>.
Consumables Info.(P. 461)
LINKS
Consumables(P. 564)
Maintenance
493
How to Replace Toner Cartridges
52AC-05W
Read the precautions in Maintenance and Inspections(P. 9) and Consumables(P. 10) before replacing the
toner cartridges.
1Fully open the front cover.
2Pull out the toner cartridge.
3Remove the replacement toner cartridge from the packing materials.
4Shake the toner cartridge ve or six times as shown below to evenly distribute the
toner inside the cartridge, and then place it on a at surface.
●De not remove the protective cover ( ) in this step.
Maintenance
494
5Remove the protective cover.
6Install the toner cartridge.
●Align the toner cartridge with the toner cartridge guide ( ) while holding it in horizontal position, and then
push it into the slot until it stops.
●Be careful that you do not touch the gear ( ) or the feed section ( ) or hit them against the mouth of
the slot.
●Place the toner cartridge into the slot marked with the appropriate color label ( ).
Maintenance
495
7Close the front cover.
Maintenance
496
Replacing the Drum Cartridges
52AC-05X
When the time for drum cartridge replacement is near, a message appears on the display. Note that the print quality
becomes poor if you continue printing without taking any action. You can also check the drum cartridge status on the
display.
●Drum cartridges that were used or are being used for a specic color must not be reused for a different
color. Such reuse of drum cartridges may result in poor print quality.
When a Message Appear(P. 497)
If Printouts are Poor in Quality(P. 499)
Checking the Drum Cartridge Status(P. 500)
◼When a Message Appear
Depending on which message is displayed, you will need to make sure that you have a replacement drum cartridge
ready or replace the toner cartridge. How to Replace Drum Cartridges(P. 501) Consumables(P. 564)
●"N" in the following message represents a number from 1 to 4.
<Drum Cartridge N will soon reach lifetime.>
<Drum Cartridge N will soon reach end of lifetime.>
This message noties you that the drum cartridge in the indicated slot needs to be replaced soon. Make sure
that you have a replacement drum cartridge ready. Replace the drum cartridge if you see this message before
you start to print a large job.
●When the <Ready to print.> message is not displayed, the printing is temporarily stopped. To resume
the printing, press ( ).
●Which message is to be displayed depends on the <Action When Warning> setting in the setting
menu of the operation panel. Action When Warning(P. 320)
●You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge that triggers
this message. Spec Drum Chk Timing(P. 397)
<Change Drum Cartridge N.>
<End of lifetime reached. Change Drum Cartridge N.>
The drum cartridge in the indicated slot has reached the end of its lifetime. It is recommended that you replace
the drum cartridge with a new one.
Maintenance
497
●You can continue printing when this message is displayed, but the print quality may deteriorate.
●Receiving e-mail and fax documents will be disabled. Printing Received E-mail (E-Mail Print)
(P. 121)
●When the <End of lifetime reached. Change Drum Cartridge N.> message is displayed, the printing is
temporarily stopped. To resume the printing, press ( ).
<Change Drum Cartridge N.>
The drum cartridge in the indicated slot has reached the end of its lifetime. Replace the toner cartridge.
●When this message is displayed, you cannot continue printing.
<Counterfeit/non-Canon cart. are not covered.>
This message noties you that the machine may not print in optimum quality. It is recommended that you
replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
●You can continue printing when this message is displayed, but the print quality may deteriorate.
Doing so may result in damage to the machine.
<Counterfeit/non-Canon drum cart. may be in use.>
This message noties you that the machine may not print in optimum quality. It is recommended that you
replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
Maintenance
498
●You can press ( ) to continue printing, but the print quality may deteriorate. Doing so
may result in damage to the machine.
<Cannot print. Drum cart. may be non-Canon/counterfeit.>
This message noties you that the machine may not print in optimum quality. It is recommended that you
replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
●When this message is displayed, you cannot continue printing. Canon Genuine Mode(P. 329)
<Drum N comm. err. Cart. may be non-Canon/counterfeit.>
This message noties you that the machine may not print in optimum quality. It is recommended that you
replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
◼If Printouts are Poor in Quality
If your printouts begin to show any of the following features, one of your drum cartridges is consumed. Replace the
nearly empty drum cartridge even if no message is displayed. How to Replace Drum Cartridges(P. 501)
Streaks Appear/Printing is Uneven Partially faded Uneven density
Afterimages appear in blank areas White spots appear
Maintenance
499
How to Replace Drum Cartridges
52AC-05Y
Read the precautions in Maintenance and Inspections(P. 9) and Consumables(P. 10) before replacing the
drum cartridges.
1Fully open the front cover.
2Unlock the drum cartridge lever.
3Pull out the drum cartridge.
4Remove the replacement drum cartridge from the packing materials.
Maintenance
501
5Remove the protective cover.
6Install the drum cartridge.
●Align the drum cartridge with the drum cartridge guide ( ) and push it into the slot until it stops.
●Be careful that you do not touch the drum surface ( ) or hit it against the mouth of the slot. Scratching
the drum surface ( ) may result in a failure.
●Drum cartridges that were used or are being used for a specic color must not be reused for a different
color. Such reuse of drum cartridges may result in poor print quality.
7Lock the drum cartridge lever.
8Close the front cover.
Maintenance
502
Replacing the Waste Toner Container
52AC-060
When the remaining capacity of the waste toner container is already small, the relevant message appears on the
display. You can also check the status of the waste toner container on the display.
When a Message Appear(P. 503)
Checking the Status of the Waste Toner Container(P. 503)
◼When a Message Appear
Depending on which message is displayed, you will need to make sure that you have a replacement waste toner
container ready or replace the waste toner container. How to Replace the Waste Toner Container(P. 504)
Consumables(P. 564)
<Change waste toner container soon.>
This message noties you that the waste toner container needs to be replaced soon. Make sure that you have a
replacement waste toner container ready. Replace the waste toner container if you see this message before you
start to print a large job.
●When the <Ready to print.> message is not displayed, the printing is temporarily stopped. To resume
the printing, press ( ).
●Which message is to be displayed depends on the <Action When Warning> setting in the setting
menu of the operation panel. Action When Warning(P. 320)
<Change waste t. ctn.>
<Change waste toner container.>
The waste toner container has become full. Replace the waste toner container with a new one.
◼Checking the Status of the Waste Toner Container
You can check the status of the waste toner container by <Waste Toner Status> under <Consumables Info.>. It is
recommended that you check if you should prepare a new waster toner container at hand before you start to print a
large job. Consumables Info.(P. 461)
LINKS
Consumables(P. 564)
Maintenance
503
How to Replace the Waste Toner Container
52AC-061
Read the precautions in Maintenance and Inspections(P. 9) and Consumables(P. 10) before replacing the
waste toner container.
1Fully open the front cover.
2Open the left cover.
3Remove the waster toner container.
●Be careful not to tilt the container. Tilting the waster toner container will result in spilling of collected
toner.
●Place the waste toner container into a plastic bag to prevent toner in the container from spilling.
Maintenance
504
4Remove the waste toner container from the packing materials.
●Do not disassemble or modify the waste toner container.
5Install the new waste toner container and close the left cover.
●Insert it while aligning it with the left cover and the lower tray.
6Close the front cover.
Maintenance
505
Relocating the Machine
52AC-062
The machine is heavy. Make sure to follow the procedures below when moving the machine to avoid injury, and also
make sure to read the safety precautions before you begin. Important Safety Instructions(P. 2)
1When transporting the machine over a long distance, perform <Prevent Tnr Spilling>.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Prevent Tnr Spilling>, and press .
3Select <Yes>, and press .
➠Cleaning starts.
●You cannot cancel cleaning after it starts. Wait until the operation is complete.
2Turn OFF the machine and computer.
●When you turn OFF the power, be sure to shut down the machine from the operation panel without using the
power switch. Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Shutdown)(P. 36)
3Disconnect the cables and cord from the machine in numerical order as in the
illustration below.
●Whether the cables with "*" are connected depends on your environment.
Power plug
Power cord
USB device*
USB cable*
LAN cable*
Maintenance
506
4When transporting the machine across a long distance, remove the toner cartridge
and drum cartridge.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 494)
How to Replace Drum Cartridges(P. 501)
5Pull out the paper drawer until it stops, and remove it while lifting the front side.
6Close all the open covers, and move the machine to a new location.
●The machine is heavy ( Main Unit(P. 545) ). Do not try hard to carry the machine.
●Use the handles on both sides of the machine, and have at least two people carry it.
If the optional paper feeder or cassette feeding unit is attached to the machine
●Unlock the paper feeder or cassette feeding unit before lifting the machine, and transport the paper
feeder or cassette feeding unit separately from the machine.
7Carefully place the machine at the new installation site.
●For information about how to install the machine after relocating it, see Getting Started. Manuals and
Their Contents(P. 580)
Maintenance
507
Maintaining and Improving Print Quality
52AC-063
If the printing results are not satisfactory such as when the printed colors are different than the original colors or the
resulting print position is different than expected, try the following adjustments.
◼Density Adjustment
Adjust the toner density. You can make ne adjustment of toner density by density level. Adjusting Print
Density(P. 509)
◼Color Mismatch/Hue Correction
Make a correction in the case of color mismatch or hue difference. Correcting Color Mismatch and Hues(P. 511)
◼Print Position Adjustment
For each paper source, you can adjust the print position. Adjusting Print Position(P. 513)
Maintenance
508
Adjusting Print Density
52AC-064
If the resulting print is darker or lighter than expected, you can adjust the toner density for each CMYK color. You can
make ne adjustment of the toner density by dividing the whole density range into three areas.
●If <Toner Save> is set to <On>, you cannot use this adjustment function. Toner Save(P. 357)
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Print Quality>, and press .
3Adjust the density.
1Select the color whose density you want to adjust, and press .
2Use / to adjust the density.
Density adjustment
Set a "+" value to increase the density. Set a "-" value to decrease the density.
3Press .
Making ne adjustment of toner density by density level
You can make ne adjustment of toner density on three density levels - high, medium, and low.
1Use / to select the color whose density you want to adjust, and press .
2Select the desired density level, and press .
Maintenance
509
3Use / to adjust the density.
Density adjustment
Set a "+" value to increase the density. Set a "-" value to decrease the density.
Example adjustment of each density area
<High>
<Medium>
<Low>
4Press .
●If you want to also make adjustments on other density levels, repeat the operations in steps 2 to 4.
Maintenance
510
Correcting Color Mismatch and Hues
52AC-065
When color mismatch occurs or when images are printed in colors that are different from the ones in the original,
execution of calibration allows you to correct the problem. Processing for this correction requires a sucient amount
of toner, so it is recommended that beforehand you check the remaining amount of toner and you replace the toner
cartridge(s) as necessary. Checking the Toner Cartridge Status(P. 493)
Correcting Color Mismatch
Print color mismatch refers to a shift in the positions of colors that may occur when printing one image with
multiple toner cartridges. Color mismatch can cause printouts to appear blurry. When color mismatch occurs,
you need to correct the problem.
When color mismatch occurs When color mismatch does not occur
Correcting Hues
Hue refers to the density of a color such as red, yellow, green, blue, or purple. When hues in the printed image
are different from those in the original or when some colors are darker or the overall density of the print is
thinner than in the original, you need to make a correction.
Hues are not reproduced correctly Original Hues are reproduced correctly
●Frequent calibration may affect the lifetime of toner cartridges.
●If the lifetime of toner cartridge(s) has been reached, calibration may not end correctly. In this case, replace
the toner cartridge(s) and try again calibration. How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 494)
●Normally, calibration is automatically performed in accordance with the usage condition of the machine or
changes in the environmental conditions.
●You can make a setting so that calibration is automatically performed immediately after the machine is
turned ON or you can set the calibration frequency.
First Calibration(P. 389)
Calibration Freq.(P. 396)
1Press ( ).
Maintenance
511
2/ to select <Calibration>, and press .
3Select the type of calibration and press .
●If you want to correct the color mismatch that has occurred in POP printing, select <POP Prnt Calibration>.
●Correction by calibration takes longer time with <POP Prnt Calibration> than with <Full Calibration>.
4Select <Yes>, and press .
➠The adjustment starts.
●You can make a setting so that calibration is automatically performed at a specied time.
Calibration Timer(P. 315)
Calibration Time(P. 315)
●Although normally the type of calibration that is performed automatically is the same as <Full Calibration>,
you can change this to <POP Prnt Calibration>.
Auto POP Calibration(P. 394)
Maintenance
512
Adjusting Print Position
52AC-066
If a document is printed off-center or out of the printable range, adjust the print position. You can adjust the print
position for each paper source.
Step 1: Printing the Current Print Position(P. 513)
Step 2: Checking the Direction and Distance to Adjust(P. 514)
Step 3: Adjusting the Print Position for Each Paper Source(P. 515)
Step 1: Printing the Current Print Position
You can perform "Printing Position Adjustment Print" to check the direction and distance to adjust.
●When you want to check the print position for 2-sided printing, set <2-Sided Printing> to <On> in the setting
menu of the operation panel in advance. 2-Sided Printing(P. 476)
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Paper Source>, and press .
3Select the paper source for which you want to check the print position, and press .
4Press ( ).
➠The screen returns to the main screen.
5Press ( ).
Maintenance
513
6Select <Printing Pos. Print>, and press .
7Select <Yes>, and press .
➠A printing position adjustment printout is output.
Step 2: Checking the Direction and Distance to Adjust
When Printing Position Adjustment Print is performed, the print position check marks are printed. Determine the
direction and distance to adjust based on those marks. When the print position is normal, all the marks are printed at
a position 5 mm from the nearest edge of the paper.
How to Check Printing Position Adjustment Printouts
The edge of paper that comes out rst when the paper is output is the top of a Printing Position Adjustment
Print. When you check the print position, make sure which edge of the paper is the top.
●The size of the mark for checking the
print position is as shown in the illustration
below.
When the Print Position Is Off-Center
When the print position check marks are printed off the correct position, you need to adjust the print position.
When you adjust the print position, specify the direction using "+" and "-" and the distance using "mm". Use "-"
to shift the print position upward and "+" to shift it downward (vertical position correction). Use "-" to shift the
print position leftward and "+" to shift it rightward (horizontal position correction).
Vertical direction (<Offset Y>) Horizontal direction (<Offset X>)
Maintenance
514
In the example shown below, to shift the print position 5 mm upward and 1.5 mm rightward, "-5.0 mm" is set in
<Offset Y> and "+1.50 mm" is set in <Offset X>.
Step 3: Adjusting the Print Position for Each Paper Source
After you conrm the direction and distance to adjust, specify an adjusted print position. You can adjust the print
position vertically in the range of -5.0 mm to +5.0 mm in 0.1 mm increments, and horizontally in the range of -3.5 mm
to +3.5 mm in 0.25 mm increments.
1Set the machine to oine.
●When ( ) is lit, press ( ).
2Press ( ).
3Use / to select <User Maintenance>, and press .
4Select <Adj. Print Position>, and press .
5Select the combination of the direction to adjust and the paper source, and press .
Maintenance
515
●For <Offset X (2-Sided)>, rst select the paper source and then adjust the print position.
Print position adjustment for 2-sided printing
●<Offset Y (2-Sided)> and <Offset X (2-Sided)> allow you to adjust the print position on the rst page (front
side). The print position on the second page (back side) will be adjusted based on the values set for each
paper source.
An example of print position adjustment
First page (front side) <Offset Y (2-Sided)> setting value
Second page (back side) <Offset Y (MP Tray)> setting value
6Set a value, and press .
●Based on the printout made by Printing Position Adjustment Print, use / to enter a value.
●When <Offset Y (2-Sided)> is specied, the print position is adjusted by the input values for all paper sources.
●To adjust another position or paper source, repeat steps 5 and 6.
7Press ( ).
➠The screen returns to the main screen.
8Press ( ) again.
➠The machine becomes online.
9Perform the Printing Position Adjustment Print, and check the adjusted print
position on the printout. Step 1: Printing the Current Print Position(P. 513)
Adjusting all print positions
You can use <Offset Y> and <Offset X> in the setting menu of the operation panel to adjust the print positions
for all types of printing regardless of the paper source. You can adjust the print position in the range of -50.0
mm to +50.0 mm in 0.5 mm increments in either direction: vertical and horizontal. Offset Y/Offset X(P. 352)
Maintenance
516
Printing Reports and Lists
52AC-067
You can check the condition of consumables and the machine settings by printing reports and lists.
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with "*1" may not be displayed depending on options.
●Settings marked with "*2" may not be displayed when [Display Job Log] check box of the Remote UI is not
selected. Hiding the Print Job History(P. 249)
Conguration Page
You can check the machine settings ( Setup Menu(P. 311) ), the contents registered in the machine, and other
information in list form. The other information includes the toner cartridge status, the number of printed pages, and
the capacity of the memory (RAM) mounted on the machine. Setting items whose name is preceded by an asterisk (*)
are the items whose setting was changed from the factory default.
( ) <Conguration Page> <Yes>
Example:
Network Status Print
You can check the settings about the network congured in the machine ( Network(P. 331) ) in list form. The
information about the security including the address lter settings and IPSec settings is also printed.
Maintenance
517
( ) <Network Status Print> <Yes>
Example:
Consmbl. Status Prt.
The information such as the status of toner cartridges and drum cartridges, warning messages, and information on
where you can purchase new toner cartridges can be viewed in list form.
( ) <Consmbl. Status Prt.> <Yes>
Example:
IPSec Policy List
You can check the list of policy names and the IPSec settings registered in the machine by printing an IPSec Policy List.
Maintenance
518
( ) <IPSec Policy List> <Yes>
Example:
E-Mail RX Log List
You can check a log consisting of subjects and received date/time of e-mails received in the machine in list form.
( ) <E-Mail Print Utility> <E-Mail RX Log List> <Yes>
Example:
Page Count List
You can check the number of pages printed for each department by printing a report when [Department ID
Management] is enabled.
Maintenance
519
( ) <Page Count List> <Yes>
Example:
Counter Report
Outputs a report showing the total number of pages printed to date.
( ) <Counter Report> <Yes>
Example:
Print MEAP Sys. Info
You can check the information about MEAP applications installed in the machine and the MEAP system applications in
list form if the MEAP function is enabled.
( ) <Print MEAP Sys. Info> <Yes>
Example:
Maintenance
520
PS Mode List
The settings for use of the PS mode and the internal information items registered in the machine are printed in list
form.
Conguration Page(P. 522)
Font List(P. 522)
◼Conguration Page
You can check the machine settings ( PS(P. 443) ) and the contents registered in the machine in list form.
( ) <PS Utility> <Conguration Page> <Yes>
Example:
◼Font List
You can check the fonts available in PS mode in list form.
Maintenance
522
( ) <PS Utility> <Font List> <Yes>
Example:
Stored Job List *1
You can print a list of documents stored in the SD card installed on the machine.
( ) <Stored Job List> <Yes>
Example:
Job Print Log *2
You can print a log of documents printed from the computer in list from.
( ) <Job Print Log> <Yes>
Maintenance
523
Example:
Stored Job Print Log *1*2
You can print a print log of documents stored in the SD card installed on the machine in list form.
( ) <Stored Job Print Log> <Yes>
Example:
Report Print Log *2
You can print the settings and a print log of reports in list form.
( ) <Report Print Log> <Yes>
Example:
Maintenance
524
Viewing the Counter Value
52AC-068
You can check the number of printed pages.
Checking Total Number of Printed Pages(P. 526)
Checking the Number of Pages Printed for Each Department(P. 527)
Checking Total Number of Printed Pages
You can check the total number of pages so far printed, as well as the current number of black and white printed
pages and that of color printed pages.
( ) <Check Counter> Select the setting to view
<101: Total 1>
You can check the total number of printed pages.
<108: Total (B&W 1)>
You can check the number of pages printed in black and white.
<112: Total (Black/L)>
You can check the number of pages printed in black and white on paper of size larger than B4.
<113: Total (B&W/Sml)>
You can check the number of pages printed in black and white on paper of size B4 or smaller.
<114:Total 1(2-Sided)>
You can check the number of pages printed in 2-sided printing mode.
<122:Total(Full+1C/L)>
You can check the number of pages printed in color on paper of size larger than B4 (other than e-mail
printing).
Maintenance
526
<123:Total(Full+1C/S)>
You can check the number of pages printed in color on paper of size B4 or smaller (other than e-mail
printing).
Checking the Number of Pages Printed for Each Department
You can check the number of pages printed for each department.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Department ID Management].
➠The number of printed pages is displayed for each Department ID under [Printed Pages].
Maintenance
527
To print the check result
Page Count List(P. 519)
To clear the page count to zero
●When you want to clear the page count to zero for each department, click the text link under [Dept. ID], and
click [Clear Count] [OK].
●If you want to return the counts of all departments to zero, click [Clear All Counts] [OK].
Maintenance
528
Checking Consumables
52AC-069
You can use the operation panel to check the information of the consumables.
Checking Paper(P. 529)
Checking the Toner Cartridge Model(P. 529)
Checking the Toner Cartridge Status(P. 530)
Checking the Drum Cartridge Model(P. 530)
Checking the Drum Cartridge Status(P. 530)
Checking the Model Numbers of Waste Toner Container(P. 531)
Checking the Status of Waste Toner Container(P. 531)
Checking Paper
You can display the currently specied paper size and paper type, and the remaining paper level for each paper
source.
( ) <Consumables Info.> <Paper Information> Select the paper
source
Paper source selection
Select the paper source of which information is displayed.
Checking the Toner Cartridge Model
You can display the model number of the toner cartridge for the machine.
( ) <Consumables Info.> <Toner Cart. Model> Select the color
Maintenance
529
Color selection
Select the model number display color.
Checking the Toner Cartridge Status
Displays the toner cartridge status.
( ) <Consumables Info.> <Remaining Toner>
●The displayed values can be used only as a guide and may differ from the actual status.
Checking the Drum Cartridge Model
You can display the model number of the drum cartridge for the machine.
( ) <Consumables Info.> <Drum Cart. Model> Select the drum
cartridge
Drum cartridge selection
Select the drum cartridge whose model number you want to display.
Checking the Drum Cartridge Status
Displays the drum cartridge status.
( ) <Consumables Info.> <Remaining Drum Life>
Maintenance
530
●The displayed values can be used only as a guide and may differ from the actual status.
Checking the Model Numbers of Waste Toner Container
Displays the model number of the waste toner used in the machine.
( ) <Consumables Info.> <Waste Toner cntnr.>
Checking the Status of Waste Toner Container
Displays the status of the waste toner container used in the machine.
( ) <Consumables Info.> <Waste Toner Status>
Maintenance
531
Initializing Menu
52AC-06C
You can restore the settings of the machine ( Setup Menu(P. 311) ) to the factory default settings.
Do not press the power switch when the initialization is in progress
●If the machine is turned OFF during the initialization, it may be damaged.
If a Remote UI Access PIN has been specied
●The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After performing initialization, respecify a Remote UI Access
PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 222)
●When you want to initialize the network settings, follow the procedure in Initializing the Network
Settings(P. 534) .
●When you want to initialize the settings in <Adj. Print Position>, follow the procedure in Adj. Print
Position(P. 374) .
( ) <Initialize Menu> <Yes> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a
Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Maintenance
533
Initializing the Network Settings
52AC-06E
You can restore the network settings ( Network(P. 331) ) to the factory default settings.
Do not initialize the network settings when the machine is printing or receiving print
data
●Doing so may result in incorrect printing, paper jams, or damage to the machine.
( ) <Network> Check the message <Init. Network
Set.> <Yes> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 466) )
Maintenance
534
Appendix
Appendix ............................................................................................................................................................. 536
Third Party Software ......................................................................................................................................... 537
Feature Highlights ............................................................................................................................................ 538
Going Green and Saving Money ................................................................................................................... 539
Improving Eciency ..................................................................................................................................... 540
So Much More .............................................................................................................................................. 542
Specications .................................................................................................................................................... 544
Main Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 545
Available Paper ............................................................................................................................................. 547
Paper Feeder PF-G ........................................................................................................................................ 553
Cassette Feeding Unit-AU ............................................................................................................................. 554
Printer Functions .......................................................................................................................................... 555
Management Functions ................................................................................................................................ 559
System Environment .................................................................................................................................... 562
Network Environment .................................................................................................................................. 563
Consumables ..................................................................................................................................................... 564
Options .............................................................................................................................................................. 567
Optional Equipment ..................................................................................................................................... 568
System Options ............................................................................................................................................ 569
Installing the ROM ................................................................................................................................. 571
Installing an SD Card ............................................................................................................................. 575
Manuals and Their Contents ............................................................................................................................. 580
Using User's Guide ............................................................................................................................................ 581
Screen Layout of User's Guide ...................................................................................................................... 582
Viewing User's Guide .................................................................................................................................... 585
Managing MEAP Applications ........................................................................................................................... 587
Using FTP Clients ............................................................................................................................................... 588
Preparing for Using the FTP Server .............................................................................................................. 589
Printing via FTP Client (FTP Print) .................................................................................................................. 592
Specifying Settings via FTP Client ................................................................................................................. 594
Others ................................................................................................................................................................ 601
Basic Windows Operations ........................................................................................................................... 602
Font Samples ................................................................................................................................................ 610
Notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 615
Appendix
535
Appendix
52AC-06F
This chapter contains technical specications of this machine, instructions on how to use the User's Guide, disclaimers,
copyright information, and other important information for customers.
Appendix
536
Third Party Software
52AC-06H
For information related to third-party software, click the following icon(s).
Appendix
537
Feature Highlights
52AC-06J
Give the features that are described in this section a try. The features are grouped under three headings: "Going
Green and Saving Money," "Improving Eciency," and "So Much More."
Appendix
538
Going Green and Saving Money
52AC-06K
There are lots of ways to cut back on paper, toner, power, and expenses.
2-Sided Printing
You can print on both sides of the paper. Use 2-sided printing to save paper not only on large print jobs but also
when you only want to print a few pages. To save even more, combine 2-sided printing with N on 1 printing of
multiple pages on one sheet of paper. You can print up to 32 pages on a single sheet, which is both economical
and environmentally friendly.
Printing from a Computer(P. 74)
Sleep Mode
If you will not be using the machine for a while, you can save power by putting it into sleep mode, either
manually or automatically. You don't need to turn OFF the power each time, but you can still have the machine
minimize its power consumption. The auto shutdown function can boost the savings, by automatically turning
OFF the machine if it remains idle for a longer time. These convenient functions work in the background to save
power and money every day.
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 67)
Setting Auto Shutdown Time(P. 69)
Appendix
539
Improving Eciency
52AC-06L
Here are some simple operations that can make complicated tasks more ecient.
Print without Application Programs
You can send PDF/PS/EPS/JPEG/TIFF/XPS data from the Remote UI directly to the machine for printing. You can
also print without a computer by connecting a USB memory device to the machine. There is no need to open
les, so you do not need to start an application program. This is very convenient when you are in a hurry and do
not have access to a computer.
Printing without Opening a File (Direct Print)(P. 107)
Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print)(P. 81)
Remote Management with Remote UI
The Remote UI allows you to manage the machine remotely from the computer at your desk. You can check the
status of paper and toner cartridges, and check the current status of print jobs to decide if you should
temporarily interrupt print jobs to print urgent documents or move documents up among the jobs waiting to be
printed. Save time and trouble by eliminating trips between your desk and the printer.
Using Remote UI(P. 285)
Save Time with Shortcuts
Appendix
540
When you have a number of documents to print, it would be convenient to print them all with one operation.
Canon PageComposer allows you to combine multiple documents and print them all at once. You can also save
frequently printed documents like fax cover sheets in the machine's SD card, and then print them directly from
the operation panel. You don't need to return to your computer and start the printer driver. These shortcuts
save time and allow you to work more eciently.
Printing from a Computer(P. 74)
Printing a Document Stored in the Machine (Stored Job Print)(P. 97)
Make Print Settings Quickly with Intuitive Operation
You can easily specify the page layout as well as binding position, switching between 1-sided and 2-sided
printing, etc. intuitively on the preview image in the printer driver. The simple click-operation allows you to
conveniently make settings while viewing how settings are applied.
Printing from a Computer(P. 74)
Appendix
541
So Much More
52AC-06R
There are a variety of features for whatever you need to do - at home, in the oce, or even on the road.
Using a smartphone/tablet
At times such as when you want to quickly print out a proposal you completed on a tablet while travelling to a
business destination, Canon Mobile Application comes in handy.
PCless, quick, and easy! An even broader range of possibilities for work/play with functionality made for this age
of speed.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device(P. 128)
Easy Printing with Google Cloud Print
Hook up to Google Cloud Print with your laptop or cell phone, send your data, and out come your printed
documents. With this machine, Google Cloud Print, and your mobile device, print whenever you want from
wherever you want.
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 139)
Keep Your Printouts Private
Normally, when you print something from your computer, it comes out of the printer right away. However, if
you have sensitive documents, this may not be what you want. Just use secure printing and no one will be able
to print your documents without entering your password on the machine's operation panel. Don't let your
condential documents lie exposed on the tray for everyone to see.
Appendix
542
Specications
52AC-06S
Specications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.
◼Machine Specications
Main Unit(P. 545)
Available Paper(P. 547)
◼Specications of Optional Equipment
Paper Feeder PF-G(P. 553)
Cassette Feeding Unit-AU(P. 554)
◼Functional Specications
Printer Functions(P. 555)
Management Functions(P. 559)
◼Environment To Use the Machine
System Environment(P. 562)
Network Environment(P. 563)
Appendix
544
Main Unit
52AC-06U
●For information on paper sizes and types for each paper source, see " Available Paper(P. 547) ."
Type Desktop
Color Supported Full Color
Resolution for Writing 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Number of Tones 256
Acceptable Paper Stock Paper Sizes
●Max: 320.0 mm x 457.2 mm
●Max (Paper Drawer): 297.0 mm x 431.8 mm
●Min (Paper Drawer): 148.0 mm x 148.0 mm
●Min (Multi-Purpose Tray): 64.0 mm x 127.0 mm
Paper Weight
●Paper Drawer: 60 g/m² to 256 g/m²*1
●Multi-Purpose Tray: 60 g/m² to 300 g/m²
Paper Type Available Paper(P. 547)
Warm-Up Time *2 After Powering ON
34.0 seconds or less
Returning from the Sleep mode
4.0 seconds or less
First Print Time
(A4)
●Full Color: Approx. 7.4 seconds
●Black-and-White: Approx. 6.7 seconds
Print Speed *3
(A4)
●Full Color: 36 sheets/minute
●Black-and-White: 36 sheets/minute
Paper Feeding System/Capacity *4 Paper Drawer
640 sheets (64 g/m²)/550 sheets (80 g/m²) x 1
Multi-Purpose Tray
120 sheets (64 g/m²)/100 sheets (80 g/m²) x 1
Paper Output System/Capacity *4 Output Tray
Appendix
545
200 sheets (60 g/m² to 90 g/m²)
100 sheets (90 g/m² to 300 g/m²)
Power Source AC 220 V - 240 V, 4.7 A, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power Consumption *2 Maximum Power Consumption
1,500 W or less
During Sleep Mode
Approx. 2.0 W
With the Main Power Turned OFF
0.1 W or less
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
556 mm x 608 mm x 403 mm
Weight Main Unit *5
Approx. 38.0 kg
Consumables
Consumables(P. 564)
Installation Space See "Getting Started"
Manuals and Their Contents(P. 580)
Memory Capacity RAM: 1 GB
Environmental Conditions Temperature: 10 °C to 30 °C
Humidity: 20 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
*1When loading paper with length of 364.0 mm or more in landscape orientation, the basis weight of the paper must not
be 199 g/m² or more.
*2May vary depending on the environment and conditions under which the machine is being used.
*3Print speed is measured based on internal testing using A4 size paper printed with 100 % print ratio to original on one-
sided paper. Internal testing involved continuously printing the same one page of content on plain paper. Print speed
may vary depending on paper type, paper size or paper feeding direction.
The device may automatically pause or slow down in order to adjust printer condition such as controlling temperature of
a certain unit or limiting impact to image quality during continuous printing.
*4May vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.
*5The toner cartridges and drum cartridges are not included.
Appendix
546
Available Paper
52AC-06W
◼Supported Paper Sizes
Paper sizes that can be loaded in the paper drawer, multi-purpose tray, or optional paper sources are listed below.
: Available : Unavailable
Paper Size Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose
Tray
Automatic 2-Sided
Printing *2
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
A6
Ledger (11x17)
Legal (LGL)
Letter (LTR)
Statement (STMT)
*1Includes the optional Paper Feeder PF-G/ Cassette Feeding Unit-AU.
*2Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
*3The following sizes are available:
●When loaded in portrait orientation (only with the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver used):
Width 148.0 mm to 297.0 mm, Length 148.0 mm to 297.0 mm
●When loaded in landscape orientation:
Width 148.0 mm to 297.0 mm, Length 148.0 mm to 431.8 mm
*4The following sizes are available:
●When loaded in portrait orientation (only with the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver used):
Width 120.0 mm to 320.0 mm, Length 120.0 mm to 320.0 mm
●When loaded in landscape orientation:
Width 64.0 mm to 320.0 mm, Length 120.0 mm to 457.2 mm
Width 200.0 mm to 297.0 mm, Length 457.3 mm to 1200.0 mm (long size: only with the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver used)
*5The following sizes are available:
●Width 148.0 mm to 320.0 mm, Length 148.0 mm to 457.2 mm
Appendix
547
Paper Size Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose
Tray
Automatic 2-Sided
Printing *2
Executive (EXEC)
Foolscap (FLSC)
305x457 mm/12x18 in
8K
16K
Index Card
Indian Legal (India-LGL)
Postcard
Reply Postcard
4 on 1 Postcard
Envelope NAGAGATA 3
Envelope KAKUGATA 2
Envelope YOUGATANAGA 3 (Younaga 3)
Envelope No. 10 (COM10)
Envelope Monarch
*1Includes the optional Paper Feeder PF-G/ Cassette Feeding Unit-AU.
*2Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
*3The following sizes are available:
●When loaded in portrait orientation (only with the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver used):
Width 148.0 mm to 297.0 mm, Length 148.0 mm to 297.0 mm
●When loaded in landscape orientation:
Width 148.0 mm to 297.0 mm, Length 148.0 mm to 431.8 mm
*4The following sizes are available:
●When loaded in portrait orientation (only with the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver used):
Width 120.0 mm to 320.0 mm, Length 120.0 mm to 320.0 mm
●When loaded in landscape orientation:
Width 64.0 mm to 320.0 mm, Length 120.0 mm to 457.2 mm
Width 200.0 mm to 297.0 mm, Length 457.3 mm to 1200.0 mm (long size: only with the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver used)
*5The following sizes are available:
●Width 148.0 mm to 320.0 mm, Length 148.0 mm to 457.2 mm
Appendix
548
Paper Size Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose
Tray
Automatic 2-Sided
Printing *2
Envelope C5 (ISO-C5)
Envelope DL
Custom Paper Size *3 *4 *5
*1Includes the optional Paper Feeder PF-G/ Cassette Feeding Unit-AU.
*2Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
*3The following sizes are available:
●When loaded in portrait orientation (only with the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver used):
Width 148.0 mm to 297.0 mm, Length 148.0 mm to 297.0 mm
●When loaded in landscape orientation:
Width 148.0 mm to 297.0 mm, Length 148.0 mm to 431.8 mm
*4The following sizes are available:
●When loaded in portrait orientation (only with the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver used):
Width 120.0 mm to 320.0 mm, Length 120.0 mm to 320.0 mm
●When loaded in landscape orientation:
Width 64.0 mm to 320.0 mm, Length 120.0 mm to 457.2 mm
Width 200.0 mm to 297.0 mm, Length 457.3 mm to 1200.0 mm (long size: only with the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver used)
*5The following sizes are available:
●Width 148.0 mm to 320.0 mm, Length 148.0 mm to 457.2 mm
●Some paper sizes may not be displayed depending on the printer driver. If the paper size that you want to
use is not displayed, download suitable printer driver from the Canon website. If you cannot download,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
◼Supported Paper Types
Chlorine-free paper can be used with this machine.
●Print quality may deteriorate depending on the paper type used.
: Available : Unavailable
Appendix
549
Paper Type Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *2
Plain L2 60 g/m²
Plain L *3 60 g/m² to 74 g/m²
Plain *3 75 g/m² to 90 g/m²
Heavy 1 91 g/m² to 120 g/m²
Heavy 2 121 g/m² to 163 g/m²
Heavy 3 164 g/m² to 220 g/m² *4
Heavy 4 221 g/m² to 256 g/m² *4
Heavy 5 257 g/m² to 300 g/m²
Coated 1 100 g/m² to 130 g/m²
Coated 2 131 g/m² to 160 g/m²
Coated 3 161 g/m² to 220 g/m²
Rough 1 60 g/m² to 74 g/m²
Rough 2 75 g/m² to 103 g/m²
Labels
Postcard *5
Envelope
*1Includes the optional Paper Feeder PF-G/ Cassette Feeding Unit-AU.
*2Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
*3Recycled paper is also available.
*4When loading paper with length of 364.0 mm or more in landscape orientation, the basis weight of the paper must not be 199 g/m² or more.
*5The inkjet printable postcard or reply postcard cannot be used.
◼Paper Types Available with POP Printing Optimization
The paper types that are available when [POP Printing Optimization] is congured on the printer driver are as follows.
Appendix
550
●For more information on [POP Printing Optimization], see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online
manual website.
●When [POP Printing Optimization] is congured, the 2-sided printing function cannot be used.
●You can use paper of those sizes that can be specied as custom size. However, print quality may deteriorate
when you use paper with a width of 199.0 mm or less or 298.0 mm or more. Use of paper with a width of
200.0 mm to 297.0 mm is recommended.
: Available : Unavailable
Paper Type *1*2 Paper Weight POP Printing Speed *3
<Mode 1> <Mode 2>
Plain 75 g/m² to 90 g/m² *4
Heavy 1 91 g/m² to 120 g/m² *4
Heavy 2 121 g/m² to 128 g/m² *4
129 g/m² to 163 g/m² *5
Coated 1 100 g/m² to 130 g/m² *6
Coated 2 131 g/m² to 160 g/m² *6
*1If you congure [POP Printing Optimization], you need to specify the paper type to use.
*2When an unsupported paper type is detected, an error message is displayed. Replace it with a supported paper type
and then perform printing.
*3For details on settings change or related subjects, see POP Printing Speed(P. 393) .
*4Print quality may deteriorate depending on the environmental conditions. If the quality of the printout is not
acceptable, setting to <Mode 2> is recommended.
*5Print quality may deteriorate regardless of the environmental conditions.
*6Even when the setting is <Mode 1>, printing is performed as with <Mode 2>.
◼Paper Type and Setting for the Machine
Loading Paper(P. 40)
◼Printable Area
The shaded area in the image below indicates the printable area of the document.
Appendix
551
●For Envelope NAGAGATA 3 and Envelope YOUGATANAGA 3, the top and
bottom margins are 10 mm and the left and right margins are 5 mm. For all
other envelopes, the top, bottom, left, and right margins are all 10 mm.
●For paper with width of 312 mm or more, the left and right margins are 5
mm or more.
Appendix
552
Paper Feeder PF-G
52AC-06X
Paper Sizes ●Max: 297.0 mm x 431.8 mm
●Min: 148.0 mm x 148.0 mm
Paper Weight 60 g/m² to 256 g/m²
Paper Drawers Capacity *640 sheets (64 g/m²)/550 sheets (80 g/m²) x 1
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
556 mm x 585 mm x 125 mm
Weight Approx. 10.0 kg
*May vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.
Appendix
553
Cassette Feeding Unit-AU
52AC-06Y
Paper Sizes ●Max: 297.0 mm x 431.8 mm
●Min: 148.0 mm x 148.0 mm
Paper Weight 60 g/m² to 256 g/m²
Paper Drawers Capacity *640 sheets (64 g/m²)/550 sheets (80 g/m²) x 2
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
641 mm x 717 mm x 325 mm
Weight Approx. 23.0 kg
*May vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.
Appendix
554
Printer Functions
52AC-070
◼UFR II Printer Function
Type Internal
Print Size Available Paper(P. 547)
Print Speed Same as "Print Speed" in "Main Unit"
Main Unit(P. 545)
Resolution Data Processing
600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) UFR II
Protocol Supported TCP/IP and SMB (with SD card installed)
Resident Fonts None
Interface USB
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wired LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)
◼PS Printer Function
Type Internal
Print Size Available Paper(P. 547)
Print Speed Same as "Print Speed" in "Main Unit"
Main Unit(P. 545)
Resolution Data Processing
600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) Adobe®PostScript®3TM
(*Genuine Adobe PostScript. Support version is 3018)
Appendix
555
Protocol Supported TCP/IP and SMB (with SD card installed)
Resident Fonts 136 Roman
Interface USB
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wired LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)
◼PCL Printer Function
Type Internal
Print Size Available Paper(P. 547)
Print Speed Same as "Print Speed" in "Main Unit"
Main Unit(P. 545)
Resolution Data Processing
600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) PCL6, PCL5
Protocol Supported TCP/IP and SMB (with SD card installed)
Resident Fonts 93 Roman, 10 Bitmap fonts, 2 OCR fonts, Andalé Mono WT J/K/S/T*1 (Japanese, Korean,
Simplied and Traditional Chinese) , Barcode fonts*2
Interface USB
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wired LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)
*1Requires optional PCL International Font Set
*2Require optional Barcode Printing Kit
◼USB Direct Print Function
Printable File Formats ●PDF (Version 1.7)
●JPEG
●TIFF
●XPS
Appendix
556
◼Stored Job Print Function
●Up to 1,000 documents (3 GB in total) can be stored in the machine.
◼Direct Print Function
Printable File Formats *1 ●PDF (Version 1.7)*2
●PS
●EPS
●JPEG
●TIFF
●XPS
*1Printing may not be performed properly depending on the data.
*2The machine supports the PDF encryption algorithm of RC4 128 bit/AES 128 bit/AES 256 bit.
The maximum printable le size is as shown below.
●PDF/XPS les (with SD card installed) : 2 GB
(without SD card installed) : 20 MB
●JPEG les (with SD card installed) : 2 GB
(without SD card installed) : 2 GB
●TIFF les*1 (with SD card installed) : 2 GB
(without SD card installed) : 2 GB
*1Even TIFF les not exceeding the upper limit of size may not be printed depending on the le structure. In this
case, set <TIFF Spooler> to <On> and try printing again. TIFF Spooler(P. 413)
◼E-Mail Print Function
Outline of E-Mail Print
General
●An e-mail message is printed with e-mail header information.
●An HTML e-mail message is printed as a plain text.
●If a line (without line feed) in an e-mail message contains more than 1,000 characters, excessive characters
are placed on a new line and may not be correctly printed.
When <TIFF Spooler> is set to <On>
●If the e-mail message size exceeds 25 MB or the e-mail size exceeds 1.5 GB, the e-mail message is not
printed.
●If the e-mail header data exceeds 20 KB, the excessive data is not printed.
●If no SD card is installed, TIFF les exceeding 40 MB in size may not be printed.
●If the SD card has no sucient free space, E-Mail Print is not available.
Appendix
557
●When the toner cartridge is nearly empty, no e-mails can be received.
Supported Encoding Formats ●7 bit
●8 bit
●binary
●uuencode
●x-uuencode
●base64
●quoted-printable
Supported Character Sets *●us-ascii
●iso-8859-1
●iso-8859-15
Printable Formats of Attached Image Files ●JPEG
●TIFF
*If any character set is not specied, "us-ascii" is applied.
Attached image les
●Some les are unavailable depending on the le structure.
●You can print up to three attached les for each e-mail. (Excessive attached les are not printed.)
●If the SD card is installed, the printable le size is 100 MB or less per le.
Appendix
558
Management Functions
52AC-081
◼Firewall Settings
●Up to 16 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specied for both IPv4 and IPv6.
●Up to 16 MAC addresses can be specied.
◼Registration of Keys and Certicates
●If you install a key or CA certicate from a computer, make sure that they meet the following requirements:
Format ●CA Certicate: X.509 DER/PEM
File extension
●Key: ".p12" or ".pfx"
●CA certicate: ".cer" or ".pem"
Public key algorithm
(and key length)
●RSA (512 bits, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, 4096 bits)
●DSA (1024 bits, 2048 bits, 3072 bits)
●ECDSA (P256, P384, P521)
Certicate signature algorithm
●RSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384*, SHA-512*, MD2, MD5
●DSA: SHA-1
●ECDSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512
*SHA384-RSA and SHA512-RSA are available only when the RSA key length is 1024 bits or more.
●The machine does not support use of a certicate revocation list (CRL).
◼Maximum Number of Job Logs That Can Be Displayed
[Print Job/Direct Print] Up to 200 documents printed from computers and USB memory devices are
displayed.
[Stored Job] The history of up to 200 printed documents stored in the machine is displayed (only
when the SD card is installed).
[Report] The history of up to 16 documents printed as setting lists and reports is displayed (up
to 128 documents when the SD card is installed).
[E-Mail Print] The history of up to 16 e-mails printed after received is displayed (up to 128
documents when the SD card is installed).
◼E-Mail Reception Error Codes
The details of error codes are as follows.
Appendix
559
Error Code Cause Action
407
The POP3 mail server was
disconnected. ●Consult your network administrator.
●If the error occurs frequently with the same e-mail
data, check whether the e-mail data is normal.
Data of 1 KB (1024 bytes) could
not be received within 10
minutes during e-mail reception.
408
The "ERR" response was
returned from the POP3 mail
server.
Consult your network administrator.
412
Data of 1 KB (1024 bytes) could
not be received within 10
minutes during e-mail reception.
●Consult your network administrator.
●If the error occurs frequently with the same e-mail
data, check whether the e-mail data is normal.
420 The e-mail data size exceeds 1.5
GB.
If the SD card is installed on the machine, the data size of
an e-mail to send must be 1.5 GB or less.
421 The e-mail message size
exceeds 25 MB.
If the SD card is installed on the machine, the message
size of an e-mail to send must be 25 MB or less.
422 The size of an attached le
exceeds 100 MB.
If the SD card is installed on the machine, the size of each
attached le must be 100 MB or less.
423 A received attached le is in an
unsupported format.
Attached les must be in JPEG or TIFF format. Do not
attach any les of other formats to an e-mail to send.
424 More than three les are
attached. Excessive attached les are not printed.
430 The sender of the received e-
mail is unknown. Make sure to set a sender before sending e-mails.
431
A divided e-mail has been
received.
Take the following action to prevent e-mails from being
sent as a divided e-mail.
●Reduce the size of an e-mail to send. (Reduce the e-
mail size to be less than the one that causes a divided
e-mail.)
●Congure the application to prevent e-mails from
being divided before sending.
The received e-mail contains
unsupported encoding or
character codes.
For e-mails to send, use the encoding and character codes
supported by the machine. Outline of E-Mail
Print(P. 557)
The received e-mail is in an
unsupported format.
Check the e-mail format. We recommend sending e-mails
in text format.
432 The received data is invalid. Check whether the data of the sent e-mail is normal.
433 The received e-mail is in HTML
format.
This machine does not support HTML e-mails. (An HTML e-
mail message is printed as a plain text.)
434 No message is in the e-mail. The received e-mail contains no message.
435 Forwarded fax document is
illegal.
The attached le is not in TIFF format or exceeds the
printable size.
436 Forwarded fax document has no
attached le. No document is printed due to no attached le.
Appendix
560
440 Printing was canceled for some
reason. Resend the e-mail.
441 An error has occurred during
processing. Resend the e-mail.
499 An error has occurred in the
machine.
Take appropriate action according to the message on the
display of the machine. For more information, see
"Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.
●If two or more errors occur, only the error code of a lower number is displayed.
●You can also check error codes by using the E-Mail RX History List. E-Mail RX Log List(P. 519)
Appendix
561
System Environment
52AC-082
System Requirements for the Remote UI *1 Windows
●Windows Vista / 7 / 8 / 10: Internet Explorer 7.0 or later
System Requirements for the User's Guide Windows
●Internet Explorer 9 and later
●Microsoft Edge
●Firefox
●Firefox ESR
●Chrome*2
macOS
●Safari
●Firefox
●Chrome*2
Linux
●Firefox
iOS
●Safari*2
Android
●Chrome*2
*1Before changing the settings of the machine, set your Web browser to enable all cookies and use JavaScript.
*2Only when browsing the manual on the Internet.
Appendix
562
Network Environment
52AC-083
◼Network Specications
Interface 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T (RJ-45)
Protocol Supported Communication Protocol
●TCP/IP (Frame type: Ethernet II)
Print applications
●LPD
●Raw
●IPP
●IPPS
●WSD
●Mopria
●Google Cloud Print
●AirPrint
●Windows10 Mobile Print
Appendix
563
Consumables
52AC-074
This section describes the consumables of the machine and the estimated timing for
replacing them. Purchase consumables at your local authorized Canon dealer. Observe
safety and health precautions when storing and handling consumables (
Consumables(P. 10) ). For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine Toner,
Cartridge and Parts is recommended.
●Depending on the installation environment, printing paper size, or document type, you may need to replace
consumables before the end of the estimated lifetime.
◼Toner Cartridges
Supplied Toner Cartridges
The average yields and weight of the toner cartridges that come with the machine are shown below.
Canon Toner Cartridge 059
●Black
- Average yield* of toner cartridge
7,000 sheets
- Weight
Approx. 1.1 kg
●Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan)
- Average yield* of toner cartridge
5,000 sheets
- Weight
Approx. 1.0 kg
Canon Toner Cartridge 059 H
●Black
- Average yield* of toner cartridge
15,500 sheets
- Weight
Approx. 1.2 kg
●Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan)
- Average yield* of toner cartridge
13,500 sheets
- Weight
Appendix
564
Approx. 1.1 kg
*The average yield is based on "ISO/IEC 19798" (the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner
cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that contain printer
components" issued by ISO [International Organization for Standardization]) when printing A4 size paper with the default
print density setting.
*The type of supplied toners varies according to countries and areas. For details, please contact the dealer you purchased
from.
Replacement Toner Cartridges
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.
Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Average yield * and weight
Canon Toner Cartridge 059 Black
Average yield of toner cartridge
7,000 sheets
Weight
Approx. 1.1 kg
Canon Toner Cartridge 059 Yellow
Canon Toner Cartridge 059 Magenta
Canon Toner Cartridge 059 Cyan
Average yield of toner cartridge
5,000 sheets
Weight
Approx. 1.0 kg
Canon Toner Cartridge 059 H Black
Average yield of toner cartridge
15,500 sheets
Weight
Approx. 1.2 kg
Canon Toner Cartridge 059 H Yellow
Canon Toner Cartridge 059 H Magenta
Canon Toner Cartridge 059 H Cyan
Average yield of toner cartridge
13,500 sheets
Weight
Approx. 1.1 kg
●When replacing toner cartridges How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 494)
◼Drum Cartridge
Appendix
565
Supplied Drum Cartridges
The average yields and weight of the drum cartridges that come with the machine are shown below.
●Average yield of drum cartridge*
70,000 sheets
●Weight
Approx. 0.6 kg
*The average yield is on the basis of our evaluation criteria when printing at interval 3-sheets (3-sheet intermittent printing)
of plain A4 size paper.
Replacement Drum Cartridges
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine drum cartridges is recommended.
Canon Genuine Drum Cartridge Average yield * and weight
Canon Drum Cartridge 053
Average yield of drum cartridge
70,000 sheets
Weight
Approx. 0.6 kg
●When replacing drum cartridges How to Replace Drum Cartridges(P. 501)
◼Waste Toner Box WT-C1
The average number of pages that can be printed per waste toner container is approx. 100,000 (for plain A4
size paper).
●When replacing the waste toner container How to Replace the Waste Toner Container(P. 504)
Appendix
566
Optional Equipment
52AC-076
The functionality of the machine can be fully utilized by using the optional equipment described below. Optional
equipment can be purchased from the retail outlet where you purchased the machine or from your local Canon dealer.
Paper Feeder PF-G
Use of the optional paper feeder allows you to load a different size of paper than
that loadable in the standard paper drawer, thus reducing the time and labor of
paper size replacement.
●You can install up to three units of paper feeder in the machine. However, if you use the optional cassette
feeding unit, the maximum installable number of paper feeder units is two.
Installation Method
See "Getting Started."
Cassette Feeding Unit-AU
Use of the optional cassette feeding unit allows you to load two different sizes of
paper than that loadable in the standard paper drawer, thus reducing the time
and labor of paper size replacement.
Installation Method
See "Getting Started."
Appendix
568
System Options
52AC-077
The functionality of the machine can be fully utilized by using the optional equipment described below. Optional
equipment can be purchased from the retail outlet where you purchased the machine or from your local Canon dealer.
Barcode Printing Kit(P. 569)
PCL International Font Set(P. 569)
SD CARD(P. 570)
Barcode Printing Kit
If the Barcode Printing Kit is installed on the machine, barcode printing mode is added, enabling
barcodes to be printed from your computer.
The Barcode Printing Kit contains the following barcode fonts.
●OCR-B
●Symb. FontInform
●Symbole stethos
●BarDIMM ©1997
●USPS ZEBRA+4Stat
This option enables you to generate barcodes in various formats. Note that if you want to print
barcodes, PCL must be enabled. For information on using the Barcode Printing Kit, see the
Barcode Printing Guide (PDF manual).
Installation Method
Installing the ROM(P. 571)
PCL International Font Set
If the PCL International Font Set is installed on the machine, the following fonts are added for a
PCL printer. As a result, you can output using multiple languages in a SAP Unicode environment.
●Andale® and WorldType® Collection J (Japanese Version)
●Andale® and WorldType® Collection K (Korean Version)
●Andale® and WorldType® Collection S (Simplied Chinese Version)
●Andale® and WorldType® Collection T (Traditional Chinese Version)
In order to support differences in character design depending on the region, four font versions
are enabled.
Installation Method
Installing the ROM(P. 571)
Appendix
569
SD CARD
You can install the SD card to use the functions described below.
●Secured Print
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secured Print)(P. 93)
●Stored Job Print
Printing a Document Stored in the Machine (Stored Job Print)(P. 97)
●Interrupt Print, Priority Print, Pause/Resume
Checking Current Status of Print Documents(P. 295)
●SMB Print
Conguring SMB(P. 201)
●Spooler
Spooler(P. 345)
Installation Method
Installing an SD Card(P. 575)
●When you dispose of a used SD card, perform <Completely Del. Data> for it or physically destroy it to
prevent your personal information from being leaked. Installing an SD Card(P. 575)
Appendix
570
Installing the ROM
52AC-078
This section describes how to install the optional ROM in
the machine. The ROM is used connected to the ROM
connectors inside the back cover of the machine. Read the
precautions in Installation(P. 3) before installing the
ROM.
Precautions when installing the ROM
●Do not cause any metal such as screws to come into contact with the circuit boards in the machine. Doing so
may result in damage to the machine.
●Do not touch the internal parts, printed wiring, connectors, or switches. Doing so may result in damage to
the machine.
●Do not turn ON the power when the ROM cover is open. Doing so may result in damage to the machine.
Precautions for avoiding static electricity
The ROM contains parts that are sensitive to static electricity. Observe the following precautions for preventing
the ROM from being damaged by static electricity.
●Touch a metal portion in the room to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the ROM.
●Do not touch any item that is likely to generate static electricity, such as a display, during work.
●To avoid the inuence of static electricity, do not remove the ROM from the packing material until just before
connecting it to the ROM connectors.
1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.
●When you turn OFF the power, shut down the machine from the operation panel without using the power
switch. Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Shutdown)(P. 36)
2Remove the back cover.
1While pushing the catch, slightly open the cover toward you.
Appendix
571
2Remove the right cover in the direction indicated by the arrow.
3Remove the ROM cover.
1Use a coin to remove the screws.
2Open the ROM cover, and remove it in the direction indicated by the arrow.
4Install the ROM.
●While aligning the ROM with the two ROM connectors of the machine, securely push it until it stops.
Appendix
572
When disconnecting the ROM
●Hold the edges of the ROM and pull it out as shown in the illustration below.
5Put the ROM cover back into position.
1Close the ROM cover by pushing in the catch of the ROM cover in the direction indicated by the
arrow.
2Use a coin to reattach the screws.
6Insert the back cover in the direction indicated by the arrow, and close it while
pushing the catch.
Appendix
573
●When you want to install an SD card at the same time, proceed to Installing an SD Card(P. 575) .
◼Checking that Barcode Printing Kit Is Properly Installed
Print the Conguration Page(P. 459) , and conrm that "BarDIMM" is
displayed in "PCL."
If "BarDIMM" is displayed, the ROM is properly installed.
If "BarDIMM" is not displayed
●The ROM is not installed properly. Remove the ROM from the machine, and
reconnect it.
Appendix
574
Installing an SD Card
52AC-079
This section describes how to mount and initialize an SD card.
Insert the SD card into the SD card slot on the left side of the
machine. Read the precautions in Installation(P. 3) before
installing the SD card. Note that the data in the machine that is
stored to the SD card is all subjected to encryption. This ensures
safe use of the SD card on a computer or in other situation
because the encrypted data in the SD card is protected against
unauthorized extraction.
●Before mounting the SD card, check whether the SD card is write-protected. If the card is write-protected,
unlock the card before inserting it.
1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.
●When you turn OFF the power, shut down the machine from the operation panel without using the power
switch. Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Shutdown)(P. 36)
2Remove the SD card slot cover.
1Use a coin to remove the screws.
2Open the SD card slot cover, and remove it in the direction indicated by the arrow.
Appendix
575
3Install an SD Card.
●Insert the card into the SD card slot until it clicks.
When removing the SD card
●Push the SD card until it clicks as shown in the illustration, release your nger, and then remove it.
4Reinstall the SD card slot cover.
1Close the SD card slot cover by pushing in the catch of the cover.
Appendix
576
2Use a coin to reattach the screws.
SD Card Anti-theft Security Slot
●The SD card slot cover is provided with a security slot, to which
you can attach security wire or equivalent.
●The hole of the security slot is 3.4 mm wide and 7.4 mm high.
●For inquires about the security slot, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.
◼Initializing the SD Card
When you turn ON the power for the rst time after installing the SD card, <Format
SD Card?> appears on the display. Press to start initializing the SD card. When the
initialization is completed, the SD card is ready to use.
If <Format SD Card?> is not displayed
●Initialize the SD card by selecting <Format> under <SD Card Maintenance> in the setting menu of the
operation panel. SD Card Maintenance(P. 382)
Appendix
577
◼Checking that the SD Card Is Properly Installed on the Machine
Print the Conguration Page(P. 517) , and the SD card is installed properly
if "SD Card" in "Control Menu" is "On."
If no SD card status information is indicated
●The SD card is not installed properly. Remove the SD card from the
machine, and remount it.
◼Conguring the Information of the SD Card
If an SD card was added after the printer driver was installed, you need to congure the SD card information in the
printer driver. To Use the Optional Items(P. 74)
◼Deleting All Data in an SD Card
Before disposing of an SD card, you can use the procedure below to delete all data in the card. The procedure deletes
even those fragments of data that cannot be deleted normally. This eliminates the risk of your data being red by third
parties, thus you can dispose of the SD card safely.
●For any SD cards other than the optional "SD CARD", the procedure below cannot be used.
1Set the machine to oine.
●When ( ) is lit, press ( ).
2Press ( )
3Use / to select <User Maintenance>, and press .
4Proceed with <SD Card Maintenance> <Completely Del. Data> in this order.
●When a message appears, press .
Appendix
578
5Select <Yes>, and press .
➠The machine is restarted. After that, the machine is turned OFF automatically.
●When <Completely Del. Data> has been performed, the setting for <SD Card> changes to <Off>.
Appendix
579
Manuals and Their Contents
52AC-07A
The manuals listed below are included with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.
Getting Started Read this manual rst. It describes the installation procedure for the machine.
User's Guide
(This Manual)
This manual describes all the functions of the machine in a manual that is viewed
using a Web browser. You can browse information by category or enter a
keyword to search for pages on a specic topic. Using User's Guide(P. 581)
Appendix
580
Using User's Guide
52AC-07C
The User's Guide is a manual that can be viewed on your computer or mobile device and it describes all of the
functions of the machine. You can search from your intended use or enter a keyword to quickly nd the page you are
looking for. The section describes the screen layout of the User's Guide and how to read the Guide. You can specify
how the appearance of the User's Guide looks.
◼Screen Layout of User's Guide
This section describes the screens conguring the User's Guide and how to use the on-screen buttons. Screen
Layout of User's Guide(P. 582)
◼Viewing User's Guide
This section describes the meaning of the marks used in the User's Guide, how the keys on the operation panel and
the buttons on the computer display are represented, and other matters that help you understand the information
contained in the User's Guide. Viewing User's Guide(P. 585)
◼Specifying How the Appearance of the User's Guide Looks
You can change the character size used in the User's Guide, and switch the screen layout to t to the device you use to
view the User's Guide.
●If you do not have access to Adobe Reader to view the manuals in PDF format, try other programs such as
PDF Preview developed by Vivid Document Imaging Technologies.
How to Find the Topic You Are Looking for
Search the contents
●You can nd the page you are looking for by selecting the topic from the "Contents" on the left side of the
screen.
Search by keyword
●Perform a search by entering a keyword, such as "envelope" or "toner cartridge," and the pages containing
the keyword are displayed. You can nd the page you are looking for from those results. You can also enter
phrases such as "connecting to a network." The keyword search also supports the AND Boolean to search for
multiple keywords. For the organization of the search screen and how to operate the search screen, see
Search(P. 583) .
Appendix
581
Screen Layout of User's Guide
52AC-07E
The User's Guide is divided into different screens, and the content of each screen varies.
Top Page
Appears when User's Guide is started.
/
Click to also display all of the sections under the chapters. Click to return to the previous display.
/
Click to toggle the display between the contents and search. When the table of contents is displayed, each
click on switches between hiding and showing the display. When the search display is shown, each
click on switches between hiding and showing the display.
Click to set parameters to determine how the User's Guide is displayed, such as character size or layout.
Click to display information on how to view the User's Guide, how to perform a search, and other
information.
/
Click to display the previous or following topic.
[Notice]
Click to view important information you should know when using the machine.
Appendix
582
Topic Page
Contains information about how to congure and use the machine.
Navigation
See what chapter topic you are currently viewing.
Click to jump to the corresponding page. To return to the previous page, click "Back" on your Web
browser.
/
Click to display the hidden detailed descriptions. Click to close the detailed descriptions.
Click to return to the page top.
Search
Click to display the search window. Contains a text box to perform a search by keyword and nd the page
you are looking for.
Appendix
583
[Enter keyword(s) here]
Enter a keyword or keywords and click to display the search results. You can search for pages
containing all the keywords by separating the keywords by a space (blank). Also you can only search for
pages containing an exact phrase by enclosing the keywords in double quotation marks.
Search result
Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specied keywords. From the results, locate the
page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page.
●The specied keyword(s) are shown in bold in the search results.
Appendix
584
Viewing User's Guide
52AC-07F
This section describes the marks, buttons, screens, and other items used in the User's Guide. The warnings and
cautions are also given in the "Important Safety Instructions" in the "Getting Started" included with the machine. See
also these instructions.
Marks
Cautions regarding safety, restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the machine, useful tips, and
other information are indicated using the marks below.
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or
injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely,
always pay attention to these warnings.
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to
persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always
pay attention to these cautions.
Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items
carefully, and make sure not to perform the described operations.
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read
these items carefully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid
damage to the machine or property.
Indicates a clarication of an operation, or contains additional
explanations for a procedure.
Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine.
Keys and Buttons Used in this Manual
Keys on the operation panel and buttons on the computer display appear in the following notation:
Type Example
Keys on the operation panel ( )
Settings displayed on the operation panel <Timer Settings>
<Paper is jammed.>
Buttons and other text interfaces displayed on the computer display [Preferences]
/ Used in This Manual
The / keys are used to select a desired setting. They are only described at the rst applicable occurrence
of their use in a page and omitted from the second time onward. For example, the / keys appear in Step
2, but are omitted in Step 3.
Example:
1Press ( ).
Appendix
585
2Use / to select <Network>, and press .
3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <IP Address Settings>.
Screens Used in This Manual
Depending on the operating system you are using, the appearance of the displays used in this manual may
slightly differ from the actual displays. Also, the appearance of the printer driver and software may differ
depending on their version.
Illustrations Used in This Manual
The illustrations of the toner cartridge used in the User's Guide are those for the Canon Toner Cartridge 059 H.
Appendix
586
Managing MEAP Applications
52AC-07J
You can install MEAP applications (function-enhancing software) on the machine to add various features. You can
customize the functions according to your needs, for example, to congure an authentication system with IC cards or
to manage printouts based on logs. When you want to manage MEAP applications, access the machine from your
computer via a Web browser. For more information, see Function Guide for MEAP Application Management .
Appendix
587
Using FTP Clients
52AC-07K
You can use an FTP client to access the FTP server of the machine and specify settings for document printing and
networking. Printing and settings can be performed with Command Prompt installed in the operating system as
standard, requiring neither specic drivers nor specic applications.
Preparing for Using the FTP Server
Specify settings to enable communication between the machine and the clients. Preparing for Using the FTP
Server(P. 589)
Printing via FTP Client (FTP Print)
You can print a document sent to the machine via FTP. Printing via FTP Client (FTP Print)(P. 592)
Specifying Settings via FTP Client
You can download the machine settings in text format and edit them. Specifying Settings via FTP
Client(P. 594)
Appendix
588
Preparing for Using the FTP Server
52AC-07L
Because the factory default settings prevent operations from FTP clients, specify settings to allow the operations.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 286)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Click [Edit] in [FTP Settings].
Appendix
589
5Specify the required settings and click [OK].
[Use FTP Print]
To perform printing via FTP client, select the check box. Otherwise, clear the check box.
[FTP Print User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name used to log on to the FTP server when performing FTP
Print.
●You cannot set "root."
[Set/Change Password]
Select the check box to set the FTP Print password, and enter alphanumeric characters for the password in
the [Password] text box. For conrmation, enter the same password in the [Conrm] text box.
●If you click [OK] with the check box selected and the [Password] and [Conrm] text boxes left blank, the
currently set password is deleted.
[Use UTF-8 to Display Name of FTP Print Job]
Select the check box if you are using UTF-8 character code for the name of the le to be printed.
[Allow Setting via FTP]
Select the check box to allow setting changes of the machine via FTP client. When not allowing setting
changes, clear the check box.
6Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Appendix
590
Printing via FTP Client (FTP Print)
52AC-07R
Documents in TEXT/JPEG/TIFF format can be printed from FTP clients via network. Check the IP address set to the
machine in advance ( Network Status Print(P. 517) ). If you are unsure of the IP address, contact your network
administrator.
1Start [Command Prompt].
●Open the [Start] menu and select [All Programs] or [Programs] [Accessories] [Command Prompt].
For macOS users
●Start the Terminal.
For UNIX users
●Display the console screen.
2Copy a document that you want to print to the directory displayed in Command
Prompt.
●In an example of a screen, the document is copied into the "USER_NAME" folder in [Users] on drive C:.
3Enter "ftp <IP address of the machine>" and press the [ENTER] key.
●Example: ftp 192.168.1.45
4Enter the FTP Print user name and press the [ENTER] key.
●The default user name is "guest".
●Anonymous (a user with no account) cannot be used to log on.
5Enter the FTP Print password and press the [ENTER] key.
●The default password is "7654321".
➠"230 User <FTP Print user name> logged in." is displayed.
Appendix
592
6Enter "bin" and press the [ENTER] key.
➠The data transfer mode is changed to binary mode.
●You also need to specify binary mode when printing a text document.
7Enter "put <File name to print>" and press the [ENTER] key.
●Example: put sample.txt
➠The document is printed.
8Enter "quit" and press the [ENTER] key.
9Enter "exit" and press the [ENTER] key.
➠Command Prompt exits.
Appendix
593
Specifying Settings via FTP Client
52AC-07S
You can specify settings, such as the network settings of the machine, from an FTP client via TCP/IP network. Check the
IP address set to the machine in advance ( Network Status Print(P. 517) ). If you are unsure of the IP address,
contact your network administrator.
1Start [Command Prompt].
●Open the [Start] menu and select [All Programs] or [Programs] [Accessories] [Command Prompt].
For macOS users
●Start the Terminal.
For UNIX users
●Display the console screen.
2Enter "ftp <IP address of the machine>" and press the [ENTER] key.
●Example: ftp 192.168.1.45
3Enter "root" for the user name and press the [ENTER] key.
4Enter the System Manager password and press the [ENTER] key.
●The default password is "7654321". Setting the System Manager Password(P. 212)
➠"230 User root logged in." is displayed.
5Enter "cd cong" and press the [ENTER] key.
6Enter "get CONFIG <le name>" and press the [ENTER] key.
●"CONFIG" must be all uppercase.
●Any characters can be used in <le name> (example: get CONFIG Setting.txt).
➠The setting le is downloaded to the directory that is displayed when Command Prompt is started. In an
example of a screen, the le is downloaded to the "USER_NAME" folder in [Users] on drive C:.
Appendix
594
7Edit the downloaded cong le by using the text editor such as Notepad.
List of cong le setting items
General Menu (General Settings)
Item Name Setting Value Factory Default
Setting
DEVICE_NAME
(Device Name) Up to 128 characters LBP852Cx
SYS_LOC
(Location) Up to 128 characters (Blank)
SYS_CONTACT
(System Manager) Up to 128 characters (Blank)
ROOT_PWD
(System Manager Password) Up to 16 alphanumeric characters 7654321
USER_JOB_CONT
(Allow End-User's Job Operation) ON, OFF OFF
LINK_URL1
(Support Link URL) Up to 512 alphanumeric characters https://global.canon
TCP/IP Menu (TCP/IP Settings)
Item Name Setting Value Factory Default
Setting
INT_ADDR
(IP Address) IP Address 0.0.0.0
NET_MASK
(Subnet Mask) IP Address 0.0.0.0
DEF_GW
(Gateway Address) IP Address 0.0.0.0
DHCP_ENB
(Use DHCP) ON, OFF OFF
RARP_ENB
(Use RARP) ON, OFF OFF
BOOTP_ENB
(Use BOOTP) ON, OFF OFF
DNS_PADDR IP Address 0.0.0.0
Appendix
595
(Primary DNS Server Address)
DNS_SADDR
(Secondary DNS Server Address) IP Address 0.0.0.0
HOST_NAME
(Host Name) Up to 47 alphanumeric characters
"Canon"+
"Lower 6 digits
of MAC address"
DOMAIN_NAME
(Domain Name) Up to 47 alphanumeric characters (Blank)
DDNS_ENB
(DNS Dynamic Update) ON, OFF OFF
WINS_ENB
(WINS Resolution) ON, OFF OFF
WINS_SERVER
(WINS Server Address) IP Address 0.0.0.0
ARP_PING_ENB
(Use ARP/PING) ON, OFF OFF
LPD_ENB
(Use LPD Printing) ON, OFF ON
LPD_BANN
(Print LPD Banner Page) ON, OFF OFF
RAW_ENB
(Use RAW Printing) ON, OFF ON
RAW_BIDIR_ENB
(Use Bidirectional Communication) ON, OFF OFF
FTP_PRINT_ENB
(Use FTP Print) ON, OFF OFF
FTP_PRINT_USER
(FTP Print User Name) Up to 24 alphanumeric characters guest
FTP_PRINT_PWD
(FTP Print Password) Up to 24 alphanumeric characters 7654321
IPP_ENB
(Use IPP) ON, OFF ON
IPP_AUTH_ENB
(Use IPP Authentication) ON, OFF OFF
IPP_AUTH_ACCUNT1
(IPP Authentication User Name)
Up to 24 alphanumeric characters (mandatory when using IPP
authentication) guest
IPP_AUTH_PASSWD1
(IPP Authentication Password)
Up to 24 alphanumeric characters (mandatory when using IPP
authentication) 7654321
WSD_ENB
(Use WSD Printing) ON, OFF ON
WSD_BROWSING
(Use WSD Browsing) ON, OFF ON
WSD_MULTICAST_
DISCOVERY
(Use Multicast Discovery)
ON, OFF ON
Appendix
596
HTTP_ENB
(Use HTTP) ON, OFF ON
SNTP_ENB
(Use SNTP) ON, OFF OFF
SNTP_ADDR
(NTP Server Name) IP address or host name (Blank)
SNTP_INTERVAL
(Polling Interval) 1 to 48 (hr.) 24
DISCOVERY_ENB
(Respond to Discovery) ON, OFF ON
DISCOVERY_SCOPE_NAME
(Scope Name) Up to 32 alphanumeric characters default
EMAIL_PRINT_ENB
(POP3 RX) ON, OFF OFF
EMAIL_POP_ADDR
(POP3 Server Name) Up to 48 alphanumeric characters (Blank)
EMAIL_POP_ACCOUNT
(POP3 User Name) Up to 32 alphanumeric characters (Blank)
EMAIL_POP_PASSWD
(POP3 Password) Up to 32 alphanumeric characters (Blank)
EMAIL_POP_INTERVAL
(POP3 RX Interval) 0 to 90 (min.) 0
EMAIL_POP_PORTNO
(POP3 Server Port Number) 0 to 65535 110
IPV4_USE
(Use IPv4) ON, OFF ON
IPV6_USE
(Use IPv6) ON, OFF OFF
IPV6_STATELESS_USE
(Use Stateless Address) ON, OFF ON
IPV6_MANUAL_ADDR_USE
(Use Manual Address) ON, OFF OFF
IPV6_MANUAL_ADDR_SET
(IP Address) IP Address (Blank)
IPV6_MANUAL_ADDR_PREFIX
(Prex Length) 0 to 128 64
IPV6_MANUAL_ROUTER_ADDR
(Default Router Address) IP Address (Blank)
IPV6_DHCPV6_USE
(Use DHCPv6) ON, OFF OFF
IPV6_DNS_ADDRESS_PRI
(Primary DNS Server Address) IP Address (Blank)
IPV6_DNS_ADDRESS_SEC
(Secondary DNS Server Address) IP Address (Blank)
Appendix
597
IPV6_DNS_NAME_
SAME_AS_IPV4
(Use IPv4 Host/Domain Names)
ON, OFF OFF
IPV6_DNS_HOST_NAME_V6
(Host Name) Up to 47 alphanumeric characters
"Canon"+
"Lower 6 digits
of MAC address"
IPV6_DNS_DOMAIN_
NAME_V6
(Domain Name)
Up to 47 alphanumeric characters (Blank)
IPV6_DNS_DYNAMIC_SET
(DNS Dynamic Update) ON, OFF OFF
IPV6_DNS_STATELESS
(Register Stateless Address) ON, OFF OFF
IPV6_DNS_MANUAL
(Register Manual Address) ON, OFF OFF
IPV6_DNS_STATEFUL
(Register Stateful Address) ON, OFF OFF
SMB Server Menu (SMB Settings)
Item Name Setting Value Factory Default
Setting
SMB_ENB
(Use SMB) ON, OFF OFF
SMB_SERVER
(Server Name) Up to 16 characters (Blank)
SMB_WG
(Workgroup Name) Up to 16 characters WORKGROUP
SMB_COMMENT
(Comments) Up to 192 characters (Blank)
SMB_LM_ENB
(Use LM Announce) ON, OFF OFF
SMB_PRINT_ENB
(Use SMB Printing) ON, OFF OFF
SMB_PRINTER
(Printer Name) Up to 13 characters PRINTER
SNMP Menu (SNMP Settings)
Item Name Setting Value Factory Default
Setting
SNMP_V1_ENB
(Use SNMPv1) ON, OFF ON
SNMP_COMMUNITY1_
ENB ON, OFF ON
Appendix
598
(Use Community Name 1)
SNMP_COMMUNITY1_
ACCESS
(MIB Access Permission)
RW (Read/Write), RO (Read Only) RO
SNMP_COMMUNITY1_
NAME
(Community Name 1)
Up to 32 alphanumeric
characters public
SNMP_COMMUNITY2_
ENB
(Use Community Name 2)
ON, OFF OFF
SNMP_COMMUNITY2_
ACCESS
(MIB Access Permission)
RW (Read/Write), RO (Read Only) RO
SNMP_COMMUNITY2_
NAME
(Community Name 2)
Up to 32 alphanumeric
characters public2
SNMP_V3_ENB
(Use SNMPv3) ON, OFF OFF
SNMP_GET_PRT_MNG_
INFO
(Obtain Printer Management Information from Host)
ON, OFF OFF
SPOOLER Menu (Spool Settings)
Item Name Setting Value Factory Default Setting
SPOOL_ENB
(Use Spooler) ON, OFF OFF
START TIMER Menu (Waiting Time Settings for Connection at Startup)
Item Name Setting Value Factory Default Setting
STRT_DELAY_TIME
(Waiting Time for Connection at Startup) 0 to 300 (sec.) 0
RUI Menu (Remote UI Settings)
Item Name Setting Value Factory Default Setting
RUI_ENB
(Use Remote UI) ON, OFF ON
8Enter "put <le name> CONFIG" and press the [ENTER] key.
●Specify the edited le name in <le name> (example: put Setting.txt CONFIG).
➠The setting le is uploaded.
Appendix
599
9Enter "get reset" and press the [ENTER] key.
➠The machine is restarted. The settings are enabled after the machine is restarted.
10 Conrm that the machine has been normally restarted, press [C] key while holding
down the [CTRL] key.
11 Enter "quit" and press the [ENTER] key.
12 Enter "exit" and press the [ENTER] key.
➠Command Prompt exits.
LINKS
Network(P. 331)
Appendix
600
Others
52AC-07U
This section describes basic Windows operations and includes disclaimers, copyright information, and other
information.
Appendix
601
Basic Windows Operations
52AC-07W
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 602)
Enabling [Network discovery](P. 602)
Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 603)
Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 604)
Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 604)
Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 605)
Checking the Computer Name(P. 606)
Checking the Printer Port(P. 607)
Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 608)
When Printing from the Windows Store App(P. 609)
●Depending on the computer that you use, the operation may differ.
◼Displaying the Printer Folder
Windows Vista
[Start] select [Control Panel] [Printer].
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start] select [Devices and Printers].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].
Windows 10
[ ] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [Hardware and Sound] [Devices and Printers].
Windows Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Printers].
Windows Server 2016
Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [Hardware] [Devices and Printers].
◼Enabling [Network discovery]
Enable [Network discovery] to view the computers on your network.
Windows Vista
[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] select [Turn on network discovery] under
[Network discovery].
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings]
select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
[Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Appendix
602
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing
settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows 10
[ ] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced
sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Network and Sharing Center] select [Turn on network
discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows Server 2016
Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing
settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
◼Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server
1Open Windows Explorer.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [All Programs] or [Programs] [Accessories] [Windows Explorer].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [File Explorer].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [File Explorer].
Windows 10/Server 2016
Right-click [ ] select [File Explorer].
2Select the printer server in [Network] or [My Network Places].
●To view computers on the network, you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for
computers.
➠Shared printers are displayed.
Appendix
603
◼Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen
If your computer does not display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen after inserting the provided CD-
ROM/DVD-ROM, follow the procedure below. The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual.
The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer you are using.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] enter "D:\MInst.exe" in [Search programs and les] or [Start Search] press the [ENTER] key.
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen [Run] Enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] [Run] Enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]
Windows 10
Click [Ask me anything] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [D:\MInst.exe] displayed as the search result.
Windows Server 2016
Click [ ] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [D:\MInst.exe] displayed as the search result.
◼Printing a Test Page in Windows
You can check whether the printer driver is operational by printing a test page in Windows.
1Load A4 size paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper(P. 40)
2Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 602)
3Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
Appendix
604
4Click [Print Test Page] in [General] tab.
➠The test page is printed.
◼Checking the Bit Architecture
If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32-bit or 64-bit Windows follow the procedure below.
1Display [Control Panel].
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 10/Server 2016
Proceed to step 2.
Appendix
605
2Display [System].
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012
Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System].
Windows 10/Server 2016
Click [ ] [Settings] [System] select [About].
Windows Server 2008
Double-click [System].
3Check the bit architecture.
For 32-bit versions
[32-bit Operating System] is displayed.
For 64-bit versions
[64-bit Operating System] is displayed.
◼Checking the Computer Name
1Display [Control Panel].
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 10
Click [ ] select [Windows System] [Control Panel].
Windows Server 2016
Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel].
Appendix
606
2Display [System].
Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012/Server 2016
Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System].
Windows Server 2008
Double-click [System].
3Check the computer name.
◼Checking the Printer Port
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 602)
2Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
Appendix
607
3In the [Ports] tab, make sure that the [Enable bidirectional support] check box is
selected.
◼When Printing from the Windows Store App
Windows 8/Server 2012
Display the charms on the right side of the screen Tap or click [Devices] The driver that you use [Print].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Display the charms on the right side of the screen Tap or click [Devices] [Print] The driver that you
use [Print].
Windows 10
Tap or click [Print] on the application The driver that you use [Print].
●If you print using this method, only a limited number of print settings are available.
●If the message [The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it.] is displayed, go to
the desktop and follow the instructions in the displayed dialog box. This message appears when the
machine is set to display the user name during printing and similar instances.
Appendix
609
Font Samples
52AC-07X
The fonts lists printed from the Utility menu are a comprehensive listing of all fonts currently available. The listing
contains the names and print samples of the fonts stored on the printer.
Scalable Fonts (PCL)(P. 611)
OCR Code Scalable Fonts (PCL) (P. 614)
Bitmapped Fonts (PCL)(P. 614)
Appendix
610
Scalable Fonts (PCL)
Appendix
611
Appendix
612
Appendix
613
OCR Code Scalable Fonts (PCL)
Bitmapped Fonts (PCL)
Appendix
614
Notice
52AC-07Y
◼IPv6 Ready Logo
The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-2
established by the IPv6 Forum.
◼Product Information required by COMMISSION REGULATION (EU) No 801/2013 amending
Regulation (EC) No 1275/2008
Power consumption of the product in networked standby if wired network ports are connected and all wireless
network ports are activated (if they are available at the same time).
Model Name Power consumption of the product in networked standby
LBP852Cx 3.0 W or less
●The above value(s) are the actual values for single machine, chosen arbitrarily, and may therefore vary from
the value of the machine in use. Optional network ports are not connected and/or activated in the
measurement.
◼WEEE and Battery Directives
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE
Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this
indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a
concentration above an applicable threshold specied in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when
you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic
equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible
impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated
Appendix
615
with EEE.Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural
resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city oce, waste authority,
approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee, or www.canon-
europe.com/battery.
◼E-Waste Rules
India only
This product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the E-Waste (Management) Rules,
2016. This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., to an authorized collection site
for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE). Improper handling of this type of waste could
have a possible negative impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous
substances that are generally associated with EEE. At the same time, your cooperation in the correct disposal of
this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources. For more information regarding return
and recycling of WEEE products, please visit http://www.canon.co.in/environment or write to us at
customer.delight@canon.co.in.
Also, this product complies with the "E-Waste (Management) Rules, 2016" and prohibits use of lead, mercury,
hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations
exceeding 0.1 % by weight and 0.01 % by weight for Cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule II of
the Rule.
◼Environmental Information
Reducing your environmental impact while saving money
Power Consumption and Activation Time
The amount of electricity a device consumes depends on the way the device is used. This product is designed and set
in a way to allow you to reduce your electricity costs. After the last print it switches to Ready Mode. In this mode it can
print again immediately if required. If the product is not used for a time, the device switches to its Power Save Mode.
The devices consume less power (Watt) in these modes.
If you wish to set a longer Activation Time or would like to completely deactivate the Power Save Mode, please
consider that this device may then only switch to a lower energy level after a longer period of time or not at all.
Canon does not recommend extending the Activation Times from the optimum ones set as default.
Energy Star®
The Energy Star® programme is a voluntary scheme to promote the development and purchase of energy ecient
models, which help to minimise environmental impact.
Products which meet the stringent requirements of the Energy Star® programme for both environmental benets and
the amount of energy consumption will carry the Energy Star® logo accordingly.
Paper types
This product can be used to print on both recycled and virgin paper (certied to an environmental stewardship
scheme), which complies with EN12281 or a similar quality standard. In addition it can support printing on media
down to a weight of 64g/m².
Lighter paper means less resources used and a lower environmental footprint for your printing needs.
Duplex printing (Standard duplex printing products only)
Duplex printing capability enables you to print on both sides automatically, and therefore helps to reduce the use of
valuable resources by reducing your paper consumption.
The duplex function has been auto enabled during the set up and driver installation and Canon strongly recommends
that you do not disable this function. You should continue to use the duplex function to reduce the environmental
impact of your work with this product at all times.
Appendix
616
◼Disclaimers
●The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
●CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR
EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
◼Trademarks
"MEAP" is a trademark of CANON Inc., referring to an "application platform" for Canon multifunction and single
function printers.
Mopria®, the Mopria® Logo and the Mopria® Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria
Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X, Safari, AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of
Apple Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Word and Excel are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.
Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome and Android are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc.
UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Oce and may
be registered in certain jurisdictions.
UFST: Copyright © 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.
Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its aliates.
Appendix
617
Adobe, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright © 2007 -08 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763; 6,639,593;
6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.
All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe Systems
Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'
implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item
refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed
by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript
language.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.
◼Copyright
Reproduction of the contents of this document in whole or in part without prior permission is prohibited.
◼Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of such images as
scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal
and/or civil liability. A non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide
only. If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce any
particular document, and/or of the use of the images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should
consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance.
●Paper Money
●Travelers Checks
●Money Orders
●Food Stamps
●Certicates of Deposit
●Passports
●Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
●Immigration Papers
●Identifying Badges or Insignias
●Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
●Selective Service or Draft Papers
●Bonds or Other Certicates of Indebtedness
●Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental Agencies
●Stock Certicates
●Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certicates of Title
Appendix
618
●Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without Permission of Copyright Owner
V_181009
Appendix
619
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,
Version 1.1.
This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:
http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
-----------------------------------------------------------
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007
-----------------------------------------------------------
PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide
development of collaborative font projects, to support the font
creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to
provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and
improved in partnership with others.
The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modied and
redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The
fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,
redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved
names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,
however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The
requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to
any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS
"Font Software" refers to the set of les released by the Copyright
Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may
include source les, build scripts and documentation.
"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specied as such after the
copyright statement(s).
"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software
components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).
"Modied Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to,
deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the
components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting
the Font Software to a new environment.
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical
writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,
modify, redistribute, and sell modied and unmodied copies of the
Font Software, subject to the following conditions:
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
620
1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in
Original or Modied Versions, may be sold by itself.
2) Original or Modied Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,
redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy
contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be
included either as stand-alone text les, human-readable headers or
in the appropriate machine-readable metadata elds within text or
binary les as long as those elds can be easily viewed by the user.
3) No Modied Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font
Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the
corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the
primary font name as presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font
Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any
Modied Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the
Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written
permission.
5) The Font Software, modied or unmodied, in part or in whole,
must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be
distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to
remain under this license does not apply to any document created using
the Font Software.
TERMINATION
This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are
not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
621
- 1 -
Third-Party Services
If you use third-party services through the PRODUCT, use of the services are subjected the conditions below.
When you access and/or obtain some third party content (such as text, images, videos, audios, or software)
through the SOFTWARE, except as expressly permitted by the content owner or by applicable law, you may
not (a) scrape, build databases or otherwise create permanent copies of such content, or keep cached copies
longer than permitted by the cache header; (b) copy, translate, modify, create a derivative work of, sell, lease,
lend, convey, distribute, publicly display or sublicense to any third party; (c) misrepresent the source or
ownership; and (d) remove, obscure, or alter any copyright, trademark or other proprietary rights notices, falsify
or delete any author attributions, legal notices or other labels of the origin or source of material.
- 2 -
The Software Subjected to the Other License Conditions
Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding
license conditions.
Table of Software
Names of Software Terms and Conditions of the
License:
See Page
Adobe PostScript 3 4
HttpClient2.0 Alpha1 Release 11
Crypto API 13
expat 14
J2ME 15
libjingle 16
MD4 17
NET-SNMP 18
OpenSSL 25
servlet.jar 29
- 3 -
If you need source code of the following Software, please send email with the following information in English
or Japanese at: <oipossg@canon.co.jp>
-Name of the model that you purchased.
-Product ID number labeled on the back of the main unit.
Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding
license conditions
Table of Software
Names of Software Terms and Conditions of the
License:
See page
Linux 32
glibc 39
json-glib
glib 47
OSGi Release 4 62
- 4 -
Adobe PostScript 3
Copyright 2007-2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated and its licensors. All rights reserved.
Portions include software under the following terms:
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions of Pool.c_Copyright 1987 - NeXT, Inc., and portions of Graphics.c_Copyright 1988 NeXT, Inc. as an
unpublished work. All Rights Reserved.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Apache Software License, Version 1.1
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
Portions Copyright (c) 1998-2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party
acknowledgments normally appear.
4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name,
without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE
FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
- 5 -
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software
Foundation and was originally based on software copyright (c) 1999, International Business Machines, Inc.,
http://www.ibm.com. For more information on the Apache Software Foundation, please see
<http://www.apache.org/>.
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 1985, 1986 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
- 6 -
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by James A. Woods, derived from original work by
Spencer Thomas and Joseph Orost.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and
this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other
materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University
of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Portions Copyright (c) 1993 X Consortium
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEX CONSORTIUM BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER INAN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR INCONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X
Consortium.
______________________________________________________________________________________
NOTICE REGARDING SABLOTRON
March 27, 2003
- 7 -
Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the "Sablotron
XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the
"License"). You may obtain a copy of
the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations
under the License.
The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance are
Copyright (C) 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated are
available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from:
http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp
The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:
https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the
University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
- 8 -
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu. This code accompanies the book:
Alexandrescu, Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied". Copyright
(c) 2001. Addison-Wesley.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Welsey Longman make no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions developed by the University of California, Berkeley.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright © 1991-2005 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and
associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and associated documentation (the
"Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons
to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) the above copyright notice(s) and
this permission notice appear in all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in each modified
Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that
the data or software has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
- 9 -
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.
Unicode and the Unicode logo are trademarks of Unicode, Inc., and may be registered in some jurisdictions. All
other trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Adobe shall retain and reproduce, and require its Sublicensees to retain and reproduce JIM's following
copyright notice within each copy of the licensed programs in any form, in whole or in part: "© 1981, 1990 JMI
Consultants, Inc. All rights reserved."
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
- 10 -
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Loki Library
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu // This code accompanies the book: Alexandrescu,
Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied". Copyright (c) 2001.
Addison-Wesley.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Wesley Longman make no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty .
______________________________________________________________________________________
- 11 -
HttpClient2.0 Alpha1 Release
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation
(http://www.apache.org/) and is subject to the following terms and conditions.
Copyright (c) 2001 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must
include the following acknowledgement:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation
(http://www.apache.org/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgement may appear in the software itself, if and
wherever such third-party acknowledgements normally appear.
4. The names "The Jakarta Project", "Commons", "Xerces", "Crimson", "Velocity",
and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written
permission, please contact apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Jakarta", "Commons",
"Xerces" "Crimson", "Velocity", or "Apache", nor may "Jakarta", "Commons",
"Xerces" "Crimson", "Velocity", or "Apache" appear in their names without prior
written permission of the Apache Group.
- 12 -
NO WARRANTY
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on
behalf of the Apache Software Foundation. For more information on the Apache
Software Foundation, please see <http://www.apache.org/>.
- 13 -
Crypto API
COPYRIGHT INFORMATION
Copyright (c) 2000 The Legion Of The Bouncy Castle (http://www.bouncycastle.org)
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
- 14 -
expat
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
- 15 -
J2ME
Software is a “commercial item,” as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of
“commercial computer software” and “commercial computer software documentation,” as such terms are used
in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995).
Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S.
Government End Users acquire Software with only those rights set forth herein.
- 16 -
libjingle
Copyright 2004--2007, Google Inc.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- 17 -
MD4
"RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm"
- 18 -
NET-SNMP
Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate parts
below. Please make sure that you read all the parts. Up until 2001,
the project was based at UC Davis, and the first part covers all code
written during this time. From 2001 onwards, the project has been
based at SourceForge, and Networks Associates Technology, Inc hold the
copyright on behalf of the wider Net-SNMP community, covering all
derivative work done since then. An additional copyright section has
been added as Part 3 below also under a BSD license for the work
contributed by Cambridge Broadband Ltd. to the project since 2001.
An additional copyright section has been added as Part 4 below also
under a BSD license for the work contributed by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
to the project since 2003.
Code has been contributed to this project by many people over
the years it has been in development, and a full list of contributors
can be found in the README file under the THANKS section.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of
the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written
permission.
- 19 -
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR
THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
- 20 -
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
- 21 -
Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara,
California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- 22 -
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2003-2005, Sparta, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network
Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- 23 -
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and
Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003
oss@fabasoft.com
Author: Bernhard Penz <bernhard.penz@fabasoft.com>
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- 24 -
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries,
brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- 25 -
OpenSSL
OpenSSL License
---------------
/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
* acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
- 26 -
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
- 27 -
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
- 28 -
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
- 29 -
servlet.jar
1. Java Platform Interface. Licensee may not
modify the Java Platform
Interface (JPI, identified as classes
contained within the javax package or any
subpackages of the javax package), by
creating additional classes within the JPI or
otherwise causing the addition to or
modification of the classes in the JPI. In
the event that Licensee creates any
Java-related API and distribute such API to
others for applet or application development,
you must promptly publish broadly, an
accurate specification for such API for free
use by all developers of Java-based
software.
2. Restrictions. Software is confidential
copyrighted information of Sun and
title to all copies is retained by Sun
and/or its licensors. Licensee shall not
modify, decompile, disassemble, decrypt,
extract, or otherwise reverse engineer
Software. Software may not be leased,
assigned, or sublicensed, in whole or in
part. Software is not designed or intended
for use in on-line control of aircraft, air
traffic, aircraft navigation or aircraft
communications; or in the design,
construction, operation or maintenance of
any nuclear facility. Licensee warrants
that it will not use or redistribute the
Software for such purposes.
3. Disclaimer of Warranty. Software is
- 30 -
provided "AS IS," without a warranty
of any kind. ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED.
4. Termination. This License is effective
until terminated. Licensee may
terminate this License at any time by
destroying all copies of Software. This
License will terminate immediately without
notice from Sun if Licensee fails to comply
with any provision of this License. Upon
such termination, Licensee must destroy all
copies of Software.
5. Export Regulations. Software, including
technical data, is subject to U.S.
export control laws, including the U.S.
Export Administration Act and its associated
regulations, and may be subject to export or
import regulations in other countries.
Licensee agrees to comply strictly with all
such regulations and acknowledges that it
has the responsibility to obtain licenses to
export, re-export, or import Software.
Software may not be downloaded, or otherwise
exported or re-exported (i) into, or to a
national or resident of, Cuba, Iraq, Iran,
North Korea, Libya, Sudan, Syria or any
country to which the U.S. has embargoed
goods; or (ii) to anyone on the U.S.
Treasury Department's list of Specially
Designated Nations or the U.S. Commerce
- 31 -
Department's Table of Denial Orders.
- 32 -
Linux
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast,
the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to
make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free
Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free
Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it
to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software
or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to
surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the
software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients
all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you
must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you
legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no
warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its
recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not
reflect on the original authors' reputations.
- 33 -
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary.
To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed
at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder
saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to
any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative
work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its
scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its
contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium,
provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and
disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty
protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that
you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and
the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived
from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under
the terms of this License.
- 34 -
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when
started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement
including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you
provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the
user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not
normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an
announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived
from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this
License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when
you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of
the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire
whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the
Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work
based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge
no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable
copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on
a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source
code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the
program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
- 35 -
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an
executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the
executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of
the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source
code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you
permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if
you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not
limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that
contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly
through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from
distribution of the Program.
- 36 -
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of
the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or
among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the
body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from
time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address
new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does
not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are
different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting
the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
- 37 -
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED
IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM
TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to
achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file
to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and
a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.
Copyright (C)
yyyy
name of author
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
- 38 -
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C)
year
name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public
License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they
could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright
disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
interest in the program `Gnomovision'
(which makes passes at compilers) written
by James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon
, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your
program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with
the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.
- 39 -
glibc
json-glib
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts
as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence
the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast,
the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can
use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public
License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses
are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software
and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask
you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute
copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all
the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link
other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them
with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so
they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license,
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if
the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not
- 40 -
the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be
introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure
that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a
patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be
consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This
license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different
from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking
those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two
is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License
therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General
Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom
than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage
over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public
License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain
library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the
library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this
case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public
License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people
to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs
enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux
operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the
user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using
a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the
difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code
derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by
the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser
General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".
- 41 -
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with
application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms.
A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to
say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term
"modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library,
complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its
scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is
covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a
tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the
Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any
medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright
notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty
protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that
you also meet all of these conditions:
• a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
• b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and
the date of any change.
• c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms
of this License.
• d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an
application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is
invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not
supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose
remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined
independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied
- 42 -
function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square
root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived
from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this
License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when
you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the
whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole,
and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the
Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based
on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope
of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a
given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to
the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version
2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you
wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public
License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete
corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2
above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering
equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the
source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by
being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a
derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the
Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is
therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code
for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is
- 43 -
especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold
for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros
and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless
of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library
will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the
terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are
linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the
Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice,
provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for
debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and
its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution
displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a
reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
• a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the
Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1
and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete
machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user
can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified
Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will
not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)
• b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one
that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather
than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version
of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the
version that the work was made with.
• c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the
materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this
distribution.
• d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer
equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.
• e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this
user a copy.
- 44 -
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility
programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be
distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that
component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not
normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the
Library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together
with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the
separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted,
and provided that you do these two things:
• a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined
with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
• b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the
Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under
this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and
will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or
rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you
permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you
do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the
Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these
terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights
granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not
limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that
contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly
- 45 -
through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from
distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of
the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or
among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the
body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public
License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in
detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License
which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a
license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are
incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN
WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
- 46 -
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY
TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend
making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution
under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each
source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
"copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the library's name and an idea of what it does.
Copyright (C)
year
name of author
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Lesser General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright
disclaimer" for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in
the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written
by James Random Hacker.
- 47 -
signature of Ty Coon
, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
That's all there is to it!
- 48 -
glib
GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the library GPL. It is
numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the ordinary GPL.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change
free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some
specially designated Free Software Foundation software, and to any
other libraries whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for
your libraries, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if
you distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis
- 49 -
or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave
you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source
code. If you link a program with the library, you must provide
complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them
with the library, after making changes to the library and recompiling
it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright
the library, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain
that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
library. If the library is modified by someone else and passed on, we
want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original
version, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on
the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
patents. We wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free
software will individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect
transforming the program into proprietary software. To prevent this,
we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's
free use or not licensed at all.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary
GNU General Public License, which was designed for utility programs. This
license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to certain
designated libraries. This license is quite different from the ordinary
one; be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything in it is
the same as in the ordinary license.
The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that
they blur the distinction we usually make between modifying or adding to a
program and simply using it. Linking a program with a library, without
changing the library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is
analogous to running a utility program or application program. However, in
a textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a
- 50 -
derivative of the original library, and the ordinary General Public License
treats it as such.
Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General
Public License for libraries did not effectively promote software
sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries. We
concluded that weaker conditions might promote sharing better.
However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the
users of those programs of all benefit from the free status of the
libraries themselves. This Library General Public License is intended to
permit developers of non-free programs to use free libraries, while
preserving your freedom as a user of such programs to change the free
libraries that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how to achieve
this as regards changes in header files, but we have achieved it as regards
changes in the actual functions of the Library.) The hope is that this
will lead to faster development of free libraries.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a
"work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The
former contains code derived from the library, while the latter only
works together with the library.
Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary
General Public License rather than by this special one.
GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library which
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized
party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library
General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is
addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data
prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs
- 51 -
(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work
which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the
Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a
portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
included without limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for
making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means
all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from
such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based
on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for
writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does
and what the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's
complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that
you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact
all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a
fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion
of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and
- 52 -
distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices
stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no
charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a
table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses
the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility
is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that,
in the event an application does not supply such function or
table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of
its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has
a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the
application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
application-supplied function or table used by this function must
be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square
root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,
and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
- 53 -
your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library
with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of
a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public
License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do
this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so
that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2,
instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the
ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in
these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for
that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all
subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of
the Library into a program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or
derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany
it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which
must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy
from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the
source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to
distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
- 54 -
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the
Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or
linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a
work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and
therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library
creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it
contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the
library". The executable is therefore covered by this License.
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file
that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a
derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be
linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The
threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data
structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline
functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object
file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the
Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also compile or
link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a
work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work
under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit
modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse
engineering for debugging such modifications.
- 55 -
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the
Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by
this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work
during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the
copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference
directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one
of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever
changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under
Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked
with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that
uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the
user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood
that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application
to use the modified definitions.)
b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
least three years, to give the same user the materials
specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more
than the cost of performing this distribution.
c) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy
from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above
specified materials from the same place.
d) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the
Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for
reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception,
the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally
distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
- 56 -
which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license
restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot
use both them and the Library together in an executable that you
distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library
facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined
library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on
the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work
based on the Library, uncombined with any other library
facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the
Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact
that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining
where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any
attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your
rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies,
or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the
- 57 -
Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
the Library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the
Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library
subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent
license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by
all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply,
and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
- 58 -
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
be a consequence of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in
certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add
an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries,
so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
versions of the Library General Public License from time to time.
Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,
but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library
specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and
conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a
license version number, you may choose any version ever published by
the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free
programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these,
write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is
copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status
of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
- 59 -
WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest
possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that
everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting
redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the
ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is
safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
"copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
- 60 -
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this library; if not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if
necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
That's all there is to it!
Copyright (c) 1997-2008 University of Cambridge.
↑ Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- 61 -
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the University of Cambridge nor the name of Google
Inc. nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* Copyright (C) 2007 Red Hat Inc.
*
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
* obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files
* (the "Software"), to deal in the Software ↑ without restriction,
* including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
* publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
* and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so,
* subject to the following conditions:
*
* The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
* included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
*
* THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
* EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
* MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
* NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
* BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
- 62 -
* ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
* CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
* SOFTWARE.
- 63 -
OSGi Release 4
Eclipse Public License - v 1.0
THE ACCOMPANYING PROGRAM IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS ECLIPSE PUBLIC
LICENSE ("AGREEMENT"). ANY USE, REPRODUCTION OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROGRAM
CONSTITUTES RECIPIENT'S ACCEPTANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT.
1. DEFINITIONS
"Contribution" means:
a) in the case of the initial Contributor, the initial code and documentation distributed under this
Agreement, and
b) in the case of each subsequent Contributor:
i) changes to the Program, and
ii) additions to the Program;
where such changes and/or additions to the Program originate from and are distributed by that
particular Contributor. A Contribution 'originates' from a Contributor if it was added to the Program by
such Contributor itself or anyone acting on such Contributor's behalf. Contributions do not include
additions to the Program which: (i) are separate modules of software distributed in conjunction with the
Program under their own license agreement, and (ii) are not derivative works of the Program.
"Contributor" means any person or entity that distributes the Program.
"Licensed Patents" mean patent claims licensable by a Contributor which are necessarily infringed by the use
or sale of its Contribution alone or when combined with the Program.
"Program" means the Contributions distributed in accordance with this Agreement.
"Recipient" means anyone who receives the Program under this Agreement, including all Contributors.
2. GRANT OF RIGHTS
a) Subject to the terms of this Agreement, each Contributor hereby grants Recipient a non-exclusive,
worldwide, royalty-free copyright license to reproduce, prepare derivative works of, publicly display,
publicly perform, distribute and sublicense the Contribution of such Contributor, if any, and such
derivative works, in source code and object code form.
b) Subject to the terms of this Agreement, each Contributor hereby grants Recipient a non-exclusive,
worldwide, royalty-free patent license under Licensed Patents to make, use, sell, offer to sell, import
- 64 -
and otherwise transfer the Contribution of such Contributor, if any, in source code and object code
form. This patent license shall apply to the combination of the Contribution and the Program if, at the
time the Contribution is added by the Contributor, such addition of the Contribution causes such
combination to be covered by the Licensed Patents. The patent license shall not apply to any other
combinations which include the Contribution. No hardware per se is licensed hereunder.
c) Recipient understands that although each Contributor grants the licenses to its Contributions set
forth herein, no assurances are provided by any Contributor that the Program does not infringe the
patent or other intellectual property rights of any other entity. Each Contributor disclaims any liability to
Recipient for claims brought by any other entity based on infringement of intellectual property rights or
otherwise. As a condition to exercising the rights and licenses granted hereunder, each Recipient
hereby assumes sole responsibility to secure any other intellectual property rights needed, if any. For
example, if a third party patent license is required to allow Recipient to distribute the Program, it is
Recipient's responsibility to acquire that license before distributing the Program.
d) Each Contributor represents that to its knowledge it has sufficient copyright rights in its Contribution,
if any, to grant the copyright license set forth in this Agreement.
3. REQUIREMENTS
A Contributor may choose to distribute the Program in object code form under its own license agreement,
provided that:
a) it complies with the terms and conditions of this Agreement; and
b) its license agreement:
i) effectively disclaims on behalf of all Contributors all warranties and conditions, express and implied,
including warranties or conditions of title and non-infringement, and implied warranties or conditions of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose;
ii) effectively excludes on behalf of all Contributors all liability for damages, including direct, indirect,
special, incidental and consequential damages, such as lost profits;
iii) states that any provisions which differ from this Agreement are offered by that Contributor alone and
not by any other party; and
iv) states that source code for the Program is available from such Contributor, and informs licensees
how to obtain it in a reasonable manner on or through a medium customarily used for software
exchange.
When the Program is made available in source code form:
a) it must be made available under this Agreement; and
b) a copy of this Agreement must be included with each copy of the Program.
Contributors may not remove or alter any copyright notices contained within the Program.
- 65 -
Each Contributor must identify itself as the originator of its Contribution, if any, in a manner that reasonably
allows subsequent Recipients to identify the originator of the Contribution.
4. COMMERCIAL DISTRIBUTION
Commercial distributors of software may accept certain responsibilities with respect to end users, business
partners and the like. While this license is intended to facilitate the commercial use of the Program, the
Contributor who includes the Program in a commercial product offering should do so in a manner which does
not create potential liability for other Contributors. Therefore, if a Contributor includes the Program in a
commercial product offering, such Contributor ("Commercial Contributor") hereby agrees to defend and
indemnify every other Contributor ("Indemnified Contributor") against any losses, damages and costs
(collectively "Losses") arising from claims, lawsuits and other legal actions brought by a third party against the
Indemnified Contributor to the extent caused by the acts or omissions of such Commercial Contributor in
connection with its distribution of the Program in a commercial product offering. The obligations in this section
do not apply to any claims or Losses relating to any actual or alleged intellectual property infringement. In order
to qualify, an Indemnified Contributor must: a) promptly notify the Commercial Contributor in writing of such
claim, and b) allow the Commercial Contributor to control, and cooperate with the Commercial Contributor in,
the defense and any related settlement negotiations. The Indemnified Contributor may participate in any such
claim at its own expense.
For example, a Contributor might include the Program in a commercial product offering, Product X. That
Contributor is then a Commercial Contributor. If that Commercial Contributor then makes performance claims,
or offers warranties related to Product X, those performance claims and warranties are such Commercial
Contributor's responsibility alone. Under this section, the Commercial Contributor would have to defend claims
against the other Contributors related to those performance claims and warranties, and if a court requires any
other Contributor to pay any damages as a result, the Commercial Contributor must pay those damages.
5. NO WARRANTY
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT, THE PROGRAM IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS
IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF TITLE,
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Each Recipient
is solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using and distributing the Program and assumes all
risks associated with its exercise of rights under this Agreement , including but not limited to the risks and costs
of program errors, compliance with applicable laws, damage to or loss of data, programs or equipment, and
unavailability or interruption of operations.
6. DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY
- 66 -
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT, NEITHER RECIPIENT NOR ANY
CONTRIBUTORS SHALL HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST PROFITS),
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OR
DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROGRAM OR THE EXERCISE OF ANY RIGHTS GRANTED HEREUNDER, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
7. GENERAL
If any provision of this Agreement is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law, it shall not affect the validity
or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this Agreement, and without further action by the parties
hereto, such provision shall be reformed to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and
enforceable.
If Recipient institutes patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)
alleging that the Program itself (excluding combinations of the Program with other software or hardware)
infringes such Recipient's patent(s), then such Recipient's rights granted under Section 2(b) shall terminate as
of the date such litigation is filed.
All Recipient's rights under this Agreement shall terminate if it fails to comply with any of the material terms or
conditions of this Agreement and does not cure such failure in a reasonable period of time after becoming
aware of such noncompliance. If all Recipient's rights under this Agreement terminate, Recipient agrees to
cease use and distribution of the Program as soon as reasonably practicable. However, Recipient's obligations
under this Agreement and any licenses granted by Recipient relating to the Program shall continue and
survive.
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute copies of this Agreement, but in order to avoid inconsistency the
Agreement is copyrighted and may only be modified in the following manner. The Agreement Steward reserves
the right to publish new versions (including revisions) of this Agreement from time to time. No one other than
the Agreement Steward has the right to modify this Agreement. The Eclipse Foundation is the initial Agreement
Steward. The Eclipse Foundation may assign the responsibility to serve as the Agreement Steward to a
suitable separate entity. Each new version of the Agreement will be given a distinguishing version number. The
Program (including Contributions) may always be distributed subject to the version of the Agreement under
which it was received. In addition, after a new version of the Agreement is published, Contributor may elect to
distribute the Program (including its Contributions) under the new version. Except as expressly stated in
Sections 2(a) and 2(b) above, Recipient receives no rights or licenses to the intellectual property of any
Contributor under this Agreement, whether expressly, by implication, estoppel or otherwise. All rights in the
Program not expressly granted under this Agreement are reserved.
- 67 -
This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of New York and the intellectual property laws of the
United States of America. No party to this Agreement will bring a legal action under this Agreement more than
one year after the cause of action arose. Each party waives its rights to a jury trial in any resulting litigation.
Function Guide for Software
Registration and Update
User's Guide
USRM2-6358-01 2017-11 en Copyright CANON INC. 2017
Contents
Available Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 2
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications ........................................................... 4
Installing by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Delivery) ....................................................................... 6
Installing by Not Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Manual) ................................................................. 9
Downloading the Manuals and Related Software ...................................................................................................... 15
Updating the Firmware .......................................................................................................................... 17
Managing the Register/Update Software Function ....................................................... 28
Using This Guide ........................................................................................................................................... 32
Operating Environment of This Guide ...................................................................................................................... 33
Screen Layout of This Guide ..................................................................................................................................... 34
Top Page ........................................................................................................................................................... 35
Topic Page ......................................................................................................................................................... 36
Site Map ............................................................................................................................................................ 37
Search Method ................................................................................................................................................... 38
Viewing This Guide .................................................................................................................................................. 39
Disclaimer .......................................................................................................................................................... 41
Trademarks ...................................................................................................................................................... 43
I
Available Functions
0Y1C-000
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
Using the Register/Update Software function, you can install the System Options/MEAP Applications to the
printer. You can use this function from both the touch panel display and the computer (Remote UI).
Installing by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network
You can install the System Options/MEAP Applications by accessing the delivery server from this printer.
Installing by Not Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network
You can install the System Options/MEAP Applications by using the license le/license key that you obtained
from the License Management System.
Updating the Firmware
Using the Register/Update Software function, you can update the rmware of the printer to the most recent
version. You can use this function from the computer (Remote UI).
Updating by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network
You can update the rmware by accessing the delivery server from this printer.
Available Functions
2
Installing the System Options/MEAP
Applications
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications ......................................................................... 4
Installing by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Delivery) .......................................................... 6
Installing by Not Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Manual) ..................................................... 9
Downloading the Manuals and Related Software ............................................................................................. 15
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
3
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
0Y1C-001
The procedures to install the system options or MEAP applications on the printer differ, depending on whether
the printer is connected or not to an outside network. Select the procedure that matches your conditions using
the references below.
Installing by Connecting this Printer to an Outside Network
Install from the Remote UI.
NOTE
Communication test
To check that the transmission with the delivery server is properly operating, if necessary, perform a
communication test before installation.
" Testing Communication Using the Remote UI(P. 29) "
Installing by Not Connecting this Printer to an Outside Network
Installing System Options
Install using one of the following procedures.
NOTE
If you install multiple system options
We recommend that you install from the Remote UI.
Procedure Necessary Steps Reference Page
Using the Remote UI to install
1. Obtain the license le from the
License Management System " Obtaining the License File(P. 9) "
2. Install the license le using the
Remote UI
" Installing the System Options Using
the Remote UI(P. 9) "
Installing MEAP Applications
Use the following procedure to install.
Procedure Necessary Steps Reference Page
Using the Remote UI to install 1. Obtain the license le from the
License Management System " Obtaining the License File(P. 9) "
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
4
Installing by Connecting This Printer to an Outside
Network (Delivery)
0Y1C-002
If the printer is connected to an outside network, you can install the system options and MEAP applications
from the Remote UI by linking with the delivery server.
NOTE
Preparing a license access number certicate
Make sure that the license access number that is included with the package is available.
1Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
" e-Manual "
2From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [License/Other] →
[Register/Update Software].
3Click [Delivered Installation].
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
6
4Enter the license access number → click [Next].
Once the license access number is conrmed after contacting the delivery server, information for the system
options/MEAP applications you can install are displayed.
5Select the system options and MEAP applications → click [Start Installation].
Status after Installation:
Start: Starts the installed MEAP applications.
Stop: Stops the installed MEAP applications.
IMPORTANT
If [Stop] is selected when installing MEAP applications
You need to start the application before using the MEAP application.
" Function Guide for MEAP Application Management "
If the agreement screen is displayed, read the agreement. If you abide with the agreement, click [Accept].
6Check the Installation Result page.
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
7
When the installation of the system options is completed, the message <Restart the device.> appears. Restart
the printer to enable the function.
To return to the Delivered Installation screen, click [To Delivered Installation].
NOTE
The manual for system options/MEAP applications
You can download the manual for the installed system options/MEAP applications by accessing the URL
for the manual download site displayed on the Installation Result screen.
" Downloading the Manuals and Related Software(P. 15) "
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
8
Installing by Not Connecting This Printer to an Outside
Network (Manual)
0Y1C-003
This section describes how to install the system options and MEAP applications without connecting the printer
to an outside network.
Obtaining the License File
Obtain the license le.
License le: Obtain the license le when installing the system options/MEAP applications using the Remote UI.
NOTE
Preparing a license access number certicate
Make sure that the license access number that is included with the package is available.
License access number is not printed on the package of the MEAP application
If the license access number is not printed on the package of the MEAP application you are using, the
license le is issued by the distributor of the MEAP application. You do not need to obtain the license le
explained in this section. For more information, see the manual for each MEAP application.
1Check the management number you need to obtain the license le.
To obtain the license le, the following management number is required.
●License Access Number: Check the license access number certicate.
●Device Serial Number: You can check this number from the Utility menu of the operation panel.
" e-Manual "
2Access http://www.canon.com/lms/license/.
3Follow the instructions on the screen and obtain the license le.
Next, install the system options or the MEAP applications.
Installing the System Options Using the Remote UI
You can install the system options to the printer using the Remote UI.
1Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
" e-Manual "
2From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [License/Other] →
[Register/Update Software].
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
9
3Click [Manual Installation].
4Click [Browse...] → select the license le to install → click [Next].
File extensions:
License File: A le with the [lic] extension.
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
10
5Check the contents that will be installed on the conrmation screen → click [Install].
Installing the MEAP Applications Using the Remote UI
You can install the MEAP applications to the printer using the Remote UI.
NOTE
The number of MEAP applications that can be installed
You can install up to eight applications.
For details on MEAP applications
There may be other system requirements for installation, depending on the MEAP applications. For
instructions on settings, see the manual provided with the MEAP application.
1Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
" e-Manual "
2From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [License/Other] →
[Register/Update Software].
3Click [Manual Installation].
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
11
4Click [Browse...] → select the license le and the application le to install → click
[Next].
File extensions:
License File: A le with the [lic] extension.
Application File: A le with the [jar] extension.
IMPORTANT
When you install MEAP applications
●You cannot install license les only.
●When installing the MEAP application, make sure you specify the license le. You cannot install the
MEAP application without specifying the license le.
5Conrm the information displayed on the install conrmation page → click [Yes].
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
12
Depending on the MEAP application, a software license agreement screen may be displayed. Conrm the
information displayed on the screen → click [OK].
If you are installing a new MEAP application, the following information is displayed on the screen.
●Application Information
●License Information
The following information is displayed when you overwrite a MEAP application.
●Current Application Information
●Application Information after Overwrite
Installation will start after the message <Installing... Please wait.> is displayed again. After the installation, click
[To Manual Installation] to display the Manual Installation screen.
IMPORTANT
To use MEAP applications
To use the installed MEAP application, you must start the MEAP application.
" Function Guide for MEAP Application Management "
Starting the MEAP Applications
This section describes how to start the installed MEAP application from the SMS screen.
NOTE
Details on SMS
For details on SMS, see " Function Guide for MEAP Application Management ."
1From the top page of the SMS, click [MEAP Application Management].
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
13
2Select the application you want to start → click [Start].
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
14
Downloading the Manuals and Related Software
0Y1C-004
You can download the manuals for the installed system options/MEAP applications and their related software
from the following URL.
http://canon.com/fau/downloads
NOTE
●Make sure that the license access number that is included with the package is available.
●If you installed from the Remote UI, you can jump to the above URL from the link displayed on the
Installation Result screen. If you do so, the license access number is entered automatically.
1Start the Web browser on your computer.
2Enter the URL in [Address].
3After entering the license access number, follow the instructions on the screen to
download the manuals and related software.
If software is downloaded, refer to the manual of that software to install.
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
15
Updating the Firmware
0Y1C-005
Update from the Remote UI.
NOTE
Communication test
To check that the transmission with the delivery server is properly operating, if necessary, perform a
communication test before installation.
" Testing Communication Using the Remote UI(P. 29) "
Updating by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network
If the printer is connected to an outside network, you can update to a most recent rmware by linking with the
delivery server.
IMPORTANT
Estimated time required to apply rmware
The time required to apply the downloaded rmware is approximately 20 minutes. This operation may
take more time depending on the system conguration and network environment of your printer.
Checking the New Firmware/Specifying the Delivery Settings
You can check the new rmware that is applicable with the printer and specify the delivery settings.
1Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
" e-Manual "
2From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [License/Other] →
[Register/Update Software].
Updating the Firmware
17
3Click [Delivered Update].
4Click [Conrm New Firmware].
Contact the delivery server for information on whether an applicable new rmware is available or not.
5Verify the displayed information → specify necessary settings → click [Execute].
If the agreement screen is displayed, read the agreement. If you abide with the agreement, press [I Accept].
Updating the Firmware
18
Details of each item are shown below.
●Firmware:
Current Version: Displays the version of the current rmware.
Applicable Firmware: Displays the new rmware that is applicable with the printer.
Release Note: If the new rmware has a release note, that information is displayed.
Delivery Settings:
●Delivery Schedule: Click "Deliver now" or "Deliver at specied date and time."
[Deliver now]: Downloads the rmware after the delivery setting is specied.
[Deliver at specied date and
time]:
Select the date/time (year, month, date, and time) to download the rmware
from the drop-down list.
●Timing to Apply: Click [Auto] or [Manual].
[Auto]: The rmware is automatically applied after the download of the rmware is completed.
[Manual]: Only downloads the rmware. To apply the downloaded rmware, set from [Apply Firmware].
●Deliver Update: Click [On] or [Off].
[On]: Downloads only the difference between the current rmware and the new rmware.
[Off]: Downloads the new rmware entirely.
●E-Mail Address: Enter the e-mail address of the administrator. You can receive e-mails regarding the update
status that is sent from the delivery server.
●Comments: Enter the comment that will automatically be added to the e-mail. If the model name is entered,
you can identify which device status the e-mail is about.
Updating the Firmware
19
NOTE
Delivery Schedule and Timing to Apply
●When the Delivery Schedule is set to [Deliver now] and the Timing to Apply is set to [Auto]
The rmware is applied after the new rmware is downloaded from the delivery server. When the
application is completed, the printer automatically restarts.
●When the Delivery Schedule is set to [Deliver now] and the Timing to Apply is set to [Manual]
The new rmware is downloaded.
●When the Delivery Schedule is set to [Deliver at specied date and time]
The scheduled delivery is set to the specied date/time.
Applying the Downloaded Firmware
You can apply the downloaded rmware to the printer.
NOTE
If the Timing to Apply in Delivery Settings is set to [Auto], this step is not necessary.
1Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
" e-Manual "
2From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [License/Other] →
[Register/Update Software].
Updating the Firmware
20
3Click [Delivered Update].
4Click [Apply Firmware].
5Conrm the rmware to apply → click [Yes].
Updating the Firmware
21
The new rmware is applied to the printer. When the application is completed, the printer automatically
restarts.
Deleting the Downloaded Firmware
You can delete the downloaded rmware.
1Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
" e-Manual "
2From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [License/Other] →
[Register/Update Software].
Updating the Firmware
22
3Click [Delivered Update].
4Click [Delete Firmware].
5Conrm the rmware to delete → click [Yes].
Updating the Firmware
23
The rmware is deleted.
Deleting the Scheduled Delivery
You can delete the scheduled delivery of the rmware.
1Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
" e-Manual "
2From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [License/Other] →
[Register/Update Software].
3Click [Delivered Update].
Updating the Firmware
24
4Click [Delete Scheduled Delivery].
5Conrm the information of the scheduled delivery → click [Yes].
Updating the Firmware
25
The scheduled delivery is deleted.
Updating the Firmware
26
Managing the Register/Update Software Function
0Y1C-006
You can display the installation logs and test communication using the Remote UI.
Displaying the Installation/Update Log Using the Remote UI
You can check the installation logs of the system options/MEAP applications and the update log of the rmware.
1Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
" e-Manual "
2From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [License/Other] →
[Register/Update Software].
3Click [Display Logs /Communication Test].
4From the Log View drop-down list, select [Update Logs] → click [Switch].
Managing the Register/Update Software Function
28
The installation logs of the system options/MEAP applications and the update log of the rmware are displayed.
Testing Communication Using the Remote UI
You can check whether the printer can properly communicate with the delivery server.
1Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
" e-Manual "
2From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [License/Other] →
[Register/Update Software].
3Click [Display Logs /Communication Test] → [Communication Test].
Managing the Register/Update Software Function
29
When the conrmation dialog is displayed, click [Yes].
Contents for the test are downloaded from the delivery server.
When the communication test is completed, the communication test result screen is displayed.
NOTE
If [Failed] is displayed on the communication test result
If [Failed] is displayed on the communication test result screen, check that the network cable is
connected and that the network settings are correct. If the problem is not resolved, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.
Managing the Register/Update Software Function
30
Using This Guide
Using This Guide ............................................................................................................................................... 32
Operating Environment of This Guide ................................................................................................................ 33
Screen Layout of This Guide ................................................................................................................................ 34
Top Page ......................................................................................................................................................... 35
Topic Page ...................................................................................................................................................... 36
Site Map ......................................................................................................................................................... 37
Search Method ............................................................................................................................................... 38
Viewing This Guide .............................................................................................................................................. 39
Using This Guide
31
Using This Guide
0Y1C-007
This chapter describes how to use this guide.
Operating Environment of This Guide(P. 33)
Screen Layout of This Guide(P. 34)
Top Page(P. 35)
Topic Page(P. 36)
Site Map(P. 37)
Search Method(P. 38)
Viewing This Guide(P. 39)
<To nd the desired content>
●Selecting between the category icons
From the top page, select a category icon you want.
" Top Page(P. 35) "
●Searching from the site map
On the site map, you can view the list of whole sections of this guide sorted by category. You can
directly display sections in a category.
" Site Map(P. 37) "
●Whole text search function
You can search by keyword in this guide. You can display the desired description from the search
results by entering a keyword you want to search. This function supports AND search.
" Search Method(P. 38) "
Using This Guide
32
Operating Environment of This Guide
0Y1C-008
You need a Web browser to use this guide. Operation of the following Web browsers is guaranteed.
Windows
●Internet Explorer 6.0 or later
●Firefox 2.x or later
Mac OS
●Safari 3.x or later
●Firefox 3.x or later
NOTE
Enabling the script function
Enable the script function for a Web browser before using this guide.
Using This Guide
33
Screen Layout of This Guide
0Y1C-009
This section describes the screen layout of this guide.
The page displayed right after this guide starts is called "Top Page" and the guide description is called "Topic
Page" in this section.
"Site map" is displayed from [Site map] which is located on the upper right of this guide.
The search panel is used to make search through this guide.
The screen layout is different for each page, so click the following links to see the instruction.
Top Page(P. 35)
Topic Page(P. 36)
Site Map(P. 37)
Search Method(P. 38)
Using This Guide
34
Top Page
0Y1C-00A
(1) Select from functions
The instructions of each function and operation method are described.
(2) [Search]
The search panel is displayed by entering keyword(s) and clicking [ ].
For details, see " Search Method(P. 38) ."
(3) [Top]
The top page of this guide is displayed.
(4) [Site map]
The entire contents of this guide are displayed.
(5) [Help]
How to use this guide is displayed.
(6) [Disclaimers]
The disclaimers are displayed.
(7) [Copyright]
The information of copyrights is displayed.
(8) [Trademarks]
The trademarks are displayed.
Using This Guide
35
Topic Page
0Y1C-00C
(1) Chapter contents
This is the list of the contents in the chapter. Clicking each item displays the description in the topic page.
Click [ ] to expand a menu, and click [ ] to collapse a menu.
Alternatively, click [ Expand all ] to expand all menus, and click [ Collapse all ] to collapse all
menus.
(2) Topic page
The descriptions of each item are displayed.
The current location of the displayed topic is displayed at the upper left of the topic page. Click a link to
move to a higher level.
(3) [Chapter] menu
You can select a different chapter from the pull-down menu.
(4) [Contents] tab
Click to display the chapter contents panel.
(5) [Search] tab
Click to display the search panel.
For details, see " Search Method(P. 38) ."
(6) [ ]
Click to display or hide the chapter contents panel/search panel.
(7) [Previous]/[Next]
Click to move to the previous or next topic.
(8) [Print this topic]
Prints only the topic page currently displayed.
(9) [Print all]
Prints all the contents in a chapter.
Using This Guide
36
Site Map
0Y1C-00E
(1) Whole contents
Shows the all chapters and sections of this guide. Click an item to view the contents.
Using This Guide
37
Search Method
0Y1C-00F
(1) Search
Entering a character string in [Search] on the top page or in the [Keyword] text box on the search panel
and then clicking [ ] displays the search results.
The AND search is available in this guide so you can rene the search results by entering two or more
keywords. When entering keywords, enter a space between the keywords.
●Example: license le (if you want to display pages which include words, "license" and "le")
(2) Search result
The search results for a keyword are displayed.
If there are more than 10 search results, you can see the other results by clicking [ ], [ ], or the
number which is located below the result.
(3) [Search options]
Click to display the search options.
The search options can be used to specify the chapter to search, case sensitivity, and whether to
differentiate between one- and two-byte characters.
Click [Search with these conditions] to search with the specied conditions.
Using This Guide
38
Viewing This Guide
0Y1C-00H
Symbols Used in This Guide
The following symbols are used in this Guide to mark descriptions of handling restrictions, precautions, and
instructions that should be observed for your safety.
IMPORTANT
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the
machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or property.
NOTE
Indicates a clarication of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure. Reading
these notes is highly recommended.
Buttons Used in This Guide
The following are examples of how control panel keys and on-screen buttons are depicted in this guide.
Type Depiction in This Guide Example
Buttons on computer operation screen and so on [Button name and so on] [OK]
Screenshots Used in This Guide
The contents of the screenshots used in this guide are the default settings.
Depending on the system conguration, the contents of the screenshots may partly differ.
Using This Guide
39
Disclaimer
0Y1C-00J
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO
MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR AGAINST
INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS
MATERIAL.
Disclaimer
41
Trademarks
0Y1C-00L
●"MEAP" is a trademark of CANON Inc., referring to an "application platform" for Canon multifunction and
single function printers.
●Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, Mac, Mac OS, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
●Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
●This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype
Imaging, Inc. UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and
Trademark Oce and may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
●UFST: Copyright© 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.
●Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its
aliates.
●Adobe, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
●Copyright© 2007 -08 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
●Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763;
6,639,593; 6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.
●All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe
Systems Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for
Adobe Systems' implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
●Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or
similar item refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript
technology created or licensed by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to
be merely compatible with the PostScript language.
●Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
●Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Trademarks
43
●All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
●All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their
respective owners.
Trademarks
44
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,
Version 1.1.
This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:
http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
-----------------------------------------------------------
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007
-----------------------------------------------------------
PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide
development of collaborative font projects, to support the font
creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to
provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and
improved in partnership with others.
The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modied and
redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The
fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,
redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved
names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,
however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The
requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to
any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS
"Font Software" refers to the set of les released by the Copyright
Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may
include source les, build scripts and documentation.
"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specied as such after the
copyright statement(s).
"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software
components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).
"Modied Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to,
deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the
components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting
the Font Software to a new environment.
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical
writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,
modify, redistribute, and sell modied and unmodied copies of the
Font Software, subject to the following conditions:
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
45
1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in
Original or Modied Versions, may be sold by itself.
2) Original or Modied Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,
redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy
contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be
included either as stand-alone text les, human-readable headers or
in the appropriate machine-readable metadata elds within text or
binary les as long as those elds can be easily viewed by the user.
3) No Modied Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font
Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the
corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the
primary font name as presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font
Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any
Modied Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the
Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written
permission.
5) The Font Software, modied or unmodied, in part or in whole,
must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be
distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to
remain under this license does not apply to any document created using
the Font Software.
TERMINATION
This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are
not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
46
Function Guide for MEAP Application
Management
User's Guide
USRM2-6341-02 2017-11 en Copyright CANON INC. 2017
Contents
Available Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 2
Launching and Closing SMS .................................................................................................................. 5
Before Launching SMS (Preparation) .......................................................................................................................... 7
Setting Up HTTP Communication ............................................................................................................................ 8
Launching SMS (Log in) .............................................................................................................................................. 9
Attention (Launching SMS (Log in)) ........................................................................................................................ 13
Closing SMS (Logging Out) ....................................................................................................................................... 14
MEAP Application Settings .................................................................................................................. 16
Installing MEAP Applications ................................................................................................................................... 19
Attention (Installing MEAP Applications) ................................................................................................................ 22
Uninstalling MEAP Applications ............................................................................................................................... 23
Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications ....................................................................................................................... 25
Starting MEAP Applications .................................................................................................................................. 26
Stopping MEAP Applications ................................................................................................................................ 27
Checking the Details of MEAP Applications ............................................................................................................... 29
MEAP Application License Settings ........................................................................................................................... 31
Adding License Files ............................................................................................................................................ 32
Disabling License Files ......................................................................................................................................... 35
Downloading Disabled License Files ...................................................................................................................... 38
Deleting Disabled License Files ............................................................................................................................. 41
Setting Authentication Information for MEAP Applications ....................................................................................... 44
System Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 49
Changing the MEAP Applet Display Order ................................................................................................................. 50
Checking Login Services .......................................................................................................................................... 52
Setting Enhanced System Applications ..................................................................................................................... 54
Starting/Stopping Enhanced System Applications ................................................................................................... 55
Starting Enhanced System Applications ........................................................................................................... 56
Stopping Enhanced System Applications .......................................................................................................... 57
Installing Enhanced System Applications ............................................................................................................... 58
Uninstalling Enhanced System Applications ........................................................................................................... 61
Checking Information ............................................................................................................................................. 62
Checking System Information .............................................................................................................................. 63
Checking Application Information ......................................................................................................................... 65
Checking License Files ......................................................................................................................................... 66
Changing the SMS Password .................................................................................................................................... 67
Deleting the MEAP Application Setting Information ................................................................................................. 69
Managing MEAP Application Log Data ...................................................................................................................... 71
Downloading Log Data ........................................................................................................................................ 72
I
Deleting Log Data ............................................................................................................................................... 74
List of Error Messages (MEAP) .......................................................................................................... 77
Errors Relating to the [Login] Page ........................................................................................................................... 79
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Management] Page ................................................................................... 81
Errors Relating to the [Install MEAP Application] Page .............................................................................................. 83
Errors Relating to the [Authentication Information Settings] Page ............................................................................ 88
Errors Relating to the [License Management] Page ................................................................................................... 89
Errors Relating to the [Enhanced System Application Management] Page .................................................................. 91
Errors Relating to the [Check License] and [Change Password] Pages ........................................................................ 97
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Setting Information Management] Page ..................................................... 99
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Log Management] Page ........................................................................... 100
Other Errors ......................................................................................................................................................... 101
Using This Guide ........................................................................................................................................ 103
Operating Environment of This Guide .................................................................................................................... 104
Screen Layout of This Guide ................................................................................................................................... 105
Top Page ......................................................................................................................................................... 106
Topic Page ....................................................................................................................................................... 107
Site Map .......................................................................................................................................................... 108
Search Method ................................................................................................................................................. 109
Viewing This Guide ................................................................................................................................................ 110
Disclaimer ........................................................................................................................................................ 112
Trademarks .................................................................................................................................................... 114
II
Available Functions
0XW7-000
SMS (Service Management Service) is software that accesses the printer over the network from an existing Web
browser, and can install and manage MEAP applications (called "applications" in this document). Since the
software (Web server) for using SMS is embedded in the printer, there is no need for any software other than a
Web browser.
If a printer on the network is connected to a computer, it can use SMS. You can perform the following
operations using SMS.
You can check application information from computers on the network
You can access the printer via the network and display the status and information of installed applications.
After SMS launches and you log in by entering your password in the [Log In] page, the following top page is
displayed.
Available Functions
2
(1) [MEAP Application Management]
It can display the status of applications that are installed in the printer.
" MEAP Application Settings(P. 16) "
(2) [Install MEAP Application]
Install the MEAP application.
" Installing MEAP Applications(P. 19) "
(3) [System Management]
MEAP system administrator settings are used for setting system application settings, displaying
information and changing passwords, etc.
" System Settings(P. 49) "
You can install and uninstall applications
You can install and uninstall applications that support this printer from the computer.
" Installing MEAP Applications(P. 19) "
" Uninstalling MEAP Applications(P. 23) "
You can update installed applications and license les
If the license for the installed applications has expired, you can reinstall and update it.
" Adding License Files(P. 32) "
Available Functions
3
Launching and Closing SMS
Launching and Closing SMS ......................................................................................................................... 5
Before Launching SMS (Preparation) ................................................................................................................... 7
Setting Up HTTP Communication ...................................................................................................................... 8
Launching SMS (Log in) ......................................................................................................................................... 9
Attention (Launching SMS (Log in)) ................................................................................................................. 13
Closing SMS (Logging Out) .................................................................................................................................. 14
Launching and Closing SMS
4
Launching and Closing SMS
0XW7-001
Log in is required to use SMS.
Before Launching SMS (Preparation)
(P. 7)
Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9)
Closing SMS (Logging Out)(P. 14)
NOTE
Web Browser Settings
The following settings are required.
●JavaScript must be enabled
●The use of session cookies must be enabled
●When a proxy server is used, using the proxy server settings of your Web browser, add the IP address
of the printer to the [Exceptions] (addresses that do not use a proxy) list.
Since settings differ depending on the network environment, consult with your network administrator.
Launching SMS
Multiple users cannot log in to SMS at the same time.
Automatic SMS Logout
While SMS is in use, if it is not accessed for approximately ve minutes or more it times out and the user
is automatically logged out. If that happens, log in again from the [Login] page.
Do not use the Web browser's [Back] navigation button
If you use the Web browser's [Back] navigation button, SMS may not operate properly.
SMS System Environment
SMS operation is guaranteed in the following system environments.
Web Browsers
●Internet Explorer 7 or later
●Safari 4.0.5 or later
Operating system
●Windows Vista SP2
●Windows 7 SP1
●Windows 8
Launching and Closing SMS
5
●Windows 10
●Mac OS X v 10.5 or later
Launching and Closing SMS
6
Before Launching SMS (Preparation)
0XW7-002
Set the following before launching SMS.
Step 1 Congure the network settings. " e-Manual "
Step 2 Check the printer's IP address by
Network Status Print. " e-Manual "
Step 3 Set it so that the printer can be
accessed from the Web browser. " Setting Up HTTP Communication(P. 8) "
Launching and Closing SMS
7
Setting Up HTTP Communication
0XW7-003
In order to use MEAP functions from the Web browser, HTTP communication must be enabled.
Follow the steps in the procedure below to congure the settings. (The default settings are <On>.)
1Press [Settings] key, select <Network> with / , and then press [OK] key.
After the message is displayed, press [OK] key.
2Select <TCP/IP Settings> with / , and then press [OK] key.
3Select <HTTP> with / , and then press [OK] key.
4Select <On> with / , and then press [OK] key.
<On> It uses HTTP.
<Off> It does not use HTTP.
5Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
The settings are enabled after a hard reset or after the printer is restarted.
NOTE
Details about Hard Resets
See the " e-Manual ."
Launching and Closing SMS
8
Launching SMS (Log in)
0XW7-004
The following two methods are used for launching SMS.
Launching SMS directly from the Web browser(P. 9)
Launching SMS from a Remote UI(P. 10)
Before launching SMS, see " Attention (Launching SMS (Log in))(P. 13) ."
Launching SMS directly from the Web browser
1Start the Web browser.
2Enter "https://<Printer's IP address>:8443/sms/" in the address bar, and then press
[ENTER] from the Enter key on the keyboard.
●Entry Example: https://192.168.0.215:8443/sms/
If the printer's host name is registered in the DNS server, you can enter [host name.domain name] instead
of the IP address.
●Input Example: http://my_printer.xy_dept.company.com:8443/sms/
If SMS does not launch
Check the following.
●HTTP communication is enabled.
" Setting Up HTTP Communication(P. 8) "
●The computer and printer are connected properly over the network.
●The printer is turned ON.
Launching and Closing SMS
9
●The IP address or [host name.domain name] are entered correctly.
NOTE
Device Serial Number
The printer's device serial number is displayed on the upper left of the screen. (The device serial number
is required to obtain the license le from the license management system.)
3Enter the password, and then click [Login].
The default password is "MeapSmsLogin" (case sensitive).
If you cannot log in
If you cannot log in because the password is not correct, a message is displayed prompting you to re-
enter your password.
Enter the correct password, and then click [Login].
If you do not log in within approximately 5 minutes after the login page is displayed, you will not
be able to log in even if you enter the correct password.
A switch license le is required to initialize passwords. After clicking on [Browse] in [Initialize
Password] in the screen that displays the message prompting password re-entry, select Switch
License File, and then click [Initialize]. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
Launching SMS from a Remote UI
1Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode.
" e-Manual "
Launching and Closing SMS
10
2Click [Service Management Service] on the portal page.
3Enter the password, and then click [Login].
The default password is "MeapSmsLogin" (case sensitive).
If you cannot log in
If you cannot log in because the password is not correct, a message is displayed prompting you to re-
enter your password.
Enter the correct password, and then click [Login].
If you do not log in within approximately 5 minutes after the login page is displayed, you will not
be able to log in even if you enter the correct password.
Launching and Closing SMS
11
A switch license le is required to initialize passwords. After clicking on [Browse] in [Initialize
Password] in the screen that displays the message prompting password re-entry, select Switch
License File, and then click [Initialize]. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
Launching and Closing SMS
12
Attention (Launching SMS (Log in))
0XW7-005
IMPORTANT
SMS Password
●To prevent unauthorized access, We recommend that the administrator change the password before
SMS use is begun. See " Changing the SMS Password(P. 67) " when changing passwords.
●This password is to prevent unauthorized operation of the printer. Do not let anyone know except the
administrator.
●Make sure that you do not forget your password. If you forget your password, you will not be able to
use SMS. If this happens, contact your local dealer.
Launching and Closing SMS
13
Closing SMS (Logging Out)
0XW7-006
Click [Log Out from SMS] to close SMS.
If you close the Web browser without clicking [Log Out from SMS], SMS becomes temporarily unusable.
Launching and Closing SMS
14
MEAP Application Settings
MEAP Application Settings ......................................................................................................................... 16
Installing MEAP Applications .............................................................................................................................. 19
Attention (Installing MEAP Applications) ......................................................................................................... 22
Uninstalling MEAP Applications ......................................................................................................................... 23
Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications ................................................................................................................ 25
Starting MEAP Applications ............................................................................................................................ 26
Stopping MEAP Applications ........................................................................................................................... 27
Checking the Details of MEAP Applications ....................................................................................................... 29
MEAP Application License Settings .................................................................................................................... 31
Adding License Files ....................................................................................................................................... 32
Disabling License Files .................................................................................................................................... 35
Downloading Disabled License Files ............................................................................................................... 38
Deleting Disabled License Files ....................................................................................................................... 41
Setting Authentication Information for MEAP Applications ............................................................................ 44
MEAP Application Settings
15
MEAP Application Settings
0XW7-007
MEAP applications are set from the [MEAP Application Management] and the [Install MEAP Application] menus.
Items shown in the [MEAP Application Management] menu
[Application Name] The name of the application is displayed.
[Installed on] The date on which the application was installed is displayed.
[Status] The status of the application is displayed.
●[Installed]:
MEAP Application Settings
16
The application has been installed, but not started.
Or, the printer was turned OFF after the application stopped, and after the printer was
restarted the application was not yet started.
●[Started]:
The application is running.
●[Stopped]:
The application is stopped.
●[Starting]:
The application is starting up.
●[Stopping]:
The application is closing down.
[License]
The license status of the application is displayed.
●[Installed]:
A valid license le has been installed.
●[Not Installed]:
The license le has been disabled.
●[Over Limit]:
The license le that is installed has an expiration date, and multiple types of counters
have been set. One or more of the counter values has exceeded the upper limits of the
counter.
●[Invalid]:
The installed license le has passed its expiration date.
Or, the current counter value has exceeded the upper limit of the license le.
*When upper limits have been set for multiple types of counters, the license will
become invalid at the point in time when any counter exceeds its upper limit.
●[Unnecessary]:
The application does not require a license le for startup.
[Resource Information]
The resources being used by the applications are displayed.
●[Storage]:
The amount of storage being used. It is shown in kilobyte units (KB).
●[Memory]:
The amount of memory being used. It is shown in kilobyte units (KB).
●[Threads]:
The number of threads.
●[Sockets]:
The number of sockets.
●[File Descriptors]:
The number of le descriptors.
NOTE
Timing of [Resource Information] Updates
[Resource Information] is updated at the following times.
Item Timing of Updates
[Storage] When the application is installed
or uninstalled
[Memory]
[Threads]
[Sockets]
When the application starts or
stops
MEAP Application Settings
17
Item Timing of Updates
[File Descriptors]
[Install MEAP Application] Menu Settings
[Install MEAP Application/License]
Install the MEAP application.
●[Install]:
Specify the application le and license le to be installed, and then click [Install] to
start the installation.
●[Application File Path]:
Specify the application le to be installed.
●[License File Path]:
Specify the license le.
See the following section for settings that use the [MEAP Application Management] and [Install MEAP
Application] menus.
Installing MEAP Applications(P. 19)
Uninstalling MEAP Applications(P. 23)
Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications(P. 25)
Checking the Details of MEAP Applications(P. 29)
MEAP Application License
Settings(P. 31)
Setting Authentication Information
for MEAP Applications(P. 44)
MEAP Application Settings
18
Installing MEAP Applications
0XW7-008
Before starting the following operation, see " Attention (Installing MEAP Applications)(P. 22) ."
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [Install MEAP Application].
3Set [Application File Path] and [License File Path].
Either select the le by clicking [Browse...], or enter the location where the le is stored.
MEAP Application Settings
19
[Application File Path] Specify a le with a "jar" extension.
[License File Path] Specify a le with a "lic" extension.
4Click [Install].
5Conrm the information on the install conrmation page, and then click [Yes].
When the [License Agreement] appears, conrm the information, and then click [I Accept].
→ The installation begins.
<Information Displayed on the Install Conrmation Page>
If you are installing a new application
[Application Information] Information about the application
[License Information] The expiration date of the application
If you are updating an application
[Application Information]
[Current Application Information] Information about the current application
[Application Information after Overwrite] Application information after overwrite
[License Information]
[Expires after] The expiration date of the targeted application
[Current Counter Usage Limit] Current counter information
[Counter Usage Limit after Overwrite] Counter information after overwrite
If the install is cancelled
MEAP Application Settings
20
If the shutdown process for the printer starts while an application is being installed, an error message
may be displayed on the [Install] page for SMS, and the installation cancelled. If this happens, install the
application again after restarting the printer by turning the main power switch OFF and then back ON
again.
6After the install is completed, click [To MEAP Application Management].
NOTE
When using the installed application
Start the application.
" Starting MEAP Applications(P. 26) "
MEAP Application Settings
21
Attention (Installing MEAP Applications)
0XW7-009
IMPORTANT
Installing Applications
●There may be other specic requirements for installation, depending on the application. For more
information, see the instruction manual provided with the application.
●You can install up to eight applications.
●You cannot install license les only. Specify both the application le and the license le.
To only add a license le for an application that is already installed, see " Adding License
Files(P. 32) ."
Obtaining License Files
●In order to install an application, a valid license le is required.
If you have a license access number in your application package, obtain a valid license le from
License Management System ( http://www.canon.com/lms/license/ ).
In order to obtain a license le,
a license access number and a
device serial number (the
number displayed on the upper
left of the SMS screen) are
required.
●If you do not have a license access number in your application package, it will be provided by the
dealer where you purchased the application. For more information, see the instruction manual
provided with the application.
Storage Area
"Storage" under resource information displayed on the [MEAP Application Management] page allows you
to conrm the maximum storage space that can be used by the application and the storage space
currently used by the application.
When you are updating an application
Stop the application before installing the new version.
" Stopping MEAP Applications(P. 27) "
MEAP Application Settings
22
Uninstalling MEAP Applications
0XW7-00A
IMPORTANT
If the license status is not "Not Installed"
Uninstall the application after disabling and deleting the license les.
" Disabling License Files(P. 35) "
" Deleting Disabled License Files(P. 41) "
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Management].
3Click [Uninstall] for the application to uninstall.
Applications with [Uninstall] grayed out cannot be deleted.
4Click [Yes].
→ The uninstall begins.
When the restart prompt message is displayed
Follow the on-screen instructions to restart the printer.
MEAP Application Settings
23
IMPORTANT
If <A package exported from this application cannot be used.> is displayed
and you uninstall the application that displayed this message, you may not be able to use other
applications.
MEAP Application Settings
24
Starting MEAP Applications
0XW7-00E
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Management].
3Click [Start] for the application to start.
If the application does not start
Check the following.
●The required license le has been installed
●There is sucient [Memory], [Threads], [Sockets] and [File Descriptors] under [Resource Information]
When the restart prompt message is displayed
Follow the on-screen instructions to restart the printer.
MEAP Application Settings
26
When the restart prompt message is displayed
Follow the on-screen instructions to restart the printer.
MEAP Application Settings
28
Checking the Details of MEAP Applications
0XW7-00H
Check the details of installed applications.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Management].
3Click the application to check the details.
→ [Application/License Information] is displayed on the screen.
MEAP Application Settings
29
MEAP Application License Settings
0XW7-00J
You can add, disable and delete license les for installed applications.
Adding License Files(P. 32)
Disabling License Files(P. 35)
Downloading Disabled License
Files(P. 38)
Deleting Disabled License
Files(P. 41)
IMPORTANT
Disabling Licenses
●You cannot disable a license le if the application is still running.
" Stopping MEAP Applications(P. 27) "
●When a disabled license le is generated, the status of that license le becomes <Not Installed> and
the application becomes unusable.
Downloading and Deleting Licenses
●You can only download or delete disabled license les.
●Some license les need to be downloaded after they have been disabled.
●Once you have deleted the disabled license le, you cannot download it from the printer again. We
recommend downloading and backing it up before deleting it.
Reinstalling License Files
You can reinstall disabled or downloaded license les in the same printer.
MEAP Application Settings
31
Adding License Files
0XW7-00K
You can install license les for applications that are already installed.
You can also increase counter values and extend terms of validity by adding license les.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Management].
3Click the name of the application to which a license le will be added.
MEAP Application Settings
32
4Click [License Management].
5Specify the license le.
(1) Click [Browse], and then select the license le to be added.
MEAP Application Settings
33
(2) Click [Install].
6Conrm the information on the install conrmation page, and then click [Yes].
→The license le is installed.
If you are adding a license le to an [Over Limit] or [Invalid] application
you may need to restart the application.
" Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications(P. 25) "
MEAP Application Settings
34
Disabling License Files
0XW7-00L
After you disable a license le, you can download and save it to a computer or delete it.
IMPORTANT
Disabling Licenses
●You cannot disable a license le if the application is still running.
" Stopping MEAP Applications(P. 27) "
●When a disabled license le is generated, the status of that license le becomes <Not Installed> and
the application becomes unusable.
Reinstalling License Files
You can reinstall disabled license les in the same printer.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Management].
3Click the name of the application for which to disable to license le.
MEAP Application Settings
35
4Click [License Management].
5Click [Disable].
MEAP Application Settings
36
6Click [Yes].
→ The license le is disabled.
MEAP Application Settings
37
Downloading Disabled License Files
0XW7-00R
Download and back up disabled license les to the computer.
IMPORTANT
Downloading Licenses
●You can only download disabled license les.
●Some license les need to be downloaded after they have been disabled.
Reinstalling License Files
You can reinstall downloaded and disabled license les in the same printer.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Management].
3Click the name of the application for which to download to license le.
MEAP Application Settings
38
4Click [License Management].
5Click [Download].
MEAP Application Settings
39
6Follow the on-screen instructions and specify a le storage directory.
→ The license le is saved.
MEAP Application Settings
40
Deleting Disabled License Files
0XW7-00S
To uninstall an application, you must rst delete the license le.
IMPORTANT
Deleting Licenses
●You can only delete disabled license les.
●Once you have deleted the disabled license le, you cannot download it again. We recommend
downloading and backing it up before deleting it.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Management].
3Click the name of the application to which to delete a license le.
MEAP Application Settings
41
4Click [License Management].
5Click [Delete].
MEAP Application Settings
42
6Click [Yes].
→ The license le is deleted.
MEAP Application Settings
43
Setting Authentication Information for MEAP
Applications
0XW7-00U
When processing jobs from applications that do not require operation from the printer, you must rst set the
authentication information.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Management].
3Click the name of the application for which to set authentication information.
MEAP Application Settings
44
4Click [Authentication Information Settings].
5Enter the authentication information.
MEAP Application Settings
45
If you use department ID management
Enter the department ID and password in the elds marked [Department ID] and [PIN].
If you do not use department ID management
Enter an arbitrary ID and password in the elds marked [Department ID] and [PIN].
6Click [Update].
→ Authentication information is set.
IMPORTANT
MEAP Application Settings
46
When cancelling authentication information
Click [Delete].
MEAP Application Settings
47
System Settings
System Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 49
Changing the MEAP Applet Display Order ......................................................................................................... 50
Checking Login Services ...................................................................................................................................... 52
Setting Enhanced System Applications .............................................................................................................. 54
Starting/Stopping Enhanced System Applications .......................................................................................... 55
Starting Enhanced System Applications ................................................................................................... 56
Stopping Enhanced System Applications ................................................................................................. 57
Installing Enhanced System Applications ........................................................................................................ 58
Uninstalling Enhanced System Applications ................................................................................................... 61
Checking Information ......................................................................................................................................... 62
Checking System Information ........................................................................................................................ 63
Checking Application Information .................................................................................................................. 65
Checking License Files .................................................................................................................................... 66
Changing the SMS Password ............................................................................................................................... 67
Deleting the MEAP Application Setting Information ........................................................................................ 69
Managing MEAP Application Log Data ............................................................................................................... 71
Downloading Log Data ................................................................................................................................... 72
Deleting Log Data ........................................................................................................................................... 74
System Settings
48
System Settings
0XW7-00W
The [System Management] menu contains the following items.
[Panel Display Order Settings] It sets the order MEAP applets are displayed on the operation panel.
" Changing the MEAP Applet Display Order(P. 50) "
[Enhanced System Application
Management]
It displays enhanced system application status and performs settings. You can
also set log in service settings.
" Setting Enhanced System Applications(P. 54) "
[System Application Management] It displays system application status and performs start/stop operations.
[System Information] It displays versions and system application information, etc.
" Checking System Information(P. 63) "
[MEAP Application Information] It displays the details about MEAP applications.
" Checking Application Information(P. 65) "
[Check License] It checks the content of the license le before it is installed.
" Checking License Files(P. 66) "
[Change Password] It changes the SMS log in password.
" Changing the SMS Password(P. 67) "
[MEAP Application Setting
Information Management]
It deletes the details about MEAP applications.
" Deleting the MEAP Application Setting Information(P. 69) "
[MEAP Application Log Management] It downloads and deletes log data obtained by MEAP applications.
" Managing MEAP Application Log Data(P. 71) "
System Settings
49
Changing the MEAP Applet Display Order
0XW7-00X
The applet display order changes when you press [Application] key on the control panel.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [Panel Display Order Settings].
3Select the check boxes for the applets whose display order you wish to change.
System Settings
50
4The display order changes.
(1) Move the applets up and down by clicking [Up] and [Down].
(2) Click [Update].
System Settings
51
System Settings
53
Setting Enhanced System Applications
0XW7-010
They perform the operations of the enhanced system applications that enhance the system applications (the
basic applications that make up the MEAP system).
Starting/Stopping Enhanced System Applications(P. 55)
Starting Enhanced System Applications(P. 56)
Stopping Enhanced System Applications(P. 57)
Installing Enhanced System Applications(P. 58)
Uninstalling Enhanced System Applications(P. 61)
System Settings
54
Starting Enhanced System Applications
0XW7-012
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [Enhanced System Application Management].
3Click [Start] for Other System Applications, and then start the application.
When the [License Agreement] appears, conrm the information, and then click [I Accept].
System Settings
56
Installing Enhanced System Applications
0XW7-014
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [Enhanced System Application Management].
3Set [Enhanced System Application File Path] and [License File Path].
Either select the le by clicking [Browse...], or enter the location where the le is stored.
System Settings
58
[Enhanced System Application File Path] Specify a le with a "jar" extension.
[License File Path] Specify a le with a "lic" extension.
IMPORTANT
When specifying a le
Specify both the application le and the license le.
4Click [Install].
System Settings
59
5Conrm the information on the install conrmation page, and then click [Yes].
When the [License Agreement] appears, conrm the information, and then click [I Accept].
→ The installation begins.
System Settings
60
Uninstalling Enhanced System Applications
0XW7-015
NOTE
Deleting License Files
There is no need to delete license les before uninstalling enhanced system applications.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [Enhanced System Application Management].
3Click [Uninstall] for the application to uninstall.
Applications with [Uninstall] grayed out cannot be deleted.
4Click [Yes].
→ The uninstall begins.
System Settings
61
Checking System Information
0XW7-017
You can check the version information of platforms such as Java virtual machine and version information, date
of installation and status of system applications.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [System Information].
Click [Display Details] to check detailed information.
System Settings
63
System Settings
64
Checking Application Information
0XW7-018
You can check the information about installed or uninstalled applications (except for system applications).
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Information].
3Information about applications is displayed.
(1) Select [Installed] or [Uninstalled].
(2) Click [Switch].
[Installed] Information about installed applications (except for system applications) is displayed.
[Uninstalled] Information about uninstalled applications (except for system applications) is displayed.
System Settings
65
Checking License Files
0XW7-019
You can check the content of the license le before it is installed.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [Check License].
3Either select the le by clicking [Browse], or enter the location where the le is stored.
4Click [Check].
→ The content of the license le is displayed.
System Settings
66
Changing the SMS Password
0XW7-01A
IMPORTANT
SMS Password
●To prevent unauthorized access, we recommend that the administrator change the password before
SMS use is begun.
●This password is to prevent unauthorized operation of the printer. Do not let anyone know except the
administrator.
●Make sure that you do not forget your password. If you forget your password, you will not be able to
use SMS. If this happens, contact your local dealer.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [Change Password].
3Set the password.
(1) Set the password.
(2) Click [Change].
Enter between 8 and 32 alphanumeric characters (a to z, A to Z, and 0 to 9) for the password.
[Old Password] Enter the password that is currently used.
[New Password] Enter the new password.
System Settings
67
[Conrm] Enter the same password again in [New Password].
System Settings
68
Deleting the MEAP Application Setting Information
0XW7-01C
Deletes the application data.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Setting Information Management].
3Select the check box for the application whose setting information you wish to delete,
and then click [Delete].
Click [Select All] to select all of the applications.
System Settings
69
4Click [Yes].
→ The setting information of the application is deleted.
System Settings
70
4Follow the on-screen instructions and specify a le storage directory.
→ The log le is saved.
System Settings
73
4Click [Yes].
→ The log data is deleted.
System Settings
75
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
List of Error Messages (MEAP) .................................................................................................................. 77
Errors Relating to the [Login] Page .................................................................................................................... 79
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Management] Page ......................................................................... 81
Errors Relating to the [Install MEAP Application] Page ..................................................................................... 83
Errors Relating to the [Authentication Information Settings] Page ................................................................ 88
Errors Relating to the [License Management] Page .......................................................................................... 89
Errors Relating to the [Enhanced System Application Management] Page ..................................................... 91
Errors Relating to the [Check License] and [Change Password] Pages ............................................................. 97
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Setting Information Management] Page ...................................... 99
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Log Management] Page ................................................................ 100
Other Errors ....................................................................................................................................................... 101
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
76
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
0XW7-01J
This section describes how to handle error messages that are displayed when logging in to or operating SMS.
The error messages are divided into separate pages. Click the following links and perform the necessary
actions.
Errors Relating to the [Login]
Page(P. 79)
Errors Relating to the [MEAP
Application Management] Page(P. 81)
Errors Relating to the [Install MEAP
Application] Page(P. 83)
Errors Relating to the
[Authentication Information Settings]
Page(P. 88)
Errors Relating to the [License
Management] Page(P. 89)
Errors Relating to the [Enhanced
System Application Management]
Page(P. 91)
Errors Relating to the [Check
License] and [Change Password]
Pages(P. 97)
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
77
Errors Relating to the [Login] Page
0XW7-01K
●< The specied le does not exist or the le path is
incorrect. Try to specify the path again.(P. 79) >
●< The contents of the specied le are incorrect or
information is missing. Check the le.(P. 79) >
●< The specied switch license le cannot be used for
password initialization. Try to specify the le again.
(P. 79) >
●< Cannot initialize password because a used switch
license le is specied. Try to specify the le again.
(P. 79) >
●< Cannot initialize the password because another
application is being installed, or the rmware being
updated. Please wait a moment and then try again.(P. 79)
>
●< You do not have permissions to use Service Management
Service. Log in with administrator rights.(P. 80) >
●< Cannot login because another user is logged in or logout
operations have not been successfully performed. Please
wait a moment and then try this operation again.(P. 80) >
●< Error: <Error Details>(P. 80) >
The specied le does not exist or the le path is incorrect. Try to specify the path
again.
Problem The le does not exist on the specied path or the le path is incorrect.
Action Specify the le path correctly.
The contents of the specied le are incorrect or information is missing. Check the le.
Problem The specied le is not a switch license le.
Action Check to make sure that the specied le is a switch license le for password initialization.
Problem Information is missing from the specied le.
Action The password cannot be initialized using the specied le. Check the content of the le.
The specied switch license le cannot be used for password initialization. Try to
specify the le again.
Problem The specied le is not a switch license le for initializing the password.
Action Specify a switch license le for initializing the password.
Cannot initialize password because a used switch license le is specied. Try to specify
the le again.
Problem The specied license le has already been installed. License les that have been installed once cannot be
installed again.
Action Since the specied license le cannot be installed, specify another le.
Cannot initialize the password because another application is being installed, or the
rmware being updated.
Please wait a moment and then try again.
Problem Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or it cannot initialize the password because the
rmware is being updated.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
79
Action Wait until the processing stops before initializing the password.
You do not have permissions to use Service Management Service. Log in with
administrator rights.
Problem Only users with administrator rights can log in to SMS with the user name and password that they use for
logging in to the printer. The user trying to log in cannot do so because they do not have administrator
rights.
Action Log in again with the user name and password of a user with administrator rights.
Cannot login because another user is logged in or logout operations have not been
successfully performed. Please wait a moment and then try this operation again.
Problem Cannot log in for a period of time because either another user is logged in or when the user was logged in
before, the logout procedure was not performed properly.
Action If another user is logged in, wait until the user logs out. If another user is not logged in, wait for the lock
to be cancelled.
Error: <Error Details>
Problem An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details.
Action If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
80
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Management]
Page
0XW7-01L
●< Cannot start this application because there is no
distributable software in the application. Get a distributable
software.(P. 81) >
●< Cannot start this application because the number of
bootable applets has exceeded the limit. Start this application
after stopping other applications.(P. 81) >
●< A license is needed to start this application. Try to start it
again after installing a license.(P. 81) >
●< Cannot start this application because system resources
(memory, threads, sockets, le descriptors, disk space, or
screen size) required to start the application may not be
available. <Resources>(P. 81) >
●< Cannot uninstall this application because the
license le has not been deleted. Uninstall the
application after deleting the license in the [License
Management] page.(P. 82) >
●< The name listed in the le for the application and
the applet name to register with Applet Viewer
Service are different. Check the le.(P. 82) >
●< Cannot start this application because application
setting information is being processed. Please wait a
moment and then try again.(P. 82) >
●< Error: <Error Details>(P. 82) >
Cannot start this application because there is no distributable software in the
application. Get a distributable software.
Problem The application cannot be started because it does not contain any redistributable modules.
Action Contact the application developer.
Cannot start this application because the number of bootable applets has exceeded the
limit. Start this application after stopping other applications.
Problem The application that you are attempting to launch contains applets. If the application was launched, the
number of applets that would be booted on the system would exceed the limit (ve applets), so the
application cannot be launched.
Action First, reduce the number of applets running on the system by stopping an application running on the
system which includes an applet, and then restart the application.
A license is needed to start this application. Try to start it again after installing a
license.
Problem Cannot start the application because a license le is not installed.
Action Install the license le, and then restart the application.
Cannot start this application because system resources (memory, threads, sockets, le
descriptors, disk space, or screen size) required to start the application may not be
available. <Resources>
Problem The application cannot be started because the system resources for opening the application may not be
available to be allocated.
Action Restart this application after stopping other applications. It may be able to start this time.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
81
Cannot uninstall this application because the license le has not been deleted.
Uninstall the application after deleting the license in the [License Management] page.
Problem The application cannot be uninstalled because the license le for the application still exists inside the
printer.
Action Uninstall the application after deleting the license on the [License Management] page.
The name listed in the le for the application and the applet name to register with
Applet Viewer Service are different. Check the le.
Problem The application cannot be started because the applet name the application is trying to register in the
Applet Viewer Service differs from the applet name included in the application le.
Action Since it is necessary to make corrections to the application le, contact the application developer.
Cannot start this application because application setting information is being
processed. Please wait a moment and then try again.
Problem The application cannot be started because application data is being deleted.
Action After deletion of application data completes, launch the application again.
Error: <Error Details>
Problem An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details.
Action If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
82
Errors Relating to the [Install MEAP Application] Page
0XW7-01R
●< The le for the application to install does not exist or the
le path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.(P. 83) >
●< The le for the license to install does not exist or the le
path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.(P. 83) >
●< The manifest is not listed in the specied le. Check the
le.(P. 84) >
●< The contents of the le for the application to install are
incorrect or information is missing. Check the le.(P. 84) >
●< The contents of the le for the license to install are
incorrect or information is missing. Check the le.(P. 84) >
●< The following information is missing in le for the
specied application. Check the le. <Missing
information>(P. 84) >
●< The following information in the specied application is
incorrect. Check the le. <Inaccurate information>(P. 84) >
●< Cannot install this application because a code signing has
not been conrmed to be valid. Get a valid code signing.
(P. 84) >
●< Cannot install this license because the specied
application and license do not correspond. Try to specify a
path for the license le again.(P. 85) >
●< The number of applications that can be installed has
exceeded the limit. Try to install this application after
uninstalling other applications.(P. 85) >
●< Cannot install this license because the number of license
le ID logs that can be saved has exceeded the limit. Contact
your service representative.(P. 85) >
●< Cannot install because a used license le is specied. Try
to specify the le again.(P. 85) >
●< To install the specied application, a license le must be
installed at the same time. Specify a license le.(P. 85) >
●< The specied le is a system application. Install the
application from the [Enhanced System Application
Management] page.(P. 85) >
●< The specied application does not require a license.
(P. 85) >
●< The specied license does not match this device.
Specify an installable license.(P. 86) >
●< The specied application does not support this
device.(P. 86) >
●< Cannot install this application because an applet
included in the specied application has exceeded the
area that can be displayed in the device panel.(P. 86) >
●< The specied le is an update le. Stop the
application that you want update and then install the
le.(P. 86) >
●< Cannot install the application because the license
requirement is different. Uninstall the specied
application, and then try to install the application
again.(P. 86) >
●< Cannot install this application because storage space
has been exceeded. Uninstall other applications and
then try to install it again.(P. 86) >
●< Could not cancel installation. Installation has been
successfully completed.(P. 86) >
●< This application does not support the MEAP version of
the device. Contact your service representative after
checking the application version.(P. 87) >
●< The specied application cannot be installed on this
device.(P. 87) >
●< The process is canceled because the system has been
shut down. Restart the system, and then perform the
process again.(P. 87) >
●< Cannot install the application or license because
another application is being installed, or the rmware
being updated. Please wait a moment and then try
again.(P. 87) >
●< Error: <Error Details>(P. 87) >
The le for the application to install does not exist or the le path is incorrect. Try to
specify the path again.
Problem The specied le does not exist or the le path is incorrect.
Action Specify the le path correctly.
The le for the license to install does not exist or the le path is incorrect. Try to specify
the path again.
Problem The license le does not exist on the specied path or the le path is incorrect.
Action Specify the le path correctly.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
83
The manifest is not listed in the specied le. Check the le.
Problem A manifest does not exist for the le specied as the application le.
Action This application cannot be installed. Contact the application developer.
The contents of the le for the application to install are incorrect or information is
missing. Check the le.
Problem Either the content of the les specied as application les is not correct or information is missing.
Action This application le cannot be installed. Check the le. If there are no problems with the les, contact the
application developer or the application support help desk.
The contents of the le for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing.
Check the le.
Problem Either the content of the les specied as license les is not correct or information is missing.
Action This license le cannot be installed. Check the le. If there are no problems with the les, contact the
application developer or the application support help desk.
The following information is missing in le for the specied application. Check the le.
<Missing information>
Problem The application cannot be installed because required information is not included in the application le.
Action Check the le. If there are no problems with the les, contact the application developer or the application
support help desk concerning the <Missing Information>.
The following information in the specied application is incorrect. Check the le.
<Inaccurate information>
Problem 1 <Inaccurate information> in the application le cannot be recognized as correct information.
Action Contact the application developer or the application support help desk.
Problem 2 If the <Inaccurate information> is the MEAP Specications, the application's MEAP specication values and
the printer's MEAP specication values do not match.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
Cannot install this application because a code signing has not been conrmed to be
valid. Get a valid code signing.
Problem 1 Cannot conrm that there is a valid code signature inside the application le.
Action Perform the correct code signing operation for the application.
Problem 2 The le may have been altered.
Action Contact the application developer.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
84
Cannot install this license because the specied application and license do not
correspond. Try to specify a path for the license le again.
Problem The application cannot be installed because the specied license le does not correspond to the specied
application.
Action Specify the license le that corresponds to the application.
The number of applications that can be installed has exceeded the limit. Try to install
this application after uninstalling other applications.
Problem The maximum number of applications that can be installed is eight. You are attempting to install an
application that will exceed that number.
Action You can install it if you rst uninstall another installed application (unless it is a system application).
Cannot install this license because the number of license le ID logs that can be saved
has exceeded the limit. Contact your service representative.
Problem The license le cannot be installed because the number of license le ID information logs contained in the
license le exceeds the number that can be saved.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
Cannot install because a used license le is specied. Try to specify the le again.
Problem License les that have been installed once cannot be installed again. The specied license le has already
been installed.
Action Since the specied license le cannot be installed, specify another le.
To install the specied application, a license le must be installed at the same time.
Specify a license le.
Problem You cannot install the application unless you specify the license le that corresponds to the application at
the same time.
Action Specify the corresponding license le when specifying the application, and then install them.
The specied le is a system application. Install the application from the [Enhanced
System Application Management] page.
Problem The specied le is a system application. It cannot be installed from this [Install MEAP Application] page.
Action Install it from the [Enhanced System Application Management] page.
The specied application does not require a license.
Problem An application le and license le were specied, but the specied application le does not require a
license le.
Action Install the application without specifying a license le.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
85
The specied license does not match this device. Specify an installable license.
Problem License les contain the serial number information of printers in which the license le can be installed.
The specied license cannot be installed because it does not contain the printer's serial number
information.
Action Specify a license le that matches the printer's serial number.
The specied application does not support this device.
Problem Some applications can only be installed in certain printer models. It cannot be installed in this model.
Action Specify an application that supports this printer.
Cannot install this application because an applet included in the specied application
has exceeded the area that can be displayed in the device panel.
Problem The application cannot be installed because the display area of an applet included in the application
exceeds the area that can be displayed on the operation panel of the printer.
Action Install an application that contains applets that support this printer.
The specied le is an update le. Stop the application that you want update and then
install the le.
Problem The specied application le is a le for updating an application which is already installed. It is necessary
to stop the application which is to be updated before updating.
Action Stop the application that you want to update, and then perform the update again.
Cannot install the application because the license requirement is different. Uninstall
the specied application, and then try to install the application again.
Problem You have tried to upgrade an application which is already installed using a version of the same application
with different license requirements.
Action Upgrade using the same license conditions.
Cannot install this application because storage space has been exceeded. Uninstall
other applications and then try to install it again.
Problem The application cannot be installed because there is not enough free storage capacity.
Action Make storage capacity available by uninstalling an application that is not being used.
Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed.
Problem The [Cancel] button was pressed when the installation operation could not be cancelled.
Action Disable the license le, download it from the [License Management] page, and then uninstall it.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
86
This application does not support the MEAP version of the device. Contact your service
representative after checking the application version.
Problem The specied application cannot be installed because it does not support the MEAP version on this printer.
Action Contact the application developer.
The specied application cannot be installed on this device.
Problem The specied application cannot be installed because there is not enough memory in the printer.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
The process is canceled because the system has been shut down. Restart the system,
and then perform the process again.
Problem The installation could not be completed because it conicted with a system shutdown.
Action Restart the printer and perform the install again.
Cannot install the application or license because another application is being installed,
or the rmware being updated. Please wait a moment and then try again.
Problem Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or the application cannot be installed because
the rmware has been updated.
Action Wait until the processing stops before installing the application.
Error: <Error Details>
Problem An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details.
Action If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
87
Errors Relating to the [Authentication Information
Settings] Page
0XW7-01S
●< Settings are incorrect.(P. 88) >
●< The [Department ID] is incorrect. Enter an integer for the
[Department ID].(P. 88) >
●< The [Department ID] is not entered.(P. 88) >
●< Could not set authentication information because
an error occurred.(P. 88) >
●< Could not delete authentication information
because an error occurred.(P. 88) >
Settings are incorrect.
●Check to see if the password is incorrect.
●Enter Dept. ID within 7 digits.
●Check to see if the Department. ID is registered with the device.
Problem Cannot set authentication information because either the Dept. ID entered does not exist, or the PIN was
entered incorrectly.
Action Enter a Dept. ID and PIN that are registered in the printer.
The [Department ID] is incorrect.
Enter an integer for the [Department ID].
Problem The Dept. ID that was entered is a positive integer, but the registered Dept. ID is not a positive integer.
Action Enter the correct Dept. ID that is registered in the device.
The [Department ID] is not entered.
Problem The Dept. ID is blank.
Action Specify a Dept. ID.
Could not set authentication information because an error occurred.
Problem An error has occurred for some reason, so authentication information could not be set.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
Could not delete authentication information because an error occurred.
Problem An error has occurred for some reason, so authentication information could not be deleted.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
88
Errors Relating to the [License Management] Page
0XW7-01U
●< The specied le does not exist or the le path is incorrect. Try
to specify the path again.(P. 89) >
●< The contents of the le for the license to install are incorrect
or information is missing. Check the le.(P. 89) >
●< Cannot install this license because the specied license does
not correspond to this application. Try to specify a path for the
license le again.(P. 89) >
●< Cannot install this license because the number of license le
ID logs that can be saved has exceeded the limit. Contact your
service representative.(P. 89) >
●< Cannot install because a used license le is specied. Try to
specify the le again.(P. 89) >
●< The specied license does not match this device.
Specify an installable license.(P. 90) >
●< Could not cancel installation. Installation has
been successfully completed.(P. 90) >
●< Cannot install the license because another
application is being installed, or the rmware
being updated. Please wait a moment and then try
again.(P. 90) >
●< Cannot disable the license le because this
application has been started. Disable the license
le after stopping the application.(P. 90) >
●< Error: <Error Details>(P. 90) >
The specied le does not exist or the le path is incorrect. Try to specify the path
again.
Problem The le does not exist on the specied path or the le path is incorrect.
Action Specify the le path correctly.
The contents of the le for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing.
Check the le.
Problem Either the content of the le is not correct or information is missing.
Action This license le cannot be installed. Contact the application developer.
Cannot install this license because the specied license does not correspond to this
application. Try to specify a path for the license le again.
Problem The specied license le does not correspond to the application, so they cannot be installed.
Action Specify the license le that corresponds to the application.
Check to make sure that the manifest le listed inside the license le is correct.
Cannot install this license because the number of license le ID logs that can be saved
has exceeded the limit. Contact your service representative.
Problem The license le cannot be installed because the number of license le ID information logs contained in the
license le exceeds the number that can be saved.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
Cannot install because a used license le is specied. Try to specify the le again.
Problem According to the specications, a license le which is already installed cannot be installed again. The
specied license le has already been installed.
Action Since the specied license le cannot be installed, specify another le.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
89
The specied license does not match this device. Specify an installable license.
Problem License les contain lists of printers in which they can be installed. The specied license le cannot be
installed in this printer.
Action Specify a license le that can be installed in this printer.
Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed.
Problem The [Cancel] button was pressed when the installation operation could not be cancelled.
Action Disable the license le, download it from the [License Management] page, and then uninstall it.
Cannot install the license because another application is being installed, or the
rmware being updated.
Please wait a moment and then try again.
Problem Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or the license le cannot be installed because
the rmware has been updated.
Action Wait until the processing stops before installing the license le.
Cannot disable the license le because this application has been started. Disable the
license le after stopping the application.
Problem You cannot disable a license if the corresponding application is still running.
Action Stop the application that corresponds to the license before disabling the license.
Error: <Error Details>
Problem An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details.
Action If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact the application developer.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
90
Errors Relating to the [Enhanced System Application
Management] Page
0XW7-01W
●< Cannot start this application because there is no
distributable software in the application. Get a
distributable software.(P. 92) >
●< Cannot start this application because the number of
bootable applets has exceeded the limit. Start this
application after stopping other applications.(P. 92) >
●< Cannot start this application because system resources
(memory, threads, sockets, le descriptors, disk space, or
screen size) required to start the application may not be
available. <Resources>(P. 92) >
●< The name listed in the le for the application and the
applet name to register with Applet Viewer Service are
different. Check the le.(P. 92) >
●< The following login services cannot be uninstalled:
(P. 92)
- The currently set login service
- Login services that will be enabled after the device is
restarted
- Default Authentication login services
The currently set login service can be uninstalled after the
device is restarted.>
●< The le for the application to install does not exist or
the le path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.
(P. 92) >
●< The manifest is not listed in the specied le. Check the
le.(P. 93) >
●< The le for the license to install does not exist or the le
path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.(P. 93) >
●< The contents of the le for the application to install are
incorrect or information is missing. Check the le.(P. 93)
>
●< The contents of the le for the license to install are
incorrect or information is missing. Check the le.(P. 93)
>
●< Cannot install this application because a code signing
has not been conrmed to be valid. Get a valid code
signing.(P. 93) >
●< Cannot install this license because the specied
application and license do not correspond. Try to specify
a path for the license le again.(P. 93) >
●< The specied le is not system application. Check the
le.(P. 93) >
●< Cannot install this license because the number of
license le ID logs that can be saved has exceeded the
limit. Contact your service representative.(P. 94) >
●< Cannot install because a used license le is specied.
Try to specify the le again.(P. 94) >
●< To install the specied application, a license le must be
installed at the same time. Specify a license le.(P. 94) >
●< The following information in the specied application is
incorrect. Check the le. <Inaccurate information>(P. 94)
>
●< The following information is missing in le for the
specied application. Check the le. <Missing
information>(P. 94) >
●< The specied application does not support this device.
(P. 94) >
●< The specied license does not match this device. Specify
an installable license.(P. 94) >
●< Cannot install this application because an applet
included in the specied application has exceeded the
area that can be displayed in the device panel.(P. 95) >
●< The specied le is an update le. Stop the application
that you want update and then install the le.(P. 95) >
●< The specied le is an update le for a login service that
is currently set. Switch to another login service, restart
the device, and then install the le.(P. 95) >
●< Cannot install this application because storage space
has been exceeded. Uninstall other applications and then
try to install it again.(P. 95) >
●< Could not cancel installation. Installation has been
successfully completed.(P. 95) >
●< The process is canceled because the system has been
shut down. Restart the system, and then perform the
process again.(P. 95) >
●< Cannot install the application or license because
another application is being installed, or the rmware
being updated. Please wait a moment and then try again.
(P. 95) >
●< Error: <Error Details>(P. 96) >
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
91
Cannot start this application because there is no distributable software in the
application. Get a distributable software.
Problem The application cannot be started because it does not contain any redistributable modules.
Action Contact the application developer.
Cannot start this application because the number of bootable applets has exceeded the
limit. Start this application after stopping other applications.
Problem The application that you are attempting to launch contains applets. If the application was launched, the
number of applets that would be booted on the system would exceed the limit (ve applets), so the
application cannot be launched.
Action First, reduce the number of applets running on the system by stopping an application running on the
system which includes an applet, and then restart the application.
Cannot start this application because system resources (memory, threads, sockets, le
descriptors, disk space, or screen size) required to start the application may not be
available. <Resources>
Problem The application cannot be started because the system resources for opening the application may not be
available to be allocated.
Action Restart this application after stopping other applications. It may be able to start this time.
The name listed in the le for the application and the applet name to register with
Applet Viewer Service are different. Check the le.
Problem The application cannot be started because the applet name the application is trying to register in the
Applet Viewer Service differs from the applet name included in the application le.
Action Since it is necessary to make corrections to the application le, contact the application developer.
The following login services cannot be uninstalled:
- The currently set login service
- Login services that will be enabled after the device is restarted
- Default Authentication login services
The currently set login service can be uninstalled after the device is restarted.
Problem The currently set login service, a login service that will be enabled after restarting the machine, and the
Default Authentication login service cannot be uninstalled.
Action Do not uninstall the currently set login service, a login service that will be enabled after restarting the
machine, or the Default Authentication login service. To uninstall the currently set login service, uninstall it
after restarting the machine.
The le for the application to install does not exist or the le path is incorrect. Try to
specify the path again.
Problem The specied le does not exist or the le path is incorrect.
Action Specify the le path correctly.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
92
The manifest is not listed in the specied le. Check the le.
Problem A manifest does not exist for the le specied as the application le.
Action This application cannot be installed. Contact the application developer.
The le for the license to install does not exist or the le path is incorrect. Try to specify
the path again.
Problem The specied le does not exist or the le path is incorrect.
Action Specify the le path correctly.
The contents of the le for the application to install are incorrect or information is
missing. Check the le.
Problem Either the content of the les specied as application les is not correct or information is missing.
Action This application le cannot be installed. Check the le. If there are no problems with the les, contact the
application developer or the application support help desk.
The contents of the le for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing.
Check the le.
Problem Either the content of the les specied as license les is not correct or information is missing.
Action This license le cannot be installed. Check the le. If there are no problems with the les, contact the
application developer or the application support help desk.
Cannot install this application because a code signing has not been conrmed to be
valid. Get a valid code signing.
Problem 1 Cannot conrm that there is a valid code signature inside the application le.
Action Perform the correct code signing operation for the application.
Problem 2 The le may have been altered.
Action Contact the application developer.
Cannot install this license because the specied application and license do not
correspond. Try to specify a path for the license le again.
Problem The application cannot be installed because the specied license le does not correspond to the specied
application.
Action Specify the license le that corresponds to the application.
The specied le is not system application. Check the le.
Problem The specied le is not system application. It cannot be installed from the [Enhanced System Application
Management] page.
Action Install it from the [Install MEAP Application] page.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
93
Cannot install this license because the number of license le ID logs that can be saved
has exceeded the limit. Contact your service representative.
Problem The license le cannot be installed because the number of license le ID information logs contained in the
license le exceeds the number that can be saved.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
Cannot install because a used license le is specied. Try to specify the le again.
Problem License les that have been installed once cannot be installed again. The specied license le has already
been installed.
Action Since the specied license le cannot be installed, specify another le.
To install the specied application, a license le must be installed at the same time.
Specify a license le.
Problem You cannot install the application unless you specify the license le that corresponds to the application at
the same time.
Action Specify the corresponding license le when specifying the application, and then install them.
The following information in the specied application is incorrect. Check the le.
<Inaccurate information>
Problem 1 <Inaccurate information> in the application le cannot be recognized as correct information.
Action Contact the application developer or the application support help desk.
Problem 2 If the <Inaccurate information> is the MEAP Specications, the application's MEAP specication values and
the printer's MEAP specication values do not match.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
The following information is missing in le for the specied application. Check the le.
<Missing information>
Problem The application cannot be installed because required information is not included in the application.
Action Check the le. If there are no problems with the les, contact the application developer or the application
support help desk concerning the <Missing Information>.
The specied application does not support this device.
Problem Some applications can only be installed in certain printer models. It cannot be installed in this model.
Action Specify an application that supports this printer.
The specied license does not match this device. Specify an installable license.
Problem License les contain the serial number information of printers in which the license le can be installed.
The specied license cannot be installed because it does not contain the printer's serial number
information.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
94
Action Specify a license le that matches the serial number of this printer.
Cannot install this application because an applet included in the specied application
has exceeded the area that can be displayed in the device panel.
Problem The application cannot be installed because the display area of an applet included in the application
exceeds the area that can be displayed on the operation panel of the printer.
Action Install an application that contains applets that support this printer.
The specied le is an update le. Stop the application that you want update and then
install the le.
Problem The specied application le is a le for updating an application which is already installed. It is necessary
to stop the application which is to be updated before updating.
Action Stop the application that you want to update, and then perform the update again.
The specied le is an update le for a login service that is currently set. Switch to
another login service, restart the device, and then install the le.
Problem Although the specied application le is an update le for the login service that is currently set, it cannot
update a login service that has already started.
Action To install the update le for the login service, start another login service, and then install the update le.
Cannot install this application because storage space has been exceeded. Uninstall
other applications and then try to install it again.
Problem The application cannot be installed because there is not enough free storage capacity.
Action Make storage capacity available by uninstalling an application that is not being used.
Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed.
Problem The [Cancel] button was pressed when the installation operation could not be cancelled.
Action Disable the license le, download it from the [License Management] page, and then uninstall it.
The process is canceled because the system has been shut down. Restart the system,
and then perform the process again.
Problem The installation could not be completed because it conicted with a system shutdown.
Action Restart the printer and perform the install again.
Cannot install the application or license because another application is being installed,
or the rmware being updated. Please wait a moment and then try again.
Problem Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or the application cannot be installed because
the rmware has been updated.
Action Wait until the processing stops before installing the application.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
95
Error: <Error Details>
Problem An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details.
Action If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
96
Errors Relating to the [Check License] and [Change
Password] Pages
0XW7-01X
●< The specied le does not exist or the le path is incorrect. Try to
specify the path again.(P. 97) >
●< The contents of the specied le are incorrect or information is missing.
Check the le.(P. 97) >
●< The specied switch license le cannot be used to delete the license le
ID log. Try to specify the path again.(P. 97) >
●< The specied license is already installed. Installed license le
information cannot be displayed.(P. 97) >
●< Cannot perform the operation because another application is being
installed, or the rmware being updated. Please wait a moment and then
try again.(P. 97) >
●< The old password is incorrect.(P. 98) >
●< The new password is incorrect. Enter the
password with 8 to 32 single-byte
alphanumeric characters.(P. 98) >
●< The new password and password to
conrm do not match.(P. 98) >
●< Error: <Error Details>(P. 98) >
The specied le does not exist or the le path is incorrect. Try to specify the path
again.
Problem The le does not exist on the specied path or the le path is incorrect.
Action Specify the le path correctly.
The contents of the specied le are incorrect or information is missing. Check the le.
Problem 1 The content of the le is not correct. (A le other than a license le was specied.)
Action Check to make sure that the specied le is a license le.
Problem 2 Information is missing from the le.
Action Check the content of the le.
The specied switch license le cannot be used to delete the license le ID log. Try to
specify the path again.
Problem The specied le is not a switch license le for deleting license le ID logs.
Action Try specifying the le path for the switch license for deleting license le ID logs.
The specied license is already installed. Installed license le information cannot be
displayed.
Problem Information about license les that have already been installed in this printer cannot be displayed.
Action Specify another license le.
Cannot perform the operation because another application is being installed, or the
rmware being updated.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
97
Please wait a moment and then try again.
Problem Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or the license le information cannot be
displayed because the rmware has been updated.
Action Wait until the processing stops before displaying the license information.
The old password is incorrect.
Problem The text string entered as the current password is different from the current password.
Action Enter the correct password.
The new password is incorrect. Enter the password with 8 to 32 single-byte
alphanumeric characters.
Problem The new password has under 8 characters or more than 33 characters. Illegal characters that cannot be
used in passwords have been used.
Action Enter a new password of between 8 and 32 alphanumeric characters (a to z, A to Z, and 0 to 9).
The new password and password to conrm do not match.
Problem The password cannot be changed because the new password and the conrmation password do not
match.
Action Enter a new password and the same text string as the conrmation password.
Error: <Error Details>
Problem An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details.
Action If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
98
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Setting
Information Management] Page
0XW7-01Y
●< Cannot delete the setting information for the selected applications because it is in use by currently running
applications.Stop the following applications, or stop all applications except for login services, and then delete the
setting information. <Application Name>(P. 99) >
●< Could not delete MEAP application setting information because an error occurred.(P. 99) >
Cannot delete the setting information for the selected applications because it is in use
by currently running applications.
Stop the following applications, or stop all applications except for login services, and
then delete the setting information.
<Application Name>
Problem The application is in one of the following states.
●Started
●Starting
●Stopping
Action Return to the previous page using the [Back] button, bring the applications corresponding to the error
message to other state than "Started," "Starting" or "Stopping," and then try deletion again.
Could not delete MEAP application setting information because an error occurred.
Problem An error has occurred for some reason, so the setting information could not be deleted.
Action Return to the previous page using the [Back] button.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
99
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Log
Management] Page
0XW7-020
●< Cannot download application logs because application logs do not exist.
(P. 100) >
●< Could not download application logs because an error occurred.(P. 100) >
●< Could not delete application logs
because an error occurred.(P. 100) >
Cannot download application logs because application logs do not exist.
Problem The application log does not exist.
Action Return to the previous page using the [Back] button.
Could not download application logs because an error occurred.
Problem An error has occurred for some reason, so the log could not be downloaded.
Action Return to the previous page using the [Back] button.
Could not delete application logs because an error occurred.
Problem An error has occurred for some reason, so the log could not be deleted.
Action Return to the previous page using the [Back] button.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
100
Other Errors
0XW7-021
●< Cannot nd the specied application. It may have been uninstalled by another user.(P. 101) >
Cannot nd the specied application. It may have been uninstalled by another user.
Problem The application for the attempted operation does not exist.
Action Return to the previous page using the [Back] button.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
101
Using This Guide
Using This Guide ............................................................................................................................................. 103
Operating Environment of This Guide ............................................................................................................. 104
Screen Layout of This Guide ............................................................................................................................. 105
Top Page ...................................................................................................................................................... 106
Topic Page .................................................................................................................................................... 107
Site Map ....................................................................................................................................................... 108
Search Method ............................................................................................................................................. 109
Viewing This Guide ............................................................................................................................................ 110
Using This Guide
102
Using This Guide
0XW7-022
This chapter describes how to use this guide.
Operating Environment of This Guide(P. 104)
Screen Layout of This Guide(P. 105)
Top Page(P. 106)
Topic Page(P. 107)
Site Map(P. 108)
Search Method(P. 109)
Viewing This Guide(P. 110)
<To nd the desired content>
●Selecting between the category icons
From the top page, select a category icon you want.
" Top Page(P. 106) "
●Searching from the site map
On the site map, you can view the list of whole sections of this guide sorted by category. You can
directly display sections in a category.
" Site Map(P. 108) "
●Whole text search function
You can search by keyword in this guide. You can display the desired description from the search
results by entering a keyword you want to search. This function supports AND search.
" Search Method(P. 109) "
Using This Guide
103
Operating Environment of This Guide
0XW7-023
You need a Web browser to use this guide. Operation of the following Web browsers is guaranteed.
Windows
●Internet Explorer 6.0 or later
●Firefox 2.x or later
Mac OS
●Safari 3.x or later
●Firefox 3.x or later
NOTE
Enabling the script function
Enable the script function for a Web browser before using this guide.
Using This Guide
104
Screen Layout of This Guide
0XW7-024
This section describes the screen layout of this guide.
The page displayed right after this guide starts is called "Top Page" and the guide description is called "Topic
Page" in this section.
"Site map" is displayed from [Site map] which is located on the upper right of this guide.
The search panel is used to make search through this guide.
The screen layout is different for each page, so click the following links to see the instruction.
Top Page(P. 106)
Topic Page(P. 107)
Site Map(P. 108)
Search Method(P. 109)
Using This Guide
105
Top Page
0XW7-025
(1) Select from functions
The instructions of each function and operation method are described.
(2) [Search]
The search panel is displayed by entering keyword(s) and clicking [ ].
For details, see " Search Method(P. 109) ."
(3) [Top]
The top page of this guide is displayed.
(4) [Site map]
The entire contents of this guide are displayed.
(5) [Help]
How to use this guide is displayed.
(6) [Disclaimers]
The disclaimers are displayed.
(7) [Copyright]
The information of copyrights is displayed.
(8) [Trademarks]
The trademarks are displayed.
Using This Guide
106
Topic Page
0XW7-026
(1) Chapter contents
This is the list of the contents in the chapter. Clicking each item displays the description in the topic page.
Click [ ] to expand a menu, and click [ ] to collapse a menu.
Alternatively, click [ Expand all ] to expand all menus, and click [ Collapse all ] to collapse all
menus.
(2) Topic page
The descriptions of each item are displayed.
The current location of the displayed topic is displayed at the upper left of the topic page. Click a link to
move to a higher level.
(3) [Chapter] menu
You can select a different chapter from the pull-down menu.
(4) [Contents] tab
Click to display the chapter contents panel.
(5) [Search] tab
Click to display the search panel.
For details, see " Search Method(P. 109) ."
(6) [ ]
Click to display or hide the chapter contents panel/search panel.
(7) [Previous]/[Next]
Click to move to the previous or next topic.
(8) [Print this topic]
Prints only the topic page currently displayed.
(9) [Print all]
Prints all the contents in a chapter.
Using This Guide
107
Site Map
0XW7-027
(1) Whole contents
Shows the all chapters and sections of this guide. Click an item to view the contents.
Using This Guide
108
Search Method
0XW7-028
(1) Search
Entering a character string in [Search] on the top page or in the [Keyword] text box on the search panel
and then clicking [ ] displays the search results.
The AND search is available in this guide so you can rene the search results by entering two or more
keywords. When entering keywords, enter a space between the keywords.
●Example: Adding License (if you want to display pages which include words, "Adding" and "License")
(2) Search result
The search results for a keyword are displayed.
If there are more than 10 search results, you can see the other results by clicking [ ], [ ], or the
number which is located below the result.
(3) [Search options]
Click to display the search options.
The search options can be used to specify the chapter to search, case sensitivity, and whether to
differentiate between one- and two-byte characters.
Click [Search with these conditions] to search with the specied conditions.
Using This Guide
109
Viewing This Guide
0XW7-029
Symbols Used in This Guide
The following symbols are used in this Guide to mark descriptions of handling restrictions, precautions, and
instructions that should be observed for your safety.
IMPORTANT
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the
machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or property.
NOTE
Indicates a clarication of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure. Reading
these notes is highly recommended.
Keys and Buttons Used in This Guide
The following are examples of how control panel keys and on-screen buttons are depicted in this guide.
Type Depiction in This Guide Example
Control panel keys [Key name] keys [Network] key
Settings displayed on the control panel <Setting name shown in the display> <On>
Buttons on computer operation screen and so on [Button name and so on] [OK]
Screenshots Used in This Guide
The contents of the screenshots used in this guide are the default settings.
Depending on the system conguration, the contents of the screenshots may partly differ.
Using This Guide
110
Disclaimer
0XW7-02A
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO
MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR AGAINST
INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS
MATERIAL.
Disclaimer
112
Trademarks
0XW7-02E
●"MEAP" is a trademark of CANON Inc., referring to an "application platform" for Canon multifunction and
single function printers.
●Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, Mac, Mac OS, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
●Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
●This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype
Imaging, Inc. UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and
Trademark Oce and may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
●UFST: Copyright© 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.
●Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its
aliates.
●Adobe, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
●Copyright© 2007 -08 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
●Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763;
6,639,593; 6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.
●All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe
Systems Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for
Adobe Systems' implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
●Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or
similar item refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript
technology created or licensed by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to
be merely compatible with the PostScript language.
●Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
●Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Trademarks
114
●All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
●All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their
respective owners.
Trademarks
115
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,
Version 1.1.
This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:
http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
-----------------------------------------------------------
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007
-----------------------------------------------------------
PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide
development of collaborative font projects, to support the font
creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to
provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and
improved in partnership with others.
The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modied and
redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The
fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,
redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved
names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,
however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The
requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to
any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS
"Font Software" refers to the set of les released by the Copyright
Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may
include source les, build scripts and documentation.
"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specied as such after the
copyright statement(s).
"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software
components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).
"Modied Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to,
deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the
components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting
the Font Software to a new environment.
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical
writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,
modify, redistribute, and sell modied and unmodied copies of the
Font Software, subject to the following conditions:
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
116
1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in
Original or Modied Versions, may be sold by itself.
2) Original or Modied Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,
redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy
contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be
included either as stand-alone text les, human-readable headers or
in the appropriate machine-readable metadata elds within text or
binary les as long as those elds can be easily viewed by the user.
3) No Modied Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font
Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the
corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the
primary font name as presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font
Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any
Modied Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the
Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written
permission.
5) The Font Software, modied or unmodied, in part or in whole,
must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be
distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to
remain under this license does not apply to any document created using
the Font Software.
TERMINATION
This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are
not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
117